Lobaczewski Andrew M.

Political Ponerology: A Science on the Nature of Evil Adjusted for Political Purposes

POLITICAL

PONEROLOGY

Andrew M. !obaczewski

P O L I T I C A L

P O N E R O L O G Y

A science on the nature of evil

adjusted for political purposes

Translated from the original Polish

by Alexandra Chciuk-Celt, Ph. D.

Corrected by the author in 1998

Edited with Notes and Commentary by

Laura Knight-Jadczyk

Henri Sy

Red Pill Press

First Edition

First English publication

© Andrew M. !obaczewski

Preface, Notes and Commentary © Laura Knight-Jadczyk and Henri Sy

ISBN 1-897244-18-5

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic,

mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the written prior

permission of the author.

Translated in 1985 from the original Polish Ponerologia Polityczna

by Alexandra Chciuk-Celt, Ph. D.

University of New York, N.Y.

Corrected by the author in 1998.

C O N T E N T S

EDITOR’S PREFACE .........................................................................7

AUTHOR’S FOREWORD ................................................................27

PREFACE TO THE RED PILL PRESS EDITION.....................30

I. INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................33

II. SOME INDISPENSABLE CONCEPTS ....................................45

PSYCHOLOGY .....................................................................................49

OBJECTIVE LANGUAGE ......................................................................51

THE HUMAN INDIVIDUAL ..................................................................57

SOCIETY .............................................................................................70

III. THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE.................................................84

IV. PONEROLOGY ...........................................................................96

PATHOLOGICAL FACTORS ...............................................................104

ACQUIRED DEVIATIONS ..................................................................105

INHERITED DEVIATIONS ..................................................................120

PONEROGENIC PHENOMENA AND PROCESSES ................................144

SPELLBINDERS .................................................................................155

PONEROGENIC ASSOCIATIONS ........................................................157

IDEOLOGIES......................................................................................164

THE PONERIZATION PROCESS .........................................................168

MACROSOCIAL PHENOMENA...........................................................173

STATES OF SOCIETAL HYSTERIZATION...........................................175

PONEROLOGY ...................................................................................178

V. PATHOCRACY ...........................................................................183

THE GENESIS OF THE PHENOMENON...............................................183

MORE ON THE CONTENTS OF THE PHENOMENON...........................194

PATHOCRACY AND ITS IDEOLOGY ..................................................200

THE EXPANSION OF THE PATHOCRACY ..........................................206

PATHOCRACY IMPOSED BY FORCE..................................................213

ARTIFICALLY INFECTED PATHOCRACY AND PSYCHOLOGICAL

WARFARE.........................................................................................216

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS ...........................................................221

VI. NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE.....230

FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF TIME ...................................................235

UNDERSTANDING.............................................................................252

VII. PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY UNDER

PATHOCRATIC RULE ..................................................................255

VIII. PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION ......................................267

IX. THERAPY FOR THE WORLD ..............................................278

TRUTH IS A HEALER.........................................................................281

FORGIVENESS...................................................................................289

IDEOLOGIES......................................................................................296

IMMUNIZATION ................................................................................299

X. A VISION OF THE FUTURE ...................................................303

BIBLIOGRAPHY .............................................................................311

INDEX.................................................................................................317

EDITOR’S PREFACE

“Aspire to be like Mt. Fuji, with such a broad and solid

foundation that the strongest earthquake cannot move you, and

so tall that the greatest enterprises of common men seem in-

significant from your lofty perspective. With your mind as

high as Mt Fuji you can see all things clearly. And you can see

all the forces that shape events; not just the things happening

near to you.”

Miyamoto Musashi

The book you hold in your hand may be the most important

book you will ever read; in fact, it will be. No matter who you

are, what your status in life, what your age or sex or nationality

or ethnic background, you will, at some point in your life, feel

the touch or relentless grip of the cold hand of Evil. Bad things

happen to good people, that’s a fact.

What is evil? Historically, the question of evil has been a

theological one. Generations of theological apologists have

written entire libraries of books in an attempt to certify the

existence of a Good God that created an imperfect world. Saint

Augustine distinguished between two forms of evil: “moral

evil”, the evil humans do, by choice, knowing that they are

doing wrong; and “natural evil”, the bad things that just happen

- the storm, the flood, volcanic eruptions, fatal disease.

And then, there is what Andrew !obaczewski calls Macro-

social Evil: large scale evil that overtakes whole societies and

nations, and has done so again and again since time immemo-

rial. The history of mankind, when considered objectively, is a

terrible thing.

8

EDITOR’S PREFACE

Death and destruction come to all, both rich and poor, free

and slave, young and old, good and evil, with an arbitrariness

and insouciance that, when contemplated even momentarily,

can destroy a normal person’s ability to function.

Over and over again, man has seen his fields and cattle laid

waste by drought and disease, his loved ones tormented and

decimated by illness or human cruelty, his life’s work reduced

to nothing in an instant by events over which he has no control

at all.

The study of history through its various disciplines offers a

view of mankind that is almost insupportable. The rapacious

movements of hungry tribes, invading and conquering and

destroying in the darkness of prehistory; the barbarian invaders

of the civilized world during medieval times, the bloodbaths of

the crusades of Catholic Europe against the infidels of the

Middle East and then the “infidels” who were their own broth-

ers: the stalking noonday terror of the Inquisition where mar-

tyrs quenched the flames with their blood. Then, there is the

raging holocaust of modern genocide; wars, famine, and pesti-

lence striding across the globe in hundred league boots; and

never more frightening than today.

All of these things produce an intolerable sense of indefen-

sibility against what Mircea Eliade calls the Terror of History.

There are those who will say that now this is all past; man-

kind has entered a new phase; science and technology have

brought us to the brink of ending all this suffering. Many peo-

ple believe that man is evolving; society is evolving; and that

we now have control over the arbitrary evil of our environ-

ment; or at least we will have it after George Bush and his

Neocons have about 25 years to fight the Endless War against

Terror. Anything that does not support this idea is reinterpreted

or ignored.

Science has given us many wonderful gifts: the space pro-

gram, laser, television, penicillin, sulfa-drugs, and a host of

other useful developments which should make our lives more

tolerable and fruitful. However, we can easily see that this is

not the case. It it could be said that never before has man been

so precariously poised on the brink of such total destruction.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

9

On a personal level, our lives are steadily deteriorating. The

air we breathe and the water we drink is polluted almost be-

yond endurance. Our foods are loaded with substances which

contribute very little to nourishment and may, in fact, be injuri-

ous to our health. Stress and tension have become an accepted

part of life and can be shown to have killed more people than

the cigarettes that some people still smoke to relieve it. We

swallow endless quantities of pills to wake up, go to sleep, get

the job done, calm our nerves and make us feel good. The in-

habitants of the earth spend more money on recreational drugs

than they spend on housing, clothing, food, education or any

other product or service.

At the social level, hatred, envy, greed and strife multiply

exponentially. Crime increases faster than the population.

Combined with wars, insurrections, and political purges, multi-

plied millions of people across the globe are without adequate

food or shelter due to political actions.

And then, of course, drought, famine, plague and natural

disasters still take an annual toll in lives and suffering. This,

too, seems to be increasing.

When man contemplates history, as it is, he is forced to re-

alize that he is in the iron grip of an existence that seems to

have no real care or concern for his pain and suffering. Over

and over again, the same sufferings fall upon mankind multi-

plied millions upon millions of times over millennia. The total-

ity of human suffering is a dreadful thing. I could write until

the end of the world using oceans of ink and forests of paper

and never fully convey this Terror. The beast of arbitrary ca-

lamity has always been with us. For as long as human hearts

have pumped hot blood through their too-fragile bodies and

glowed with the inexpressible sweetness of life and yearning

for all that is good and right and loving, the sneering, stalking,

drooling and scheming beast of unconscious evil has licked its

lips in anticipation of its next feast of terror and suffering.

Since the beginning of time, this mystery of the estate of man,

this Curse of Cain has existed. And, since the Ancient of Days,

the cry has been: My punishment is greater than I can bear!

It is conjectured that, in ancient times, when man perceived

this intolerable and incomprehensible condition in which he

10

EDITOR’S PREFACE

found his existence, that he created cosmogonies to justify all

the cruelties, aberrations, and tragedies of history. It is true

that, man, as a rule and in general, is powerless against cosmic

and geological catastrophes, and it has long been said that the

average man can’t really do anything about military onslaughts,

social injustice, personal and familial misfortunes, and a host of

assaults against his existence too numerous to list.

This is about to change. The book you hold in your hand is

going to give you answers to many of the questions about Evil

in our world. This book is not just about macrosocial evil, it is

also about everyday evil, because, in a very real sense, the two

are inseparable. The long term accumulation of everyday evil

always and inevitably leads to Grand Systemic Evil that de-

stroys more innocent people than any other phenomenon on

this planet.

The book you hold in your hands is also a survival guide.

As I said above, this book will be the most important book you

will ever read. Unless, of course, you are a psychopath.

“What does psychopathy have to do with personal or social

evil?” you may ask.

Absolutely everything. Whether you know it or not, each

and every day your life is touched by the effects of psychopa-

thy on our world. You are about to learn that even if there isn’t

much we can do about geological and cosmological catastro-

phe, there is a lot we can do about social and macrosocial evil,

and the very first thing to do is to learn about it. In the case of

psychopathy and its effects on our world, what you don’t know

definitely can and will hurt you.

Nowadays the word “psychopath” generally evokes images

of the barely restrained - yet surprisingly urbane - mad-dog

serial killer, Dr. Hannibal Lecter, of Silence of the Lambs fame.

I will admit that this was the image that came to my mind

whenever I heard the word; almost, that is. The big difference

was that I never thought of a psychopath as possibly being so

cultured or so capable of passing as “normal”. But I was

wrong, and I was to learn this lesson quite painfully by direct

experience. The exact details are chronicled elsewhere; what is

important is that this experience was probably one of the most

painful and instructive episodes of my life, and it enabled me to

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

11

overcome a block in my awareness of the world around me and

those who inhabit it.

Regarding blocks to awareness, I need to state for the record

that I have spent 30 years studying psychology, history, cul-

ture, religion, myth and the so-called paranormal1. I also have

worked for many years with hypnotherapy - which gave me a

very good mechanical knowledge of how the mind/brain of the

human being operates at very deep levels. But even so, I was

still operating with certain beliefs firmly in place that were

shattered by my research into psychopathy. I realized that there

was a certain set of ideas that I held about human beings that

were sacrosanct – and false. I even wrote about this once in the

following way:

…my work has shown me that the vast majority of people

want to do good, to experience good things, think good

thoughts, and make decisions with good results. And they try

with all their might to do so! With the majority of people hav-

ing this internal desire, why the Hell isn't it happening?

I was naïve, I admit. There were many things I did not know

that I have learned since I penned those words. But even at that

time I was aware of how our own minds can be used to deceive

us.

Now, what beliefs did I hold that made me a victim of a

psychopath? The first and most obvious one is that I truly be-

lieved that deep inside, all people are basically “good” and that

they “want to do good, to experience good things, think good

thoughts, and make decisions with good results. And they try

with all their might to do so….”

As it happens, this is not true as I - and everyone involved

in our research group - learned to our sorrow, as they say. But

we also learned to our edification. In order to come to some

understanding of exactly what kind of human being could do

the things that were done to me (and others close to me), and

why they might be motivated - even driven - to behave this

way, we began to research the psychology literature for clues

because we needed to understand for our own peace of mind.

1 I have never received any academic degrees, so I am not a “professional”, in

that respect.

12

EDITOR’S PREFACE

If there is a psychological theory that can explain vicious

and harmful behavior, it helps very much for the victim of such

acts to have this information so that they do not have to spend

all their time feeling hurt or angry. And certainly, if there is a

psychological theory that helps a person to find what kind of

words or deeds can bridge the chasm between people, to heal

misunderstandings, that is also a worthy goal. It was from such

a perspective that we began our extensive work on the subjects

of narcissism, which then led to the study of psychopathy.

Of course, we didn’t start out with such any such “diagno-

sis” or label for what we were witnessing. We started out with

observations and searched the literature for clues, for profiles,

for anything that would help us to understand the inner world

of a human being - actually a group of human beings - who

seemed to be utterly depraved and unlike anything we had ever

encountered before. We found that this kind of human is all too

common, and that, according to some of the latest research,

they cause more damage in human society than any other sin-

gle so-called “mental illness”. Martha Stout, who has worked

extensively with victims of psychopaths, writes:

Imagine - if you can - not having a conscience, none at all,

no feelings of guilt or remorse no matter what you do, no lim-

iting sense of concern for the well-being of strangers, friends,

or even family members. Imagine no struggles with shame,

not a single one in your whole life, no matter what kind of

selfish, lazy, harmful, or immoral action you had taken.

And pretend that the concept of responsibility is unknown

to you, except as a burden others seem to accept without ques-

tion, like gullible fool.

Now add to this strange fantasy the ability to conceal from

other people that your psychological makeup is radically dif-

ferent from theirs. Since everyone simply assumes that con-

science is universal among human beings, hiding the fact that

you are conscience-free is nearly effortless.

You are not held back from any of your desires by guilt or

shame, and you are never confronted by others for your cold-

bloodedness. The ice water in your veins is so bizarre, so

completely outside of their personal experience, that they sel-

dom even guess at your condition.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

13

In other words, you are completely free of internal re-

straints, and your unhampered liberty to do just as you please,

with no pangs of conscience, is conveniently invisible to the

world.

You can do anything at all, and still your strange advan-

tage over the majority of people, who are kept in line by their

consciences will most likely remain undiscovered.

How will you live your life?

What will you do with your huge and secret advantage,

and with the corresponding handicap of other people (con-

science)?

The answer will depend largely on just what your desires

happen to be, because people are not all the same. Even the

profoundly unscrupulous are not all the same. Some people -

whether they have a conscience or not - favor the ease of iner-

tia, while others are filled with dreams and wild ambitions.

Some human beings are brilliant and talented, some are dull-

witted, and most, conscience or not, are somewhere in be-

tween. There are violent people and nonviolent ones, indi-

viduals who are motivated by blood lust and those who have

no such appetites. [...]

Provided you are not forcibly stopped, you can do any-

thing at all.

If you are born at the right time, with some access to fam-

ily fortune, and you have a special talent for whipping up

other people's hatred and sense of deprivation, you can arrange

to kill large numbers of unsuspecting people. With enough

money, you can accomplish this from far away, and you can

sit back safely and watch in satisfaction. [...]

Crazy and frightening - and real, in about 4 percent of the

population....

The prevalence rate for anorexic eating disorders is esti-

mated a 3.43 percent, deemed to be nearly epidemic, and yet

this figure is a fraction lower than the rate for antisocial per-

sonality. The high-profile disorders classed as schizophrenia

occur in only about 1 percent of [the population] - a mere

quarter of the rate of antisocial personality - and the Centers

for Disease Control and Prevention say that the rate of colon

cancer in the United States, considered “alarmingly high,” is

14

EDITOR’S PREFACE

about 40 per 100,000 - one hundred times lower than the rate

of antisocial personality.

The high incidence of sociopathy in human society has a

profound effect on the rest of us who must live on this planet,

too, even those of us who have not been clinically trauma-

tized. The individuals who constitute this 4 percent drain our

relationships, our bank accounts, our accomplishments, our

self-esteem, our very peace on earth.

Yet surprisingly, many people know nothing about this

disorder, or if they do, they think only in terms of violent psy-

chopathy - murderers, serial killers, mass murderers - people

who have conspicuously broken the law many times over, and

who, if caught, will be imprisoned, maybe even put to death

by our legal system.

We are not commonly aware of, nor do we usually iden-

tify, the larger number of nonviolent sociopaths among us,

people who often are not blatant lawbreakers, and against

whom our formal legal system provides little defense.

Most of us would not imagine any correspondence be-

tween conceiving an ethnic genocide and, say, guiltlessly ly-

ing to one's boss about a coworker. But the psychological cor-

respondence is not only there; it is chilling. Simple and pro-

found, the link is the absence of the inner mechanism that

beats up on us, emotionally speaking, when we make a choice

we view as immoral, unethical, neglectful, or selfish.

Most of us feel mildly guilty if we eat the last piece of

cake in the kitchen, let alone what we would feel if we inten-

tionally and methodically set about to hurt another person.

Those who have no conscience at all are a group unto

themselves, whether they be homicidal tyrants or merely ruth-

less social snipers.

The presence or absence of conscience is a deep human

division, arguably more significant than intelligence, race, or

even gender.

What differentiates a sociopath who lives off the labors of

others from one who occasionally robs convenience stores, or

from one who is a contemporary robber baron - or what makes

the difference betwen an ordinary bully and a sociopathic

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

15

murderer - is nothing more than social status, drive, intellect,

blood lust, or simple opportunity.

What distinguishes all of these people from the rest of us is

an utterly empty hole in the psyche, where there should be the

most evolved of all humanizing functions.2

We did not have the advantage of Dr. Stout’s book at the

beginning of our research project. We did, of course, have

Robert Hare and Hervey Cleckley and Guggenbuhl-Craig and

others. But they were only approaching the subject of the pos-

sibly large numbers of psychopaths that live among us who

never get caught breaking laws, who don’t murder – or if they

do, they don’t get caught – and who still do untold damage to

the lives of family, acquaintances, and strangers.

Most mental health experts, for a very long time, have oper-

ated on the premise that psychopaths come from impoverished

backgrounds and have experienced abuse of one sort or another

in childhood, so it is easy to spot them, or at least, they cer-

tainly don’t move in society except as interlopers. This idea

seems to be coming under some serious revision lately. As

!obaczewski points out in this book, there is some confusion

between Psychopathy and Antisocial Personality Disorder and

Sociopathy. As Robert Hare points out, yes, there are many

psychopaths who are also “anti-socials”, but there seem to be

far more of them that would never be classified as anti-social or

sociopathic! In other words, they can be doctors, lawyers,

judges, policemen, congressmen, presidents of corporations

that rob from the poor to give to the rich, and even presidents.

In a recent paper, it is suggested that psychopathy may exist

in ordinary society in even greater numbers than anyone has

thus far considered:

Psychopathy, as originally conceived by Cleckley (1941),

is not limited to engagement in illegal activities, but rather en-

compasses such personality characteristics as manipulative-

ness, insincerity, egocentricity, and lack of guilt - characteris-

tics clearly present in criminals but also in spouses, parents,

bosses, attorneys, politicians, and CEOs, to name but a few.

(Bursten, 1973; Stewart, 1991). Our own examination of the

prevalence of psychopathy within a university population sug-

2 Stout, Martha: The Sociopath Next Door, Broadway. 2005

16

EDITOR’S PREFACE

gested that perhaps 5% or more of this sample might be

deemed psychopathic, although the vast majority of those will

be male (more than 1/10 males versus approximately 1/100

females).

As such, psychopathy may be characterized ... as involving

a tendency towards both dominance and coldness. Wiggins

(1995) in summarizing numerous previous findings... indicates

that such individuals are prone to anger and irritation and are

willing to exploit others. They are arrogant, manipulative,

cynical, exhibitionistic, sensation-seeking, Machiavellian,

vindictive, and out for their own gain. With respect to their

patterns of social exchange (Foa & Foa, 1974), they attribute

love and status to themselves, seeing themselves as highly

worthy and important, but prescribe neither love nor status to

others, seeing them as unworthy and insignificant. This char-

acterization is clearly consistent with the essence of psychopa-

thy as commonly described.

The present investigation sought to answer some basic

questions regarding the construct of psychopathy in non foren-

sic settings... In so doing we have returned to Cleckley’s

(1941) original emphasis on psychopathy as a personality style

not only among criminals, but also among successful indi-

viduals within the community.

What is clear from our findings is that (a) psychopathy

measures have converged on a prototype of psychopathy that

involves a combination of dominant and cold interpersonal

characteristics; (b) psychopathy does occur in the community

and at what might be a higher than expected rate; and (c) psy-

chopathy appears to have little overlap with personality disor-

ders aside from Antisocial Personality Disorder. ...

Clearly, where much more work is needed is in under-

standing what factors differentiate the abiding (although per-

haps not moral-abiding) psychopath from the law-breaking

psychopath; such research surely needs to make greater use of

non forensic samples than has been customary in the past.3

!obaczewski discusses the fact that there are different types

of psychopaths. One type, in particular, is the most deadly of

3 Salekin, Trobst, Krioukova: (2001) “Construct Validity of Psychopathy in a

Community Sample: A Nomological Net Approach” in Journal of Personal-

ity Disorders, 15(5), 425-441.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

17

all: the Essential Psychopath. He doesn’t give us a “checklist”

but rather discusses what is inside the psychopath. His descrip-

tion meshes very well with items in the paper quoted above.

Martha Stout also discusses the fact that psychopaths, like

anyone else, are born with different basic likes and dislikes and

desires, which is why some of them are doctors and presidents

and others are petty thieves or rapists.

“Likeable”, “Charming”, “Intelligent”, “Alert”, “Impres-

sive”, “Confidence-inspiring,” and “A great success with the

ladies”. This is how Hervey Cleckley described most of his

subjects in The Mask of Sanity. It seems that, in spite of the fact

that their actions prove them to be “irresponsible” and “self-

destructive”, psychopaths seem to have in abundance the very

traits most desired by normal persons. The smooth self-

assurance acts as an almost supernatural magnet to normal

people who have to read self-help books or go to counseling to

be able to interact with others in an untroubled way. The psy-

chopath, on the contrary, never has any neuroses, no self-

doubts, never experiences angst, and is what “normal” people

seek to be. What’s more, even if they aren’t that attractive, they

are “babe magnets”.

Cleckley's seminal hypothesis is that the psychopath suffers

from profound and incurable affective deficit. If he really feels

anything at all, they are emotions of only the shallowest kind.

He is able to do whatever he wants, based on whatever whim

strikes him, because consequences that would fill the ordinary

man with shame, self-loathing, and embarrassment simply do

not affect the psychopath at all. What to others would be a

horror or a disaster is to him merely a fleeting inconvenience.

Cleckley posits that psychopathy is quite common in the

community at large. His cases include examples of psychopaths

who generally function normally in the community as busi-

nessmen, doctors, and even psychiatrists. Nowadays, some of

the more astute researchers see criminal psychopathy - often

referred to as anti-social personality disorder - as an extreme of

a particular personality type. I think it is more helpful to char-

acterize criminal psychopaths as “unsuccessful psychopaths”.

18

EDITOR’S PREFACE

One researcher, Alan Harrington, goes so far as to say that

the psychopath is the new man being produced by the evolu-

tionary pressures of modern life.

Certainly, there have always been shysters and crooks, but

past concern was focused on ferreting out incompetents rather

than psychopaths. Unfortunately, all that has changed. We now

need to fear the super-sophisticated modern crook who does

know what he is doing ... and does it so well that no one else

knows. Yes, psychopaths love the business world.

Uninvolved with others, he coolly saw into their fears and

desires, and maneuvered them as he wished. Such a man

might not, after all, be doomed to a life of scrapes and esca-

pades ending ignominiously in the jailhouse. Instead of mur-

dering others, he might become a corporate raider and murder

companies, firing people instead of killing them, and chopping

up their functions rather than their bodies.

[…T]he consequences to the average citizen from business

crimes are staggering. As criminologist Georgette Bennett

says, “They account for nearly 30% of case filings in U.S.

District Courts - more than any other category of crime. The

combined burglary, mugging and other property losses in-

duced by the country’s street punks come to about $4 billion a

year. However, the seemingly upstanding citizens in our cor-

porate board rooms and the humble clerks in our retail stores

bilk us out of between $40 and $200 billion a year.”

Concern here is that the costume for the new masked san-

ity of a psychopath is just as likely to be a three-piece suit as a

ski mask and a gun. As Harrington says, “We also have the

psychopath in respectable circles, no longer assumed to be a

loser.” He quotes William Krasner as saying, “They - psycho-

path and part psychopath - do well in the more unscrupulous

types of sales work, because they take such delight in ‘putting

it over on them’, getting away with it - and have so little con-

science about defrauding their customers.” Our society is fast

becoming more materialistic, and success at any cost is the

credo of many businessmen. The typical psychopath thrives in

this kind of environment and is seen as a business “hero”.4

4 Ken Magid and Carole McKelvey: The Psychopaths Favourite Play-

ground:Business Relationships.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

19

The study of “ambulatory” psychopaths - what we call “The

Garden Variety Psychopath” - has, however, hardly begun.

Very little is known about subcriminal psychopathy. Some

researchers have begun to seriously consider the idea that it is

important to study psychopathy not as a pathological category

but as a general personality trait in the community at large. In

other words, psychopathy is being recognized as a more or less

a different type of human.

Hervey Cleckly actually comes very close to suggesting that

psychopaths are human in every respect - but that they lack a

soul. This lack of “soul quality” makes them very efficient

“machines”. They can write scholarly works, imitate the words

of emotion, but over time, it becomes clear that their words do

not match their actions. They are the type of person who can

claim that they are devastated by grief who then attend a party

“to forget”. The problem is: they really do forget.

Being very efficient machines, like a computer, they are

able to execute very complex routines designed to elicit from

others support for what they want. In this way, many psycho-

paths are able to reach very high positions in life. It is only

over time that their associates become aware of the fact that

their climb up the ladder of success is predicated on violating

the rights of others. “Even when they are indifferent to the

rights of their associates, they are often able to inspire feelings

of trust and confidence.”

The psychopath recognizes no flaw in his psyche, no need

for change.

Andrew !obaczewski addresses the problem of the psycho-

path and their extremely significant contribution to our macro-

social evils, their ability to act as the éminence grise behind the

very structure of our society. It is very important to keep in

mind that this influence comes from a relatively small segment

of humanity. The other 90-some percent of human beings are

not psychopaths.

But that 90-some percent of normal people know that some-

thing is wrong! They just can’t quite identify it; can’t quite put

their finger on it; and because they can’t, they tend to think that

there is nothing they can do about it, or maybe it is just God

punishing people.

20

EDITOR’S PREFACE

What is actually the case is that when that 90-some percent

of human beings fall into a certain state, as !obaczewski will

describe, the psychopaths, like a virulent pathogen in a body,

strike at the weaknesses, and the entire society is plunged into

conditions that always and inevitably lead to horror and tragedy

on a very large scale.

The movie, The Matrix, touched a deep chord in society be-

cause it exemplified this mechanistic trap in which so many

people find their lives enmeshed, and from which they are un-

able to extricate themselves because they believe that everyone

around them who “looks human” is, in fact, just like them -

emotionally, spiritually, and otherwise.

To give an example of how psychopaths can directly affect

society at large: the “legal argument” as explicated by Robert

Canup in his work on the Socially Adept Psychopath. The legal

argument seems to be at the foundation of our society. We

believe that the legal argument is an advanced system of jus-

tice. This is a very cunning trick that has been foisted on nor-

mal people by psychopaths in order to have an advantage over

them. Just think about it for a moment: the legal argument

amounts to little more than the one who is the slickest at using

the structure for convincing a group of people of something, is

the one who is believed. Because this “legal argument” system

has been slowly installed as part of our culture, when it invades

our personal lives, we normally do not recognize it immedi-

ately. But here’s how it works.

Human beings have been accustomed to assume that other

human beings are - at the very least - trying to “do right” and

“be good” and fair and honest. And so, very often, we do not

take the time to use due diligence in order to determine if a

person who has entered our life is, in fact, a “good person”.

When a conflict ensues, we automatically fall into the legal

argument assumption that in any conflict, one side is partly

right one way, and the other is partly right the other, and that

we can form opinions about which side is mostly right or

wrong. Because of our exposure to the “legal argument” norms,

when any dispute arises, we automatically think that the truth

will lie somewhere between two extremes. In this case, applica-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

21

tion of a little mathematical logic to the problem of the legal

argument might be helpful.

Let us assume that in a dispute, one side is innocent, honest,

and tells the truth. It is obvious that lying does an innocent

person no good; what lie can he tell? If he is innocent, the only

lie he can tell is to falsely confess “I did it”. But lying is noth-

ing but good for the liar. He can declare that “I didn’t do it”,

and accuse another of doing it, all the while the innocent per-

son he has accused is saying “I didn’t do it” and is actually

telling the truth.

The truth, when twisted by good liars, can always make an

innocent person look bad, especially if the innocent person is

honest and admits his mistakes.

The basic assumption that the truth lies between the testi-

mony of the two sides always shifts the advantage to the lying

side and away from the side telling the truth. Under most cir-

cumstances, this shift put together with the fact that the truth is

going to also be twisted in such a way as to bring detriment to

the innocent person, results in the advantage always resting in

the hands of liars - psychopaths. Even the simple act of giving

testimony under oath is a useless farce. If a person is a liar,

swearing an oath means nothing to that person. However,

swearing an oath acts strongly on a serious, truthful witness.

Again, the advantage is placed on the side of the liar.

It has often been noted that psychopaths have a distinct ad-

vantage over human beings with conscience and feelings be-

cause the psychopath does not have conscience and feelings.

What seems to be so is that conscience and feelings are related

to the abstract concepts of “future” and “others”. It is “spatio-

temporal”. We can feel fear, sympathy, empathy, sadness, and

so on because we can imagine in an abstract way, the future

based on our own experiences in the past, or even just “con-

cepts of experiences” in myriad variations. We can “see our-

selves” in them even though they are “out there” and this

evokes feelings in us. We can’t do something hurtful because

we can imagine it being done to us and how it would feel. In

other words, we can not only identify with others spatially - so

to say - but also temporally - in time.

The psychopath does not seem to have this capacity.

22

EDITOR’S PREFACE

They are unable to “imagine” in the sense of being able to

really connect to images in a direct “self connecting to another

self” sort of way.

Oh, indeed, they can imitate feelings, but the only real feel-

ings they seem to have - the thing that drives them and causes

them to act out different dramas for the effect - is a sort of

“predatorial hunger” for what they want. That is to say, they

“feel” need/want as love, and not having their needs/wants met

is described by them as “not being loved”. What is more, this

“need/want” perspective posits that only the “hunger” of the

psychopath is valid, and anything, and everything “out there”,

outside of the psychopath, is not real except insofar as it has the

capability of being assimilated to the psychopath as a sort of

“food”. “Can it be used or can it provide something?” is the

only issue about which the psychopath seems to be concerned.

All else - all activity - is subsumed to this drive.

In short, the psychopath is a predator. If we think about the

interactions of predators with their prey in the animal kingdom,

we can come to some idea of what is behind the “mask of san-

ity” of the psychopath. Just as an animal predator will adopt all

kinds of stealthy functions in order to stalk their prey, cut them

out of the herd, get close to them, and reduce their resistance,

so does the psychopath construct all kinds of elaborate camou-

flage composed of words and appearances - lies and manipula-

tions - in order to “assimilate” their prey.

This leads us to an important question: what does the psy-

chopath really get from their victims? It’s easy to see what they

are after when they lie and manipulate for money or material

goods or power. But in many instances, such as love relation-

ships or faked friendships, it is not so easy to see what the psy-

chopath is after. Without wandering too far afield into spiritual

speculations - a problem Cleckley also faced - we can only say

that it seems to be that the psychopath enjoys making others

suffer. Just as normal humans enjoy seeing other people happy,

or doing things that make other people smile, the psychopath

enjoys the exact opposite.

Anyone who has ever observed a cat playing with a mouse

before killing and eating it has probably explained to them-

selves that the cat is just “entertained” by the antics of the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

23

mouse and is unable to conceive of the terror and pain being

experienced by the mouse. The cat, therefore, is innocent of

any evil intent. The mouse dies, the cat is fed, and that is na-

ture. Psychopaths don’t generally eat their victims.

Yes, in extreme cases of psychopathy, the entire cat and

mouse dynamic is carried out. Cannibalism has a long history

wherein it was assumed that certain powers of the victim could

be assimilated by eating some particular part of them. But in

ordinary life, psychopaths don’t normally go all the way, so to

say. This causes us to look at the cat and mouse scenario again

with different eyes. Now we ask: is it too simplistic to think

that the innocent cat is merely entertained by the mouse run-

ning about and frantically trying to escape? Is there something

more to this dynamic than meets the eye? Is there something

more than being “entertained” by the antics of the mouse trying

to flee? After all, in terms of evolution, why would such behav-

ior be hard-wired into the cat? Is the mouse tastier because of

the chemicals of fear that flood his little body? Is a mouse fro-

zen with terror more of a “gourmet” meal?

This suggests that we ought to revisit our ideas about psy-

chopaths with a slightly different perspective. One thing we do

know is this: many people who experience interactions with

psychopaths and narcissists report feeling “drained” and con-

fused and often subsequently experience deteriorating health.

Does this mean that part of the dynamic, part of the explanation

for why psychopaths will pursue “love relationships” and

“friendships” that ostensibly can result in no observable mate-

rial gain, is because there is an actual energy consumption?

We do not know the answer to this question. We observe,

we theorize, we speculate and hypothesize. But in the end, only

the individual victim can determine what they have lost in the

dynamic - and it is often far more than material goods. In a

certain sense, it seems that psychopaths are soul eaters or “Psy-

chophagic”.

In the past several years, there are many more psychologists

and psychiatrists and other mental health workers beginning to

look at these issues in new ways in response to the questions

about the state of our world and the possibility that there is

24

EDITOR’S PREFACE

some essential difference between such individuals as George

W. Bush and many so-called Neocons, and the rest of us.

Dr. Stout’s book has one of the longest explanations as to

why none of her examples resemble any actual persons that I

have ever read. And then, in a very early chapter, she describes

a “composite” case where the subject spent his childhood blow-

ing up frogs with fire-crackers. It is widely known that George

W. Bush did this, so one naturally wonders...

In any event, even without Dr. Stout’s work, at the time we

were studying the matter, we realized that what we were learn-

ing was very important to everyone because as the data was

assembled, we saw that the clues, the profiles, revealed that the

issues we were facing were faced by everyone at one time or

another, to one extent or another. We also began to realize that

the profiles that emerged also describe rather accurately many

individuals who seek positions of power in fields of authority,

most particularly politics and commerce. That’s really not so

surprising an idea, but it honestly hadn’t occurred to us until

we saw the patterns and recognized them in the behaviors of

numerous historical figures and, lately, including George W.

Bush and members of his administration.

Current day statistics tell us that there are more psychologi-

cally sick people than healthy ones. If you take a sampling of

individuals in any given field, you are likely to find that a sig-

nificant number of them display pathological symptoms to one

extent or another. Politics is no exception, and, by its very na-

ture, would tend to attract more of the pathological “dominator

types” than other fields. That is only logical, and we began to

realize that it was not only logical, it was horrifyingly accurate;

horrifying because pathology among people in power can have

disastrous effects on all of the people under the control of such

pathological individuals. And so, we decided to write about this

subject and publish it on the Internet.

As the material went up, letters from our readers began to

come in thanking us for putting a name to what was happening

to them in their personal lives as well as helping them to under-

stand what was happening in a world that seems to have gone

completely mad. We began to think that it was an epidemic,

and, in a certain sense, we were right. If an individual with a

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

25

highly contagious illness works in a job that puts them in con-

tact with the public, an epidemic is the result. In the same way,

if an individual in a position of political power is a psychopath,

he or she can create an epidemic of psychopathology in people

who are not, essentially, psychopathic. Our ideas along this line

were soon to receive confirmation from an unexpected source:

Andrew !obaczewski, the author of the book you are about to

read. I received an email as follows:

Dear Ladies and Gentlemen.

I have got your Special Research Project on psychopathy

by my computer. You are doing a most important and valu-

able work for the future of nations.[…]

I am a very aged clinical psychologist. Forty years ago I

took part in a secret investigation of the real nature and psy-

chopathology of the macro-social phenomenon called “Com-

munism”. The other researchers were the scientists of the pre-

vious generation who are now passed away.

The profound study of the nature of psychopathy, which

played the essential and inspirational part in this macro-social

psychopathologic phenomenon, and distinguishing it from

other mental anomalies, appeared to be the necessary prepara-

tion for understanding the entire nature of the phenomenon.

The large part of the work, you are doing now, was done in

those times. …

I am able to provide you with a most valuable scientific

document, useful for your purposes. It is my book “Political

Ponerology – A science on the nature of evil adjusted for po-

litical purposes”. You may also find copy of this book in the

Library of Congress and in some university and public librar-

ies in the USA.

Be so kind and contact me so that I may mail a copy to

you.

Very truly yours!

Andrew M. !obaczewski

I promptly wrote a reply saying yes, I would very much like

to read his book. A couple of weeks later the manuscript ar-

rived in the mail.

26

EDITOR’S PREFACE

As I read, I realized that what I was holding in my hand was

essentially a chronicle of a descent into hell, transformation,

and triumphant return to the world with knowledge of that hell

that was priceless for the rest of us, particularly in this day and

time when it seems evident that a similar hell is enveloping the

planet. The risks that were taken by the group of scientists that

did the research on which this book is based are beyond the

comprehension of most of us.

Many of them were young, just starting in their careers

when the Nazis began to stride in their hundred league jack-

boots across Europe. These researchers lived through that, and

then when the Nazis were driven out and replaced by the

Communists under the heel of Stalin, they faced years of op-

pression the likes of which those of us today who are choosing

to take a stand against the Bush Reich cannot even imagine.

But, based on the syndrome that describes the onset of the dis-

ease, it seems that the United States, in particular, and perhaps

the entire world, will soon enter into “bad times” of such horror

and despair that the Holocaust of World War II will seem like

just a practice run.

And so, since they were there, and they lived through it and

brought back information to the rest of us, it may well save our

lives to have a map to guide us in the falling darkness.

Laura Knight-Jadczyk

AUTHOR’S FOREWORD

In presenting my honored readers with this volume, which I

generally worked on during the early hours before leaving to

make a difficult living, I would first like to apologize for the

defects which are the result of anomalous circumstances. I

readily admit that these lacunae should be filled, time-

consuming as that may be, because the facts on which this

book are based are urgently needed; through no fault of the

author’s, these data have come too late.

The reader is entitled to an explanation of the long history

and circumstances under which this work was compiled, not

just of the content itself. This is, in fact, the third manuscript I

have created on this same subject. I threw the first manuscript

into a central-heating furnace, having been warned just in time

about an official search, which took place minutes later. I sent

the second draft to a Church dignitary at the Vatican by means

of an American tourist and was absolutely unable to obtain any

kind of information about the fate of the parcel once it was left

with him.

This long history of subject-matter elaboration made work

on the third version even more laborious. Prior paragraphs and

former phrases from one or both of the first drafts haunt the

writer’s mind and make proper planning of the content more

difficult.

The two lost drafts were written in very convoluted lan-

guage for the benefit of specialists with the necessary back-

ground, particularly in the field of psychopathology. The irre-

trievable disappearance of the second version also meant the

28

AUTHOR’S FOREWORD

loss of the overwhelming majority of statistical data and facts

which would have been so valuable and conclusive for special-

ists in the field. Several analyses of individual cases were also

lost.

The present version contains only such statistical data that

had been memorized due to frequent use, or that could be re-

constructed with satisfactory precision. I also added those data,

particularly the more accessible ones from the field of psycho-

pathology, which I considered essential in presenting this sub-

ject to readers with a good general education, and especially to

representatives of the social and political sciences and to politi-

cians. I also nurse the hope that this work may reach a wider

audience and make available some useful scientific data which

may serve as a basis for comprehension of the contemporary

world and its history. It may also make it easier for readers to

understand themselves, their neighbors, and other nations of

the world.

Who produced the knowledge and performed the work

summarized within the pages of this book? It was a joint en-

deavor consisting of not only my efforts, but also representing

the results of many researchers, some of them not known to the

author. The situational genesis of this book makes it virtually

impossible to separate the accomplishments and give proper

credit to every individual for his or her efforts.

I worked in Poland far away from active political and cul-

tural centers for many years. That is where I undertook a series

of detailed tests and observations which were to be combined

with the resulting generalizations of various other experiment-

ers in order to produce an overall introduction for an under-

standing of the macrosocial phenomenon surrounding us. The

name of the person who was expected to produce the final syn-

thesis was a secret, as was understandable and necessary given

the time and the situation. I would very occasionally receive

anonymous summaries of the results of tests made by other

researchers in Poland and Hungary; a few data were published,

as they raised no suspicions that a specialized work was being

compiled, and these data could still be located today.

The expected synthesis of this research did not occur. All of

my contacts became inoperative as a result of the wave of post-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

29

Stalin repression and secret arrests of researchers in the early

sixties. The remaining scientific data in my possession were

very incomplete, albeit priceless in value. It took many years of

lonely work to weld these fragments into a coherent whole,

filling the lacunae with my own experience and research.

My research on essential psychopathy and its exceptional

role in the macrosocial phenomenon, was conducted concur-

rently with, or shortly after, that of others. Their conclusions

reached me later and confirmed my own. The most characteris-

tic item in my work is the general concept for a new scientific

discipline named “ponerology” . The reader will also find other

fragments of information based on my own research. I also

effected an overall synthesis to the best of my ability.

As the author of the final work, I hereby express my deep

respect for all those who initiated the research and continued to

conduct it at the risk of their careers, health and lives. I pay

homage to those who paid the price through suffering or death.

May this work constitute some compensation for their sacri-

fices, regardless of where they may be today. Times more con-

ducive to an understanding of this material may recall their

names, both those which I never knew and those I have since

forgotten.

New York, N.Y. August 1984.

PREFACE

TO THE RED PILL PRESS EDITION

Twenty years have passed since the writing of this book. I

became a very old man. One day, my computer put me in con-

tact with the Scientists of the Quantum Future Group who con-

vinced me that the time had matured for my book to become

useful and to serve the future of humanity. They took the trou-

ble of publishing it.

The passing of these last twenty years has been fraught with

political occurrences. Our world has changed in essential ways

due to the natural laws of the phenomenon described in this

book. Knowledge has increased dramatically thanks to the

efforts of the people of good will. Nonetheless, our world is not

yet restored to good health; and the remainders of the great

disease are still active. The illness has reappeared connected to

another ideology. The laws of the genesis of evil are working

in millions of individual cases of individuals and families. The

political phenomena threatening peace are confronted by mili-

tary force. The small-scale occurrences are condemned or re-

strained by the word of moral science. The result is that great

efforts of the past, undertaken without the support of objective

natural knowledge about the very nature of evil, have been

insufficient and dangerous. All these efforts have been made

without taking into account that great maxim of medicine that

serves as a motto in this book: Ignota nulla curatio morbid.*

The end of Communist subjugation has come at a high price,

* Do not attempt to cure what you do not understand.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

31

and those nations that now think they are free will soon find

they are paying still.

The question must be asked: why was this work, produced

by eminent researchers and the author for just this purpose – to

prevent the spread of the disease of macrosocial evil, not able

to perform its function?

This is a long story.

I had been recognized as the bearer of this “dangerous” sci-

ence in Austria by a “friendly” physician who then was re-

vealed to be an agent of Communist Secret Services. All the

Red nodes and networks in New York were mobilized to orga-

nize a counteraction against the information contained in this

book being made publicly and widely available. It was terrible

to learn that the overt system of suppression I had so recently

escaped was just as prevalent, though more covert, in the

United States. It was demoralizing to see how the system of

conscious and unconscious pawns worked; to watch people

who trusted their conscious “friends” – unknown to them as

Communist agents - and performed the insinuated activities

against me with such patriotic zeal. As a result of these activi-

ties, I was refused any assistance, and to survive, I had to take

work as a labourer when already of an age to retire. My health

collapsed and two years were lost.

I learned also that I was not the first such emissary who had

come to America bringing similar knowledge; I was rather the

third one; the other two had been similarly dealt with.

In spite of all these circumstances, I persevered and the

book was finally written in 1984 and carefully translated into

English. It was esteemed by those who read it as being “very

informative”, but it was not published. For the psychological

editors it was “too political”; for political editors, it contained

too much psychology and psychopathology. In some cases, the

“editorial deadline was already closed”. Gradually, it became

clear that the book did not pass the “insider’s” inspections.

The time for this book’s major political value is not over;

it’s scientific essence remains permanently valuable and inspi-

rational. It may serve a great purpose in coming times, when

properly adjusted and expanded. Further investigations in these

areas may yield a new understanding of human problems that

32

PREFACE

have plagued humanity for millennia. Ponerology may buttress

the centuries old moral sciencea by a modern natural approach.

Thus this work may contribute to progress toward a universal

peace.

That is the reason that I laboured to retype on my computer

the whole already fading manuscript after twenty years. No

essential changes have been introduced, and it is presented as it

was written in New York all those many years ago. So let it

remain as a document of a very dangerous work of eminent

scientists and myself, undertaken in dark and tragic times under

impossible conditions; still a piece of good science.

The author’s desire is to place this work in the hands of

those who are capable of taking this burden over and progress-

ing with the theoretical research in ponerology, enrich it with

detailed data to replace that which has been lost, and put it in

praxis for various valuable purposes it may serve – for the good

of individual people and for all nations.

I am thankful to Madame Laura Knight-Jadczyk and Profes-

sor Arkadiusz Jadczyk, and their Friends for their heartfelt

encouragement, understanding, and their labour in bringing my

old work to be published.

Andrew M. !obaczewski.

Rzeszów – Poland, December 2005

CHAPTER IV

PONEROLOGY

Ever since ancient times, philosophers and religious think-

ers representing various attitudes in different cultures have

been searching for the truth regarding moral values, attempting

to find criteria for what is right, and what constitutes good ad-

vice. They have described the virtues of human character at

length and suggested these be acquired. They have created a

heritage containing centuries of experience and reflection. In

spite of the obvious differences of originating cultures and

attitudes, even though they worked in widely divergent times

and places, the similarity, or complementary nature, of the

conclusions reached by famous ancient philosophers are strik-

ing. It demonstrates that whatever is valuable is conditioned

and caused by the laws of nature acting upon the personalities

of both individual human beings and collective societies.

It is equally thought-provoking to see how relatively little

has been said about the opposite side of the coin; the nature,

causes, and genesis of evil. These matters are usually cloaked

behind the above generalized conclusions with a certain

amount of secrecy. Such a state of affairs can be partially as-

cribed to the social conditions and historical circumstances

under which these thinkers worked; their modus operandi may

have been dictated at least in part by personal fate, inherited

traditions, or even prudishness. After all, justice and virtue are

the opposites of force and perversity; the same applies to truth-

fulness vs. mendacity, similarly like health is the opposite of an

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

97

illness. It is also possible that whatever they thought or said

about the true nature of evil was later expunged and hidden by

those very forces they sought to expose.

The character and genesis of evil thus remained hidden in

discreet shadows, leaving it to literature to deal with the subject

in highly expressive language. But, expressive though the liter-

ary language might be, it has never reached the primeval source

of the phenomena. A certain cognitive space remained as an

uninvestigated thicket of moral questions which resist under-

standing and philosophical generalizations.

Present-day philosophers developing meta-ethics are trying

to push on along the elastic space leading to an analysis of the

language of ethics, contributing bits and pieces toward elimi-

nating the imperfections and habits of natural conceptual lan-

guage. Penetrating this ever-mysterious nucleus is highly

tempting to a scientist.

At the same time, active practitioners in social life and nor-

mal people searching for their way are significantly condi-

tioned by their trust in certain authorities. Eternal temptations

such as trivializing insufficiently-proven moral values or dis-

loyally taking advantage of naive human respect for them, find

no adequate counterweight within a rational understanding of

reality.

If physicians behaved like ethicists, i.e. relegated to the

shadow of their personal experience relatively un-esthetic dis-

ease phenomena because they were primarily interested in

studying questions of physical and mental hygiene, there would

be no such thing as modern medicine. Even the roots of this

health-maintenance science would be hidden in similar shad-

ows. In spite of the fact that the theory of hygiene has been

linked to medicine since its ancient beginnings, physicians

were correct in their emphasis upon studying disease above all.

They risked their own health and made sacrifices in order to

discover the causes and biological properties of illnesses and,

afterwards, to understand the patho-dynamics of the courses of

these illnesses. A comprehension of the nature of a disease, and

the course it runs, after all, enables the proper curative means

to be elaborated.

98

PONEROLOGY

While studying an organisms’ ability to fight off disease,

scientists invented vaccination, which allows organisms to

become resistant to an illness without passing through it in its

full-blown manifestation. Thanks to this, medicine conquers

and prevents phenomena which, in its scope of activity, are

considered a type of evil.

The question thus arises: could some analogous modus op-

erandi not be used to study the causes and genesis of other

kinds of evil scourging human individuals, families, and socie-

ties, in spite of the fact that they appear even more insulting to

our moral feelings than do diseases? Experience has taught the

author that evil is similar to disease in nature, although possibly

more complex and elusive to our understanding. Its genesis

reveals many factors, pathological, especially psychopathologi-

cal, in character, whose essence medicine and psychology have

already studied, or whose understanding demands further in-

vestigation in these realms.

Parallel to the traditional approach, problems commonly

perceived to be moral may also be treated on the basis of data

provided by biology, medicine, and psychology, as factors of

this kind are simultaneously present in the question as a whole.

Experience teaches us that a comprehension of the essence and

genesis of evil generally makes use of data from these areas.

Philosophical reflection alone is insufficient. Philosophical

thought may have engendered all the scientific disciplines, but

the other scientific disciplines did not mature until they became

independent, based on detailed data and a relationship to other

disciplines supplying such data.

Encouraged by the often “coincidental” discovery of these

naturalistic aspects of evil, the author has imitated the method-

ology of medicine; a clinical psychologist and medical co-

worker by profession, he had such tendencies anyway. As is

the case with physicians and disease, he took the risks of close

contact with evil and suffered the consequences. His purpose

was to ascertain the possibilities of understanding the nature of

evil, its etiological factors and to track its pathodynamics.

The developments of biology, medicine, and psychology

opened so many avenues that the above mentioned behavior

turned out to be not only feasible, but exceptionally fertile.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

99

Personal experience and refined methods in clinical psychology

permitted reaching ever more accurate conclusions.

There was a major difficulty: insufficient data, especially in

the area of the science of psychopathies. This problem had to

be overcome based on my own investigations. This insuffi-

ciency was caused by neglect of these areas, theoretical diffi-

culties facing researchers, and the unpopular nature of these

problems. This work in general, and this chapter in particular,

contain references to research conclusions the author was either

prevented from publishing or unwilling to publish for reasons

of personal safety. Sadly, it is lost now and age prevents any

attempts at recovery. It is hoped that my descriptions, observa-

tions, and experience, here condensed from memory, will pro-

vide a platform for a new effort to produce the data needed to

confirm again what was confirmed then.

Nevertheless, based on the work of myself and others in that

past tragic time, a new discipline arose that became our beacon;

two Greek philologists - monks baptized it “PONEROLOGY”

from the Greek poneros = evil. The process of the genesis of

evil was called, correspondingly, “ponerogenesis”. I hope that

these modest beginnings will grow so as to enable us to over-

come evil through an understanding of its nature, causes, and

development.

~~~

From among 5000 psychotic, neurotic, and healthy patients,

the author selected 384 adults who behaved in a manner which

had seriously hurt others. They came from all circles of Polish

society, but mostly from a large industrial center characterized

by poor working conditions and substantial air pollution. They

represented various moral, social, and political attitudes. Some

30 of them had been subjected to penal measures which were

often excessively harsh. Once freed from jail or other penalty,

these people attempted to readapt to social life, which made

them tend to be sincere in speaking to me - the psychologist.

Others had escaped punishment; still others had hurt their fel-

lows in a manner which does not qualify for judicial treatment

under legal theory or practice. Some were protected by a politi-

cal system which is in itself a ponerogenic derivate. The author

100

PONEROLOGY

had the further advantage of speaking to persons whose neuro-

ses were caused by some abuse they had experienced.

All the above-mentioned people were given psychological

tests and subjected to detailed anamnesis33 so as to determine

their overall mental skills, thereby either excluding or detecting

possible brain tissue lesions and evaluating them in relation to

one another.34 Other methods were also used in accordance

with the patient’s actual needs in order to create a sufficiently

accurate picture of the psychological condition. In most of

these cases the author had access to the results of medical ex-

aminations and laboratory tests performed in medical facilities.

A psychologist can glean many valuable observations, such

as those used in this work, when he himself is subjected to

abuse, as long as cognitive interest overcomes his natural hu-

man emotional reactions. If not, he must utilize his professional

skills to rescue himself first. The author never lacked for such

opportunities since his unhappy country is replete with exam-

ples of human injustice to which he was, himself, subjected on

numerous occasions.

Analysis of their personalities and the genesis of their be-

havior revealed that only 14 to 16 per cent of the 384 persons

who hurt others failed to exhibit any psychopathological fac-

tors which would have influenced their behavior. Regarding

this statistic, it should be pointed out that a psychologist’s non-

discovery of such factors does not prove their non-existence. In

a significant part of this group of cases, the lack of proof was

rather the result of insufficient interview possibilities, imper-

fection of testing methods, and deficiency of skills on the part

of the tester. Thus, natural reality appeared different in princi-

ple from everyday attitudes, which interpret evil in a moraliz-

ing way, and from juridical practices, which only in a small

33 Medical history: the case history of a medical patient as recalled by the

patient. [Editor’s note.]

34 My basic test battery resembled more those used in Great Britain as op-

posed to the American versions. I used in addition two tests: one was an old

British performance test restandarized for clinical purposes. The other was

completely elaborated by myself. Unfortunately, when I was expelled from

Poland, it made it impossible for me to transfering any of my many results to

other psychologists because I was deprived of all my research papers in

addition to almost everything else.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

101

part of the cases adjudicate a commutation of a sentence by

taking the criminal’s pathological characteristics into account.

We may often reason by means of the exclusionary hy-

pothesis, e.g. pondering what would happen if the genesis of a

particular wrongdoing did not have some pathological compo-

nent. We then usually reach the conclusion that the deed would

not have taken place either since the pathological factor sealed

its occurrence or became an indispensable component in its

origin.

The hypothesis thus suggests itself that such factors are

commonly active in the genesis of evil. The conviction that

pathological factors generally participate in ponerogenic proc-

esses appears even more likely if we also take into account the

conviction of many scholars in ethics that evil in this world

represents a kind of web or continuum of mutual conditioning.

Within this interlocking structure, one kind of evil feeds and

opens doors for others regardless of any individual or doctrinal

motivations. It does not respect the boundaries of individual

cases, social groups, and nations. Since pathological factors are

present within the synthesis of most instances of evil, they are

also present in this continuum.

Further deliberations on the observations thus obtained con-

sidered only a part of the above-mentioned variegated cases,

especially those which did not generate doubt by colliding with

natural moral attitudes, and those which did not reveal practical

difficulties for further analysis (such as absence of further con-

tact with the patient). The statistical approach furnished only

general guidelines. Intuitive penetration into each individual

problem, and a similar synthesis of the whole, proved the most

productive method in this area.

The role of pathological factors in a process of the origin of

evil can be played by any known, or not yet sufficiently re-

searched, psychopathological phenomenon, and also by some

pathological matters medical practice does not include within

psychopathology. However, their activity in a ponerogenic

process is dependent on features other than the obviousness or

intensity of the condition. Quite the contrary, the greatest pon-

erogenic activity is reached by pathological factors at an inten-

sity which generally permits detection with the help of clinical

102

PONEROLOGY

methods, although they are not yet considered pathological by

the opinion of the social environment. Such a factor can then

covertly limit the bearer’s ability to control his conduct, or

have an effect upon other persons, traumatizing their psyches,

fascinating them, causing their personalities to develop im-

properly, or inciting vindictive emotions or a lust for punishing.

A moralistic interpretation of such agents and their legacy

works against humankind’s ability to see the causes of evil and

to utilize common sense to combat it. This is why identifying

such pathological factors and revealing their activities can so

often stifle their ponerogenic functions.

In the process of the origin of evil, pathological factors can

act from within an individual who has committed a hurtful act;

such activity is relatively easily acknowledged by public opin-

ion and the courts. Consideration is given much less frequently

to how outside influences emitted by their carriers act upon

individuals or groups. Such influences, however, play a sub-

stantial role in the overall genesis of evil. In order for such

influence to be active, the pathological characteristic in ques-

tion must be interpreted in a moralistic manner, i.e. differently

from its true nature. There are many possibilities for such ac-

tivities. For the moment, let us indicate the most damaging.

Every person in the span of his life, and particularly during

childhood and youth, assimilates psychological material from

others through mental resonance, identification, imitation, and

other communicative means, thereupon transforming it to build

his own personality and world view. If such material is con-

taminated by pathological factors and deformities, personality

development shall also be deformed. The product will be a

person unable to understand correctly either himself and others,

normal human relations and morals; he develops into a person

who commits evil acts with a poor feeling of being faulty. Is he

really at fault?

Man’s age-old, familiar moral weaknesses and intelligence

deficiencies, proper reasoning, and knowledge combine with

the activity of various pathological factors to create a complex

network of causation which frequently contains feedback rela-

tionships or closed causal structures. Practically speaking,

cause and effect are often widely separated in time, which

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

103

makes it more difficult to track the links. If our scope of obser-

vation is expansive enough, the ponerogenic processes are

reminiscent of complex chemical synthesis, wherein modifying

a single factor causes the entire process to change. Botanists

are aware of the law of the minimum, wherein plant growth is

limited by contents of the component which is in deficiency in

the soil. Similarly, eliminating (or at least limiting) the activity

of one of the above-mentioned factors or deficiencies should

cause a corresponding reduction in the entire process of the

genesis of evil.

For centuries, moralists have been advising us to develop

ethics and human values; they have been searching for the

proper intellectual criteria. They have also respected correct-

ness of reasoning, whose value in this area is unquestionable.

In spite of all their efforts, however, they have been unable to

overcome the many kinds of evil that have scourged humanity

for ages and that are presently taking on unheard-of propor-

tions.

By no means does a ponerologist wish to belittle the role of

moral values and knowledge in this area; rather, he wants to

buttress it with hitherto-underrated scientific knowledge in

order to round out the picture as a whole and adapt it better to

reality, thereby making more effective action possible in moral,

psychological, social, and political practice.

This new discipline is thus primarily interested in the role of

pathological factors in the origin of evil, especially since con-

scious control and monitoring of them on the scientific, social,

and individual levels could effectively stifle or disarm these

processes. Something which has been impossible for centuries

is now feasible in practice thanks to progress in naturalistic

cognizance. Methodological refinements are dependent upon

further progress in detailed data and upon the conviction that

such behavior is valuable.

For instance, in the course of psychotherapy, we may in-

form a patient that in the genesis of his personality and behav-

ior we find the results of influences from some person who

revealed psychopathological characteristics. We thereby carry

out an intervention that is painful for the patient, which de-

mands we proceed with tact and skill. As a result of this inter-

104

PONEROLOGY

action, however, the patient develops a kind of self-analysis

which will liberate him from the results of these influences and

enable him to develop some critical distance in dealing with

other factors of a similar nature. Rehabilitation will depend on

improving his ability to understand himself and others. Thanks

to this, he will be able to overcome his internal and interper-

sonal difficulties more easily and to avoid mistakes which hurt

him and his immediate environment.

Pathological Factors

Let us now attempt a concise description of some examples

of those pathological factors which have proved to be the most

active in ponerogenic processes. Selection of these examples

resulted from the author’s own experience, instead of exhaus-

tive statistical tallies, and may thus differ from other special-

ists’ evaluations. Much depends on particular situation. A small

amount of statistical data concerning these phenomena has

been borrowed from other works or are approximate evalua-

tions elaborated under conditions which did not allow the entire

front of research to be developed. Again, may the reader please

consider the conditions under which the author worked, and the

time and place.

Mention should also be made of some historical figures,

people whose pathological characteristics contributed to the

process of the genesis of evil on a large social scale, imprinting

their mark upon the fate of nations. It is not an easy task to

establish diagnosis for people whose psychological anomalies

and diseases died together with them. The results of such clini-

cal analyses are open to question even by persons lacking

knowledge or experience in this area, only because recognizing

such a state of mind does not correspond to their historical or

literary way of thought. While this is done on the basis of the

legacy of natural and often moralizing language, I can only

assert that I always based my findings on comparisons of data

acquired through numerous observations I made by studying

many similar patients with the help of the objective methods of

contemporary clinical psychology. I took the critical approach

herein as far as possible. The opinions of specialists elaborated

in a similar way nevertheless remain valuable.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

105

Acquired Deviations

Brain tissue is very limited in its regenerative ability. If it is

damaged and the change subsequently heals, a process of reha-

bilitation can take place wherein the neighboring healthy tissue

takes over the function of the damaged portion. This substitu-

tion is never quite perfect; thus some deficits in skill and proper

psychological processes can be detected in even cases of very

small damage by using the appropriate tests. Specialists are

aware of the variegated causes for the origin of such damage,

including trauma and infections. We should point out here that

the psychological results of such changes, as we can observe

many years later, are more heavily dependent upon the location

of the damage itself in the brain mass, whether on the surface

or within, than they are upon the cause which brought them

about. The quality of these consequences also depends upon

when they occurred in the person’s lifetime. Regarding patho-

logical factors of ponerogenic processes, perinatal or early

infant damages have more active results than damages which

occurred later.

In societies with highly developed medical care, we find

among the lower grades of elementary school (when tests can

be applied), that 5 to 7 per cent of children have suffered brain

tissue lesions which cause certain academic or behavioral diffi-

culties. This percentage increases with age. Modern medical

care has contributed to a quantitative decrease in such phenom-

ena, but in certain relatively uncivilized countries and during

historical times, indications of difficulties caused by such

changes are and have been more frequent.

Epilepsy and its many variations constitute the oldest

known results of such lesions; it is observed in a relatively

small number of persons suffering such damage. Researchers in

these matters are more or less unanimous in believing that

Julius Caesar, and then later Napoleon Bonaparte, had epileptic

seizures. Those were probably instances of vegetative epilepsy

caused by lesions lying deep within the brain, near the vegeta-

tive centers. This variety does not cause subsequent dementia.

The extent to which these hidden ailments had negative effects

upon their characters and historical decision-making, or played

a ponerogenic role, can be the subject of a separate study and

106

PONEROLOGY

evaluation of great interest. In most cases, however, epilepsy is

an evident ailment, which limits its role as a ponerogenic fac-

tor.

In a much larger segment of the bearers of brain tissue dam-

age, the negative deformation of their characters grows in the

course of time. It takes on variegated mental pictures, depend-

ing upon the properties and localization of these changes, their

time of origin, and also the life conditions of the individual

after their occurrence. We will call such character disorders –

characteropathies. Some characteropathies play an outstanding

role as pathological agents in the processes of the genesis of

evil. Let us thus characterize these most active ones.

Characteropathies reveal a certain similar quality, if the

clinical picture is not dimmed by the coexistence of other men-

tal anomalies (usually inherited), which sometimes occur in

practice. Undamaged brain tissue retains our species’ natural

psychological properties. This is particularly evident in instinc-

tive and affective responses, which are natural, albeit often

insufficiently controlled. The experience of people with such

anomalies grows in the medium of the normal human world to

which they belong by nature. Thus their different way of think-

ing, their emotional violence, and their egotism find relatively

easy entry into other people’s minds and are perceived within

the categories of the everyday world. Such behavior on the part

of persons with such character disorders traumatizes the minds

and feelings of normal people, gradually diminishing the ability

of the normal person to use their common sense. In spite of

their resistance, victims of the characteropath become used to

the rigid habits of pathological thinking and experiencing. If

the victims are young people, the result is that the personality

suffers abnormal development leading to its malformation.

Characteropaths and their victims thus represent pathological,

ponerogenic factors which, by their covert activity, easily en-

gender new phases in the eternal genesis of evil, opening the

door to a later activation of other factors which thereupon take

over the main role.

A relatively well-documented example of such an influence

of a characteropathic personality on a macrosocial scale is the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

107

last German emperor, Wilhelm II.35 He was subjected to brain

trauma at birth. During and after his entire reign, his physical

and psychological handicap was hidden from public knowl-

edge. The motor abilities of the upper left portion of his body

were handicapped. As a boy, he had difficulty learning gram-

mar, geometry, and drawing, which constitute the typical triad

of academic difficulties caused by minor brain lesions. He de-

veloped a personality with infantile features and insufficient

control over his emotions, and also a somewhat paranoid way

of thinking which easily sidestepped the heart of some impor-

tant issues in the process of dodging problems.

Militaristic poses and a general’s uniform overcompensated

for his feelings of inferiority and effectively cloaked his short-

comings. Politically, his insufficient control of emotions and

factors of personal rancor came into view. The old Iron Chan-

cellor had to go, that cunning and ruthless politician who had

been loyal to the monarchy and had built up Prussian power.

After all, he was too knowledgeable about the prince’s defects

and had worked against his coronation. A similar fate met other

overly critical people, who were replaced by persons with

lesser brains, more subservience, and, sometimes, discreet psy-

chological deviations. Negative selection took place.

Since the common people are prone to identify with the em-

peror, and through the emperor, with a system of government,

the characteropathic material emanating from the Kaiser re-

sulted in many Germans being progressively deprived of their

ability to use their common sense. An entire generation grew

up with psychological deformities regarding feeling and under-

standing moral, psychological, social and political realities. It is

35 The eldest grandchild of Queen Victoria, Wilhelm symbolized his era and

the nouveaux riche aspects of the German empire. The kaiser suffered from a

birth defect that left his left arm withered and useless. It was claimed that he

overcame this handicap, but the effort to do so left its mark, and despite

efforts of his parents to give him a liberal education, the prince became im-

bued with religious mysticism, militarism, anti-semitism, the glorification of

power politics. Some have claimed that his personality displayed elements of

a narcissistic personality disorder. Bombastic, vain, insensitive, and pos-

sessed with grandiose notions of divine right rule, his personality traits paral-

leled those of the new Germany: strong, but off balance; vain, but insecure;

intelligent, but narrow; self-centered yet longing for acceptance. [Editor’s

note.]

108

PONEROLOGY

extremely typical that in many German families having a

member who was psychologically not quite normal, it became

a matter of honor (even excusing nefarious conduct) to hide

this fact from public opinion, and even from the awareness of

close friends and relatives. Large portions of German society

ingested psychopathological material, together with that unreal-

istic way of thinking wherein slogans take on the power of

arguments and real data are subjected to subconscious selec-

tion.

This occurred during a time when a wave of hysteria was

growing throughout Europe, including a tendency for emotions

to dominate and for human behavior to contain an element of

histrionics. How individual sober thought can be terrorized by

a behavior colored with such material was evidenced particu-

larly by women. This progressively took over three empires

and other countries on the mainland.

To what extent did Wilhelm II contribute to this, along with

two other emperors whose minds also were incapable of taking

in the actual facts of history and government? To what extent

were they themselves influenced by an intensification of hys-

teria during their reigns? That would make an interesting topic

of discussion among historians and ponerologists.

International tensions increased; Archduke Ferdinand was

assassinated in Sarajevo. Unfortunately, neither the Kaiser nor

any other governmental authority in his country were in pos-

session of their reason. What dominated the subsequent events

was Wilhelm’s emotional attitude and the stereotypes of

thought and action inherited from the past. War broke out.

General war plans that had been prepared earlier, and which

had lost their relevance under the new conditions, unfolded

more like military maneuvers. Even those historians familiar

with the genesis and character of the Prussian state, including

its ideological subjugation of individuals to the authority of

king and emperor, and its tradition of bloody expansionism,

intuit that these situations contained some activity of an un-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

109

comprehended fatality which eludes an analysis in terms of

historical causality.36

Many thoughtful persons keep asking the same anxious

question: how could the German nation have chosen for a Fue-

hrer a clownish psychopath who made no bones about his

pathological vision of superman rule? Under his leadership,

Germany then unleashed a second criminal and politically ab-

surd war. During the second half of this war, highly-trained

army officers honorably performed inhuman orders, senseless

from the political and military point of view, issued by a man

whose psychological state corresponded to the routine criteria

for being forcibly committed to a psychiatric hospital.

Any attempt to explain the things that occurred during the

first half of our century by means of categories generally ac-

cepted in historical thought leaves behind a nagging feeling of

inadequacy. Only a ponerological approach can compensate for

this deficit in our comprehension, as it does justice to the role

of various pathological factors in the genesis of evil at every

social level.

The German nation, fed for a generation on pathologically

altered psychological material, fell into a state comparable to

what we see in certain individuals raised by persons who are

both characteropathic and hysterical. Psychologists know from

experience how often such people then let themselves commit

acts which seriously hurt others. A psychotherapist needs a

good deal of persistent work, skill, and prudence in order to

enable such a person to regain his ability to comprehend psy-

chological problems with more naturalistic realism and to util-

ize his healthy critical faculties in relation to his own behavior.

The Germans inflicted and suffered enormous damage and

pain during the first World War; they thus felt no substantial

guilt and even thought that they were the ones who had been

wronged. This is not surprising as they were behaving in ac-

cordance with their customary habit, without being aware of its

pathological causes. The need for this pathological state to be

concealed in heroic garb after a war in order to avoid bitter

36 An interesting comparison is the regime of George W. Bush and the Neo-

conservatives. It follows, almost point by point, the history of the Kaiser in

Germany. [Editor’s note.]

110

PONEROLOGY

disintegration became all too common. A mysterious craving

arose, as if the social organism had managed to become ad-

dicted to some drug. The hunger was for more pathologically

modified psychological material, a phenomenon known to psy-

chotherapeutic experience. This hunger could only be satisfied

by another similarly pathological personality and system of

government. A characteropathic personality opened the door

for leadership by a psychopathic individual. We shall return

later in our deliberations to this pathological personality se-

quence, as it appears a general regularity in ponerogenic proc-

esses.

A ponerological approach facilitates our understanding of a

person who succumbs to the influence of a characteropathic

personality, as well as comprehension of macrosocial phenom-

ena caused by the contribution of such factors. Unfortunately,

relatively few such individuals can be served by appropriate

psychotherapy. Such behavior cannot be ascribed to nations

proudly defending their sovereignty without extreme reactions.

However, we may consider the solution of such problems by

means of the proper knowledge as a vision for the future.

~~~

Paranoid character disorders: It is characteristic of para-

noid behavior for people to be capable of relatively correct

reasoning and discussion as long as the conversation involves

minor differences of opinion. This stops abruptly when the

partner’s arguments begin to undermine their overvalued ideas,

crush their long-held stereotypes of reasoning, or forces them

to accept a conclusion they had subconsciously rejected before.

Such a stimulus unleashes upon the partner a torrent of pseudo-

logical, largely paramoralistic, often insulting utterances which

always contain some degree of suggestion.

Utterances like these inspire aversion among cultivated and

logical people, who then tend to avoid the paranoid types.

However, the power of the paranoid lies in the fact that they

easily enslave less critical minds, e.g. people with other kinds

of psychological deficiencies, who have been victims of the

egotistical influence of individuals with character disorders,

and, in particular, a large segment of young people.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

111

A proletarian may perceive this power to enslave to be a

kind of victory over higher-class people and thus take the para-

noid person’s side. However, this is not the normal reaction

among the common people, where perception of psychological

reality occurs no less often than among intellectuals.

In sum then, the response of accepting paranoid argumenta-

tion is qualitatively more frequent in reverse proportion to the

civilization level of the community in question, although it

never approaches the majority. Nevertheless, paranoid indi-

viduals become aware of their enslaving influence through

experience and attempt to take advantage of it in a pathologi-

cally egotistic manner.

We know today that the psychological mechanism of para-

noid phenomena is twofold: one is caused by damage to the

brain tissue, the other is functional or behavioral. Within the

above-mentioned process of rehabilitation, any brain-tissue

lesion causes a certain slackening of accurate thinking and, as a

consequence, of the personality structure. Most typical are

those cases caused by an aggression in the diencephalon37 by

various pathological factors, resulting in its permanently de-

creased tonal ability, and similarly of the tonus of inhibition in

the brain cortex. Particularly during sleepless nights, runaway

thoughts give rise to a paranoid changed view of human reality,

as well as to ideas which can be either gently naive or violently

revolutionary. Let us call this kind paranoid characteropathy.

In persons free of brain tissue lesions, such phenomena

most frequently occur as a result of being reared by people with

paranoid characteropathia, along with the psychological terror

of their childhood. Such psychological material is then assimi-

lated creating the rigid stereotypes of abnormal experiencing.

This makes it difficult for thought and world view to develop

normally, and the terror-blocked contents become transformed

into permanent, functional, congestive centers.

Ivan Pavlov comprehended all kinds of paranoid states in a

manner similar to this functional model without being aware of

this basic and primary cause. He nevertheless provided a vivid

37 The posterior division of the forebrain; connects the cerebral hemispheres

with the mesencephalon; the region of the brain that includes the epithala-

mus, thalamus, and hypothalamus. [Editor’s note.]

112

PONEROLOGY

description of paranoid characters and the above-mentioned

ease with which paranoid individuals suddenly tear away from

factual discipline and proper thought-processes. Those readers

of his work on the subject who are sufficiently familiar with

Soviet conditions glean yet another historical meaning from his

little book. Its intent appears obvious. The author dedicated his

work, with no word of inscription, of course, to the chief model

of a paranoid personality: the revolutionary leader Lenin,

whom the scientist knew well. As a good psychologist, Pavlov

could predict that he would not be the object of revenge, since

the paranoid mind will block out the egocentric associations.

He was thus able to die a natural death.

Lenin should nevertheless be included with the first and

most characteristic kind of paranoid personality, i.e. most

probably due to diencephalic brain damage. Vassily Gross-

man38 describes him more or less as follows:

Symptom:

Lenin was always tactful, gentle, and

polite, but simultaneously characterized

Asthenization.

by an excessively sharp, ruthless, and

Fixation and stereotypia.

brutal attitude to political opponents. He

never allowed any possibility that they

38 Vassily Grossman was a Soviet citizen, a Ukrainian Jew born in 1905. A

Communist, he became a war correspondent, working for the army paper Red

Star - a job which took him to the front lines of Stalingrad and ultimately to

Berlin. He was among the first to see the results of the death camps, and

published the first account of a death camp - Treblinka - in any language.

After the war, he seems to have lost his faith. He wrote his immense novel,

Life and Fate (Zhizn i Sudba) in the 1950s and - in the period of the Krush-

chev thaw, which had seen Alexander Solzhenitsyn allowed to publish A Day

on the Life of Ivan Denisovich - he submitted the manuscript to a literary

journal in 1960 for publication. But Solzhenitsyn was one thing, Grossman

another: his manuscript was confiscated, as were the sheets of carbon paper

and typewriter ribbons he had used to write it. Suslov, the Politbureau mem-

ber in charge of ideology, is reported as having said it could not be published

for 200 years. However, it was smuggled out on microfilm to the west by

Vladimir Voinovich, and published, first in France in 1980, then in English in

1985.

Why the 200 year ban? Because Life and Fate commits what was still, in a

‘liberal’ environment, the unthinkable sin of arguing for the moral equiva-

lence of Nazism and Soviet communism. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

113

might be even minimally right, nor that

Pathological egotism.

he might be even minimally wrong. He

would often call his opponents huck-

Paramoralisms.

sters, lackeys, servant-boys, mercenar-

ies, agents, or Judases bribed for thirty

pieces of silver. He made no attempt to

persuade his opponents during a dis-

pute. He communicated not with them,

Spellbinding and of con-

but rather with those witnessing the

sciousness and its effects.

dispute, in order to ridicule and com-

promise his adversaries. Sometimes

such witnesses were just a few people,

sometimes thousands of delegates to a

Lack of the self- criticism.

congress, sometimes millions worth

throngs of newspaper readers.

~~~

Frontal characteropathy: The frontal areas of the cerebral

cortex (10A and B acc. to the Brodmann division) are virtually

present in no creature except man; they are composed of the

phylogenetically youngest nervous tissue. Their cyto-

architecture is similar to the much older visual projection areas

on the opposite pole of the brain. This suggests some functional

similarity. The author has found a relatively easy way to test

this psychological function, which enables us to grasp a certain

number of imaginary elements in our field of consciousness

and subject them to internal contemplation. The capacity of this

act of internal projection varies greatly from one person to

another, manifesting a statistical correlation with similar varie-

gation in the anatomical extent of such areas. The correlation

between this capacity and general intelligence is much lower.

As described by researchers (Luria et al.), the functions of

these areas, thought-process acceleration and coordination,

seem to result from this basic function.

Damage to this area occurred rather frequently: at or near

birth, especially for premature infants, and later in life as a

result of various causes. The number of such perinatal brain

tissue lesions has been significantly reduced due to improved

medical care for pregnant women and newborns. The spectacu-

lar ponerogenic role which results from character disorders

114

PONEROLOGY

caused by this can thus be considered somewhat characteristic

of past generations and primitive cultures.

Brain cortex damage in these areas selectively impairs the

above mentioned function without impairing memory, associa-

tive capacity, or, in particular, such instinct-based feelings and

functions as, for instance, the ability to intuit a psychological

situation. The general intelligence of an individual is thus not

greatly reduced. Children with such a defect are almost normal

students; difficulties emerge suddenly in upper grades and af-

fect principally these parts of the curriculum which place bur-

den on the above function.

The pathological character of such people, generally con-

taining a component of hysteria, develops through the years.

The non-damaged psychological functions become overdevel-

oped to compensate, which means that instinctive and affective

reactions predominate. Relatively vital people become belliger-

ent, risk-happy, and brutal in both word and deed.

Persons with an innate talent for intuiting psychological

situations tend to take advantage of this gift in an egotistical

and ruthless fashion. In the thought process of such people, a

short cut way develops which bypasses the handicapped func-

tion, thus leading from associations directly to words, deeds,

and decisions which are not subject to any dissuasion. Such

individuals interpret their talent for intuiting situations and

making split-second oversimplified decisions as a sign of their

superiority compared to normal people, who need to think for

long time, experiencing self-doubt and conflicting motivations.

The fate of such creatures does not deserve to be pondered

long.

Such “Stalinistic characters” traumatize and actively spell-

bind others, and their influence finds it exceptionally easy to

bypass the controls of common sense. A large proportion of

people tend to credit such individuals with special powers,

thereby succumbing to their egotistic beliefs. If a parent mani-

fests such a defect, no matter how minimal, all the children in

the family evidence anomalies in personality development.

The author studied an entire generation of older, educated,

people wherein the source of such influence was the eldest

sister who suffered perinatal damage of the frontal centers.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

115

From early childhood, her four younger brothers exposed to

and assimilated pathologically altered psychological material,

including their sister’s growing component of hysteria. They

retained well into their sixties the deformities of personality

and world view, as well as the hysterical features thus caused,

whose intensity diminished in proportion to the greater differ-

ence in age.

Subconscious selection of information made it impossible

for these men to apprehend any critical comments regarding

their sister’s character; also, any such comments were consid-

ered to be an offense to the family honor.

The brothers accepted as real their sister’s pathological de-

lusions and complaints about her “bad” husband (who was

actually a decent person) and her son, in whom she found a

scapegoat to avenge her failures. They thereby participated in a

world of vengeful emotions, considering their sister a com-

pletely normal person whom they were prepared to defend by

the most unsavory methods, if need be, against any suggestion

of her abnormality. They thought normal woman were insipid

and naive, good for nothing but sexual conquest. Not one

among the brothers ever created a healthy family or developed

even average wisdom of life.

The character development of these people also included

many other factors that were dependent upon the time and

place in which they were reared: the turn of the century, with a

patriotic Polish father and German mother who obeyed con-

temporary custom by formally accepting her husband’s nation-

ality, but who still remained an advocate of the militarism, and

customary acceptance of the intensified hysteria which covered

Europe at the time. That was the Europe of the three Emperors:

the splendor of three people with limited intelligence, two of

whom revealed pathological traits. The concept of “honor”

sanctified triumph. Staring at someone too long was sufficient

pretext for a duel. These brothers were thus raised to be valiant

duelists covered with saber-scars; however, the slashes they

inflicted upon their opponents were more frequent and much

worse.

When people with a humanistic education pondered the per-

sonalities of this family, they concluded that the causes for this

116

PONEROLOGY

formation should be sought in contemporary time and customs.

If, however, the sister had not suffered brain damage and the

pathological factor had not existed (exclusionary hypothesis),

their personalities would have developed more normally even

during those times. They would have become more critical and

more amenable to the values of healthy reasoning and humanis-

tic contents. They would have founded better families and re-

ceived more sensible advice from wives more wisely chosen.

As for the evil they sowed too liberally during their lives, it

would either not have existed at all, or else would have been

reduced to a scope conditioned by more remote pathological

factors.

Comparative considerations also led the author to conclude

that Iosif Vissarionovich Dzhugashvili, also known as Stalin,

should be included in the list of this particular ponerogenic

characteropathy, which developed against the backdrop of

perinatal damage to his brain’s prefrontal fields. Literature and

news about him abounds in indications: brutal, charismatic,

snake-charming; issuing of irrevocable decisions; inhuman

ruthlessness, pathologic revengefulness directed at anyone who

got in his way; and egotistical belief in his own genius on the

part of a person whose mind was, in fact, only average. This

state explains as well his psychological dependence on a psy-

chopath like Beria39. Some photographs reveal the typical de-

formation of his forehead which appears in people who suf-

fered very early damage to the areas mentioned above. His

typical irrevocable decisions his daughter describes as follows:

~~~

Whenever he threw out of his heart someone whom he

had known for a long time, classifying him among his

39 L.P. Beria (1899–1953), Soviet Communist leader, b. Georgia. He rose to

prominence in the Cheka (secret police) in Georgia and the Transcaucasus,

became party secretary in these areas, and in 1938 became head of the secret

police. As commissar (later minister) of internal affairs, Beria wielded great

power, and he was the first in this post to become (1946) a member of the

politburo. After Stalin’s death (Mar., 1953), Beria was made first deputy

premier under Premier Malenkov, but the alliance was shaky; in the ensuing

struggle for power Beria was arrested (July) on charges of conspiracy. He and

six alleged accomplices were tried secretly and shot in Dec., 1953. [Editor’s

note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

117

“enemies” in his soul, it was impossible to talk to him about

that person. The reverse process became impossible for

him, namely persuasion that he was not his enemy, and any

attempts in that direction made him fly into a rage. Redens,

Uncle Pavlusha, and A.S. Svanidze were incapable of doing

anything about it; all they accomplished was to have my fa-

ther break off contacts and withdraw his trust. After seeing

any of them for the last time, he said goodbye as if to a po-

tential foe, one of his “enemies”…40

~~~

We know the effect of being “thrown out of his heart”, as it

is documented by the history of those times.

When we contemplate the scope of the evil Stalin helped to

bring about, we should always take this most ponerogenic

characteropathy into account and attribute the proper portion of

the “blame” to it; unfortunately, it has not yet been sufficiently

studied. We have to consider many other pathologic deviations

as they played essential roles in this macrosocial phenomenon.

Disregarding the pathologic aspects of those occurrences and

limiting interpretation thereof by historiographic and moral

considerations opens the door to an activity of further ponero-

genic factors; such reasoning should be thus regarded as not

only scientifically insufficient but immoral as well.

~~~

Drug-induced characteropathies: During the last few dec-

ades, medicine has begun using a series of drugs with serious

side effects: they attack the nervous system, leaving permanent

damage behind. These generally discreet handicaps sometimes

give rise to personality changes which are often very harmful

socially. Streptomycin41 proved a very dangerous drug; as a

result, some countries have limited its use, whereas others have

taken it off the list of drugs whose use is permitted.

40 Svetlana Alliluieva - Twenty Letters to a Friend.

41 Streptomycin acts by inhibiting protein synthesis and damaging cell mem-

branes in susceptible microorganisms. Possible side effects include injury to

the kidneys and nerve damage that can result in dizziness and deafness. [Edi-

tor’s note.]

118

PONEROLOGY

The cytostatic drugs42 used in treating neoplastic43 diseases

often attack the phylogenetically oldest brain tissue, the pri-

mary carrier of our instinctive substratum and basic feelings.44

Persons treated with such drugs progressively tend to lose their

emotional color and their ability to intuit a psychological situa-

tion. They retain their intellectual functions but become praise-

craving egocentrics, easily ruled by people who know how to

take advantage of this. They become indifferent to other peo-

ple’s feelings and the harm they are inflicting upon them; any

criticism of their own person or behavior is repaid with a

vengeance. Such a change of character in a person who until

recently enjoyed respect on the part of his environment or

community, which perseveres in human minds, becomes a

pathological phenomenon causing often tragic results.

Could this have been a factor in the case of the Shah of

Iran? Again, diagnosing dead people is problematic, and the

author lacks detailed data. However, this possibility should be

accepted as a probability. The genesis of that county’s present

42 Most drugs that are used to treat cancer kill the cancer cells. The word

cytotoxic means toxic to cells, or cell-killing. Chemotherapy is properly

called “cytotoxic therapy”. There are other treatments that do not kill cancer

cells. They work by stopping the cancer cells from multiplying. These treat-

ments are called “cytostatic”. The hormone therapies used to treat breast

cancer could be called cytostatic therapy. [Editor’s note.]

43 Neoplasia (literally: new growth) is abnormal, disorganized growth in a

tissue or organ, usually forming a distinct mass. Such a growth is called a

neoplasm, also known as a tumor. Neoplasia refers to both benign and malig-

nant growths, while “cancer” refers specifically to malignant neoplasia.

[Editor’s note.]

44 Chemo Head is the name given by cancer patients to one of the side-effects

of chemotherapy. It has been described as an inability to concentrate, reduced

memory, or finding it difficult to think clearly. This could be simply attrib-

uted to general fatigue, however it seems that there are some very specific

triggers and results. Some people get flustered by loud noises and activity

around them. Others find that they cannot find the right words to express

themselves. One patient described the feeling as “everything seems distant ...

it takes me a few seconds longer to think or answer questions. The mental

process slows down tremendously.” The symptoms are similar to those of

Attention Deficit Disorder. New research concludes “chemo head” continued

in up to 50% of survivors as long as 10 years following the end of systemic

chemotherapy treatment. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

119

tragedy also doubtless contains pathological factors which play

ponerologically active roles.45

Results similar to the above in the psychological picture

may be caused by endogenous toxins46 or viruses. When, on

occasion, the mumps proceeds with a brain reaction, it leaves

in its wake a discrete pallor or dullness of feelings and a slight

decrease in mental efficiency. Similar phenomena are wit-

nessed after a difficult bout with diphtheria. Finally, polio at-

tacks the brain, more often the higher part of the anterior horns,

which was affected by the process. People with leg paresis

rarely manifest these effects, but those with paresis of the neck

and/or shoulders must count themselves lucky if they do not. In

addition to affective pallor, persons manifesting these effects

usually evidence naiveté and an inability to comprehend the

crux of a matter.

We rather doubt that President F.D. Roosevelt manifested

some of this latter features, since the polio virus which attacked

him when he was forty caused paresis to his legs. After over-

coming this, years of creative activity followed. However, it is

possible that his naive attitude toward Soviet policy during his

last term of office had a pathological component related to his

deteriorating health.

Character anomalies developing as a result of brain-tissue

damage behave like insidious ponerogenic factors. As a result

of the above-described features, especially the above-

mentioned naiveté and an inability to comprehend the crux of a

matter, their influence easily anchors in human minds, trauma-

tizing our psyches, impoverishing and deforming our thoughts

and feelings, and limiting individuals’ and societies’ ability to

45 Editor’s reminder that this book was written in 1985.

46 Current Western medical opinion states: Endogenous toxins include heavy

metals, pesticides, food additives, and industrial and household chemicals.

These can damage the liver and kidneys; they can also cross the blood-brain

barrier and damage brain cells. Workers exposed to high levels of inhaled

manganese showed concentrated levels in the basal ganglia, and exhibited

Parkinson’s-like syndrome. Observational studies have also shown increased

levels of aluminum, mercury, copper, and iron in the cerebral spinal fluid

(CSF) of Parkinson's patients. It is not fully determined whether these miner-

als found in the brain have any clinical significance. (Mitchell J. Ghen, D.O.,

Ph.D., and Maureen Melindrez, N.D.) [Editor’s note.]

120

PONEROLOGY

use common sense and to read a psychological or moral situa-

tion accurately. This opens the door to the influence of other

pathological characters who most frequently carry some inher-

ited psychological deviations; they then push the charac-

teropathic individuals into the shadows and proceed with their

ponerogenic work. That is why various types of characteropa-

thy participate during the initial periods of the genesis of evil,

both on the macrosocial scale and on the individual scale of

human families.

An improved social system of the future should thus protect

individuals and societies by preventing persons with the above

deviations, or certain characteristics to be discussed below,

from any societal functions wherein the fate of other people

would depend upon their behavior. This of course applies pri-

marily to top governmental positions. Such questions should be

dealt with by an appropriate institution composed of people

with a reputation for wisdom and with medical and psychologi-

cal training.

The features of brain-tissue lesions and their character dis-

order results are much easier to detect than certain inherited

anomalies. Thus, stifling ponerogenic processes by removing

these factors from the process of the synthesis of evil is effec-

tive during the early phases of such genesis, and much easier in

practice.

Inherited Deviations

Science already protects societies from the results of some

physiological anomalies which are accompanied by certain

psychological weaknesses. The tragic role played by hereditary

hemophilia among European royalty is well known. Responsi-

ble people in countries where the system of monarchy still

survives, are anxious not to allow a carrier of such a gene to

become queen. Any society exercising so much concern over

individuals with blood-coagulation insufficiency or other seri-

ous and life-threatening pathology would protest if a man af-

flicted with such a condition were appointed to a high office

bearing responsibility for many people. This behavior model

should be extended to many pathologies, including inherited

psychological anomalies.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

121

Daltonists, men with an impaired ability to distinguish red

and green colors from grey, are now barred from professions in

which this could cause a catastrophe. We also know that this

anomaly is often accompanied by a decrease in esthetic experi-

ence, emotions, and the feeling of linkage to people who can

see colors normally. Industrial psychologists are thus cautious

whether such a person should be entrusted with work requiring

dependence upon an autonomic sense of responsibility, as

workers safety is contingent upon this sense.

It was discovered long ago that these two above-mentioned

anomalies – hemophilia and color blindness - are inherited by

means of a gene located in the X chromosome, and tracking

their transmission through many generations is not difficult.

Geneticists have similarly studied the inheritance of many

other features of human organisms, but they have paid scant

attention to the anomalies interesting us here. Many features of

human character have a hereditary bases in genes located in the

same X chromosome; although it is not a rule. Something simi-

lar could apply to the majority of the psychological anomalies

to be discussed below.

Significant progress has recently been made in cognition of

a series of chromosomal anomalies resulting from defective

division of the reproductive cells and their phenotypic psycho-

logical symptoms. This state of affairs enables us to initiate

studies on their ponerogenetic role and to introduce conclu-

sions which are theoretically valuable, something which is in

effect already being done. In practice, however, the majority of

chromosomal anomalies are not transferred to the next genera-

tion; furthermore, their carriers constitute a very small propor-

tion of the population at large, and their general intelligence is

lower than the social average, so their ponerological role is

even smaller than their statistical distribution. Most problems

are caused by the XYY karyotype47 which produces men who

are tall, strong, and emotionally violent, with an inclination to

collide with the law. These engendered tests and discussions,

but their role at the level studied herein is also very small.

47 Sandberg, A. A.; Koepf, G. F.; Ishihara, T.; Hauschka, T. S. (August 26,

1961) “An XYY human male”. Lancet 2, 488-9.

122

PONEROLOGY

Much more numerous are those psychological deviations

which play a correspondingly greater role as pathological fac-

tors in the ponerological processes; they are most probably

transmitted through normal heredity. However, this realm of

genetics in particular is faced with manifold biological and

psychological difficulties as far as recognizing these phenom-

ena. People studying their psychopathology lack biological

isolation criteria. Biologists lack clear psychological differen-

tiation of such phenomena which would permit studies of he-

redity mechanics and some other properties.

At the time most of the observations on which this book is

based were being done, the works of many researchers who

have since shed light upon many aspects of the matters dis-

cussed herein, during the latter half of the sixties, were either

nonexistent or unavailable. Scientists studying the phenomena

described below were hacking their way through a thicket of

symptoms based on previous works and on their own efforts.

An understanding of the essence of some of these hereditary

anomalies and their ponerogenic role proved a necessary pre-

condition for reaching the primary goal. Results were gleaned

which served as a basis for further reasoning. For the sake of

the overall picture, and because the manner elaborated also

brings in certain theoretical values, I decided to retain the

methodology of description for such anomalies which emerged

from my own work and from that of others at the time.

Numerous scientists during the above-mentioned fertile era,

and some subsequent scientists, such as R. Jenkins, H.

Cleckley, S.K. Ehrlich, K.C. Gray, H.C. Hutchison, F. Kraupl

Taylor, and others did cast more stereoscopic light upon the

matter. They were clinicians, concentrating their attention upon

the more demonstrative cases which play a lesser role in the

processes of the genesis of evil, in accordance with the above-

mentioned general rule of ponerology. We therefore need to

differentiate those analogic states which are less intense or

contain less of a psychological deficit. Equally valuable for

ponerology are inquiries concerning the nature of the phenom-

ena under discussion, which facilitate differentiation of their

essence and analysis of their role as pathological factors in the

genesis of evil.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

123

~~~

Schizoidia: Schizoidia, or schizoidal psychopathy, was iso-

lated by the very first of the famous creators of modern psy-

chiatry.48 From the beginning, it was treated as a lighter form

of the same hereditary taint which is the cause of susceptibility

to schizophrenia. However, this latter connection could neither

be confirmed nor denied with the help of statistical analysis,

and no biological test was then found which would have been

able to solve this dilemma. For practical reasons, we shall dis-

cuss schizoidia with no further reference to this traditional

relationship.

Literature provides us with descriptions of several varieties

of this anomaly, whose existence can be attributed either to

changes in the genetic factor or to differences in other individ-

ual characteristics of a non-pathological nature. Let us thus

sketch these sub-species’ common features.

Carriers of this anomaly are hypersensitive and distrustful,

while, at the same time, pay little attention to the feelings of

others. They tend to assume extreme positions, and are eager to

retaliate for minor offenses. Sometimes they are eccentric and

odd. Their poor sense of psychological situation and reality

leads them to superimpose erroneous, pejorative interpretations

upon other people’s intentions. They easily become involved in

activities which are ostensibly moral, but which actually inflict

48 Emil Kraepelin (1856- 1926): German psychiatrist who attempted to create

a synthesis of the hundreds of mental disorders, grouping diseases together

based on classification of common patterns of symptoms, rather than by

simple similarity of major symptoms in the manner of his predecessors. In

fact, it was precisely because of the demonstrated inadequacy of the older

methods that Kraepelin developed his new diagnostic system. Kraepelin also

demonstrated specific patterns in the genetics of these disorders and specific

and characteristic patterns in their course and outcome. Generally speaking,

there tend to be more schizophrenics among the relatives of schizophrenic

patients than in the general population, while manic-depression is more fre-

quent in the relatives of manic-depressives. Kraepelin should be credited with

being the founder of modern scientific psychiatry, psychopharmacology and

psychiatric genetics, according to the eminent psychologist H. J. Eysenck in

his Encyclopedia of Psychology. Kraepelin postulated that psychiatric dis-

eases are principally caused by biological and genetic disorders. His psychiat-

ric theories dominated the field of psychiatry at the beginning of the twenti-

eth century. He vigorously opposed the approach of Freud who regarded and

treated psychiatric disorders as caused by psychological factors. (Wikipedia)

124

PONEROLOGY

damage upon themselves and others. Their impoverished psy-

chological worldview makes them typically pessimistic regard-

ing human nature. We frequently find expressions of their

characteristic attitudes in their statements and writings: “Hu-

man nature is so bad that order in human society can only be

maintained by a strong power created by highly qualified indi-

viduals in the name of some higher idea.” Let us call this typi-

cal expression the “schizoid declaration”.

Human nature does in fact tend to be naughty, especially

when the schizoids embitter other people’s lives. When they

become wrapped up in situations of serious stress, however, the

schizoid’s failings cause them to collapse easily. The capacity

for thought is thereupon characteristically stifled, and fre-

quently the schizoids fall into reactive psychotic states so simi-

lar in appearance to schizophrenia that they lead to misdiagno-

ses.

The common factor in the varieties of this anomaly is a dull

pallor of emotion and lack of feeling for the psychological

realities, an essential factor in basic intelligence. This can be

attributed to some incomplete quality of the instinctive substra-

tum, which works as though founded on shifting sand. Low

emotional pressure enables them to develop proper speculative

reasoning, which is useful in non-humanistic spheres of activ-

ity, but because of their one-sidedness, they tend to consider

themselves intellectually superior to “ordinary” people.

The quantitative frequency of this anomaly varies among

races and nations: low among Blacks, the highest among Jews.

Estimates of this frequency range from negligible up to 3 %. In

Poland it may be estimated as 0.7 % of population. My obser-

vations suggest this anomaly is autosomally hereditary.49

A schizoid’s ponerological activity should be evaluated in

two aspects. On the small scale, such people cause their fami-

lies trouble, easily turn into tools of intrigue in the hands of

clever and unscrupulous individuals, and generally do a poor

job of raising children. Their tendency to see human reality in

49 Autosomal: the disease is due to a DNA error in one of the 22 pairs that are

not sex chromosomes. Both boys and girls can then inherit this error. If the

error is in a sex chromosome, the inheritance is said to be sex-linked. [Edi-

tor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

125

the doctrinaire and simplistic manner they consider “proper” –

i.e. “black or white” - transforms their frequently good inten-

tions into bad results. However, their ponerogenic role can

have macrosocial implications if their attitude toward human

reality and their tendency to invent great doctrines are put to

paper and duplicated in large editions.

In spite of their typical deficits, or even an openly schizoi-

dal declaration, their readers do not realize what the authors’

characters are really like. Ignorant of the true condition of the

author, such uninformed readers thed to interpret such works in

a manner corresponding to their own nature. The minds of

normal people tend toward corrective interpretation due to the

participation of their own richer, psychological world view.

At the same time, many other readers critically reject such

works with moral disgust but without being aware of the spe-

cific cause.

An analysis of the role played by Karl Marx’s works easily

reveals all the above-mentioned types of apperception and the

social reactions which engendered animosity between large

groups of people.

When reading any of those disturbingly divisive works, we

should examine them carefully for any of these characteristic

deficits, or even an openly formulated schizoid declaration.

Such a process will enable us to gain a proper critical distance

from the contents and make it easier to dig the potentially valu-

able elements out of the doctrinaire material. If this is done by

two or more people who represent greatly divergent interpreta-

tions, their methods of perception will come closer together,

and the causes of dissent will dissipate. Such a project might be

attempted as a psychological experiment and for purposes of

proper mental hygiene.

~~~

Essential psychopathy: Within the framework of the above

assumptions, let us characterize another heredity-transmitted

anomaly whose role in ponerogenic processes on any social

scale appears exceptionally great. We should also underscore

that the need to isolate this phenomenon and examine it in de-

tail became quickly and profoundly evident to those research-

ers – including the author - who were interested in the macro-

126

PONEROLOGY

social scale of the genesis of evil, because they witnessed it. I

acknowledge my debt to Kazimierz Dabrowski50 in doing this

and calling this anomaly an “essential psychopathy”.

Biologically speaking, the phenomenon is similar to color-

blindness but occurs with about ten times lower frequency

(slightly above 1/2%),51 except that, unlike color blindness, it

affects both sexes. Its intensity also varies in scope from a level

barely perceptive to an experienced observer to an obvious

pathological deficiency.

Like color blindness, this anomaly also appears to represent

a deficit in stimulus transformation, albeit occurring not on the

sensory but on the instinctive level.52 Psychiatrist of the old

school used to call such individuals “Daltonists of human feel-

ings and socio-moral values”.

The psychological picture shows clear deficits among men

only; among women it is generally toned down, as by the effect

of a second normal allele. This suggests that the anomaly is

also inherited via the X chromosome, but through a semi-

dominating gene. However, the author was unable to confirm

this by excluding inheritance from father to son.

Analysis of the different experiential manner demonstrated

by these individuals caused us to conclude that their instinctive

substratum is also defective, containing certain gaps and lack-

ing the natural syntonic responses commonly evidenced by

50 Kazimierz Dabrowski (1902-1980):Polish psychologist, psychiatrist, phy-

sician, and poet. Dabrowski developed the theory of Positive Disintegration,

a novel approach to personality development, over his lifetime of clinical and

academic work. [Editor’s note.]

51 Recent research by Robert Hare, then Martha Stout, and finally Salekin,

Trobst, Krioukova, have tended to increase the probably rate of occurrence in

a given population. The latter researchers, in “Construct Validity of Psycho-

pathy in a Community Sample: A Nomological Net Approach”, Salekin,

Trobst, Krioukova, Journal of Personality Disorders, 15(5), 425-441, 2001),

suggest the prevalence of psychopathy to be perhaps 5% or more, although

the vast majority of those will be male (more than 1/10 males versus ap-

proximately 1/100 females). [Editor’s note.]

52 Current day research suggests that many of the characteristics displayed by

psychopaths are closely associated with a profound lack of ability to con-

struct an empathic mental and emotional “facsimile” of another person. They

seem completely unable to “get into the skin” of others, except in a purely

intellectual sense. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

127

members of the species Homo Sapiens.53 Our species instinct is

our first teacher; it stays with us everywhere throughout our

lives. Upon this defective instinctive substratum, the deficits of

higher feelings and the deformities and impoverishments in

psychological, moral, and social concepts develop in corre-

spondence with these gaps.

Our natural world of concepts – based upon species in-

stincts as described in an earlier chapter - strikes the psycho-

path as a nearly incomprehensible convention with no justifica-

tion in their own psychological experience. They think that

customs and principles of decency are a foreign convention

invented and imposed by someone else, (“probably by priests”)

silly, onerous, sometimes even ridiculous. At the same time,

however, they easily perceive the deficiencies and weaknesses

of our natural language of psychological and moral concepts in

a manner somewhat reminiscent of the attitude of a contempo-

rary psychologist—except in caricature.

The average intelligence of the psychopath, especially if

measured via commonly used tests, is somewhat lower than

that of normal people, albeit similarly variegated. Despite the

wide variety of intelligence and interests, this group does not

contain examples of the highest intelligence, nor do we find

technical or craftsmanship talents among them. The most gifted

members of this kind may thus achieve accomplishments in

those sciences which do not require a correct humanistic world

view or practical skills. (Academic decency is another matter,

however.) Whenever we attempt to construct special tests to

measure “life wisdom” or “socio-moral imagination”, even if

the difficulties of psychometric evaluation are taken into ac-

count, individuals of this type indicate a deficit disproportion-

ate to their personal IQ.

In spite of their deficiencies in normal psychological and

moral knowledge, they develop and then have at their disposal

a knowledge of their own, something lacked by people with a

natural world view. They learn to recognize each other in a

crowd as early as childhood, and they develop an awareness of

the existence of other individuals similar to them. They also

53 What’s missing in psychopaths are the qualities that people depend on for

living in social harmony. [Editor’s note.]

128

PONEROLOGY

become conscious of being different from the world of those

other people surrounding them. They view us from a certain

distance, like a para-specific variety. Natural human reactions -

which often fail to elicit interest to normal people because they

are considered self-evident - strike the psychopath as strange

and, interesting, and even comical. They therefore observe us,

deriving conclusions, forming their different world of concepts.

They become experts in our weaknesses and sometimes effect

heartless experiments. The suffering and injustice they cause

inspire no guilt within them, since such reactions from others

are simply a result of their being different and apply only to

“those other” people they perceive to be not quite conspecific.

Neither a normal person nor our natural world view can fully

conceive nor properly evaluate the existence of this world of

different concepts.

A researcher into such phenomena can glimpse the deviant

knowledge of the psychopath through long-term studies of the

personalities of such people, using it with some difficulty, like

a foreign language. As we shall see below, such practical skill

becomes rather widespread in nations afflicted by that macro-

social pathological phenomenon wherein this anomaly plays

the inspiring role.

A normal person can learn to speak their conceptual lan-

guage even somewhat proficiently, but the psychopath is never

able to incorporate the world view of a normal person, although

they often try to do so all their lives. The product of their ef-

forts is only a role and a mask behind which they hide their

deviant reality.

Another myth and role they often play, albeit containing a

grain of truth in relation to the “special psychological knowl-

edge” that the psychopath acquires regarding normal people,

would be the psychopaths’ brilliant mind or psychological gen-

ius; some of them actually believe in this and attempt to insinu-

ate this belief to others.

In speaking of the mask of psychological normality worn by

such individuals (and by similar deviants to a lesser extent), we

should mention the book The Mask of Sanity; by Hervey

Cleckley, who made this very phenomenon the crux of his

reflections. A fragment:

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

129

Let us remember that his typical behavior defeats what ap-

pear to be his own aims. Is it not he himself who is most

deeply deceived by his apparent normality? Although he de-

liberately cheats others and is quite conscious of his lies, he

appears unable to distinguish adequately between his own

pseudointentions, pseudoremorse, pseudolove, etc., and the

genuine responses of a normal person. His monumental lack

of insight indicates how little he appreciates the nature of his

disorder. When others fail to accept immediately his “word of

honor as a gentleman”, his amazement, I believe, is often

genuine. His subjective experience is so bleached of deep

emotion that he is invincibly ignorant of what life means to

others.

His awareness of hypocrisy’s opposite is so insubstantially

theoretical that it becomes questionable if what we chiefly

mean by hypocrisy should be attributed to him. Having no ma-

jor value himself, can he be said to realize adequately the na-

ture and quality of the outrages his conduct inflicts upon oth-

ers? A young child who has no impressive memory of severe

pain may have been told by his mother it is wrong to cut off

the dog’s tail. Knowing it is wrong he may proceed with the

operation. We need not totally absolve him of responsibility if

we say he realizes less what he did than an adult who, in full

appreciation of physical agony, so uses a knife. Can a person

experience the deeper levels of sorrow without considerable

knowledge of happiness? Can he achieve evil intention in the

full sense without real awareness of evil’s opposite? I have no

final answer to these questions. 54

All researchers into psychopathy underline three qualities

primarily with regard to this most typical variety: The absence

of a sense of guilt for antisocial actions, the inability to love

truly, and the tendency to be garrulous in a way which easily

deviates from reality.55

54 Hervey Cleckley: The Mask of Sanity, 1976; C.V. Mosby Co., p. 386.

55 In their paper, “Construct Validity of Psychopathy in a Community Sam-

ple: A Nomological Net Approach,” (op cit.) Salekin, Trobst, and Krioukova,

write: “Psychopathy, as originally conceived by Cleckley (1941), is not

limited to engagement in illegal activities, but rather encompasses such per-

sonality characteristics as manipulativeness, insincerity, egocentricity, and

lack of guilt - characteristics clearly present in criminals but also in spouses,

parents, bosses, attorneys, politicians, and CEOs, to name but a few.

(Bursten, 1973; Stewart, 1991).... As such, psychopathy may be characterized

130

PONEROLOGY

A neurotic patient is generally taciturn and has trouble ex-

plaining what hurts him most. A psychologist must know how

to overcome these obstacles with the help of non-painful inter-

actions. Neurotics are also prone to excessive guilt about ac-

tions which are easily forgiven. Such patients are capable of

decent and enduring love, although they have difficulty ex-

pressing it or achieving their dreams. A psychopath’s behavior

constitutes the antipode of such phenomena and difficulties.

Our first contact with the psychopath is characterized by a

talkative stream which flows with ease and avoids truly impor-

tant matters with equal ease if they are uncomfortable for the

speaker. His train of thought also avoids those abstract matters

of human feelings and values whose representation is absent in

the psychopathic world view unless, of course, he is being de-

liberately deceptive, in which case he will use many “feeling”

words which careful scrutiny will reveal that he does not un-

derstand those words the same way normal people do. We then

also feel we are dealing with an imitation of the thought pat-

terns of normal people, in which something else is, in fact,

“normal”. From the logical point of view, the flow of thought is

ostensibly correct, albeit perhaps removed from commonly

accepted criteria. A more detailed formal analysis, however,

evidences the use of many suggestive paralogisms.56

Individuals with the psychopathy referred to herein are vir-

tually unfamiliar with the enduring emotions of love for an-

... as involving a tendency towards both dominance and coldness. Wiggins

(1995) in summarizing numerous previous findings... indicates that such

individuals are prone to anger and irritation and are willing to exploit others.

They are arrogant, manipulative, cynical, exhibitionistic, sensation-seeking,

Machiavellian, vindictive, and out for their own gain. With respect to their

patterns of social exchange (Foa & Foa, 1974), they attribute love and status

to themselves, seeing themselves as highly worthy and important, but pre-

scribe neither love nor status to others, seeing them as unworthy and insig-

nificant. This characterization is clearly consistent with the essence of psy-

chopathy as commonly described. ... What is clear from our findings is that

(a) psychopathy measures have converged on a prototype of psychopathy that

involves a combination of dominant and cold interpersonal characteristics;

(b) psychopathy does occur in the community and at what might be a higher

than expected rate; and (c) psychopathy appears to have little overlap with

personality disorders aside from Antisocial Personality Disorder.” [Editor’s

note.]

56 An unintentionally invalid argument. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

131

other person, particularly the marriage partner; it constitutes a

fairytale from that “other” human world. Love, for the psycho-

path, is an ephemeral phenomenon aimed at sexual adventure.

Many psychopathic Don Juans are able to play the lover’s role

well enough for their partners to accept it in good faith. After

the wedding, feelings which really never existed are replaced

by egoism, egotism, and hedonism. Religion, which teaches

love for one’s neighbor, also strikes them as a similar fairytale

good only for children and those different “others”.

One would expect them to feel guilty as a consequence of

their many antisocial acts, however their lack of guilt is the

result of all their deficits, which we have been discussing

here.57 The world of normal people whom they hurt is incom-

prehensible and hostile to them, and life for the psychopath is

the pursuit of its immediate attractions, moments of pleasure,

and temporary feelings of power. They often meet with failure

along this road, along with force and moral condemnation from

the society of those other incomprehensible people.

In their book Psychopathy and Delinquency, W. and J.

McCord say the following about them:

57 Robert Hare says, “What I thought was most interesting was that for the

first time ever, as far as I know, we found that there was no activation of the

appropriate areas for emotional arousal, but there was over-activation in other

parts of the brain, including parts of the brain that are ordinarily devoted to

language. Those parts were active, as if they were saying, ‘Hey, isn’t that

interesting.’ So they seem to be analyzing emotional material in terms of its

linguistic or dictionary meaning. There are anomalies in the way psychopaths

process information. It may be more general than just emotional information.

In another functional MRI study, we looked at the parts of the brain that are

used to process concrete and abstract words. Non-psychopathic individuals

showed increased activation of the right anterior/superior temporal cortex.

For the psychopaths, that didn't happen.”

Hare and his colleagues then conducted an fMRI study using pictures of

neutral scenes and unpleasant homicide scenes. “Non-psychopathic offenders

show lots of activation in the amygdala [to unpleasant scenes], compared

with neutral pictures,” he points out. “In the psychopath, there was nothing.

No difference. But there was overactivation in the same regions of the brain

that were overactive during the presentation of emotional words. It’s like

they're analyzing emotional material in extra-limbic regions.” ( Psychopathy

vs. Antisocial Personality Disorder and Sociopathy: A Discussion by Robert

Hare; crimelibrary.com)

132

PONEROLOGY

The psychopath feels little, if any, guilt. He can commit

the most appalling acts, yet view them without remorse. The

Psychopath has a warped capacity for love. His emotional re-

lationships, when they exist, are meager, fleeting, and de-

signed to satisfy his own desires. These last two traits, guilt-

lessness and lovelessness, conspicuously mark the psychopath

as different from other men. 58

The problem of a psychopath’s moral and legal responsibil-

ity thus remains open and subject to various solutions, fre-

quently summary or emotional, in various countries and cir-

cumstances. It remains a subject of discussion whose solution

does not appear possible within the framework of the presently

accepted principles of legal thought.

~~~

Other psychopathies: The cases of essential psychopathy

seem similar enough to each other to permit them to be classi-

fied as qualitatively homogenous. However, we can also in-

clude within psychopathic categories a somewhat indetermi-

nate number of anomalies with a hereditary substratum, whose

symptoms are approximate to this most typical phenomenon.

We also meet difficult individuals with a tendency to be-

have in a manner hurtful to other people, for whom tests do not

indicate existing damage to brain tissue and anamnesis does not

indicate abnormal childhood experiences which could explain

their state. The fact that such cases are repeated within families

would suggest a hereditary substratum, but we must also take

into account the possibility that harmful factors participated in

the fetal stage. This is an area of medicine and psychology

warranting more study, as there is more to learn than we al-

ready know concretely.

Such people also attempt to mask their different world of

experience and to play a role of normal people to varying de-

grees, although this is no longer the characteristic “Cleckley

mask”. Some are notable by demonstrations of their strange-

ness. These people participate in the genesis of evil in very

different ways, whether taking part openly or, to a lesser extent,

when they have managed to adapt to proper ways of living.

58 McCord, W. & McCord, J. Psychopathy and Delinquency. New York:

Grune & Stratton, 1956.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

133

These psychopathic and related phenomena may, quantitatively

speaking, be summarily estimated at two or three times the

number of cases of essential psychopathy, i.e. at less than two

per cent of the population.

This type of person finds it easier to adjust to social life.

The lesser cases in particular adapt to the demands of the soci-

ety of normal people, taking advantage of its understanding for

the arts and other areas with similar traditions. Their literary

creativity is often disturbing if conceived in ideational catego-

ries alone; they insinuate to their readers that their world of

concepts and experiences is self-evident; also it contains char-

acteristic deformities.59

The most frequently indicated and long-known of these is

the asthenic psychopathy, which appears in every conceivable

intensity, from barely perceptible to an obvious pathologic

deficiency.

These people, asthenic and hypersensitive, do not indicate

the same glaring deficit in moral feeling and ability to sense a

psychological situation as do essential psychopaths. They are

somewhat idealistic and tend to have superficial pangs of con-

science as a result of their faulty behavior.

On the average, they are also less intelligent than normal

people, and their mind avoids consistency and accuracy in rea-

soning. Their psychological world view is clearly falsified, so

their options about people can never be trusted. A kind of mask

cloaks the world of their personal aspirations, which is at vari-

ance with what they are actually capable of doing. Their behav-

ior towards people who do not notice their faults is urbane,

even friendly; however, the same people manifest a preemptive

59 A number of researchers at present are suggesting that Asperger’s Syn-

drome belongs under the classification of psychopathy. Asperger’s Syndrome

describes children who: “lack basic social and motor skills, seem unable to

decode body language and sense the feelings of others, avoid eye contact, and

frequently launch into monologues about narrowly defined - and often highly

technical - interests. Even when very young, these children become obsessed

with order, arranging their toys in a regimented fashion on the floor and

flying into tantrums when their routines are disturbed. As teenagers, they’re

prone to getting into trouble with teachers and other figures of authority,

partly because the subtle cues that define societal hierarchies are invisible to

them.” ( Steve Silberman, “The Geek Syndrome”: wired.com) [Editor’s

note.]

134

PONEROLOGY

hostility and aggression against persons who have a talent for

psychology, or demonstrate knowledge in this field.

The asthenic psychopath is relatively less vital sexually and

is therefore amenable to accepting celibacy; that is why some

Catholic monks and priests often represent lesser or minor

cases of this anomaly. Such individuals may very likely have

inspired the anti-psychological attitude traditional in Church

thinking.

The more severe cases are more brutally anti-psychological

and contemptuous of normal people; they tend to be active in

the processes of the genesis of evil on a larger scale. Their

dreams are composed of a certain idealism similar to the ideas

of normal people. They would like to reform the world to their

liking but are unable to foresee more far-reaching implications

and results. Spiced by deviance, their visions may influence

naive rebels or people who have suffered injustice. Existing

social injustice may look like a justification for a radicalized

world view and the assimilation of such visions.

The following is an example of the thought-pattern of a per-

son who displays a typical and severe case of asthenic psycho-

pathy:

Symptoms:

“IIf I had to start life all over again,

I’d do exactly the same: it’s organic

A feeling of being differ-

necessity, nor the dictates of duty. I

ent.

have one thing which keeps me going

and bids me be serene even when

The shallow nostalgia

things are so very sad. That is an

characteristic of this psy-

unshakable faith in people. Condi-

chopathy.

tions will change and evil will cease

to reign, and man will be a brother to

man, not a wolf as is the case today.

Vision of a new world.

My forebearance derives not from my Different psychological

fancy, but rather from my clear vision knowledge.-

of the cause which give rise to evil."

Those words were written in prison on December 15, 1913

by Felix Dzerzhinsky, a descendant of Polish gentry who was

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

135

soon to originate the Cherezvichayka60 in the Soviet Union and

to become the greatest idealist among these most famous mur-

derers. Psychopathies surface in all nations.61

If the time ever comes, when “conditions will change” and

“evil will no longer rule”, it could be because progress in the

study of pathological phenomena and their ponerogenic role

will make it possible for societies to calmly accept the exis-

tence of these phenomena and comprehend them as categories

of nature. The vision of a new, just structure of society can then

be realized within the framework and under the control of nor-

mal people. Having reconciled ourselves to the fact that such

people are different and have a limited capacity for social ad-

justment, we should create a system of permanent protection

for them within the framework of reason and proper knowl-

edge, a system which will partially make their dreams come

true.

For our purposes, we should also draw attention to types

with deviant features; these were isolated relatively long ago by

Edward Brzezicki62 and accepted by Ernst Kretschmer63 as

characteristic of eastern Europe in particular. Skirtoids64 are

60 The Cheka was the first secret police set up under Bolshevik rule. Dzerz-

hinsky was its first Commissar. [Editor’s note]

61 Dzerzhinsky is an interesting case. It is said of him that “His honest and

incorruptible character, combined with his complete devotion to the cause,

gained him swift recognition and the nickname Iron Felix.” His monument in

the center of Warsaw in “Dzerzhinsky square”, was hated by the population

of the Polish capital as a symbol of soviet oppression and was toppled down

in 1989, as soon as the PZPR started losing power, the square’s name was

soon changed to its pre-second world war name “Plac Bankowy” (Bank

square). According to a popular joke of that late People’s Republic of Poland-

era “Dzerzhinsky deserved a monument for being the Pole to kill the largest

number of communists”.

62 My professor of psychiatry – Yagiellonian University – Cracow (a friend

of Kretschmer).

63 Ernst Kretschmer is remembered for his correlation of build and physical

constitution with personality characteristics and mental illness. In 1933

Krestchmer resigned as president of the German society of Psychotherapy in

protest against the Nazi takeover of the government. But unlike other promi-

nent German psychologists he remained in Germany during World War II.

Kretschmer further developed new methods of psychotherapy and hypnosis,

and studied compulsive criminality, recommending adequate provision be

made for the psychiatric treatment of prisoners. [Editor’s note.]

64 Greek root skirtaô: to rebel, to jump. [Editor’s note.]

136

PONEROLOGY

vital, egotistical, and thick-skinned individuals who make good

soldiers because of their endurance and psychological resis-

tance. In peacetime, however, they are incapable of understand-

ing life’s subtler matters or rearing children prudently. They

are happy in primitive surroundings; a comfortable environ-

ment easily causes hysterization within them. They are rigidly

conservative in all areas and supportive of governments that

rule with a heavy hand.

Kretschmer was of the opinion that this anomaly was a

biodynamic phenomenon caused by the crossing of two widely

separated ethnic groups, which is frequent in that area of

Europe. If that were the case, North America should be full of

skirtoids, a hypothesis that deserves observation. We may as-

sume that skirtoidism is inherited normally; not sex-linked.

This anomaly should be taken into consideration if we wish to

understand the history of Russia, as well as the history of Po-

land, to a lesser extent.

Another interesting question suggests itself: what kind of

people are the so-called “jackals”, hired as professional and

mercenary killers by various groups, and who so quickly and

easily take up arms as a means of political struggle? They offer

themselves as specialists who perform the duty as accepted; no

human feelings interfere with their nefarious plans. They are

most certainly not normal people, but none of the deviations

described herein fits this picture. As a rule, essential psycho-

paths are talkative and incapable of such carefully planned

activity.

Perhaps, we should assume this type to be the product of a

cross between lesser taints of various deviations. Even if we

accept the statistical probability of the appearance of such hy-

brids, taking into account the quantitative data, they should be

an extremely rare phenomena. However, mate-selection psy-

chology produces pairings which bilaterally represent various

anomalies. Carriers of two or even three lesser deviational fac-

tors should thus be more frequent. A jackal could then be imag-

ined as the carrier of schizoidal traits in combination with some

other psychopathy, e.g. essential psychopathy or skirtoidism.

More frequent instances of such hybrids are a large part of a

society’s pool of hereditary pathological ponerogenic factors.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

137

~~~

The above characterizations are selected examples of patho-

logical factors which participate in ponerogenic processes. The

ever-increasing literature in this area furnishes interested read-

ers with a wider range of data and sometimes colorful descrip-

tions of such phenomena. The current state of knowledge in

this area is nevertheless still insufficient to produce practical

solutions for the many problems human beings face, particu-

larly those on the individual and family scale. Studies on the

biological nature of these phenomena are needed for this pur-

pose.

I would like to warn those readers lacking knowledge and

experience of their own in this area not to fall prey to the im-

pression that the world surrounding them is dominated by indi-

viduals with pathological deviations, whether described herein

or not; it is not. The following graphic representation in circle

form approximates the presence of individuals with various

psychological anomalies within a society

~~~

Pathological phenomena as described in approximate pro-

portion of their appearance:

T.P. Total population

Psp. Psychopathies

Chp. Characteropathies

E.P. Essential psychopa-

thy

Sh. Schizoidia

XYY karyotype

The fact that deviant individuals are a minority should be

emphasized all the more since there have been theories on the

exceptionally creative role of abnormal individuals, even an

identification of human genius with the psychology of abnor-

mality. However, the one-sidedness of these theories appears to

be derived from people who were searching for an affirmation

138

PONEROLOGY

of their own personalities by means of such a world view. Out-

standing thinkers, discoverers, and artists have also been

specimens of psychological normality, qualitatively speaking.

After all, psychologically normal people constitute both the

great statistical majority and the real base of societal life in

each community. According to natural law, they should thus be

the ones to set the pace; moral law is derived from their nature.

Power should be in the hands of normal people. A ponerologist

only demands that such authority be endowed with an appro-

priate understanding of these less-normal people, and that the

law be based upon such understanding.

The quantitative and qualitative composition of this biopsy-

chologically deficient fraction of the population certainly varies

in time and space on our planet. This may be represented by a

single-digit percentage in some nations, in the teens in others.

Said quantitative and qualitative structure influence the entire

psychological and moral climate of the country in question.

That is why this problem should be the subject of conscious

concern. However it should also be noted that evidence sug-

gests that the dreams of power so frequently present in these

circles do not always and necessarily manifest fully in coun-

tries where this percentile has been very high. Other historical

circumstances were decisive as well.

In any society in this world, psychopathic individuals and

some of the other deviant types create a ponerogenically active

network of common collusions, partially estranged from the

community of normal people. An inspirational role of essential

psychopathy in this network appears to be a common phe-

nomenon. They are aware of being different as they obtain their

life-experiences and become familiar with different ways of

fighting for their goals. Their world is forever divided into “us

and them”; their little world with its own laws and customs and

that other foreign world of normal people that they see as full

of presumptuous ideas and customs by which they are con-

demned morally. Their sense of honor bids them to cheat and

revile that other human world and its values at every opportu-

nity. In contradiction to the customs of normal people, they feel

that breaking their promises is appropriate behavior.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

139

One of the most disturbing things about psychopaths that

normal people must deal with is the fact that they very early

learn how their personalities can have traumatizing effects on

the personalities of those normal people, and how to take ad-

vantage of this root of terror for purposes of reaching their

goals. This dichotomy of worlds is permanent and does not

disappear even if they succeed in realizing their youthful dream

of gaining power over the society of normal people. This

strongly suggests that the separation is biologically condi-

tioned.

In the psychopath, a dream emerges like some Utopia of a

“happy” world and a social system which does not reject them

or force them to submit to laws and customs whose meaning is

incomprehensible to them. They dream of a world in which

their simple and radical way of experiencing and perceiving

reality would dominate65; where they would, of course, be as-

sured safety and prosperity. In this Utopian dream, they imag-

ine that those “others”, different, but also more technically

skillful than they are, should be put to work to achieve this goal

for the psychopaths and others of their kin. “We”, they say,

“after all, will create a new government, one of justice”66. They

are prepared to fight and to suffer for the sake of such a brave

new world, and also, of course, to inflict suffering upon others.

Such a vision justifies killing people, whose suffering does not

move them to compassion because “they” are not quite con-

specific. They do not realize that they will consequently meet

with opposition which can last for generations67.

Subordinating a normal person to psychologically abnormal

individuals has severe and deforming effects on his or her per-

sonality: it engenders trauma and neurosis. This is accom-

plished in a manner which generally evades conscious controls.

Such a situation deprives the person of his natural rights: to

practice his own mental hygiene, develop a sufficiently

autonomous personality, and utilize his common sense. In the

light of natural law, it thus constitutes a kind of crime - which

65 i.e. Lying, cheating, destroying, using others, etc. [Editor’s note.]

66 For psychopaths only; injustice for everyone else. [Editor’s note.]

67 “Kill them all; God will know his own,” seems to be the method advocated

by psychopaths. [Editor’s note.]

140

PONEROLOGY

can appear at any social scale, in any context - although it is

not mentioned in any code of law.

We have already discussed the nature of some pathological

personalities, e.g. frontal characteropathy, and how they can

deform the personalities of those with whom they interact.

Essential psychopathy has exceptionally intense effects in this

manner. Something mysterious gnaws into the personality of an

individual at the mercy of the psychopath and is then fought

like a demon. His emotions become chilled, his sense of psy-

chological reality is stifled. This leads to de-criterialization of

thought and a feeling of helplessness, culminating in depressive

reactions which can be so severe that psychiatrists sometimes

misdiagnose them as a manic-depressive psychosis. Many peo-

ple rebel against a psychopathic domination much earlier than

such a crisis point and start searching for some way of liberat-

ing themselves from such an influence.

Many life-situations involve far less mysterious results of

other psychological anomalies upon normal people (which are

always unpleasant and destructive) and their carriers’ unscru-

pulous drives to dominate and take advantage of others. Gov-

erned by unpleasant experiences and feelings, as well as natural

egoism, societies thus have good reason to reject such people,

helping to push them into marginal positions in social life,

including poverty and criminality.

It is unfortunately almost the rule that such behavior is

amenable to moralizing justification in our natural world view

categories. Most members of society feel entitled to protect

their own persons and property and enact legislation for that

purpose. Being based on natural perception of phenomena, and

on emotional motivations instead of an objective understanding

of the problems, such laws in no way serve to safeguard the

kind of order and safety we would like; psychopaths and other

deviants merely perceive such laws as a force which needs to

be battled.

To individuals with various psychological deviations, the

social structure dominated by normal people and their concep-

tual world appears to be a “system of force and oppression”.

Psychopaths reach such a conclusion as a rule. If, at the same

time, a good deal of injustice does in fact exist in a given soci-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

141

ety, pathological feelings of unfairness and suggestive state-

ments emanating from deviants can resonate among those who

have truly been treated unfairly. Revolutionary doctrines may

then be easily propagated among both groups, although each

group has completely different reasons for favoring such ideas.

~~~

The presence of pathogenic bacteria in our environment is a

common phenomenon; however, it is not the single decisive

factor that determines whether an individual or a society be-

comes ill, since natural and artificial immunity as well as medi-

cal assistance may play a role as well. Similarly, psychopatho-

logical factors alone do not – themselves - decide about the

spread of evil. Other factors have parallel importance: socio-

economic conditions, and moral and intellectual deficits.

Individuals and nations that are able to endure injustice in

the name of moral values can more easily find a way out of

such difficulties without resorting to violent means. A rich

moral tradition contains the experience and reflections of cen-

turies in this regard. This book describes the role of these addi-

tional factors in the genesis of evil, which have been insuffi-

ciently understood for centuries; such explication is essential

for completing the overall picture and permitting more effec-

tive practical measures to be formulated.

Thus, emphasizing the role of pathological factors in the

genesis of evil does not minimize the responsibility of social

moral failings and intellectual deficits in contributing to the

situation. Real moral deficits and a grossly inadequate concep-

tion of human reality and psychological and moral situations

are frequently caused by some earlier or contemporary activity

on the part of pathological factors.

However, we must also acknowledge the constant, biologi-

cally determined presence within every human society of this

small minority of individuals who are carriers of qualitatively

diverse, but ponerologically active, pathological factors. Any

discussion on what came first in the process of the genesis of

evil, moral failings or the activities of pathological factors, can

thus be considered academic speculation. On the other hand,

the Bible is worth re-reading through the eyes of a ponerolo-

gist.

142

PONEROLOGY

Detailed analysis of the personality of the average normal

person nearly always reveals conditions and difficulties caused

by the effects upon him of some kind of pathological factor. If

the activity was far removed in time or space, or the factor

relatively obvious, healthy common sense is generally suffi-

cient to correct such effects. If the pathological factor remains

incomprehensible, the person has difficulty understanding the

cause of his problems; he sometimes appears to remain a life-

long slave of imaginings and patterns of behavioral response

which originated under the influence of pathological individu-

als. This is what occurred in the above-mentioned family,

where the source of pathological induction was the eldest sister

with perinatal damage of the prefrontal fields of her brain cor-

tex. Even when she obviously abused her youngest child, her

brothers attempted to interpret this in a paramoralistic manner,

a sacrifice in the name of “family honor”.

Such matters should be taught to everyone in order to facili-

tate auto-pedagogical self-monitoring. Certain outstanding

psychopathologists became convinced that developing a

healthy functional view of human reality is impossible without

factoring in psychopathological findings, are correct, a conclu-

sion difficult to accept by people who believe they have at-

tained a mature world view without such burdensome studies.

The older egotistical defenders of the natural world view have

tradition, belles-lettres, even philosophy on their side. They do

not realize that during the present time, their manner of com-

prehending life’s questions renders the battle with evil more

problematic. However, the younger generation is more familiar

with biology and psychology, and is thus more amenable to an

objective understanding of the role of pathological phenomena

in the processes of the genesis of evil.

Parallax68, often even a wide gap, frequently occurs be-

tween human and social reality, which is biological by nature

and frequently influenced by the above-mentioned refusal to

factor in psychopathological elements, as well as the traditional

perceptions of reality as taught by philosophy, ethics, and secu-

lar and canon law. This gap is easily discernible to those people

68 The difference in appearance or position of an object when viewed from

two different locations. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

143

whose psychological world view was formed in a manner dif-

ferent from the natural way of a normal person. Many of them

consciously and subconsciously take advantage of this weak-

ness in order to force themselves into it, along with their my-

opically-determined activities characterized by egoistical con-

cepts of self-interest. Still people, whether pathologically indif-

ferent to other peoples’ or nations’ hurts, or lacking in knowl-

edge as to what is human and decent, then find an open gate to

bulldoze their different way of life through unobliging socie-

ties.

Will we ever be able to overcome this age-old problem of

humanity sometime in the yet undetermined future, with the

assistance of the biological and psychological sciences making

progress in the study of various pathological factors participat-

ing in ponerogenic processes? That will depend on the support

of the societies in question. Scientific and societal awareness of

the role played by the above-mentioned factors in the genesis

of evil will help public opinion to elaborate an appropriate

position against evil, which will then cease to be so fascinat-

ingly mysterious. If properly modified based on an understand-

ing of the nature of phenomena, the law will permit prophylac-

tic countermeasures to the origin of evil.

Over the centuries, every society has been subjected to natu-

ral eugenic processes which cause defective individuals, in-

cluding those with above-mentioned features, to drop out of

reproductive competition or reduce their birth rate. These proc-

esses are rarely seen as such, often being screened by the ac-

companying evil or some other conditions apparently relegat-

ing them to the background. Conscious comprehension of these

matters based on proper knowledge and approximate moral

criteria could render these processes less stormy in form, not so

full of bitter experience. If human consciousness and con-

science are properly formed and good advice in these matters is

heeded, the balance of these processes could be tipped mark-

edly in the positive direction. After a number of generations,

society’s burden of inherited pathological factors would be

144

PONEROLOGY

reduced below a certain critical level, and their participation in

ponerogenic processes would begin to fade away. 69

Ponerogenic Phenomena and Processes

Following the real space-time network of qualitatively

complex causative links as occur in ponerogenic processes

requires the proper approach and experience. The fact that psy-

chologists daily face multiple cases of dealing with such devi-

ants or their victims means that they are becoming progres-

sively more skilled in understanding and describing the many

components of psychological causation. They are observing

feedback on closed causative structures. However, this skill

sometimes proves insufficient in overcoming our human ten-

dency to concentrate upon some facts while ignoring others,

provoking an unpleasant sensation that our mind’s capacity of

understanding the reality surrounding us is inefficient. This

explains the temptation to use the natural world view in order

to simplify complexity and its implications, a phenomenon as

common as the “old sage” known to India’s philosophical psy-

chology. Such oversimplification of the causative picture as

regards the genesis of evil, often to a single easily understood

cause or one perpetrator, itself becomes, itself, a cause in this

genesis.

With great respect for the shortcomings of our human rea-

son, let us consciously take the middle road and use the ab-

straction process, first describing selected phenomena, then the

causative chains characteristic for ponerogenic processes. Such

chains can then be linked into more complex structures ever

more sufficient for grasping the full picture of the real causa-

tive network. At first the holes in the net will be so large that a

school of sprats can swim through undetected, although large

fish will be caught. However, this world’s evil represents a

kind of continuum, where minor species of human evil effec-

tively add up to the genesis of large evil. Making this net

denser and filling in the details of the picture appear to be eas-

69 !obaczewski seems to be referring to war and other physical conflicts and

suggesting that, if normal people would refuse to get involved and allow only

the deviants to fight, they would eventually kill each other off. [Editor’s

note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

145

ier, since ponerogenic laws are analogous regardless of the

scale of occurrences. Our common sense thus commits minor

errors at the level of minor matters.

In attempting closer observation of these psychological

processes and phenomena which lead one man or one nation to

hurt another, let us select phenomena as characteristic as possi-

ble. We shall see that the participation of various pathological

factors in these processes is the rule; the situation where such

participation is not noticeable tends to be the exception.

~~~

The second chapter sketched the human instinctive substra-

tum’s role in our personality development, the formation of the

natural world view, and societal links and structures. We also

indicated that our social, psychological, and moral concepts, as

well as our natural forms of reaction, are not adequate for every

situation with which life confronts us. We generally wind up

hurting someone if we act according to our natural concepts

and reactive archetypes in situations which seem to be appro-

priate to our imaginings, although they are in fact essentially

different. As a rule, such different situations allowing para-

appropriate reactions occur because some pathological factor

difficult to understand has entered the picture. Thus, the practi-

cal value of our natural world view generally ends where psy-

chopathology begins.

Familiarity with this common weakness of human nature

and the normal person’s “naïveté” is part of the specific knowl-

edge we find in many psychopathic individuals, as well some

characteropaths. Spellbinders of various schools attempt to

provoke such para-appropriate reactions from other people in

the name of their specific goals, or in the service of their reign-

ing ideologies. That hard-to-understand pathological factor is

located within the spellbinder himself.

~~~

Egotism: We call egotism the attitude, subconsciously con-

ditioned as a rule, to which we attribute excessive value to our

instinctive reflexes, early acquired imaginings and habits, and

individual world view. Egotism hampers a personality’s normal

evolution because it fosters the domination of subconscious life

and makes it difficult to accept disintegrative states which can

146

PONEROLOGY

be very helpful for growth and development. This egotism and

rejection of disintegration70 in turn favors the appearance of

para-appropriate reactions as described above. An egotist

measures other people by his own yardstick, treating his con-

cepts and experiential manner as objective criteria. He would

like to force other people to feel and think very much the same

way he does. Egotist nations have the subconscious goal of

teaching or forcing other nations to think in their own catego-

ries, which makes them incapable of understanding other peo-

ple and nations or becoming familiar with the values of their

cultures.

Proper rearing and self-rearing thus always aims at de-

egotizing a young person or adult, thereby opening the door for

his mind and character to develop. Practicing psychologists

nevertheless commonly believe that a certain measure of ego-

tism is useful as a factor stabilizing the personality, protecting

it from overly facile neurotic disintegration, and thereby mak-

ing it possible to overcome life’s difficulties. However rather

exceptional people exist whose personality is very well inte-

grated even though they are almost totally devoid of egotism;

this allows them to understand others very easily.

The kind of excessive egotism which hampers the develop-

ment of human values and leads to misjudgment and terrorizing

of others well deserves the title “king of human faults”. Diffi-

culties, disputes, serious problems, and neurotic reactions

sprout up in everyone around such an egotist like mushrooms

after a rainfall. Egotist nations start wasting money and effort

in order to achieve goals derived from their erroneous reason-

ing and overly emotional reactions. Their inability to acknowl-

edge other nations’ values and dissimilarities, derived from

other cultural traditions, leads to conflict and war.

70 See footnote p. 128. Kazimierz Dabrowski developed the theory of Positive

Disintegration which posits that individuals with strong developmental poten-

tial tend to experience frequent and intense crises (positive disintegrations)

that create opportunities for the development of an autonomous, self-crafted

personality. Dabrowski observed that gifted and creative populations tend to

exhibit increased levels of developmental potential and thus may be predis-

posed to experience the process of positive disintegration. ( A Brief Overview

Dabrowski's Theory of Positive Disintegration by William Tillier

Calgary, Alberta, Canada) [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

147

We can differentiate between primary and secondary ego-

tism. The former comes from a more natural process, namely

the child’s natural egotism and child-rearing errors that tend to

perpetuate this childish egotism. The secondary one occurs

when a personality that has overcome his childish egotism

regresses to this state under stress, which leads to an artificial

attitude characterized by greater aggression and social nox-

iousness. Excessive egotism is a constant property of the hys-

terical personality71, whether their hysteria be primary or sec-

ondary. That is why the increase in a nations’ egotism should

be attributed to the above described hysterical cycle before

anything else.

If we analyze the development of excessively egotistical

personalities, we often find some non-pathological causes, such

as having been raised in a constricted and overly routine envi-

ronment or by persons less intelligent than the child. However,

the main reason for the development of an overly egotistical

personality in a normal person is contamination, through psy-

chological induction, by excessively egotistical or hysterical

persons who, themselves, developed this characteristic under

the influence of various pathological causes. Most of the

above-described genetic deviations cause the development of

pathologically egotistical personalities, among other things.

Many people with various hereditary deviations and ac-

quired defects develop pathological egotism. For such people,

forcing others in their environment, whole social groups, and,

if possible, entire nations, to feel and think like themselves

becomes an internal necessity, a ruling concept. A game that a

normal person would not take seriously can become a lifelong

goal for them, the object of effort, sacrifices, and cunning psy-

chological strategy.

Pathological egotism derives from repressing from one’s

field of consciousness any objectionable, self-critical associa-

tions referring to one’s own nature or normality. Dramatic

71 A personality disorder marked by immaturity, dependence, self-

centeredness, and vanity, with a craving for attention, activity, or excitement,

and behavior that is markedly unstable or manipulative. ( The American Heri-

tage Stedman's Medical Dictionary, 2nd Edition 2004; Houghton Mifflin

Company) [Editor’s note.]

148

PONEROLOGY

question such as “who is abnormal here, me or this world of

people who feel and think differently?” are answered in the

world’s disfavor. Such egotism is always linked to a dissimula-

tive attitude, with a Cleckley mask over some pathological

quality being hidden from consciousness, both one’s own and

that of other people. The greatest intensity of such egotism can

be found in the prefrontal characteropathy described above.

The importance of the contribution of this kind of egotism

to the genesis of evil thus hardly needs elaboration. It is a pri-

marily societal influence, egotizing or traumatizing others,

which in turn causes further difficulties. Pathological egotism

is a constant component of variegated states wherein someone

who appears to be normal (although he is in fact not quite so) is

driven by motivations or battles for goals a normal person con-

siders unrealistic or unlikely. The average person might ask:

“What could he expect to gain by that?”. Environmental opin-

ion, however, often interprets such a situation in accordance

with “common sense” and is thus prone to accept a “more

likely” version of the situation and events. Such interpretation

often results in human tragedy. We should thus always remem-

ber that the principle of law cui prodest72 becomes illusory

whenever some pathological factor enters the picture.

~~~

Moralizing interpretation: The tendency to impart a moral-

izing interpretation upon essentially pathological phenomena is

an aspect of human nature whose discernable substratum is

encoded in our specific instinct; namely humans normally fail

to differentiate between moral and biological evil. Moralizing

always surfaces, albeit to varying degrees, within the natural

psychological and moral world view, which is why we should

consider this tendency a permanent error of public opinion. We

may curb it with increased self-knowledge, but overcoming it

requires specific knowledge in the psychopathological area.

Young people and less cultured circles always tend toward

such interpretations (although it characterizes traditional es-

thetes too), which intensifies whenever our natural reflexes

take over control from reason, i.e. in hysterical states, and in

direct proportion to the intensity of egotism.

72 What or who does it advance? Who does it serve? What’s the point?

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

149

We close the door to a causative comprehension of phe-

nomena and open it to vengeful emotions and psychological

error whenever we impose a moralistic interpretation upon

faults and errors in human behavior, which are in fact largely

derived from the various influences of pathological factors,

whether mentioned above or not, which are often obscured

from minds untrained in this area. We thereby also permit these

factors to continue their ponerogenic activities, both within

ourselves and others. Nothing poisons the human soul and de-

prives us of our capacity to understand reality more objectively

than this very obedience to that common human tendency to

take a moralistic view of human behavior.

Practically speaking, to say the least, each instance of be-

havior that seriously hurts some other person contains within

its psychological genesis the influence of some pathological

factors, among other things, of course. Therefore, any interpre-

tation of the causes of evil which would limit itself to moral

categories is an inappropriate perception of reality. This can

lead, generally speaking, to erroneous behavior, limiting our

capacity for counteraction of the causative factors of evil and

opening the door for lust for revenge. This frequently starts a

new fire in the ponerogenic processes. We shall therefore con-

sider a unilaterally moral interpretation of the origins of evil to

be wrong and immoral at all times. The idea of overcoming this

common human inclination and its results can be considered a

moral motive intertwined throughout ponerology.

If we analyze the reasons why some people frequently

overuse such emotionally-loaded interpretations, often indig-

nantly rejecting a more correct interpretation, we shall of

course also discover pathological factors acting within them.

Intensification of this tendency in such cases is caused by re-

pressing from the field of consciousness any self-critical con-

cepts concerning their own behavior and its internal reasons.

The influence of such people causes this tendency to intensify

in others.

~~~

Paramoralisms: The conviction that moral values exist and

that some actions violate moral rules is so common and ancient

a phenomenon that it seems to have some substratum at man’s

150

PONEROLOGY

instinctive endowment level (although it is certainly not totally

adequate for moral truth), and that it does not only represent

centuries’ of experience, culture, religion, and socialization.

Thus, any insinuation framed in moral slogans is always sug-

gestive, even if the “moral” criteria used are just an “ad hoc”

invention. Any act can thus be proved to be immoral or moral

by means of such paramoralisms utilized as active suggestion,

and people whose minds will succumb to such reasoning can

always be found.

In searching for an example of an evil act whose negative

value would not elicit doubt in any social situation, ethics

scholars frequently mention child abuse. However, psycholo-

gists often meet with paramoral affirmations of such behavior

in their practice, such as in the above-mentioned family with

the prefrontal field damage in the eldest sister. Her younger

brothers emphatically insisted that their sister’s sadistic treat-

ment of her son was due to her exceptionally high moral quali-

fications, and they believed this by auto-suggestion. Paramoral-

ism somehow cunningly evades the control of our common

sense, sometimes leading to acceptance or approval of behavior

that is openly pathological.73

Paramoralistic statements and suggestions so often accom-

pany various kinds of evil that they seem quite irreplaceable.

Unfortunately, it has become a frequent phenomenon for indi-

viduals, oppressive groups, or patho-political systems to invent

ever-new moral criteria for someone’s convenience. Such sug-

gestions often partially deprive people of their moral reasoning

and deform its development in youngsters. Paramoralism facto-

ries have been founded worldwide, and a ponerologist finds it

hard to believe that they are managed by psychologically nor-

mal people.

73 Many examples of recent years include children beaten to death by their

parents for “religious reasons”. The parents may claim that the child is demon

possessed, or that they have behaved so loosely that only beating them will

“straighten them out”. Another example is circumcision, both for boys and

girls by certain ethnic groups. The Indian custom of suttee, where the wife

climbs on the funeral pyre of her husband; or in Muslim cultures where, if a

woman is raped, it is the duty of her male family members to kill her to wipe

away the shame from the family name. All of these acts are claimed to be

“moral”, but they are not, they are pathological and criminal. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

151

The conversive74 features in the genesis of paramoralisms

seem to prove they are derived from mostly subconscious re-

jection (and repression from the field of consciousness) of

something completely different, which we call the voice of

conscience.

A ponerologist can nevertheless indicate many observations

supporting the opinion that various pathological factors partici-

pate in the tendency to use paramoralisms. This was the case in

the above-mentioned family. When it occurs with a moralizing

interpretation, this tendency intensifies in egotists and hyster-

ics, and its causes are similar. Like all conversive phenomena,

the tendency to use paramoralisms is psychologically conta-

gious. That explains why we observe it among people raised by

individuals in whom it was developed alongside pathological

factors.

This may be a good place to reflect that true moral law is

born and exists independently of our judgments in this regard,

and even of our ability to recognize it. Thus, the attitude re-

quired for such understanding is scientific, not creative: we

must humbly subordinate our mind to the apprehended reality.

That is when we discover the truth about man, both his weak-

nesses and values, which shows us what is decent and proper

with respect to other people and other societies.

~~~

Reversive blockade: Emphatically insisting upon something

which is the opposite of the truth blocks the average person’s

mind from perceiving the truth. In accordance with the dictates

of healthy common sense, he starts searching for meaning in

the “golden mean” between the truth and its opposite, winding

up with some satisfactory counterfeit. People who think like

this do not realize that this effect is precisely the intent of the

person who subjects them to this method. If the counterfeit of

the truth is the opposite of a moral truth, at the same time, it

simultaneously represents an extreme paramoralism, and bears

its peculiar suggestiveness.

We rarely see this method being used by normal people;

even if raised by the people who abused it; they usually only

indicate its results in their characteristic difficulties in appre-

74 See note p. 46.

152

PONEROLOGY

hending reality properly. Use of this method can be included

within the above-mentioned special psychological knowledge

developed by psychopaths concerning the weaknesses of hu-

man nature and the art of leading others into error. Where they

are in rule, this method is used with virtuosity, and to an extent

conterminous with their power.

~~~

Information selection and substitution: The existence of

psychological phenomena known to pre-Freudian philosophical

students of the subconscious bears repeating. Unconscious

psychological processes outstrip conscious reasoning, both in

time and in scope, which makes many psychological phenom-

ena possible: including those generally described as conver-

sive, such as subconscious blocking out of conclusions, the

selection, and, also, substitution of seemingly uncomfortable

premises.

We speak of blocking out conclusions if the inferential

process was proper in principle and has almost arrived at a

conclusion and final comprehension within the act of internal

projection, but becomes stymied by a preceding directive from

the subconscious, which considers it inexpedient or disturbing.

This is primitive prevention of personality disintegration,

which may seem advantageous; however, it also prevents all

the advantages which could be derived from consciously elabo-

rated conclusion and reintegration. A conclusion thus rejected

remains in our subconscious and in a more unconscious way

causes the next blocking and selection of this kind. This can be

extremely harmful, progressively enslaving a person to his own

subconscious, and is often accompanied by a feeling of tension

and bitterness.

We speak of selection of premises whenever the feedback

goes deeper into the resulting reasoning and from its database

thus deletes and represses into the subconscious just that piece

of information which was responsible for arriving at the un-

comfortable conclusion. Our subconscious then permits further

logical reasoning, except that the outcome will be erroneous in

direct proportion to the actual significance of the repressed

data. An ever-greater number of such repressed information is

collected in our subconscious memory. Finally, a kind of habit

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

153

seems to take over: similar material is treated the same way

even if reasoning would have reached an outcome quite advan-

tageous to the person.

The most complex process of this type is substitution of

premises thus eliminated by other data, ensuring an ostensibly

more comfortable conclusion. Our associative ability rapidly

elaborates a new item to replace the removed one, but it is one

leading to a comfortable conclusion. This operation takes the

most time, and it is unlikely to be exclusively subconscious.

Such substitutions are often effected collectively, in certain

groups of people, through the use of verbal communication.

That is why they best qualify for the moralizing epithet “hy-

pocrisy” than either of the above-mentioned processes.

The above examples of conversive phenomena do not ex-

haust a problem richly illustrated in psychoanalytical works.

Our subconscious may carry the roots of human genius within,

but its operation is not perfect; sometimes it is reminiscent of a

blind computer, especially whenever we allow it to be cluttered

with anxiously rejected material. This explains why conscious

monitoring, even at the price of courageously accepting disin-

tegrative states, is likewise necessary to our nature, not to men-

tion our individual and social good.

There is no such thing as a person whose perfect self-

knowledge allows him to eliminate all tendencies toward con-

versive thinking, but some people are relatively close to this

state, while others remain slaves to these processes. Those

people who use conversive operations too often for the purpose

of finding convenient conclusions, or constructing some cun-

ning paralogistic or paramoralistic statements, eventually begin

to undertake such behavior for ever more trivial reasons, losing

the capacity for conscious control over their thought process

altogether. This necessarily leads to behavior errors which must

be paid for by others as well as themselves.

People who have lost their psychological hygiene and ca-

pacity of proper thought along this road also lose their natural

critical faculties with regard to the statements and behavior of

individuals whose abnormal thought processes were formed on

a substratum of pathological anomalies, whether inherited or

acquired. Hypocrites stop differentiating between pathological

154

PONEROLOGY

and normal individuals, thus opening an “infection entry” for

the ponerologic role of pathological factors.

Generally, each community contains people in whom simi-

lar methods of thinking were developed on a large scale, with

their various deviations as a backdrop. We find this both in

characteropathic and psychopathic personalities. Some have

even been influenced by others to grow accustomed to such

“reasoning”, since conversion thinking is highly contagious

and can spread throughout an entire society. In “happy times”

especially, the tendency for conversion thinking generally in-

tensifies. It appears accompanied by a rising wave of hysteria

in said society. Those who try to maintain common sense and

proper reasoning finally wind up in the minority, feeling

wronged because their human right to maintain psychological

hygiene is violated by pressure from all sides. This means that

unhappy times are not far away.

We should point out that the erroneous thought processes

described herein also, as a rule, violate the laws of logic with

characteristic treachery. Educating people in the art of proper

reasoning can thus serve to counteract such tendencies; it has a

hallowed age-old tradition which seems to have been insuffi-

ciently effective for centuries. As an example: according to the

laws of logic, a question containing an erroneous or uncon-

firmed suggestion has no answer. Nevertheless, not only does

operating with such questions become epidemic among people

with a tendency to conversion thinking, and a source of terror

when used by psychopathical individuals; it also occurs among

people who think normally, or even those who have studied

logic.

This decreasing tendency in a society’s capacity for proper

thought should be counteracted, since it also lowers its immu-

nity to ponerogenic processes. An effective measure would be

teaching both proper thought and skillful detection of errors in

thought. The front of such education should be expanded, in-

cluding psychology, psychopathology, and the science de-

scribed herein, for the purpose of raising people who can easily

detect any paralogism.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

155

Spellbinders

In order to comprehend ponerogenic pathways of contagion,

especially those acting in a wider social context, let us observe

the roles and personalities of individuals we shall call “spell-

binders”, who are highly active in this area in spite of their

statistically negligible number.

Spellbinders are generally the carriers of various pathologi-

cal factors, some characteropathies, and some inherited anoma-

lies. Individuals with malformations of their personalities fre-

quently play similar roles, although the social scale of influ-

ence remains small (family or neighborhood) and does not

cross certain boundaries of decency.

Spellbinders are characterized by pathological egotism.

Such a person is forced by some internal causes to make an

early choice between two possibilities: the first is forcing other

people to think and experience things in a manner similar to his

own; the second is a feeling of being lonely and different, a

pathological misfit in social life. Sometimes the choice is either

snake-charming or suicide.

Triumphant repression of self-critical or unpleasant con-

cepts from the field of consciousness gradually gives rise to the

phenomena of conversion thinking, or paralogistics, paramoral-

isms, and the use of reversion blockades. They stream so pro-

fusely from the mind and mouth of the spellbinder that they

flood the average person’s mind. Everything becomes subordi-

nated to the spellbinder’s over-compensatory conviction that

they are exceptional, sometimes even messianic. An ideology

emerges from this conviction, true in part, whose value is sup-

posedly superior. However, if we analyze the exact functions of

such an ideology in the spellbinder’s personality, we perceive

that it is a nothing other than a means of self-charming, useful

for repressing those tormenting self-critical associations into

the subconscious. The ideology’s instrumental role in influenc-

ing other people also serves the spellbinder’s needs.

The spellbinder believes that he will always find converts to

his ideology, and most often, they are right. However, they feel

shock (or even paramoral indignation) when it turns out that

their influence extends to only a limited minority, while most

people’s attitude to their activities remains critical, pained and

156

PONEROLOGY

disturbed. The spellbinder is thus confronted with a choice:

either withdraw back into his void or strengthen his position by

improving the effectiveness of his activities.

The spellbinder places on a high moral plane anyone who

has succumbed to his influence and incorporated the experien-

tial method he imposes. He showers such people with attention

and property, if possible. Critics are met with “moral” outrage.

It can even be proclaimed that the compliant minority is in fact

the moral majority, since it professes the best ideology and

honors a leader whose qualities are above average.

Such activity is always necessarily characterized by the in-

ability to foresee its final results, something obvious from the

psychological point of view because its substratum contains

pathological phenomena, and both spellbinding and self-

charming make it impossible to perceive reality accurately

enough to foresee results logically. However, spellbinders nur-

ture great optimism and harbor visions of future triumphs simi-

lar to those they enjoyed over their own crippled souls. It is

also possible for optimism to be a pathological symptom.

In a healthy society, the activities of spellbinders meet with

criticism effective enough to stifle them quickly. However,

when they are preceded by conditions operating destructively

upon common sense and social order; such as social injustice,

cultural backwardness, or intellectually limited rulers some-

times manifesting pathological traits, spellbinders’ activities

have led entire societies into large-scale human tragedy.

Such an individual fishes an environment or society for

people amenable to his influence, deepening their psychologi-

cal weaknesses until they finally join together in a ponerogenic

union. On the other hand, people who have maintained their

healthy critical faculties intact, based upon their own common

sense and moral criteria, attempt to counteract the spellbinders’

activities and their results. In the resulting polarization of so-

cial attitudes, each side justifies itself by means of moral cate-

gories. That is why such commonsense resistance is always

accompanied by some feeling of helplessness and deficiency of

criteria.

The awareness that a spellbinder is always a pathological

individual should protect us from the known results of a moral-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

157

izing interpretation of pathological phenomena, ensuring us an

objective criteria for more effective action. Explaining what

kind of pathological substratum is hidden behind a given in-

stance of spellbinding activities should enable a modern solu-

tion to such situations.

It is a characteristic phenomenon that a high IQ generally

helps a person to be more immune to spellbinding activities

only to a moderate degree. Actual differences in the formation

of human attitudes to the influence of such activities should be

attributed to other properties of human nature. The most deci-

sive factor in assuming a critical attitude is good basic intelli-

gence, which conditions our perception of psychological real-

ity. We can also observe how a spellbinder’s activities “husk

out” amenable individuals with an astonishing regularity.

We shall later return to the specific relations that occur

among the spellbinder’s personality, the ideology he expounds,

and the choices made by those who easily succumb. More ex-

haustive clarification thereof would require separate study

within the framework of general ponerology, a work intended

for specialists, in order to explain some of those interesting

phenomena which are still not properly understood today.

Ponerogenic Associations

We shall give the name “ponerogenic association” to any

group of people characterized by ponerogenic processes of

above-average social intensity, wherein the carriers of various

pathological factors function as inspirers, spellbinders, and

leaders, and where a proper pathological social structure gener-

ates. Smaller, less permanent associations may be called

“groups” or “unions”.

Such an association gives birth to evil which hurts other

people as well as its own members. We could list various

names ascribed to such organizations by linguistic tradition:

gangs, criminal mobs, mafias, cliques, and coteries, which

cunningly avoid collision with the law while seeking to gain

their own advantage. Such unions frequently aspire to political

power in order to impose their expedient legislation upon so-

cieties in the name of a suitably prepared ideology, deriving

158

PONEROLOGY

advantages in the form of disproportionate prosperity and the

satisfaction of their craving for power.

A description and classification of such associations with a

view of their numbers, goals, officially promulgated ideologies,

and internal organizations would of course be scientifically

valuable. Such a description, effected by a perceptive observer,

could help a ponerologist determine some of the properties of

such unions, which cannot be determined by means of natural

conceptual language.

A description of this kind, however, ought not to cloak the

more factual phenomena and psychological dependencies oper-

ating within these unions. Failure to heed this warning can

easily cause such a sociological description to indicate proper-

ties which are of secondary importance, or even made “for

show” to impress the uninitiated, thereby overshadowing the

actual phenomena which decide the quality, role, and fate of

the union. Particularly if such a description is colorful litera-

ture, it can furnish merely illusory or ersatz knowledge, thus

rendering a naturalistic perception and causative comprehen-

sion of phenomena more difficult.

One phenomenon all ponerogenic groups and associations

have in common is the fact that their members lose (or have

already lost) the capacity to perceive pathological individuals

as such, interpreting their behavior in a fascinated, heroic, or

melodramatic ways. The opinions, ideas, and judgments of

people carrying various psychological deficits are endowed

with an importance at least equal to that of outstanding indi-

viduals among normal people.

The atrophy of natural critical faculties with respect to

pathological individuals becomes an opening to their activities,

and, at the same time, a criterion for recognizing the associa-

tion in concern as ponerogenic. Let us call this the first crite-

rion of ponerogenesis.

Another phenomenon all ponerogenic associations have in

common is their statistically high concentration of individuals

with various psychological anomalies. Their qualitative com-

position is crucially important in the formation of the entire

union’s character, activities, development, or extinction.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

159

Groups dominated by various kinds of characteropathic in-

dividuals will develop relatively primitive activities, proving

rather easy for a society of normal people to break. However,

things are quite different when such unions are inspired by

psychopathic individuals. Let us adduce the following example

illustrating the roles of two different anomalies, selected from

among actual events studied by the author.

In felonious youth gangs, a specific role is played by boys

(and occasionally girls) that carry a characteristic deficit that is

sometimes left behind by an inflammation of the parotid glands

(the mumps). This disease entails brain reactions in some cases,

leaving behind a discreet but permanent bleaching of feelings

and a slight decrease in general mental skills. Similar results

are sometimes left behind after diphtheria. As a result, such

people easily succumb to the suggestions and manipulations of

a more clever individuals.

When drawn into a felonious group, these constitutionally

weakened individuals become faint-critical helpers and execu-

tors of the leader’s intentions, tools in the hands of more

treacherous, usually psychopathic, leaders. Once arrested, they

submit to their leaders’ insinuated explanations that the higher

(paramoral) group ideal demands that they become scapegoats,

taking the majority of blame upon themselves. In court, the

same leaders who initiated the delinquencies mercilessly dump

all the blame onto their less crafty colleagues. Sometimes a

judge actually accepts the insinuations.

Individuals with the above-mentioned post-mumps and

post-diphtheria traits constitute less than 1.0 % of the popula-

tion as a whole, but their share reaches 1/4 of juvenile delin-

quent groups. This represents an inspissation75 of the order of

30-fold, requiring no further methods of statistical analysis.

When studying the contents of ponerogenic unions skillfully

enough, we often meet with an inspissation of other psycho-

logical anomalies which also speak for themselves.

~~~

Two basic types of the above-mentioned unions should be

differentiated: Primary ponerogenic and secondary ponero-

75 To thicken by either evaporation or absorption of fluid. Diminished fluid-

ity, increased thickness. A concentration. [Editor’s note.]

160

PONEROLOGY

genic. Let us describe as primarily ponerogenic a union whose

abnormal members were active from the very beginning, play-

ing the role of crystallizing catalysts as early as the process of

creation of the group occurred. We shall call secondarily

ponerogenic a union which was founded in the name of some

idea with an independent social meaning, generally

comprehensible within the categories of the natural world view,

but which later succumbed to a certain moral degeneration.

This in turn opened the door to infection and activation of the

pathological factors within, and later to a ponerization of the

group as a whole, or often of its fraction.

From the very outset, a primarily ponerogenic union is a

foreign body within the organism of society, its character col-

liding with the moral values held or respected by the majority.

The activities of such groups provoke opposition and disgust

and are considered immoral; as a rule, therefore, such groups

do not spread large, nor do they metastasize into numerous

unions; they finally lose their battle with society.

In order to have a chance to develop into a large ponero-

genic association, however, it suffices that some human orga-

nization, characterized by social or political goals and an ideol-

ogy with some creative value, be accepted by a larger number

of normal people before it succumbs to a process of ponero-

genic malignancy. The primary tradition and ideological values

of such a society may then, for a long time, protect a union

which has succumbed to the ponerization process from the

awareness of society, especially its less critical components.

When the ponerogenic process touches such a human organiza-

tion, which originally emerged and acted in the name of politi-

cal or social goals, and whose causes were conditioned in his-

tory and the social situation, the original group’s primary val-

ues will nourish and protect such a union, in spite of the fact

that those primary values succumb to characteristic degenera-

tion, the practical function becoming completely different from

the primary one, because the names and symbols are retained.

This is where the weaknesses of individual and social “com-

mon sense” are revealed.76

76 Just because a group operates under the banner of “communism” or “so-

cialism” or “democracy” or “conservatism” or “republicanism”, doesn’t mean

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

161

This is reminiscent of a situation psychopathologists know

well: a person who enjoyed trust and respect in their circles

starts behaving with preposterous arrogance and hurting others,

allegedly in the name of his already known, decent and ac-

cepted convictions, which have – in the meantime - deterio-

rated due to some psychological process rendering them primi-

tive but emotionally dynamic. However, his old acquaintances

– having known him for long as the person he was - do not

believe the injured parties who complain about his new, or

even hidden, behavior, and are prepared to denigrate them and

consider them liars. This adds insult to their injury and gives

encouragement and license to the individual whose personality

is undergoing deterioration, to commit further hurtful acts; as a

rule, such a situation lasts until the person’s madness becomes

obvious.

Ponerogenic unions of the primary variety are mainly of in-

terest to criminology; our main concern will be associations

that succumb to a secondary process of poneric malignancy.

First, however, let us sketch a few properties of such associa-

tions which have already surrendered to this process.

Within each ponerogenic union, a psychological structure is

created which can be considered a counterpart or caricature of

the normal structure of society or a normal societal organiza-

tion. In a normal social organization, individuals with various

psychological strengths and weaknesses complement each

other’s talents and characteristics. This structure is subjected to

diachronic77 modification with regard to changes in the charac-

ter of the association as whole. The same is true of a ponero-

genic union. Individuals with various psychological aberrations

also complement each other’s talents and characteristics.

The earlier phase of a ponerogenic union’s activity is usu-

ally dominated by characteropathic, particularly paranoid, indi-

viduals, who often play an inspirational or spellbinding role in

the ponerization process. Recall here the power of the paranoid

characteropath lies in the fact that they easily enslave less criti-

cal minds, e.g. people with other kinds of psychological defi-

that, in practice, their functions are anything close to the original ideology.

[Editor’s note.]

77 Over time; employing a chronological perspective. [Editor’s note.]

162

PONEROLOGY

ciencies, or who have been victims of individuals with charac-

ter disorders, and, in particular, a large segment of young peo-

ple.

At this point in time, the union still exhibits certain roman-

tic features and is not yet characterized by excessively brutal

behavior.78 Soon, however, the more normal members are

pushed into fringe functions and are excluded from organiza-

tional secrets; some of them thereupon leave such a union.

Individuals with inherited deviations then progressively take

over the inspirational and leadership positions. The role of

essential psychopaths gradually grows, although they like to

remain ostensibly in the shadows (e.g. directing small groups),

setting the pace as an éminence grise.79 In ponerogenic unions

on the largest social scales, the leadership role is generally

played by a different kind of individual, one more easily di-

gestible and representative. Examples include frontal charac-

teropathy, or some more discreet complex of lesser taints.

A spellbinder at first simultaneously plays the role of leader

in a ponerogenic group. Later there appears another kind of

“leadership talent”, a more vital individual who often joined

the organization later, once it has already succumbed to poneri-

zation. The spellbinding individual, being weaker, is forced to

come to terms with being shunted into the shadows and recog-

nizing the new leader’s “genius”, or accept the threat of total

failure. Roles are parceled out. The spellbinder needs support

from the primitive but decisive leader, who in turn needs the

spellbinder to uphold the association’s ideology, so essential in

maintaining the proper attitude on the part of those members of

the rank and file who betray a tendency to criticism and doubt

of the moral variety.

The spellbinder’s job then becomes to repackage the ideol-

ogy appropriately, sliding new contents in under old titles, so

78 An example would be a paranoid character who believes himself to be a

Robin Hood type character with a “mission” to “rob from the rich and give to

the poor”. This can easily transform to “rob from anyone to gain for the self”

under the cover of “social injustice against us makes it right”. [Editor’s note.]

79 A powerful advisor or decision-maker who operates secretly or otherwise

unofficially. This phrase originally referred to Cardinal Richelieu’s right-

hand man, François Leclerc du Tremblay, a Capuchin priest who wore gray

robes. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

163

that it can continue fulfilling its propaganda function under

ever-changing conditions. He also has to uphold the leader’s

mystique inside and outside the association. Complete trust

cannot exist between the two, however, since the leader se-

cretly has contempt for the spellbinder and his ideology,

whereas the spellbinder despises the leader for being such a

coarse individual. A showdown is always probable; whoever is

weaker becomes the loser.

The structure of such a union undergoes further variegation

and specialization. A chasm opens between the somewhat more

normal members and the elite initiates who are, as a rule, more

pathological. This later subgroup becomes ever more domi-

nated by hereditary pathological factors, the former by the af-

ter-effects of various diseases affecting the brain, less typically

psychopathic individuals, and people whose malformed per-

sonalities were caused by early deprivation or brutal child-

rearing methods on the part of pathological individuals. It soon

develops that there is less and less room for normal people in

the group at all. The leaders’ secrets and intentions are kept

hidden from the union’s proletariat; the products of the spell-

binders’ work must suffice for this segment.

An observer watching such a union’s activities from the

outside and using the natural psychological world view will

always tend to overestimate the role of the leader and his alleg-

edly autocratic function. The spellbinders and the propaganda

apparatus are mobilized to maintain this erroneous outside

opinion. The leader, however, is dependent upon the interests

of the union, especially the elite initiates, to an extent greater

than he himself knows. He wages a constant position-jockeying

battle; he is an actor with a director. In macrosocial unions, this

position is generally occupied by a more representative indi-

vidual not deprived of certain critical faculties; initiating him

into all those plans and criminal calculations would be coun-

terproductive. In conjunction with part of the elite, a group of

psychopathic individuals hiding behind the scenes steers the

leader, the way Borman and his clique steered Hitler. If the

leader does not fulfill his assigned role, he generally knows that

the clique representing the elite of the union is in a position to

kill or otherwise remove him.

164

PONEROLOGY

We have sketched the properties of unions in which the

ponerogenic process has transformed their original generally

benevolent content into a pathological counter-part thereof and

modified its structure and its later changes, in a manner suffi-

ciently wide-scale to encompass the greatest possible scope of

this kind of phenomena, from the smallest to the largest social

scale. The general rules governing those phenomena appear to

be at least analogous, independent of the quantitative, social,

and historical scale of such a phenomenon.

Ideologies

It is a common phenomenon for a ponerogenic association

or group to contain a particular ideology which always justifies

its activities and furnishes motivational propaganda. Even a

small-time gang of hoodlums has its own melodramatic ideol-

ogy and pathological romanticism. Human nature demands that

vile matters be haloed by an over-compensatory mystique in

order to silence one’s conscience and to deceive consciousness

and critical faculties, whether one’s own or those of others.

If such a ponerogenic union could be stripped of its ideol-

ogy, nothing would remain except psychological and moral

pathology, naked and unattractive. Such stripping would of

course provoke “moral outrage”, and not only among the

members of the union. The fact is, even normal people, who

condemn this kind of union along with its ideologies, feel hurt

and deprived of something constituting part of their own ro-

manticism, their way of perceiving reality when a widely ideal-

ized group is exposed as little more than a gang of criminals.

Perhaps even some of the readers of this book will resent the

author’s stripping evil so unceremoniously of all its literary

motifs. The job of effecting such a “strip-tease” may thus turn

out to be much more difficult and dangerous than expected.

A primary ponerogenic union is formed at the same time as

its ideology, perhaps even somewhat earlier. A normal person

perceives such ideology to be different from the world of hu-

man concepts, obviously suggestive, and even primitively

comical to a degree.

An ideology of a secondarily ponerogenic association is

formed by gradual adaptation of the primary ideology to func-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

165

tions and goals other than the original formative ones. A certain

kind of layering or schizophrenia of ideology takes place dur-

ing the ponerization process. The outer layer closest to the

original content is used for the group’s propaganda purposes,

especially regarding the outside world, although it can in part

also be used inside with regard to disbelieving lower-echelon

members. The second layer presents the elite with no problems

of comprehension: it is more hermetic, generally composed by

slipping a different meaning into the same names. Since identi-

cal names signify different contents depending on the layer in

question, understanding this “doubletalk” requires simultane-

ous fluency in both languages.

Average people succumb to the first layer’s suggestive in-

sinuations for a long time before they learn to understand the

second one as well. Anyone with certain psychological devia-

tions, especially if he is wearing the mask of normality with

which we are already familiar, immediately perceives the sec-

ond layer to be attractive and significant; after all, it was built

by people like him. Comprehending this doubletalk is therefore

a vexatious task, provoking quite understandable psychological

resistance; this very duality of language, however, is a pathog-

nomonic80 symptom indicating that the human union in ques-

tion is touched by the ponerogenic process to an advanced de-

gree.

The ideology of unions affected by such degeneration has

certain constant factors regardless of their quality, quantity, or

scope of action: namely, the motivations of a wronged group,

radical righting of the wrong, and the higher values of the in-

dividuals who have joined the organization. These motivations

facilitate sublimation of the feeling of being wronged and dif-

ferent, caused by one’s own psychological failings, and appear

to liberate the individual from the need to abide by uncomfort-

able moral principles.

In the world full of real injustice and human humiliation,

making it conducive to the formation of an ideology containing

the above elements, a union of its converts may easily succumb

to degradation. When this happens, those people with a ten-

80 Specific characteristics of a disease. [Editor’s note.]

166

PONEROLOGY

dency to accept the better version of the ideology will tend to

justify such ideological duality.

The ideology of the proletariat,81 which aimed at revolu-

tionary restructuring of the world, was already contaminated by

a schizoid deficit in the understanding of, and trust for, human

nature; small wonder, then, that it easily succumbed to a proc-

ess of typical degeneration in order to nourish and disguise a

macrosocial phenomenon whose basic essence is completely

different.82

For future reference, let us remember: ideologies do not

need spellbinders. Spellbinders need ideologies in order to

subject them to their own deviant goals.

On the other hand, the fact that some ideology degenerated

along with its corollary social movement, later succumbing to

81 From the Communist Manifesto: “By proletariat [is meant] the class of

modern wage laborers, who, having no means of production of their own, are

reduced to selling their labor-power in order to live.” [Editor’s note.]

82 Fascism seems to be the diametric opposite of Communism and Marxism,

both in a philosophic and political sense, and also opposed democratic capi-

talist economics along with socialism and liberal democracy. It viewed the

state as an organic entity in a positive light rather than as an institution de-

signed to protect collective and individual rights, or as one that should be

held in check. Fascism is also typified by totalitarian attempts to impose state

control over all aspects of life: political, social, cultural, and economic which

accurately describes what was passed off under the name of Communism.

The fascist state regulates and controls (as opposed to nationalizing) the

means of production. Fascism exalts the nation, state, or race as superior to

the individuals, institutions, or groups composing it. Fascism uses explicit

populist rhetoric; calls for a heroic mass effort to restore past greatness; and

demands loyalty to a single leader, often to the point of a cult of personality.

Again, we see that Fascism was passed off as Communism. So, what actually

seems to have happened is that the original ideals of the proletariat were

cleverly subsumed to State corporatism. Most people in the west are not

aware of this because of the Western propaganda against Communism. The

word “Fascist” has become a slur throughout the world since the stunning

failure of the Axis powers in World War II. In contemporary political dis-

course, adherents of some political ideologies tend to associate fascism with

their enemies, or define it as the opposite of their own views. There are no

major self-described fascist parties or organizations anywhere in the world.

However, at the present time, in the U.S., the system is far more fascist than

democratic, which probably explains the existence of the years of anti-

Communist propaganda. That would demonstrate an early process of poneri-

zation of Western democracy which, at present, has almost completed the

transformation to full-blown fascism. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

167

this schizophrenia and serving goals which the originators of

the ideology would have abhorred, does not prove that it was

worthless, false, and fallacious from the start. Quite the con-

trary: it rather appears that under certain historical conditions,

the ideology of any social movement, even if it is sacred truth,

can yield to the ponerization process.

A given ideology may have contained weak spots, created

by the errors of human thought and emotion within; or it may,

during the course of its history, become infiltrated by more

primitive foreign material which can contain ponerogenic fac-

tors. Such material destroys an ideology’s internal homogeny.

The source of such infection by foreign ideological material

may be the ruling social system with its laws and customs

based on a more primitive tradition, or an imperialistic system

of rule. It may be, of course, simply another philosophical

movement often contaminated by the eccentricities of its foun-

der, who considers the facts to blame for not conforming to his

dialectical construct.

The Roman Empire, including its legal system and paucity

of psychological concepts, similarly contaminated the primary

homogeneous idea of Christianity. Christianity had to adapt to

coexistence with a social system wherein “dura lex sed lex”83,

rather than an understanding of human beings, decided a per-

son’s fate; this then led to the corruption of attempting to reach

the goals of the “Kingdom of God” by means of Roman impe-

rialistic methods.

The greater and truer the original ideology, the longer it

may be capable of nourishing and disguising from human criti-

cism that phenomenon which is the product of the specific

degenerative process. In a great and valuable ideology, the

danger for small minds is hidden; they can become the factors

of such preliminary degeneration, which opens the door to

invasion by pathological factors.

Thus, if we intend to understand the secondary ponerization

process and the kinds of human associations which succumb to

it, we must take great care to separate the original ideology

from its counterpart, or even caricature, created by the ponero-

genic process. Abstracting from any ideology, we must, by

83 The law [is] harsh, but [it is] the law.

168

PONEROLOGY

analogy, understand the essence of the process itself, which has

its own etiological causes which are potentially present in

every society, as well as characteristic developmental patho-

dynamics.

The Ponerization Process

Observation of the ponerization processes of various human

unions throughout history easily leads to the conclusion that the

initial step is a moral warping of the group’s ideational con-

tents. In analyzing the contamination of a group’s ideology, we

note first of all an infiltration of foreign, simplistic, and doctri-

naire contents, thereby depriving it of any healthy support for,

and trust in, the necessity of understanding of human nature.

This opens the way for invasion by pathological factors and the

ponerogenic role of their carriers.

The example of the Roman legal system vis a vis early

Christianity mentioned above, is a case in point. The Roman

imperial and legal civilization was overly attached to matter

and law, and created a legal system that was too rigid to ac-

commodate any real aspects of psychological and spiritual life.

This “earthy” foreign element infiltrated Christianity resulting

in the Catholic church adopting Imperial strategies to enforce

its system on others by violence.

This fact could justify the conviction of moralists that main-

taining a union’s ethical discipline and ideational purity is suf-

ficient protection against derailing or hurtling into an insuffi-

ciently comprehended world of error. Such a conviction strikes

a ponerologist as a unilateral oversimplification of an eternal

reality which is more complex. After all, the loosening of ethi-

cal and intellectual controls is sometimes a consequence of the

direct or indirect influence of the omnipresent factors of the

existence of deviants in any social group, along with some

other non-pathological human weaknesses.

Sometime during life, every human organism undergoes pe-

riods during which physiological and psychological resistance

declines, facilitating development of bacteriological infection

within. Similarly, a human association or social movement

undergoes periods of crisis which weaken its ideational and

moral cohesion. This may be caused by pressure on the part of

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

169

other groups, a general spiritual crisis in the environment, or

intensification of its hysterical condition. Just as more stringent

sanitary measures are an obvious medical indication for a

weakened organism, the development of conscious control over

the activity of pathological factors is a ponerological indica-

tion. This is a crucial factor for prevention of tragedy during a

society’s periods of moral crisis.

For centuries, individuals exhibiting various psychological

anomalies have had the tendency to participate in the activities

of human unions. This is made possible on the one hand by

such group’s weaknesses, i.e. failure in adequate psychological

knowledge; on the other hand, it deepens the moral failings and

stifles the possibilities of utilizing healthy common sense and

understanding matters objectively. In spite of the resulting

tragedies and unhappiness, humanity has shown a certain pro-

gress, especially in the cognitive area; therefore, a ponerologist

may be cautiously optimistic. After all, by detecting and de-

scribing these aspects of the ponerization process of human

groups, which could not be understood until recently, we shall

be able to counteract such processes earlier and more effec-

tively. Again, depth and breadth of knowledge of human psy-

chological variations is crucial.

Any human group affected by the process described herein

is characterized by its increasing regression from natural com-

mon sense and the ability to perceive psychological reality.

Someone considering this in terms of traditional categories

might consider it an instance of “turning into half-wits” or the

development of intellectual deficiencies and moral failings. A

ponerological analysis of this process, however, indicates that

pressure is being applied to the more normal part of the asso-

ciation by pathological factors present in certain individuals

who have been allowed to participate in the group because the

lack of good psychological knowledge has not madated their

exclusion.

Thus, whenever we observe some group member being

treated with no critical distance, although he betrays one of the

psychological anomalies familiar to us, and his opinions being

treated as at least equal to those of normal people, although

they are based on a characteristically different view of human

170

PONEROLOGY

matters, we must derive the conclusion that this human group is

affected by a ponerogenic process and if measures are not

taken the process shall continue to its logical conclusion. We

shall treat this in accordance with the above described first

criterion of ponerology, which retains its validity regardless of

the qualitative and quantitative features of such a union: the

atrophy of natural critical faculties with respect to pathologi-

cal individuals becomes an opening to their activities, and, at

the same time, a criterion for recognizing the association in

concern as ponerogenic.

Such a state of affairs simultaneously consists as a liminal

(watershed) situation, whereupon further damage to people’s

healthy common sense and critical moral faculties becomes

ever easier. Once a group has inhaled a sufficient dose of

pathological material to give birth to the conviction that these

not-quite-normal people are unique geniuses, it starts subject-

ing its more normal members to pressure characterized by cor-

responding paralogical and paramoral elements.

For many people, such pressure of collective opinion takes

on attributes of a moral criterion; for others, it represents a kind

of psychological terror ever more difficult to endure. The phe-

nomenon of counter-selection thus occurs in this phase of pon-

erization: individuals with a more normal sense of psychologi-

cal reality leave after entering into conflict with the newly

modified group; simultaneously, individuals with various psy-

chological anomalies join the group and easily find a way of

life there. The former feel “pushed into counter-revolutionary

positions”, and the latter can afford to remove their masks of

sanity ever more often.

People who have been thus thrown out of a ponerogenic as-

sociation because they were too normal suffer bitterly; they are

unable to understand their specific state. Their ideal, the reason

they joined the group, which constituted a part of the meaning

of life for them, has now been degraded, although they cannot

find a rational basis for this fact. They feel wronged; they

“fight against demons” they are not in a position to identify.

The fact is their personalities have already been modified to a

certain extent due to saturation by abnormal psychological

material, especially psychopathic material. They easily fall into

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

171

the opposite extreme in such cases, because unhealthy emo-

tions rule their decisions. What they need is good psychologi-

cal information in order to find the path of reason and measure.

Based on a ponerologic understanding of their condition, psy-

chotherapy could provide rapid positive results. However, if

the union they left is succumbing to deep ponerization, a threat

looms over them: they may become the objects of revenge,

since they have “betrayed” a magnificent ideology.84

This is the stormy period of a group’s ponerization, fol-

lowed by a certain stabilization in terms of contents, structure,

and customs. Rigorous selective measures of a clearly psycho-

logical kind are applied to new members. So as to exclude the

possibility of becoming sidetracked by defectors, people are

observed and tested to eliminate those characterized by exces-

sive mental independence or psychological normality. The new

internal function created is something like a “psychologist”,

and it doubtless takes advantage of the above-described psy-

chological knowledge collected by psychopaths.

It should be noted that certain of these exclusionary steps

taken by a group in the process of ponerization, should have

been taken against deviants by the ideological group in the

beginning. So rigorous selective measures of a psychological

kind taken by a group is not necessarily an indicator that the

group is ponerogenic. Rather one should carefully examine

what the psychological selection is based on. If any group

seeks to avoid ponerization, it will want to exclude individuals

with any psychological dependence on subjective beliefs, rites,

rituals, drugs, and certainly those individuals that are incapable

of objectively analyzing their own inner psychological content

or who reject the process of Positive disintegration.

In a group in the process of ponerization, spellbinders take

care of “ideological purity”. The leader’s position is relatively

secure. Individuals manifesting doubt or criticism are subject to

paramoral condemnation. Maintaining the utmost dignity and

84 It should also be mentioned that the same process occurs when a psycho-

logical deviant is thrown out of a group of normal people. The way to tell the

difference is that a normal group ejecting a deviant will not seek to exact

revenge on the ejected member, while the deviant will seek revenge on the

group he has been ejected from. [Editor’s note.]

172

PONEROLOGY

style, leadership discusses opinions and intentions which are

psychologically and morally pathological. Any intellectual

connections which might reveal them as such are eliminated,

thanks to the substitution of premises operating in the proper

subconscious process on the basis of prior conditioned reflexes.

An objective observer might wish to compare this state to one

in which the inmates of an asylum take over the running of the

institution. The association enters the state wherein the whole

has donned the mask of ostensible normality. In the next chap-

ter, we shall call such a state the “dissimulative phase” with

regard to macrosocial ponerogenic phenomena.

Observing the appropriate state corresponding to the first

ponerological criterion - the atrophy of natural critical facul-

ties with respect to pathological individuals - requires skillful

psychology and specific factual knowledge; the second, more

stable phase can be perceived both by a person of average rea-

son and by public opinion in most societies. The interpretation

imposed, however, is unilaterally moralistic or sociological,

simultaneously undergoing the characteristic feeling of defi-

ciency as regards the possibility of both understanding the phe-

nomenon and counteracting the spread of said evil.

However, in this phase a minority of social groups tend to

consider such a ponerogenic association comprehensible within

the categories of their own world view and the outer layer of

diffusing ideology as a doctrine acceptable to them. The more

primitive the society in question, and the further removed from

direct contact to the union affected by this pathological state,

the more numerous such minorities would be. This very period,

during which the customs of the union become somewhat

milder, often represents simultaneously its most intensive ex-

pansionist activity.

This period may last long, but not forever. Internally, the

group is becoming progressively more pathological, finally

showing its true qualitative colors again as its activities become

ever clumsier. At this point, a society of normal people can

easily threaten ponerologic associations, even at the macroso-

cial level.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

173

Macrosocial Phenomena

When a ponerogenic process encompasses a society’s entire

ruling class, or nation, or when opposition from normal people

is stifled -- as a result of the mass character of the phenomenon,

or by using spellbinding means and physical compulsion, in-

cluding censorship -- we are dealing with a macrosocial pone-

rologic phenomenon. In such a case, however, a society’s trag-

edy, often coupled with that of the researcher’s own suffering,

opens before him an entire volume of ponerologic knowledge,

where he can read all about the laws governing such a process

if he is only able to familiarize himself in time with its natural-

istic language and its different grammar.

Studies in the genesis of evil which are based on observing

small groups of people can indicate the details of these laws to

us. However, it might be thought that this would present a

warped picture that is dependent upon various environmental

conditions which are further dependent on the historical period

in question; this is the backdrop to the phenomena observed.

Nevertheless, such observations may enable us to hazard a

hypothesis to the effect that the general laws of ponerogenesis

may be at least analogous, regardless of the quantity and scope

of the phenomenon in time and space. They do not, however,

permit verification of such a hypothesis.

In studying a macrosocial phenomenon, we can obtain both

quantitative and qualitative data, statistical correlation indices,

and other observations as accurately as might be allowed by the

state of the art in science, research methodology, and the obvi-

ously very difficult situation of the observer.85 We can then use

the classical method, hazarding a hypothesis and then actively

searching for facts which could falsify it. The wide-spread

causative regularity of ponerogenic processes would then be

confirmed within the bounds of the above-mentioned possibili-

ties. This is, in fact, what the author and his colleagues under-

took to do. It is astonishing how neatly causative regularity of

ponerogenic processes observed in small groups govern this

macrosocial phenomenon. The comprehension of the phe-

85 Assuming that one can gather this information and survive the gathering!

[Editor’s note.]

174

PONEROLOGY

nomenon thus acquired can serve as a basis for predicting its

future development, to be verified by time. It is in close and

careful observation, and only after time passes, that we become

aware that the colossus has an Achilles heel after all.

The study of macrosocial ponerogenic phenomena meets

with obvious problems: their period of genesis, duration, and

decay is several times longer than the researcher’s scientific

activity. Simultaneously, there are other transformations in

history, customs, economics, and technology; however, the

difficulties confronted in abstracting the appropriate symptoms

need not be insuperable, since our criteria are based on eternal

phenomena subject to relatively limited transformations in

time.

The traditional interpretation of these great historical dis-

eases has already taught historians to distinguish two phases.

The first is represented by a period of spiritual crisis in a soci-

ety,86 which historiography associates with exhausting of the

ideational, moral, and religious values heretofore nourishing

the society in question. Egoism among individuals and social

groups increases, and the links of moral duty and social net-

works are felt to be loosening. Trifling matters thereupon

dominate human minds to such an extent that there is no room

left for thinking about public matters or a feeling of commit-

ment to the future. An atrophy of the hierarchy of values within

the thinking of individuals and societies is an indication

thereof; it has been described both in historiographic mono-

graphs and in psychiatric papers. The country’s government is

finally paralyzed, helpless in the face of problems which could

be solved without great difficulty under other circumstances.

Let us associate such periods of crisis with the familiar phase in

social hysterization.

The next phase has been marked by bloody tragedies, revo-

lutions, wars, and the fall of empires. The deliberations of his-

86 Sorokin, Pitirim. (1941). Social and Cultural Dynamics, Volume Four:

Basic Problems, Principles and Methods, New York: American Book Com-

pany. Sorokin, Pitirim. (1957). Social and Cultural Dynamics, One Volume

Revision. Boston: Porter Sargent. Simonton, Dean Keith. (1976). “Does

Sorokin’s data support his theory?: A study of generational fluctuations in

philosophical beliefs.” Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion 15: 187-

198.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

175

torians or moralists regarding these occurrences always leave

behind a certain feeling of deficiency with reference to the

possibility of perceiving certain psychological factors dis-

cerned within the nature of phenomena; the essence of these

factors remains outside the scope of their scientific experience.

A historian observing these great historical diseases is

struck first of all by their similarities, easily forgetting that all

diseases have many symptoms in common because they are

states of absent health. A ponerologist thinking in naturalistic

terms tends to doubt that we are dealing with only one kind of

societal disease, thereby leading to a certain differentiation of

forms with regard to ethnological and historical conditions.

Differentiating the essence of such states is more appropriate to

the reasoning patterns we are familiar with from the natural

sciences. The complex conditions of social life, however, pre-

clude using the method of distinction, which is similar to etio-

logical criterion in medicine: qualitatively speaking, the phe-

nomena become layered in time, conditioning each other and

transforming constantly. We should then rather use certain

abstract patterns, similar to those used in analyzing the neurotic

states of human beings.

Governed by this type of reasoning, let us here attempt to

differentiate two pathological states of societies; their essence

and contents appear different enough, but they can operate

sequentially in such a way that the first opens the door to the

second. The first such state has already been sketched in the

chapter on the hysteroidal cycle; we shall adduce a certain

number of other psychological details hereunder. The next

chapter shall be dedicated to the second pathological state, for

which I have adopted the denomination of “pathocracy”.

States of Societal Hysterization

When perusing scientific or literary descriptions of hysteri-

cal phenomena, such as those dating from the last great in-

crease in hysteria in Europe encompassing the quarter-century

preceding World War I, a non-specialist may gain the impres-

sion that this was endemic to individual cases, particularly

among woman. The contagious nature of hysterical states,

176

PONEROLOGY

however, had already been discovered and described by Jean-

Martin Charcot87.

It is practically impossible for hysteria to manifest itself as a

mere individual phenomenon, since it is contagious by means

of psychological resonance, identification, and imitation. Each

human being has a predisposition for this malformation of the

personality, albeit to varying degrees, although it is normally

overcome by rearing and self-rearing, which are amenable to

correct thinking and emotional self-discipline.

During “happy times” of peace dependent upon social injus-

tice, children of the privileged classes learn to repress from

their field of consciousness the uncomfortable ideas suggesting

that they and their parents are benefitting from injustice against

others. Such young people learn to disqualify disparage the

moral and mental values of anyone whose work they are using

to over-advantage. Young minds thus ingest habits of subcon-

scious selection and substitution of data, which leads to a hys-

terical conversion economy of reasoning. They grow up to be

somewhat hysterical adults who, by means of the ways ad-

duced above, thereupon transmit their hysteria to the next gen-

eration, which then develops these characteristics to an even

greater degree. The hysterical patterns for experience and be-

havior grow and spread downwards from the privileged classes

until crossing the boundary of the first criterion of ponerology:

the atrophy of natural critical faculties with respect to patho-

logical individuals.

When the habits of subconscious selection and substitution

of thought-data spread to the macrosocial level, a society tends

87 Jean-Martin Charcot (1825 - 1893) French neurologist. His work greatly

impacted the developing fields of neurology and psychology. Charcot took an

interest in the malady then called hysteria. It seemed to be a mental disorder

with physical manifestations, of immediate interest to a neurologist. He

believed that hysteria was the result of a weak neurological system which

was hereditary. It could be set off by a traumatic event like an accident, but

was then progressive and irreversible. To study the hysterics under his care,

he learned the technique of hypnosis and soon became a master of the rela-

tively new "science." Charcot believed that a hypnotized state was very

similar to a bout of hysteria, and so he hypnotized his patients in order to

induce and study their symptoms. He was single-handedly responsible for

changing the French medical community's opinion about the validity of

hypnosis (it was previously rejected as Mesmerism). [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

177

to develop contempt for factual criticism and to humiliate any-

one sounding an alarm. Contempt is also shown for other na-

tions which have maintained normal thought-patterns and for

their opinions. Egotistic thought-terrorization is accomplished

by the society itself and its processes of conversive thinking.

This obviates the need for censorship of the press, theater, or

broadcasting, as a pathologically hypersensitive censor lives

within the citizens themselves.

When three “egos” govern, egoism, egotism, and egocen-

trism, the feeling of social links and responsibility toward oth-

ers disappear, and the society in question splinters into groups

ever more hostile to each other. When a hysterical environment

stops differentiating the opinions of limited, not-quite-normal

people from those of normal, reasonable persons, this opens the

door for activation of the pathological factors of a various na-

ture to enter in.

Individuals we have already met who are governed by a

pathological view of reality and abnormal goals caused by their

different nature are able to develop their activities in such con-

ditions. If a given society does not manage to overcome the

state of hysterization under its ethnological and political cir-

cumstances, a huge bloody tragedy can be the result.

One variation of such a tragedy can be pathocracy. Thus,

minor setbacks in terms of political failure or military defeat

can be a warning in such a situation and may turn out to be a

blessing in disguise if properly understood and allowed to be-

come a factor in the regeneration of a society’s normal thought

patterns and customs. The most valuable advice a ponerologist

can offer under such circumstances is for a society to avail

itself of the assistance of modern science, taking particular

advantage of data remaining from the last great increase of

hysteria in Europe.

A greater resistance to hysterization characterizes those so-

cial groups which earn their daily bread by daily effort, and

where the practicalities of everyday life force the mind to think

soberly and reflect on generalities. As an example: peasants

continue to view the hysterical customs of the well-to-do

classes through their own earthy perception of psychological

reality and their sense of humor. Similar customs on the part of

178

PONEROLOGY

the bourgeoisie incline workers to bitter criticism and revolu-

tionary anger. Whether couched in economic, ideological, or

political terms, the criticism and demands of these social

groups always contain a component of psychological, moral,

and anti-hysterical motivation. For this reason, it is most ap-

propriate to consider these demands with deliberation and take

these classes’ feelings into account. On the other hand, tragic

results can derive from thoughtless action paving the way for

spellbinders to make themselves heard.

Ponerology

Ponerology utilizes the scientific progress of the last dec-

ades and last years, especially in the realms of biology, psy-

chopathology and clinical psychology. It clarifies unknown

causative links and analyzes the processes of the genesis of evil

without giving a short shrift to factors which have so far been

underrated. In initiating this new discipline, the author has also

utilized his professional experience in these areas and the re-

sults of his own recent research.

A ponerological approach facilitates an understanding of

some of mankind’s more dramatic difficulties on both levels,

the macrosocial and the individual human scale. This new dis-

cipline will make it possible to achieve first theoretical, and

then practical, solutions for problems we have been attempting

to solve by ineffective traditional means, resulting in feelings

of helplessness against the tides of history. These latter means

are based on historiographical concepts and excessively moral-

izing attitudes, which makes them overrate force as a means of

counteracting evil. Ponerology can help equalize such one-

sidedness by means of modern naturalistic thinking, supple-

menting our comprehension of the causes and genesis of evil

with the facts necessary to build a more stable foundation for

practical inhibition of the processes of ponerogenesis and coun-

teraction of their results.

Synergetic activity of several measures aimed at the same

valuable goal, e.g. such as treating a sick person, usually pro-

duces better effects than the mere sum of the factors involved.

In building a second wing for the activities of moralistic efforts

to date, ponerology will make it possible to achieve results

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

179

which are also better than the sum of their useful effects. By

reinforcing trust in familiar moral values, it will make it possi-

ble to answer many heretofore unanswerable questions and

utilize means not used thus far, especially on a larger social

scale.

Societies have a right to defend themselves against any evil

harassing or threatening them. National governments are obli-

gated to use effective means for this purpose, and to use them

as skillfully as possible.88 In order to discharge this essential

function, nations obviously utilize the information available at

the time in that given civilization relating to the nature and

genesis of evil, as well as whatever means they can muster.

Society’s survival must be protected, but abuse of power and

sadistic degenerations come about all too easily.

We now have rational and moral doubts about prior genera-

tions’ comprehension and counteraction of evil. Simple obser-

vation of history justifies this. The general developing opinion

in free societies requires that evil repressing measures be hu-

manized and limited so as to set boundaries to possible abuse.

This seems to be due to the fact that morally sensitive individu-

als want to protect their personalities and those of their children

from the destructive influence conveyed by the awareness that

severe punishment, especially capital punishment, is still being

meted out.

And so it is that the methods of counteracting evil are being

mitigated in their severity, but at the same time effective meth-

ods to protect the citizenry against the birth of evil and force

are not indicated. This creates an ever-widening gap between

the need for counteraction and the means at our disposal; as a

result, many kinds of evil can develop at every social scale.

Under such circumstances, it may be understandable that some

voices clamor for a return to the old-fashioned, iron-fisted

methods so inimical to the development of human thought.

Ponerology studies the nature of evil and the complex proc-

esses of its genesis, thereby opening new ways for counteract-

ing it. It points out that evil has certain weaknesses in its struc-

ture and genesis which can be exploited to inhibit its develop-

88 Unless, of course, the government itself is the evil that threatens and har-

asses the people. [Editor’s note.]

180

PONEROLOGY

ment as well as to quickly eliminate the fruits of such devel-

opment. If the ponerogenic activity of pathological factors -

deviant individuals and their activities - is subjected to con-

scious controls of a scientific, individual, and societal nature,

we can counteract evil as effectively as by means of persistent

calls to respect moral values. The ancient method and this

completely new one can thus combine to produce results more

favorable than an arithmetic sum of the two. Ponerology also

leads to the possibilities of prophylactic behavior at the levels

of individual, societal, and macrosocial evil. This new ap-

proach ought to enable societies to feel safe again, both at the

internal level and on the scale of international threats.

Methods of counteracting evil which are conditioned upon

causation, supported by ever-increasing scientific progress, will

of course be much more complex, just as the nature and genesis

of evil are complex. Any allegedly fair relationship between a

person’s crime and the punishment meted out is a survival of

archaic thinking, something ever more difficult to comprehend.

That is why our times demand that we further develop the dis-

cipline initiated herein and undertake detailed research, espe-

cially as regards the nature of many pathological factors which

take part in ponerogenesis. An appropriately ponerological

reading of history is an essential condition for understanding

macrosocial ponerogenic phenomena whose duration exceeds

the observation possibilities of a single person. The author

utilized this method in the following chapter, reconstructing the

phase wherein characteropathic factors dominated in the initial

period of the creation of pathocracy.

In teaching us about the causes and genesis of evil, ponerol-

ogy barely addresses human guilt. Thus, it does not solve the

perennial problem of human responsibility, although it does

shed additional light from the side of causation. We become

aware of just how little we understand in this area, and how

much remains to be researched, while attempting to correct our

comprehension of the complex causation of phenomena and

acknowledging greater individual dependence upon the opera-

tion of outside factors. At that point, any moral judgment about

another person or his blame-worthiness may strike us as based

mostly upon emotional responses and centuries-old tradition.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

181

We have the right and duty to critically judge our own be-

havior and the moral value of our motivations. This is condi-

tioned by our conscience, a phenomenon as ubiquitous as it is

incomprehensible within the boundaries of naturalistic think-

ing. Even if armed with all the present and future accomplish-

ments of ponerology, will we ever be in a position to abstract

and evaluate the individual blame of another person? In terms

of theory, this appears ever more doubtful; in terms of practice,

ever more unnecessary.

If we consistently abstain from moral judgments of other

people, we transfer our attention to tracking the causative proc-

esses that are responsible for conditioning the behavior of an-

other person or society. This improves our prospects for proper

mental hygiene and our capacity to apprehend psychological

reality. Such restraint also enables us to avoid an error which

poisons minds and souls all too effectively, namely superim-

posing a moralizing interpretation upon the activity of patho-

logical factors. We also avoid emotional entanglements and

better control our own egotism and egocentrism, thus facilitat-

ing objective analysis of phenomena.

If such an attitude strikes some readers as being close to

moral indifference, we should reiterate that the here-adduced

method of analyzing evil and its genesis gives rise to a new

type of reasoned distance from its temptations, as well as acti-

vating additional theoretical and practical possibilities for

counter-acting it. Also, we should give thought to the astonish-

ing and obvious convergence between the conclusions we can

derive from this analysis of the phenomena and certain ideas

from ancient philosophies, well stated in the Christian Bible:

“Judge not, that ye be not judged. For with what judgment ye

judge, ye shall be judged; and with what measure ye mete, it

shall be measured to you again.” (Mat. 7:1-2)

These values, unfortunately often overshadowed by a gov-

ernment’s immediate needs, as well as the activity of our in-

stinctive and emotional reflexes goading us to revenge and

punishment of others, find at least partial rational justification

in this new science. Practicing such rigorous understanding and

behavior can only confirm these values in a more evident and

scientific manner.

182

PONEROLOGY

This new discipline can be applicable to many walks of life.

The author has utilized these accomplishments and tested their

practical value in the course of individual psychotherapy upon

his patients. As a result, their personality and future were rear-

ranged in a manner more favorable than if it were based on

earlier skills. Bearing in mind the exceptional nature of our

times, when multi-faceted mobilization of moral and mental

values must be effected to counteract the evil threatening the

world, in the coming chapters, the author shall suggest the

adoption of just such an attitude, whose end result ought be an

act of forgiveness heretofore unheard of in history. Keep in

mind also that understanding and forgiveness does not exclude

correction of conditions and taking prophylactic measures.

Disentangling the Gordian Knot of present times, composed

of the macrosocial pathological phenomenon threatening our

future, may appear impossible without the development and

utilization of this new discipline. This knot can no longer be

cut with a sword. A psychologist cannot afford to be as impa-

tient as Alexander the Great. That is why we have here de-

scribed it within the indispensable scope, adaptation, and selec-

tion of data, so as to enable clarification of the problems to be

discussed later in the book. Perhaps the future will make it

possible to elaborate a general theoretical work.

CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

May the reader please imagine a very large hall in an old

Gothic university building. Many of us gathered there early in

our studies in order to listen to the lectures of outstanding phi-

losophers and scientists. We were herded back there – under

threat - the year before graduation in order to listen to the in-

doctrination lectures which recently had been introduced.

Someone nobody knew appeared behind the lectern and in-

formed us that he would now be the professor. His speech was

fluent, but there was nothing scientific about it: he failed to

distinguish between scientific and ordinary concepts and

treated borderline imaginings as though it were wisdom that

could not be doubted. For ninety minutes each week, he

flooded us with naive, presumptuous paralogistics and a patho-

logical view of human reality. We were treated with contempt

and poorly controlled hatred. Since fun-poking could entail

dreadful consequences, we had to listen attentively and with

the utmost gravity.

The grapevine soon discovered this person’s origins. He had

come from a Cracow suburb and attended high school, al-

though no one knew if he had graduated. Anyway, this was the

first time he had crossed university portals, and as a professor,

at that!

“You can’t convince anyone this way!” we whispered to

each other. “It’s actually propaganda directed against them-

34

INTRODUCTION

selves.” But after such mind-torture, it took a long time for

someone to break the silence.

We studied ourselves, since we felt something strange had

taken over our minds and something valuable was leaking

away irretrievably. The world of psychological reality and

moral values seemed suspended as if in a chilly fog. Our hu-

man feeling and student solidarity lost their meaning, as did

patriotism and our old established criteria. So we asked each

other, “are you going through this too”? Each of us experienced

this worry about his own personality and future in his own

way. Some of us answered the questions with silence. The

depth of these experiences turned out to be different for each

individual.

We thus wondered how to protect ourselves from the results

of this “indoctrination”. Teresa D. made the first suggestion:

Let’s spend a weekend in the mountains. It worked. Pleasant

company, a bit of joking, then exhaustion followed by deep

sleep in a shelter, and our human personalities returned, albeit

with a certain remnant. Time also proved to create a kind of

psychological immunity, although not with everyone. Analyz-

ing the psychopathic characteristics of the “professor’s” per-

sonality proved another excellent way of protecting one’s own

psychological hygiene.

You can just imagine our worry, disappointment, and sur-

prise when some colleagues we knew well suddenly began to

change their world view; their thought-patterns furthermore

reminded us of the “professor’s” chatter. Their feelings, which

had just recently been friendly, became noticeably cooler, al-

though not yet hostile. Benevolent or critical student arguments

bounced right of them. They gave the impression of possessing

some secret knowledge; we were only their former colleagues,

still believing what those “professors of old” had taught us. We

had to be careful of what we said to them. These former col-

leagues soon joined the Party.

Who were they, what social groups did they come from,

what kind of students and people were they? How and why did

they change so much in less than a year? Why did neither I nor

a majority of my fellow students succumb to this phenomenon

and process? Many such questions fluttered through our heads

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

35

then. It was in those times, from those questions, observations

and attitudes that the idea was born that this phenomenon could

be objectively studied and understood; an idea whose greater

meaning crystallized with time.

Many of us newly graduated psychologists participated in

the initial observations and reflections, but most crumbled

away in the face of material or academic problems. Only a few

of that group remained; so the author of this book may be the

last of the Mohicans.

It was relatively easy to determine the environments and

origins of the people who succumbed to this process, which I

then called “transpersonification”. They came from all social

groups, including aristocratic and fervently religious families,

and caused a break in our student solidarity to the order of

some 6 %. The remaining majority suffered varying degrees of

personality disintegration which gave rise to individual search-

ing for the values necessary to find ourselves again; the results

were varied and sometimes creative.

Even then, we had no doubts as to the pathological nature of

this “transpersonification” process, which ran similar but not

identical in all cases. The duration of the results of this phe-

nomenon also varied. Some of these people later became zeal-

ots. Others later took advantage of various circumstances to

withdraw and re-establish their lost links to the society of nor-

mal people. They were replaced. The only constant value of the

new social system was the magic number of 6 %.

We tried to evaluate the talent level of those colleagues who

had succumbed to this personality-transformation process, and

reached the conclusion that, on average, it was slightly lower

than the average of the student population. Their lesser resis-

tance obviously resided in other bio-psychological features

which were most probably qualitatively heterogeneous.

I found that I had to study subjects bordering on psychology

and psychopathology in order to answer the questions arising

from our observations; scientific neglect in these areas proved

an obstacle difficult to overcome. At the same time, someone

guided by special knowledge apparently vacated the libraries of

anything we could have found on the topic; books were in-

dexed, but not physically present.

36

INTRODUCTION

Analyzing these occurrences now in hindsight, we could say

that the “professor” was dangling bait over our heads, based on

specific psychological knowledge. He knew in advance that he

would fish out amenable individuals, and even how to do it, but

the limited numbers disappointed him. The transpersonification

process generally took hold only when an individual’s instinc-

tive substratum was marked by pallor or certain deficits. To a

lesser extent, it also worked among people who manifested

other deficiencies in which the state provoked within them was

partially impermanent, being largely the result of psychopatho-

logical induction.

This knowledge about the existence of susceptible individu-

als and how to work on them will continue being a tool for

world conquest as long as it remains the secret of such “profes-

sors”. When it becomes skillfully popularized science, it will

help nations to develop immunity. But none of us knew this at

the time.

Nevertheless, we must admit that in demonstrating the

properties of this process to us in such a way as to force us into

in-depth experience, the professor helped us understand the

nature of the phenomenon in a larger scope than many a true

scientific researcher participating in this work in other less

direct ways.

~~~

As a youth, I read a book about a naturalist wandering

through the Amazon-basin wilderness. At some moment a

small animal fell from a tree onto the nape of his neck, clawing

his skin painfully and sucking his blood. The biologist cau-

tiously removed it -- without anger, since that was its form of

feeding -- and proceeded to study it carefully. This story stub-

bornly stuck in my mind during those very difficult times when

a vampire fell onto our necks, sucking the blood of an unhappy

nation.

Maintaining the attitude of a naturalist, while attempting to

track the nature of macrosocial phenomenon in spite of all ad-

versity, insures a certain intellectual distance and better psy-

chological hygiene in the face of horrors that might otherwise

be difficult to contemplate. Such an attitude also slightly in-

creases the feeling of safety and furnishes an insight that this

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

37

very method may help find a certain creative solution. This

requires strict control of the natural, moralizing reflexes of

revulsion, and other painful emotions that the phenomenon

provokes in any normal person when it deprives him of his joy

of life and personal safety, ruining his own future and that of

his nation. Scientific curiosity therefore becomes a loyal ally

during such times.

~~~

Hopefully, my readers will forgive me for recounting here a

youthful reminiscence that will lead us directly into the subject.

My uncle, a very lonely man, would visit our house periodi-

cally. He had survived the great Soviet Revolution in the

depths of Russia, where he had been shipped out by the Czarist

police. For over a year he wandered from Siberia to Poland.

Whenever he met with an armed group during his travels, he

quickly tried to determine which ideology they represented,

white or red, and thereupon skillfully pretended to profess it.

Had his ruse been unsuccessful, he would have had his head

blown off as a suspected enemy sympathizer. It was safest to

have a gun and belong to a gang. So he would wander and war

alongside either group, usually only until he found an opportu-

nity to desert westward toward his native Poland, a country

which had just regained its freedom.

When he finally reached his beloved homeland again, he

managed to finish his long-interrupted law studies, to become a

decent person, and to achieve a responsible position. However,

he was never able to liberate himself from his nightmarish

memories. Women were frightened by his stories of the bad old

days and thought it would make no sense to bring a new life

into an uncertain future. Thus, he never started a family. Per-

haps he would have been unable to relate to his loved ones

properly.

This uncle of mine would recapture his past by telling the

children in my family stories about what he had seen, experi-

enced and taken part in; our young imaginations were unable to

come to terms with any of it. Nightmarish terror shuddered in

our bones. We would think of questions: why did people lose

all their humanity, what was the reason for all this? Some sort

38

INTRODUCTION

of apprehensive premonition choked its way into our young

minds; unfortunately, it was to come true in the future.

~~~

If a collection were to be made of all those books which de-

scribe the horrors of wars, the cruelties of revolutions, and the

bloody deeds of political leaders and their systems, many read-

ers would avoid such a library. Ancient works would be placed

alongside books by contemporary historians and reporters. The

documentary treatises on German extermination and concentra-

tion camps, and of the extermination of the Jewish Nation,

furnish approximate statistical data and describe the well-

organized “labor” of the destruction of human life, using a

properly calm language, and providing a concrete basis for the

acknowledgement of the nature of evil.

The autobiography of Rudolf Hoess, the commander of

camps in Oswiecim ( Auschwitz) and Brzezinka ( Birkenau), is a

classic example of how an intelligent psychopathic individual

with a deficit of human emotion thinks and feels.

Foremost among these would be books written by witnesses

to criminal insanity such as Arthur Koestler’s Darkness at

Noon, from prewar Soviet life; Smoke over Birkenau the per-

sonal memories of Severina Szmaglewska5 from the Oswiecim

German concentration camp for women; The Other World, the

Soviet memoires of Gustav Herling-Grudzinski6; and the Solz-

henitsyn volumes turgid with human suffering.

The collection would include works on the philosophy of

history discussing the social and moral aspects of the genesis of

evil, but they would also use the half-mysterious laws of his-

tory to partly justify the blood-stained solutions. However, an

5 Szmaglewska, Seweryna, 1916-92, writer; 1942-45 prisoner in Nazi con-

centration camps; wrote Dymy nad Birkenau (Smoke over Birkenau, 1945);

witness at Nuremberg Trial; stories and novels mainly concerned with war

and occupation: Zapowiada sie piekny dzien (Looks Like a Beautiful Day,

1960), Niewinni w Norymberdze (The Innocent at Nuremberg, 1972); novels

for young people; anthology of memoirs 1939-45: Wiezienna krata (Prison

Bars, 1964). [Editor’s note.]

6 Herling-Grudzinski, Gustav: Polish writer who after WWII lived in Napoli,

Italy. Married the daughter of well known Italian philosopher Benedetto

Croce. He wrote an account of his time in a Soviet gulag: A World Apart.

[Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

39

alert reader would be able to detect a certain degree of evolu-

tion in the authors’ attitudes, from an ancient affirmation of

primitive enslavement and murder of vanquished peoples, to

the present-day moralizing condemnation of such methods of

behavior.

Such a library would nevertheless be missing a single work

offering a sufficient explanation of the causes and processes

whereby such historical dramas originate, of how and why

human frailties and ambitions degenerate into bloodthirsty

madness. Upon reading the present volume, the reader will

realize that writing such a book was scientifically impossible

until recently.

The old questions would remain unanswered: what made

this happen? Does everyone carry the seeds of crime within, or

is it only some of us? No matter how faithful and psychologi-

cally true, no literary description of occurrences, such as those

narrated by the above-mentioned authors, can answer these

questions, nor can they fully explain the origins of evil. They

are thus incapable of furnishing sufficiently effective principles

for counter-acting evil. The best literary description of a dis-

ease cannot produce an understanding of its essential etiology,

and thus furnishes no principles for treatment. In the same way,

such descriptions of historical tragedies are unable to elaborate

effective measures for counteracting the genesis, existence, or

spread of evil.

In using natural7 language to circumscribe psychological,

social, and moral concepts which cannot properly be described

within its sphere of utility, we produce a sort of surrogate com-

prehension leading to a nagging suspicion of helplessness. Our

natural system of concepts and imaginings is not equipped with

the necessary factual content to permit reasoned comprehen-

sion of the quality of the factors (particularly the psychological

ones) which were active before the birth of, and during, such

inhumanly cruel times

We must nevertheless point out that the authors of such lit-

erary descriptions sensed that their language was insufficient

and therefore attempted to infuse their words with the proper

7 Ordinary, everyday words which have various meanings, generally benign,

and often do not embrace a specific, scientific meaning. [Editor’s note.]

40

INTRODUCTION

scope of precision, almost as though they foresaw that someone

– at some point in time - might use their works in order to ex-

plain what cannot be explained, not even in the best literary

language. Had these writers not been so precise and descriptive

in their language, this author would have been unable to use

their works for his own scientific purposes.

In general, most people are horrified by such literature; in

hedonistic societies particularly, people have the tendency to

escape into ignorance or naive doctrines. Some people even

feel contempt for suffering persons. The influence of such

books can thus be partially harmful; we should counteract that

influence by indicating what the authors had to leave out be-

cause our ordinary world of concepts and imaginings cannot

contain it.

The reader will therefore find herein no bloodcurdling de-

scriptions of criminal behavior or human suffering. It is not the

author’s job to present a graphic return of material adduced by

people who saw and suffered more than he did, and whose

literary talents are greater. Introducing such descriptions into

this work would run counter to its purpose: it would not only

focus attention on some occurrences to the exclusion of many

others, but would also distract the mind from the real heart of

the matter, namely, the general laws of the origin of evil.

In tracking the behavioral mechanisms of the genesis of

evil, one must keep both abhorrence and fear under control,

submit to a passion for epistemological science, and develop

the calm outlook needed in natural history. We must never lose

sight of the objective: to trace the processes of ponerogenesis;

where they can lead and what threat they can pose to us in the

future.

This book therefore aims to take the reader by the hand into

a world beyond the concepts and imaginings he has relied on to

describe his world since childhood, in an overly egotistic way,

probably because his parents, surroundings, and the community

of his country used concepts similar to his own. Thereafter, we

must show him an appropriate selection from the world of fac-

tual concepts which have given birth to recent scientific think-

ing and which will allow him an understanding of what has

remained irrational in his everyday system of concepts.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

41

However, this tour of another reality will not be a psycho-

logical experiment conducted upon readers’ minds for the sole

purpose of exposing the weak points and gaps in their natural

world view. Rather, it an urgent necessity due to our contempo-

rary world’s pressing problems, which we can ignore only at

our peril.

It is important to realize that we cannot possibly distinguish

the path to nuclear catastrophe from the path to creative dedica-

tion unless we step beyond this world of natural egotism and

well known concepts. Then we can come to the understanding

that the path was chosen for us by powerful forces, against

which our nostalgia for homey, familiar human concepts can be

no match. We must step beyond this world of everyday, illu-

sory thinking for our own good and for the good of our loved

ones.

The social sciences have already elaborated their own con-

ventional language which mediates between the ordinary man’s

view and a fully objective naturalistic view. It is useful to sci-

entists in terms of communication and cooperation, but it is still

not the kind of conceptual structure which can fully take into

account the biological, psychological, and pathological prem-

ises at issue in the second and fourth chapters of this book. In

the social sciences, the conventional terminology eliminates

critical standards and puts ethics on ice; in the political sci-

ences, it leads to an underrated evaluation of factors which

describe the essence of political situations when evil is at the

core.

This social science language left the author and other inves-

tigators feeling helpless and scientifically stranded early in our

research on the mysterious nature of this inhuman historical

phenomenon which engulfed our nation, and still fires his at-

tempts to reach an objective understanding of it. Ultimately, I

had no choice but to resort to objective biological, psychologi-

cal, and psychopathological terminology in order to bring into

focus the true nature of the phenomenon, the heart of matter.

The nature of the phenomena under investigation as well as

the needs of readers, particularly those unfamiliar with psycho-

pathology, dictate the descriptive manner which must first in-

troduce the data and concepts necessary for further comprehen-

42

INTRODUCTION

sion of psychologically and morally pathological occurrences.

We shall thus begin with human personality questions, inten-

tionally formulated in such a way as to coincide largely with

the experience of a practicing psychologist, passing then to

selected questions of societal psychology. In the “ponerology”

chapter, we shall familiarize ourselves with how evil is born

with regard to each social scale, emphasizing the actual role of

some psychopathological phenomena in the process of ponero-

genesis. This will facilitate the transition from natural language

to the necessary objective language of naturalistic, psychologi-

cal, and statistical science to the extent that is necessary and

sufficient. Hopefully, it will not be irksome for readers to dis-

cuss these matters in clinical terms.

In the author’s opinion, Ponerology reveals itself to be a

new branch of science born out of historical need and the most

recent accomplishments of medicine and psychology. In the

light of objective naturalistic language, it studies the causal

components and processes of the genesis of evil, regardless of

the latter’s social scope. We may attempt to analyze these pon-

erogenic processes which have given rise to human injustice,

armed with proper knowledge, particularly in the area of psy-

chopathology. Again and again, as the reader will discover, in

such a study, we meet with the effects of pathological factors

whose carriers are people characterized by some degree of

various psychological deviations or defects.

Moral evil and psychobiological evil are, in effect, inter-

linked via so many causal relationships and mutual influences

that they can only be separated by means of abstraction. How-

ever, the ability to distinguish them qualitatively can help us to

avoid a moralizing interpretation of the pathological factors, an

error to which we are all prone, and which poisons the human

mind in an insidious way, whenever social and moral affairs

are at issue.

The ponerogenesis of macrosocial phenomena – large scale

evil - which constitutes the most important object of this book,

appears to be subject to the same laws of nature that operate

within human questions on an individual or small-group level.

The role of persons with various psychological defects and

anomalies of a clinically low level appears to be a perennial

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

43

characteristic of such phenomena. In the macrosocial phe-

nomenon we shall later call “pathocracy”, a certain hereditary

anomaly isolated as “essential psychopathy” is catalytically and

causatively essential for the genesis and survival of large scale

social evil.

Our natural human world view actually creates a barrier to

our understanding of such questions, thus, it is necessary to be

familiar with psychopathological phenomena, such as those

encountered in this field, in order to breach that barrier. May

then the readers please forgive the author’s occasional lapses

along this innovative path and fearlessly follow his lead, famil-

iarizing themselves rather systematically with the data adduced

in the first few chapters. Thus, we shall be able to accept the

truth of the nature of evil without reflex protests on the part of

our natural egotism.

Specialists familiar with psychopathology will find the road

less novel. They will, however, notice some differences in in-

terpreting several well known phenomena, resulting in part

from the anomalous situations under which the research was

done, but mostly from the more intensive penetration needed to

achieve the primary purpose. That is why this aspect of our

work contains certain theoretical values useful for psychopa-

thology. Hopefully, non-specialists will depend upon the

author’s long experience in distinguishing individual psycho-

logical anomalies found among people and factored into the

process of the genesis of evil.

It should be pointed out that considerable moral, intellec-

tual, and practical advantages can be gleaned from an under-

standing of the ponerogenic processes thanks to the naturalistic

objectivity required. The long-term heritage of ethical ques-

tions is thereby not destroyed; quite the contrary, it is rein-

forced, since modern scientific methods confirm the basic val-

ues of moral teachings. However, ponerology forces some cor-

rections upon many details.

Understanding the nature of macrosocial pathological phe-

nomena permits us to find a healthy attitude and perspective

toward them, thus assisting us in protecting our minds from

being poisoned by their diseased contents and the influence of

their propaganda. The unceasing counter-propaganda resorted

44

INTRODUCTION

to by some countries with a normal human system could easily

be superseded by straightforward information of a scientific

and popular scientific nature on the subject. The bottom line is

that we can only conquer this huge, contagious social cancer if

we comprehend its essence and its etiological causes. This

would eliminate the mystery of this phenomenon as its primary

survival asset. Ignota nulla curatio morbi!8

Such an understanding of the nature of the phenomena that

this study brings forward leads to the logical conclusion that

the measures for healing and reordering the world today should

be completely different from the ones heretofore used for solv-

ing international conflicts. Solutions to such conflicts should

function more like modern antibiotics, or, even better, psycho-

therapy properly handled, rather than taking the approach of

old-style weapons such as clubs, swords, tanks or nuclear mis-

siles. Healing social problems should be the objective, not de-

stroying society. An analogy can be drawn between the archaic

method of bleeding a patient as opposed to the modern method

of strengthening and restoring the ill one in order to effect the

cure.

With reference to phenomena of a ponerogenic nature, mere

proper knowledge alone can begin healing individual humans

and helping their minds regain harmony. Toward the end of

this book, we shall be discussing how to use this knowledge in

order to arrive at the correct political decisions and apply it to

an overall therapy of the world.

8 Do not attempt to cure what you do not understand.

CHAPTER II

SOME INDISPENSABLE CONCEPTS

Three principal heterogeneous items coincided in order to

form our European civilization: Greek philosophy, Roman

imperial and legal civilization, and Christianity, consolidated

by time and effort of later generations. The culture of cogni-

tive/spiritual heritage thus born was internally fuzzy wherever

the language of concepts, being overly attached to matter and

law, turned out to be too stiff to comprehend aspects of psycho-

logical and spiritual life.

Such a state of affairs had negative repercussions upon our

ability to comprehend reality, especially that reality which

concerns humanity and society. Europeans became unwilling to

study reality (subordinating intellect to facts), but rather tended

to impose upon nature their subjective ideational schemes,

which are extrinsic and not completely coherent. Not until

modern times, thanks to great developments in the hard sci-

ences, which study facts by their very nature, as well as the

apperception of the philosophical heritage of other cultures,

could we help clarify our world of concepts and permit its own

homogenization.

It is surprising to observe what an autonomous tribe the cul-

ture of the ancient Greeks represented. Even in those days, a

civilization could hardly develop in isolation, without being

affected by older cultures in particular. However, even with

that consideration, it seems that Greece was relatively isolated,

culturally speaking. This was probably due to the era of decay

46

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

the archaeologist refer to as the “dark age”, which occurred in

those Mediterranean areas between 1200 and 800 B.C., and

also to the Achaean tribes’ belligerence.

Among the Greeks, a rich mythological imagination, devel-

oped in direct contact with nature and the experiences of life

and war, furnished an image of this link with the nature of the

country and peoples. These conditions saw the birth of a liter-

ary tradition, and later of philosophical reflections searching

for generalities, essential contents, and criteria of values. The

Greek heritage is fascinating due to its richness and individual-

ity, but above all due to its primeval nature. Our civilization,

however, would have been better served if the Greeks had

made more ample use of the achievements of other civiliza-

tions.

Rome was too vital and practical to reflect profoundly upon

the Greek thoughts it had appropriated. In this imperial civili-

zation, administrative needs and juridical developments im-

posed practical priorities. For the Romans, the role of philoso-

phy was more didactic, useful for helping to develop the think-

ing process which would later be utilized for the discharge of

administrative functions and the exercise of political options.

The Greek reflective influence softened Roman customs, which

had a salutary effect on the development of the empire.

However, in any imperial civilization, the complex prob-

lems of human nature are troublesome factors complicating the

legal regulations of public affairs and administrative functions.

This begets a tendency to dismiss such matters and develop a

concept of human personality simplified enough to serve the

purposes of law. Roman citizens could achieve their goals and

develop their personal attitudes within the framework set by

fate and legal principles, which characterized an individual’s

situation based on premises having little to do with actual psy-

chological properties. The spiritual life of people lacking the

rights of citizenship was not an appropriate subject of deeper

studies. Thus, cognitive psychology remained barren, a condi-

tion which always produces moral recession at both the indi-

vidual and public levels.

Christianity had stronger ties with the ancient cultures of the

Asiatic continent, including their philosophical and psycho-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

47

logical reflections. This was of course a dynamic factor render-

ing it more attractive, but it was not the most important one.

Observing and understanding the apparent transformations

faith caused in human personalities created a psychological

school of thought and art on the part of the early believers. This

new relationship to another person, i.e. one’s neighbor, charac-

terized by understanding, forgiveness, and love, opened the

door to a psychological cognition which, often supported by

charismatic phenomena, bore abundant fruit during the first

three centuries after Christ.

An observer at the time might have expected Christianity to

help develop the art of human understanding to a higher level

than the older cultures and religions, and to hope that such

knowledge would protect future generations from the dangers

of speculative thought divorced from that profound psycho-

logical reality which can only be comprehended through sin-

cere respect for another human being.

History, however, has not confirmed such an expectation.

The symptoms of decay in sensitivity and psychological com-

prehension, as well as the Roman Imperial tendency to impose

extrinsic patterns upon human beings, can be observed as early

as 350 A.D. During later eras, Christianity passed through all

those difficulties which result from insufficient psychological

cognition of reality. Exhaustive studies on the historical rea-

sons for suppressing the development of human cognition in

our civilization would be an extremely useful endeavor.

First of all, Christianity adapted the Greek heritage of phi-

losophical thought and language to its purposes. This made it

possible to develop its own philosophy, but the primeval and

materialistic traits of that language imposed certain limits

which hampered communication between Christianity and

other religious cultures for many centuries.

Christ’s message expanded along the seacoast and beaten

paths of the Roman empire’s transportation lines, within the

imperial civilization, but only through bloody persecutions and

ultimate compromises with Rome’s power and law. Rome fi-

nally dealt with the threat by appropriating Christianity to its

own purposes and, as a result, the Christian Church appropri-

ated Roman organizational forms and adapted to existing social

48

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

institutions. As a result of this unavoidable process of adapta-

tion, Christianity inherited Roman habits of legal thinking,

including its indifference to human nature and its variety.

Two heterogeneous systems were thus linked together so

permanently that later centuries forgot just how strange they

actually were to each other. However, time and compromise

did not eliminate the internal inconsistencies, and Roman influ-

ence divested Christianity of some of its profound primeval

psychological knowledge. Christian tribes developing under

different cultural conditions created forms so variegated that

maintaining unity turned out to be an historical impossibility.

A “Western civilization” thus arose hampered by a serious

deficiency in an area which both can and does play a creative

role, and which is supposed to protect societies from various

kinds of evil. This civilization developed formulations in the

area of law, whether national, civil, or finally canon, which

were conceived for invented and simplified beings. These for-

mulations gave short shrift to the total contents of the human

personality and the great psychological differences between

individual members of the species Homo sapiens. For many

centuries any understanding of certain psychological anomalies

found among some individuals was out of the question, even

though these anomalies repeatedly caused disasters.

This civilization was insufficiently resistant to evil, which

originates beyond the easily accessible areas of human con-

sciousness and takes advantage of the enormous gap between

formal or legal thought and psychological reality. In a civiliza-

tion deficient in psychological cognition, hyperactive individu-

als driven by their internal doubts caused by a feelings of being

different easily find a ready echo in other people’s insuffi-

ciently developed consciousness. Such individuals dream of

imposing their power and their different experiential manner

upon their environment and their society.Unfortunately, in a

psychologically ignorant society, their dreams have a good

chance of becoming reality for them and a nightmare for oth-

ers.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

49

Psychology

In the 1870s, a tempestuous event occurred: a search for the

hidden truth about human nature was initiated as a secular

movement based on biological and medical progress, thus its

cognition originated in the material sphere. From the very out-

set, many researchers had a vision of the great future role of

this science for the good of peace and order. However, since it

relegated prior knowledge to the spiritual sphere, any such

approach to the human personality was necessarily one-sided.

People like Ivan Pavlov, C.G. Jung, and others soon noticed

this one-sidedness and attempted to reach a synthesis. Pavlov,

however, was not allowed to state his convictions in public.

Psychology is the only science wherein the observer and the

observed belong to the same species, even to the same person

in an act of introspection. It is thus easy for subjective error to

steal into the reasoning process of the thinking person’s com-

monly used imaginings and individual habits. Error then often

bites its own tail in a vicious circle, thus giving rise to prob-

lems due to the lack of distance between observer and ob-

served, a difficulty unknown in other disciplines.

Some people, such as the behaviorists, attempted to avoid

the above error at all costs. In the process, they impoverished

the cognitive contents to such an extent that there was very

little matter left. However, they produced a very profitable

discipline of thought. Progress was very often elaborated by

persons simultaneously driven by internal anxieties and search-

ing for a method of ordering their own personalities via the

road of knowledge and self-knowledge. If these anxieties were

caused by a defective upbringing, then overcoming these diffi-

culties gave rise to excellent discoveries. However, if the cause

for such anxieties rested within human nature, it resulted in a

permanent tendency to deform the understanding of psycho-

logical phenomena. Within this science, progress is unfortu-

nately very contingent upon the individual values and nature of

its practitioners. It is also dependent upon the social climate.

Wherever a society has become enslaved to others or to the rule

of an overly-privileged native class, psychology is the first

discipline to suffer from censorship and incursions on the part

50

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

of an administrative body which starts claiming the last word

as to what represents scientific truth.

Thanks to the work of outstanding pathfinders, however, the

scientific discipline exists and continues to develop in spite of

all these difficulties; it is useful for the life of society. Many

researchers fill in the gaps of this science with detailed data

which function as a corrective to the subjectivity and vagueness

of famous pioneers. The childhood ailments of any new disci-

pline persist, including a lack of general order and synthesis, as

does the tendency to splinter into individual schools, expound-

ing upon certain theoretical and practical achievements, at the

cost of limiting themselves in other areas.

At the same time, however, findings of a practical nature are

gleaned for the good of people who need help. The direct ob-

servations furnished by everyday work of therapists in the field

are more instrumental in forming scientific comprehension and

developing the language of contemporary psychology than any

academic experiments or deliberations undertaken in a labora-

tory. After all, life itself provides variegated conditions,

whether comfortable or tragic, which subject human individu-

als to experiments no scientist in any laboratory would ever

undertake. This very volume exists because of studies, in the

field, of inhuman experimentation upon entire nations.

Experience teaches a psychologist’s mind how to track an-

other person’s life quickly and effectively, discovering the

causes that conditioned the development of his personality and

behavior. Our minds can thus also reconstruct those factors

which influenced him, although he himself may be unaware of

them. In doing this, we do not, as a rule, use the natural struc-

ture of concepts, often referred to as “common sense” relied

upon by public opinion and many individuals. Rather, we use

categories which are as objective as we can possibly achieve.

Psychologists utilize conceptual language with descriptions of

phenomena that are independent of any common imaginings,

and this is an indispensable tool of practical activity. In prac-

tice, however, it usually turns into clinical slang rather than the

distinguished scientific language it would behoove us to foster.

An analogy can be drawn between this conceptual language of

psychology and mathematical symbols. Very often, a single

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

51

Greek letter stands for many pages of mathematical operations

which is instantly recognized by the mathematician.

Objective language

In the categories of psychological objectivity, cognition and

thought are based on the same logical and methodological prin-

ciples shown to be the best tool in many other areas of natural-

istic studies. Exceptions to these rules have become a tradition

for ourselves and for creatures similar to us, but they turn out to

engender more error than usefulness. At the same time, how-

ever, consistent adherence to these principles, and rejection of

additional scientific limitations, lead us toward the wide hori-

zon from which it is possible to glimpse supernatural causal-

ity. Accepting the existence of such phenomena within the

human personality becomes a necessity if our language of psy-

chological concepts is to remain an objective structure.

In affirming his own personality, man has the tendency to

repress from the field of his consciousness any associations

indicating an external causative conditioning of his world view

and behavior. Young people in particular want to believe they

freely chose their intentions and decisions; at the same time,

however, an experienced psychological analyst can track the

causative conditions of these choices without much difficulty.

Much of this conditioning is hidden within our childhood; the

memories may be receding into the distance, but we carry the

results of our early experiences around with us throughout our

lives.

The better our understanding of the causality of the human

personality, the stronger the impression that humanity is a part

of nature and society, subject to dependencies we are ever bet-

ter able to understand. Overcome by human nostalgia, we then

wonder if there is really no room for a scope of freedom, for a

Purusha9? The more progress we make in our art of under-

9 Sanskrit. A word literally meaning “man”; but bearing the mystical signifi-

cance of the “Ideal Man”, the Higher Self within. The term Purusha is often

used in the Esoteric philosophy to express the Spirit or the everlasting entita-

tive individual of a Universe, a Solar System, or of a man. Purusha comes

from the verb-root pri – to fill, to make complete, to bestow. One of the two

52

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

standing human causation, the better we are able to liberate the

person who trusts us from the toxic effects of conditioning,

which has unnecessarily constricted his freedom of proper

comprehension and decision making. We are thus in a position

to close ranks with our patient in a search for the best way out

of his problems. If we succumb to the temptation of using the

natural structure of psychological concepts for this purpose, our

advice to him would sound similar to the many non-productive

pronouncements he has already heard and that never quite

manage to really help him to become free of his problem.

The everyday, ordinary, psychological, societal, and moral

world view is a product of man’s developmental process within

a society, under the constant influence of innate traits. Among

these innate traits are mankind’s phylogenetically determined

instinctive foundation, and the upbringing furnished by the

family and the environment. No person can develop without

being influenced by other people and their personalities, or by

the values imbued by his civilization and his moral and relig-

ious traditions. That is why his natural world view of humans

can be neither sufficiently universal nor completely true. Dif-

ferences among individuals and nations are the product of both

inherited dispositions and the ontogenesis10 of personalities.

It is thus significant that the main values of this human

world view of nature indicate basic similarities in spite of great

divergences in time, race, and civilization. This world view

quite obviously derives from the nature of our species and the

natural experience of human societies which have achieved a

certain necessary level of civilization. Refinements based on

literary values or philosophical and moral reflections do show

differences, but, generally speaking, they tend to bring together

the natural conceptual languages of various civilizations and

eras. People with a humanistic education may therefore get the

impression that they have achieved wisdom. We shall also

ultimate realities of Sankhya philosophy. The divine Self, the absolute Real-

ity, pure Consciousness. [Editor’s note.]

10 Ontogeny (also ontogenesis or morphogenesis) describes the origin and the

development of an organism from the fertilized egg to its mature form. On-

togeny is studied in developmental biology. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

53

continue to respect the wisdom of that “common sense” de-

rived from life experience and reflections thereon.

However, a conscientious psychologist must ask the follow-

ing questions: Even if the natural world view has been refined,

does it mirror reality with sufficient reliability? Or does it only

mirror our species’ perception? To what extent can we depend

upon it as a basis for decision making in the individual, societal

and political spheres of life?

Experience teaches us, first of all, that this natural world

view has permanent and characteristic tendencies toward de-

formation dictated by our instinctive and emotional features.

Secondly, our work exposes us to many phenomena which

cannot be understood nor described by natural language alone.

An objective scientific language able to analyze the essence of

a phenomenon thus becomes an indispensable tool. It has also

shown itself to be similarly indispensable for an understanding

of the questions presented within this book.

Now, having laid the groundwork, let us attempt a listing of

the most important reality-deforming tendencies and other

insufficiencies of the natural human world view.

Those emotional features which are a natural component of

the human personality are never completely appropriate to the

reality being experienced. This results both from our instinct

and from our common errors of upbringing. That is why the

best tradition of philosophical and religious thought have coun-

seled subduing the emotions in order to achieve a more accu-

rate view of reality.

The natural world view is also characterized by a similar,

emotional, tendency to endow our opinions with moral judg-

ment, often so negative as to represent outrage. This appeals to

tendencies which are deeply rooted in human nature and socie-

tal customs. We easily extrapolate this method of comprehen-

sion onto manifestations of improper human behavior, which

are, in fact, caused by minor psychological deficiencies. When

another individual behaves in a way that we deem to be “bad”,

we tend to make a judgment of negative intent rather than seek-

ing to understand the psychological conditions that might be

driving them, and convincing them that they are, in fact, behav-

ing very properly. Thus, any moralizing interpretation of minor

54

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

psychopathological phenomena is erroneous and merely leads

to an exceptional number of unfortunate consequences, which

is why we shall repeatedly refer to it.

Another defect of the natural world view is its lack of uni-

versality. In every society, a certain percentage of the people

has developed a world view a good deal different from that

used by the majority. The causes of the aberrations are by no

means qualitatively monolithic; we will be discussing them in

greater detail in the fourth chapter.

Another essential deficiency of the natural world view is its

limited scope of applicability. Euclidean geometry would suf-

fice for a technical reconstruction of our world and for a trip to

the moon and the closest planets. We only need a geometry

whose axioms are less natural if we reach inside of an atom or

outside of our solar system. The average person does not en-

counter phenomena for which Euclidean geometry would be

insufficient. Sometime during his lifetime, virtually every per-

son is faced with problems he must deal with. Since a compre-

hension of the truly operational factors is beyond the ken of his

natural world view, he generally relies on emotion: intuition

and the pursuit of happiness. Whenever we meet a person

whose individual world view developed under the influence of

non-typical conditions, we tend to pass moral judgment upon

him in the name of our more typical world view. In short,

whenever some unidentified psychopathological factor comes

into play, the natural human world view ceases to be applica-

ble.

Moving further, we often meet with sensible people en-

dowed with a well-developed natural world view as regards

psychological, societal, and moral aspects, frequently refined

via literary influences, religious deliberations, and philosophi-

cal reflections. Such persons have a pronounced tendency to

overrate the values of their world view, behaving as though it

were an objective basis for judging other people. They do not

take into account the fact that such a system of apprehending

human matters can also be erroneous, since it is insufficiently

objective. Let us call such an attitude the “egotism of the natu-

ral world view”. To date, it has been the least pernicious type

of egotism, being merely an overestimation of that method of

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

55

comprehension containing the eternal values of human experi-

ence.

Today, however, the world is being jeopardized by a phe-

nomenon which cannot be understood nor described by means

of such a natural conceptual language; this kind of egotism thus

becomes a dangerous factor stifling the possibility of objective

counteractive measures. Developing and popularizing the ob-

jective psychological world view could thus significantly ex-

pand the scope of dealing with evil, via sensible action and

pinpointed countermeasures.

The objective psychological language, based on mature phi-

losophical criteria, must meet the requirements derived from its

theoretical foundations, and meet the needs of individual and

macrosocial practice. It should be evaluated fully on the basis

of biological realities and constitute an extension of the analo-

gous conceptual language elaborated by the older naturalistic

sciences, particularly medicine. Its range of applicability

should cover all those facts and phenomena conditioned upon

cognizable biological factors for which this natural language

has proved inadequate. It should, within this framework, allow

sufficient understanding of the contents, and varied causes, for

the genesis of the above-mentioned deviant world views.

Elaborating such a conceptual language, being far beyond

the individual scope of any scientist, is a step-by-step affair; by

means of the contribution of many researchers, it matures to the

point when it could be organized under philosophical supervi-

sion in the light of above-mentioned foundations. Such a task

would greatly contribute to the development of all bio-

humanistic and social sciences by liberating them from the

limitations and erroneous tendencies imposed by the overly

great influence of the natural language of psychological imagi-

nation, especially when combined with an excessive compo-

nent of egotism.

Most of the questions dealt with in this book are beyond the

scope of applicability of the natural language. The fifth chapter

shall deal with a macrosocial phenomenon which has rendered

our traditional scientific language completely deceptive. Un-

derstanding these phenomena thus requires consistent separa-

tion from the habits of that method of thinking and the use of

56

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

the most objective system of concepts possible. For this pur-

pose, it proves necessary to develop the contents, organize

them, and familiarize the readers with them as well.

At the same time, an examination of the phenomena whose

nature forced the use of such a system will render a great con-

tribution to enriching and perfecting the objective system of

concepts.

While working on these matters, the author gradually accus-

tomed himself to comprehending reality by means of this very

method, a way of thinking which turned out to be both the most

appropriate and the most economical in terms of time and ef-

fort. It also protects the mind from its own natural egotism and

any excessive emotionalism.

In the course of the above-mentioned inquiries, each re-

searcher went through his own period of crisis and frustration

when it became evident that the concepts he had trusted thus

far proved to be inapplicable. Ostensibly, correct hypotheses

formulated in the scientifically improved natural conceptual

language turned out to be completely unfounded in the light of

facts, and of preliminary statistical calculations. At the same

time, the elaboration of concepts better suited for investigated

reality became extremely complex: after all, the key to the

question lies in a scientific area still in the process of develop-

ment.

Surviving this period thus required an acceptance of and a

respect for a feeling of nescience11 truly worthy of a philoso-

pher. Every science is born in an area uninhabited by popular

imaginings that must be overcome and left behind. In this case,

however, the procedure had to be exceptionally radical; we had

to venture into any area indicated by systematic analysis of the

facts we observed and experienced from within a full-blown

condition of macrosocial evil, guided by the light of the re-

quirements of scientific methodology. This had to be upheld in

spite of the difficulties caused by extraordinary outside condi-

tions and by our own human personalities.

Very few of the many people who started out on this road

were able to arrive at the end, since they withdrew for various

reasons connected to this period of frustration. Some of them

11 Literally, the absence of knowledge. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

57

concentrated on a single question; succumbing to a kind of

fascination regarding its scientific value; they delved into de-

tailed inquiries. Their achievements may be present in this

work, since they understood the general mining of their work.

Others gave up in the face of scientific problems, personal

difficulties, or the fear of being discovered by the authorities,

who are highly vigilant in such matters.

Perusing this book will therefore confront the reader with

similar problems, albeit on a much smaller scale. A certain

impression of injustice may be conveyed due to the need to

leave behind a significant portion of our prior conceptualiza-

tions, the feeling that our natural world view is inapplicable,

and the expendability of some emotional entanglements. I

therefore ask my readers to accept these disturbing feelings in

the spirit of the love of knowledge and its redeeming values.

The above explanations were crucial in order to render the

language of this work more easily comprehensible to the read-

ers. The author has attempted to approach the matters described

herein in such a way as to avoid both losing touch with the

world of objective concepts and becoming incomprehensible to

anyone outside a narrow circle of specialists. We must thus beg

the reader to pardon any slips along the tightrope between the

two methods of thought. However, the author would not be an

experienced psychologist if he could not predict that some

readers will reject the scientific data adduced within this work,

feeling that they constitute an attack upon the natural wisdom

of their life-experience.

The Human Individual

When Auguste Comte12 attempted to found the new science

of sociology during the early nineteenth century, i.e. well be-

12 Auguste Comte (1798 - 1857) was a French positivist thinker who invented

the term “sociology” to name the new science made by Saint-Simon. Comte

saw a “universal law” at work in all sciences which he called the “law of

three phases”. It is for this law that he is best known in the English-speaking

world; namely, that society has gone through three phases: Theological,

Metaphysical, and Scientific. He also gave the name “Positive” to the last of

these. The other universal law he called the “encyclopedic law”. By combin-

ing these laws, Comte developed a systematic and hierarchical classification

of all sciences, including inorganic physics (astronomy, earth science and

58

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

fore modern psychology was born, he was immediately con-

fronted with the problem of man, a mystery he could not solve.

If he rejected the Catholic Church’s oversimplifications of

human nature, then nothing remained except traditional

schemes for comprehending the personality, derived from well

known social conditions. He thus had to avoid this problem,

among others, if he wanted to create his new scientific branch

under such conditions.

Therefore, he accepted that the basic cell of society is the

family, something much easier to characterize and treat like an

elementary model of societal relations. This could also be ef-

fected by means of a language of comprehensible concepts,

without confronting problems which could truly not have been

overcome at the time. Slightly later, J. S. Mill13 pointed out the

resulting deficiencies of psychological cognition and the role of

the individuals.

chemistry) and organic physics (biology and for the first time, physique

sociale, later renamed sociologie). Comte saw this new science, sociology, as

the last and greatest of all sciences, one that would include all other sciences,

and which would integrate and relate their findings into a cohesive whole.

(Wikipedia)

13 John Stuart Mill (1806 – 1873), an English philosopher and political

economist, was an influential liberal thinker of the 19th century. He was an

advocate of utilitarianism, the ethical theory first proposed by his godfather

Jeremy Bentham. During his time as an MP, Mill advocated easing the bur-

dens on Ireland, and became the first person in parliament to call for women

to be given the right to vote. In “Considerations on Representative Govern-

ment”, Mill called for various reforms of Parliament and voting, especially

proportional representation, the Single Transferable Vote, and the extension

of suffrage. He was godfather to Bertrand Russell. Mill argued that it is

Government’s role only to remove the barriers, such as laws, to behaviors

that do not harm others. Crucially, he felt that offense did not constitute

harm, and therefore supported almost total freedom of speech; only in cases

where free speech would lead to direct harm did Mill wish to limit it. For

example, whipping up an angry mob to go and attack people would not be

defended in Mill’s system. Mill argued that free discourse was vital to ensure

progress. He argued that we could never be sure if a silenced opinion did not

hold some portion of the truth. Ingeniously, he also argued that even false

opinions have worth, in that in refuting false opinions the holders of true

opinions have their beliefs reaffirmed. Without having to defend one’s be-

liefs, Mill argued, the beliefs would become dead and we would forget why

we held them at all. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

59

Only now is sociology successfully dealing with the diffi-

culties which resulted, laboriously reinforcing the existing

foundations of science by the achievements of psychology, a

science which by its very nature treats the individual as the

basic object of observation. This restructuring and acceptance

of an objective psychological language will in time permit

sociology to become a scientific discipline which can mirror

the social reality with sufficient objectivity and attention to

detail in order to render it a basis for practical action. After all,

it is man who is the basic unit of society, including the entire

complexity of his human personality.

In order to understand the functioning of an organism,

medicine begins with cytology, which studies the variegated

structures and functions of cells. If we want to understand the

laws governing social life, we must similarly first understand

the individual human being, his physiological and psychologi-

cal nature, and fully accept the quality and scope of differences

(particularly psychological ones) among the individuals who

constitute two sexes, different families, associations, and social

groups, as well as the complex structure of society itself.

The doctrinaire and propaganda-based Soviet system con-

tains a characteristic built-in contradiction whose causes will

be readily understandable toward the end of this book. Man’s

descent from the animals, bereft of any extraordinary occur-

rences, is accepted there as the obvious basis for the materialis-

tic world view. At the same time, however, they suppress the

fact that man has an instinctive endowment, i.e. something in

common with the rest of the animal world. If faced with espe-

cially troublesome questions, they sometimes admit that man

contains an insignificant survival of such phylogenetic heri-

tage, however, they prevent the publication of any work study-

ing this basic phenomenon of psychology.14

14 See: “A Mess in Psychiatry”, an interview with Robert van Voren, General

Secretary of Geneva Initiative on Psychiatry, published in the Dutch newspa-

per De Volkskrant on August 9, 1997 where he says: “Since 1950 Soviet

psychiatry has not just been standing still, but has gone downhill. Absolutely

nothing has changed. The bulk of the [Russian] psychiatrists could never find

a job as a psychiatrist in the West. There, methods of treatment are customary

about which you cannot even talk anymore in the West. ” [Editor’s note.]

60

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

In order to understand humanity, however, we must gain a

primary understanding of mankind’s instinctive substratum and

appreciate its salient role in the life of individuals and socie-

ties. This role easily escapes our notice, since our human spe-

cies’ instinctive responses seem so self-evident and are so

much taken for granted that it arouses insufficient interest. A

psychologist, schooled in the observation of human beings,

does not fully appreciate the role of this eternal phenomenon of

nature until he has years of professional experience.

Man’s instinctive substratum has a slightly different bio-

logical structure than that of animals. Energetically speaking, it

has become less dynamic and become more plastic, thereby

giving up its job as the main dictator of behavior. It has become

more receptive to the controls of reasoning, without, however,

losing much of the rich specific contents of the human kind.

It is precisely this phylogenetically developed basis for our

experience, and its emotional dynamism, that allow individuals

to develop their feelings and social bounds, enabling us to in-

tuit other people’s psychological state and individual or social

psychological reality. It is thus possible to perceive and under-

stand human customs and moral values. From infancy, this

substratum stimulates various activities aiming at the develop-

ment of the mind’s higher functions. In other words, our in-

stinct is our first tutor, whom we carry inside all our lives.

Proper child-rearing is thus not limited to teaching a young

person to control the overly violent reactions of his instinctual

emotionalism; it also ought to teach him to appreciate the wis-

dom of nature contained and speaking through his instinctive

endowment

This substratum contains millions of years’ worth of bio-

psychological development that was the product of species’ life

conditions, so it neither is nor can be a perfect creation. Our

well known weaknesses of human nature and errors in the natu-

ral perception and comprehension of reality have thus been

conditioned on that phylogenetic level for millennia.15

15 Konrad Lorenz: Evolution and Modification of Behavior (1965); On Ag-

gression (1966); Studies in Animal and Human Behavior, Volume I (1970);

Studies in Animal and Human Behavior, Volume II (1971); Behind the Mirror

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

61

The common substratum of psychology has made it possi-

ble for peoples throughout the centuries and civilizations to

create concepts regarding human, social, and moral matters

which share significant similarities. Inter-epochal and interra-

cial variations in this area are less striking than those differen-

tiating persons whose instinctual human substratum is normal

from those who are carriers of an instinctual bio-psychological

defect, though they are members of the same race and civiliza-

tion. It shall behoove us to return to this latter question repeat-

edly, since it has taken on a crucial importance for the prob-

lems dealt with in this book.

Man has lived in groups throughout his prehistory, so our

species’ instinctual substratum was shaped in this tie, thus con-

ditioning our emotions as regards the mining of existence. The

need for an appropriate internal structure of commonality, and

a striving to achieve a worthy role within that structure, are

encoded at this very level. In the final analysis, our self-

preservation instinct is rivaled by another feeling: the good of

society demands that we make sacrifices, sometimes even the

supreme sacrifice. At the same time, however, it is worth point-

ing out that if we love a man, we love his human instinct above

all.

Our zeal to control anyone harmful to ourselves or our

group is so primal in its near-reflex necessity as to leave no

doubt that it is also encoded at the instinctual level. Our in-

stinct, however, does not differentiate between behavior moti-

vated by simple human failure and behavior performed by indi-

viduals with pathological aberrations. Quite the contrary: we

(1973); The Natural Science of the Human Species: An Introduction to Com-

parative Behavioral Research - The Russian Manuscript (1944-1948)(1995).

Lorenz joined the Nazi Party in 1938 and accepted a university chair under

the Nazi regime. His publications during that time led in later years to allega-

tions that his scientific work had been contaminated by Nazi sympathies.

When accepting the Nobel Prize, he apologized for a 1940 publication that

included Nazi views of science, saying that “many highly decent scientists

hoped, like I did, for a short time for good from National Socialism, and

many quickly turned away from it with the same horror as I.” It seems highly

likely that Lorenz’s ideas about an inherited basis for behavior patterns were

congenial to the Nazi authorities, but there is no evidence to suggest that his

experimental work was either inspired or distorted by Nazi ideas. [Editor’s

note.]

62

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

instinctively tend to judge the latter more severely, harkening

to nature’s striving to eliminate biologically or psychologically

defective individuals. Our tendency to such evil generating

error is thus conditioned at the instinctual level.

It is also at this level that differences begin to occur be-

tween normal individuals, influencing the formation of their

characters, world views, and attitudes. The primary differences

are in the bio-psychical dynamism of this substratum; differ-

ences of content are secondary. For some people the sthenic16

instinct supersedes psychology; for others, it easily relinquishes

control to reason. It also appears that some people have a

somewhat richer and more subtle instinctual endowment than

others. Significant deficiencies in this heritage nevertheless

occur in only a tiny percentage of the human population; and

we perceive this to be qualitatively pathological. We shall have

to pay closer attention to such anomalies, since they participate

in that pathogenesis of evil which we would like to understand

more fully.

A more subtle structure of effect is built upon our instinc-

tual substratum, thanks to constant cooperation from the latter

as well as familial and societal child-rearing practices. With

time, this structure becomes a more easily observable compo-

nent of our personality, within which it plays an integrative

role. This higher effect is instrumental in linking us to society,

which is why its correct development is a proper duty of peda-

gogues and constitutes one of the objects of a psychotherapist’s

efforts, if perceived to be abnormally formed. Both pedagogues

and psychotherapists sometimes feel helpless, if this process of

formation was influenced by a defective instinctual substratum.

~~~

Thanks to memory, that phenomenon ever better described

by psychology, but whose nature remains partly mysterious,

man stores life-experiences and purposely acquired knowledge.

There are extensive individual variations in regard to this ca-

pacity, its quality, and its contents. A young person also looks

at the world differently from an old man endowed with a good

memory. People with a good memory and a great deal of

16 Relating to or marked by sthenia; strong, vigorous, or active. [Editor’s

note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

63

knowledge have a greater tendency to reach for the written data

of collective memory in order to supplement their own.

This collected material constitutes the subject matter of the

second psychological process, namely association; our under-

standing of its characteristics is constantly improving, although

we have not yet been able to shed sufficient light upon its nur-

turance. In spite of, or maybe thanks to, the value judgments

contributed to this question by psychologists and psychoana-

lysts, it appears that achieving a satisfactory synthetic under-

standing of the associative processes will not be possible unless

and until we humbly decide to cross the boundaries of purely

scientific comprehension.

Our reasoning faculties continue to develop throughout our

entire active lives, thus, accurate judgmental abilities do not

peak until our hair starts greying and the drive of instinct, emo-

tion, and habit begins to abate. It is a collective product derived

from an interaction between man and his environment, and

from many generations’ worth of creation and transmission.

The environment may also have a destructive influence upon

the development of our reasoning faculties. In its environment

in particular, the human mind is contaminated by conversive

thinking17, which is the most common anomaly in this process.

It is for this reason that the proper development of mind re-

quires periods of solitary reflection on occasion.

Man has also developed a psychological function not found

among animals. Only man can apprehend a certain quantity of

material or abstract imaginings within his field of attention,

inspecting them internally in order to effect further operations

of the mind upon this material. This enables us to confront

facts, affect constructive and technical operations, and predict

future results. If the facts subjected to internal projection and

inspection deal with man’s own personality, man performs an

act of introspection essential for monitoring the state of a hu-

17 Conversive thinking: using terms but giving them opposing or twisted

meanings. Examples: peacefulness = appeasement; freedom = license; initia-

tive = arbitrariness; traditional = backward; rally = mob; efficiency = small-

mindedness. Example: the words “peacefulness” and “appeasement” denote

the same thing: a striving to establish peace, but have entirely different con-

notations which indicate the speaker’s attitude toward this striving toward

peace. [Editor’s note.]

64

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

man personality and the meaning of his own behavior. This act

of internal projection and inspection complements our con-

sciousness; it characterizes no species other than the human.

However, there is exceptionally wide divergence among indi-

viduals regarding the capacity for such mental acts. The effi-

ciency of this mental function shows a somewhat low statistical

correlation with general intelligence.

Thus, if we speak of man’s general intelligence, we must

take into account both its internal structure and the individual

differences occurring at every level of this structure. The sub-

stratum of our intelligence, after all, contains nature’s instinc-

tual heritage of wisdom and error, giving rise to the basic intel-

ligence of life experience. Superimposed upon this construct,

thanks to memory and the associative capacity, is our ability to

effect complex operations of thought, crowned by the act of

internal projection, and to constantly improve their correctness.

We are variously endowed with these capabilities, which

makes for a mosaic of individually variegated talents.

Basic intelligence grows from this instinctual substratum

under the influence of an amicable environment and a readily

accessible compendium of human experience; it is intertwined

with higher effect, enabling us to understand others and to in-

tuit their psychological state by means of some naive realism.

This conditions the development of moral reason.

This layer of our intelligence is widely distributed within

society; the overwhelming majority of people have it, which is

why we can so often admire the tact, the intuition, of social

relationships, and sensible morality of people whose intellec-

tual gifts are only average. We also see people with an out-

standing intellect who lack these very natural values. As is the

case with deficiencies in the instinctual substratum, the deficits

of this basic structure of our intelligence frequently take on

features we perceive as pathological.

The distribution of human intellectual capacity within so-

cieties is completely different, and its amplitude has the great-

est scope. Highly gifted people constitute a tiny percentage of

each population, and those with the highest quotient of intelli-

gence constitute only a few per thousand. In spite of this, how-

ever, the latter play such a significant role in collective life that

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

65

any society attempting to prevent them from fulfilling their duty

does so at its own peril. At the same time, individuals barely

able to master simple arithmetic and the art of writing are, in

the majority, normal people whose basic intelligence is often

entirely adequate.

It is a universal law of nature that the higher a given spe-

cies’ psychological organization, the greater the psychological

differences among individual units. Man is the most highly

organized species; hence, these variations are the greatest. Both

qualitatively and quantitatively, psychological differences oc-

cur in all structures of the human personality dealt with here,

albeit in terms of necessary oversimplification. Profound psy-

chological variegations may strike some as an injustice of na-

ture, but they are her right and have meaning.

Nature’s seeming injustice, alluded to above, is, in fact, a

great gift to humanity, enabling human societies to develop

their complex structures and to be highly creative at both the

individual and collective level. Thanks to psychological vari-

ety, the creative potential of any society is many times higher

than it could possibly be if our species were psychologically

more homogeneous. Thanks to these variations, the societal

structure implicit within can also develop. The fate of human

societies depends upon the proper adjustment of individuals

within this structure and upon the manner in which innate

variations of talents are utilized.

Our experience teaches us that psychological differences

among people are the cause of misunderstandings and prob-

lems. We can overcome these problems only if we accept psy-

chological differences as a law of nature and appreciate their

creative value. This would also enable us to gain an objective

comprehension of man and human societies; unfortunately, it

would also teach us that equality under the law is inequality

under the law of nature.

~~~

If we observe our human personality by consistently track-

ing psychological causation within, if we are able to exhaust

the question to a sufficient degree, we shall come ever closer to

phenomena whose biopsychological energy is very low, which

begin to manifest themselves to us with certain characteristic

66

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

subtlety. Discovering this phenomenon, we then attempt to

track our associations particularly because we have exhausted

the available analytical platform. Finally, we must admit to

noticing something within us which is a result of supra-sensory

causation. This path may be the most laborious of all, but it

will nevertheless lead to the most material certainty regarding

the existence of what all the major religious systems talk about.

Attaining some small piece of truth via this path brings us to

respect for some of the teachings of the ancients regarding the

existence of something beyond the material universe.

If we thus wish to understand mankind, man as whole,

without abandoning the laws of thought required by the objec-

tive language, we are finally forced to accept this reality, which

is within each of us, whether normal or not, whether we have

accepted it because we have been brought up that way, or have

achieved such gnosis on our own, or whether we have rejected

it for reasons of materialism or science. After all, invariabley,

when we analyze negative psychological attitudes, we always

discern an affirmation which has been repressed from the field

of consciousness. As a consequence, the constant subconscious

effort of denying concepts about existing things engenders a

zeal to eliminate them in other people.

Trustfully opening our mind to perception of this reality is

thus indispensable for someone whose duty is to understand

other people, and is advisable for everyone else as well. Thanks

to this, our mind is rendered free of internal tensions and

stresses and can be liberated from its tendency to select and

substitute information, including those areas which are more

easily accessible to naturalistic comprehension.

~~~

The human personality is unstable by its very nature, and a

lifelong evolutionary process is the normal state of affairs.

Some political and religious systems advocate slowing down

this process or achieving excessive stability in our personali-

ties, but these are unhealthy states from the point of view of

psychology. If the evolution of a human personality or world

view becomes frozen long and deeply enough, the condition

enters the realm of psychopathology. The process of personal-

ity transformation reveals its meaning thanks to its own crea-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

67

tive nature which is based on the conscious acceptance of this

creative changing as the natural course of events.

Our personalities also pass through temporary destructive

periods as a result of various life events, especially if we un-

dergo suffering or meet with situations or circumstances which

are at variance with our prior experiences and imaginings.

These so-called disintegrative stages are often unpleasant, al-

though not necessarily so. A good dramatic work, for instance,

enables us to experience a disintegrative state, simultaneously

calming down the unpleasant components and furnishing crea-

tive ideas for a renewed reintegration of our own personalities.

True theater therefore causes the condition known as catharsis.

A disintegrative state provokes us to mental efforts in at-

tempts to overcome it in order to regain active homeostasis.

Overcoming such states, in effect, correcting our errors and

enriching our personalities, is a proper and creative process of

reintegration, leading to a higher level of understanding and

acceptance of the laws of life, to a better comprehension of self

and others, and to a more highly developed sensitivity in inter-

personal relationships. Our feelings also validate the successful

achievement of a reintegrative state: the unpleasant conditions

we have survived are endowed with meaning. Thus, the experi-

ence renders us better prepared to confront the next disintegra-

tive situation.

If, however, we have proved unable to master the problems

which occurred because our reflexes were too quick to repress

and substitute the uncomfortable material from our conscious-

ness, or for some similar reason, our personality undergoes

retroactive egotization,18 but it is not free of the sensation of

failure. The results are devolutionary; the person becomes more

difficult to get along with. If we cannot overcome such a disin-

tegrative state because the causative circumstances were over-

powering or because we lacked the information essential for

constructive use, our organism reacts with a neurotic condition.

~~~

The diagram of the human personality presented herein,

summarized and simplified for reasons of necessity, makes us

aware of how complex human beings are in their structure,

18 Similar to narcissistic withdrawal. [Editor’s note.]

68

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

their changes, and their mental and spiritual lives. If we wish to

create social sciences whose descriptions of our reality would

be capable of enabling us to rely on them in practice, we must

accept this complexity and make certain that it is sufficiently

respected. Any attempt to substitute this basic knowledge with

the help of oversimplifying schemes leads to loss of that indis-

pensable convergence between our reasoning and the reality we

are observing. It behooves us to reemphasize that using our

natural language of psychological imaginations for this purpose

cannot be a substitute for objective premises.

Similarly, it is extremely difficult for a psychologist to be-

lieve in the value of any social ideology based on simplified or

even naive psychological premises. This applies to any ideol-

ogy which attempts to over-simplify psychological reality,

whether it be one utilized by a totalitarian system or, unfortu-

nately, by democracy as well. People are different. Whatever is

qualitatively different and remains in a state of permanent evo-

lution cannot be equal.

~~~

The above-mentioned statements about human nature apply

to normal people, with a few exceptions. However, each soci-

ety on earth contains a certain percentage of individuals, a rela-

tively small but active minority, who cannot be considered

normal.

We emphasize that here we are dealing with qualitative, not

statistical, abnormality. Outstandingly intelligent persons are

statistically abnormal, but they can be quite normal members of

society from the qualitative point of view. We are going to be

looking at individuals that are statistically small in number, but

whose quality of difference is such that it can affect hundreds,

thousands, even millions of other human beings in negative

ways.

The individuals we wish to consider are people who reveal

morbid19 phenomena, and in whom mental deviations and

anomalies of various qualities and intensities can be observed.

Many such people are driven by internal anxieties: they search

for unconventional paths of action and adjustment to life with a

19 Diseased; caused by or altered by or manifesting disease or pathology.

[Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

69

certain characteristic hyperactivity. In some cases, such activity

can be pioneering and creative, which ensures societal toler-

ance for some of these individuals. Some psychiatrists, espe-

cially Germans, have praised such people as embodying the

principal inspiration for the development of civilization; this is

a damagingly unilateral view of reality. Laymen in the field of

psychopathology frequently gain the impression that such per-

sons represent some extraordinary talents. This very science,

however, then goes on to explain that these individuals’ hyper-

activity and sense of being exceptional are derived from their

drive to overcompensate for a feeling of some deficiency. This

aberrant attitude results in the obscuration of the truth: that

normal people are the richest of all.

The fourth chapter of the book contains a concise descrip-

tion of some of these anomalies, their causes, and the biologi-

cal reality, selected in such a way as to facilitate comprehen-

sion of this work as a whole. Other data are distributed

throughout many specialized works that will not be included

here. However, we must consider the overall shape of our

knowledge in this area, which is so basic to our understanding

of, and practical solutions to, many difficult problems of social

life, is unsatisfactory. Many scientists treat this area of science

as being peripheral; others consider it “thankless” because it

easily leads to misunderstandings with other specialists. As a

consequence, various concepts and various semantic conven-

tions emerge, and the totality of knowledge in this science is

still characterized by an excessively descriptive nature. This

book therefore encompasses efforts whose purpose was to

bring to light the causative aspects of the descriptively known

phenomena.

The pathological phenomena in question, usually of a suffi-

ciently low intensity which can be more easily concealed from

environmental opinion, merge without much difficulty into the

eternal process of the genesis of evil, which later affects peo-

ple, families, and entire societies. Later in this book, we shall

learn that these pathological factors become indispensable

components in a synthesis which results in widescale human

suffering, and also that tracking their activities by means of

70

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

scientific control and social consciousness may prove to be an

effective weapon against evil.

For the above reasons, this scope of psychopathological sci-

ence represents an indispensable part of that objective language

we have dealt with before. Ever-increasing accuracy in biologi-

cal and psychological facts in this area is an essential precondi-

tion for an objective comprehension of many phenomena

which become extremely onerous for societies, as well as for a

modern solution to age-old problems. Biologists, physicians,

and psychologists who have been struggling with these elusive

and convoluted problems deserve assistance and encourage-

ment from society, since their work will enable the future pro-

tection of people and nations from an evil whose causes we do

not as yet sufficiently understand.

Society

Nature has designed man to be social, a state of affairs en-

coded early, on the instinctual level of our species as described

above. Our minds and personalities could not possibly develop

without contact and interaction with an ever-widening circle of

people. Our mind receives input from others, whether con-

sciously or unconsciously, in regard to matters of emotional

and mental life, tradition and thought, by means of resonant

sensitivity, identification, imitation, and by exchange of ideas,

and permanent rules. The material we obtain in these ways is

then transformed by our psyche in order to create a new human

personality, one we call “our own”. However, our existence is

contingent upon necessary links with those who lived before,

those who presently make up our society, and those who shall

exist in the future. Our existence only assumes meaning as a

function of societal bonds; hedonistic isolation causes us to

lose our selves.

It is man’s fate to actively cooperate in giving shape to the

fate of society by two principal means: forming his individual

and family life within it, and becoming active in the sum total

of social affairs based on his – hopefully sufficient - compre-

hension of what needs to be done, what ought to be done, and

whether or not he can do it. This requires an individual to de-

velop two somewhat overlapping areas of knowledge about

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

71

things; his life depends on the quality of this development, as

does his nation and humanity as a whole.

If, say, we observe a beehive with a painter’s eye, we see

what looks like a crowding throng of insects linked by their

species-similarity. A beekeeper, however, tracks complicated

laws encoded in every insect’s instinct and in the collective

instinct of the hive as well; that helps him understand how to

cooperate with the laws of nature governing apiary society. The

beehive is a higher-order organism; no individual bee can exist

without it, and thus it submits to the absolute nature of its laws.

If we observe the throngs of people crowding the streets of

some great human metropolis, we see what looks like individu-

als driven by their business and problems, pursuing some

crumb of happiness. However, such an oversimplification of

reality causes us to disregard the laws of social life which ex-

isted long before the metropolis ever did, and which will con-

tinue to exist long after huge cities are emptied of people and

purpose. Loners in a crowd have a difficult time accepting that

reality, which – for them - exists in only potential form, al-

though they cannot perceive it directly.

In reality, accepting the laws of social life in all their com-

plexity, even if we find initial difficulties in comprehending

them, helps us to come, finally, to a certain level of understand-

ing that we acquire by something akin to osmosis. Thanks to

this comprehension, or even just an instinctive intuition of such

laws, an individual is able to reach his goals and mature his

personality in action. Thanks to sufficient intuition and com-

prehension of these conditions, a society is able to progress

culturally and economically and to achieve political maturity.

The more we progress in this understanding, the more social

doctrines strike us as primitive and psychologically naive, es-

pecially those based on the thoughts of thinkers living during

the 18th and 19th centuries which were characterized by a

dearth of psychological perception. The suggestive nature of

these doctrines derives from their oversimplification of reality,

something easily adapted and used in political propaganda.

These doctrines and ideologies show their basic faults, in re-

gard to the understanding of human personalities and differ-

ences among people, all rather clearly if viewed in the light of

72

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

our natural language of psychological concepts, and even more

so in the light of objective language.

A psychologist’s view of society, even if based only on pro-

fessional experience, always places the human individual in the

foreground; it then widens the perspective to include small

groups, such as families, and finally societies and humanity as

whole. We must then accept from the outset that an individ-

ual’s fate is significantly dependent upon circumstance. When

we gradually increase the scope of our observations, we also

gain a greater pictorial specificity of causative links, and statis-

tical data assume ever greater stability.

In order to describe the interdependence between someone’s

fate and personality, and the state of development of society,

we must study the entire body of information collected in this

area to date, adding a new work written in objective language.

Herein I shall adduce only a few examples of such reasoning in

order to open the door to questions presented in later chapters.

~~~

Throughout the ages and in various cultures, the best peda-

gogues have understood the importance, regarding the forma-

tion of a culture and a person’s character, of the scope of con-

cepts describing psychological phenomena. The quality and

richness of concepts and terminology20 mastered by an individ-

20 !obaczewski’s emphasis on language is very important. Semiotics is the

study of language or any other symbol system that conveys meaning. One of

the great philosophical discussions that has continued for centuries relates to

that of the alphabet giver and “namer” of things. In the monotheistic world,

Adam is, of course, the one we think of when we think of the “giving of

names” to things. In terms of the study of Semiotics, the question is: did he

name things based on what they were, in essence, or did he simply create a

convention, and arbitrarily name them whatever appealed to him?

The theories of Semiotics propose that there are two levels, or “planes of

articulation”. At the level of any given language, such as Greek, English,

Chinese, or whatever, there is what they call the “Expression plane” that

consists of a lexicon, a phonology and syntax. In other words, the Expression

Plane is the selection of words that belong to that language, the sounds that

the selection of words produce, and the way they are arranged to convey

meaning. That is the first plane. The second plane is called the Content Plane.

This is the array of concepts that the language is capable of expressing. This

last is rather important because, as we have all heard at least once in our

lives, Eskimos have many words for snow while people who do not live in an

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

73

ual and society, as well as the degree to which they approxi-

mate an objective world view, condition the development of

our moral and social attitudes. The correctness of our under-

standing of self and others characterizes the components condi-

tioning our decisions and choices, be they mundane or impor-

tant, in our private lives and social activities.

The level and quality of a given society’s psychological

worldview is also a condition of realization of the full socio-

psychological structure present as a potential in the psycho-

logical variety within our species. Only when we can under-

stand a person in relation to his actual internal contents, not

some substituted external label, can we help him along his path

to proper adjustment to social life, which would be to his ad-

vantage and would also assist in the creation of a stable and

creative structure of society.

Supported by a proper feel for, and understanding of, psy-

chological qualities, such a structure would impart high social

office to individuals possessing both full psychological normal-

ity, sufficient talent and specific preparation. The basic collec-

tive intelligence of the masses of people would then respect

and support them.

And so, in such a society, the only pending problems to be

resolved would be those matters so difficult as to overwhelm

the natural language of concepts, however enriched and quali-

tatively ennobled.

However, there have always been “society pedagogues”,

less outstanding but more numerous, who have become fasci-

nated by their own great ideas, which might, sometimes, even

environment where snow and ice are the dominant features may only have

one or two words for these phenomena.

So it is that the “Content Plane” of a language becomes crucial to what can be

discussed in that language. In order for the sounds of speech to be meaning-

ful, the words formed out of these sounds must have a meaning associated

with them. In other words, the sounds relate to the Content. The Content

Continuum represents the Universe or reality to which our words relate as we

are capable of conceiving it.

!obaczewski is rightly pointing out that the normal person (not to mention

psychology as a whole, though to a lesser extent) has an extremely psycho-

logical vocabulary of limited understanding because the content continuum of

understanding has been artificially truncated, repressed, or otherwise dimin-

ished. [Editor’s note.]

74

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

be true, but are more often constricted or contain the taint of

some hidden pathological thought processes. Such people have

always striven to impose pedagogical methods which would

impoverish and deform the development of individuals’ and

societies’ psychological world view; they inflict permanent

harm upon societies, depriving them of universally useful val-

ues. By claiming to act in the name of a more valuable idea,

such pedagogues actually undermine the values they claim and

open the door for destructive ideologies.

At the same time, as we have already mentioned, each soci-

ety contains a small but active minority of persons with various

deviant worldviews, especially in the areas treated above,

which are caused either by psychological anomalies, to be dis-

cussed below, or by the long-term influence of such anomalies

upon their psyches, especially during childhood. Such people

later exert a pernicious influence upon the formative process of

the psychological world view in society, whether by direct

activity or by means of written or other transmission, especially

if they engage in the service of some ideology or other.

Many causes which easily escape the notice of sociologists

and political scientists can thus be broken down into either the

development or involution of this factor, whose meaning for

the life of society is as decisive as the quality of their language

of psychological concepts.

Let us imagine that we want to analyze these processes: we

would construct a sufficiently credible inventory method which

would examine the contents and correctness of the area of

world view in question. After subjecting the appropriate repre-

sentative groups to such testing, we would then obtain indica-

tors of that particular society’s ability to understand psycho-

logical phenomena and dependencies within their country and

other nations. This would simultaneously constitute the basic

indicators of said society’s talent for self-government and pro-

gress, as well as its ability to carry on a reasonable interna-

tional policy. Such tests could provide an early warning system

if such abilities were to deteriorate, in which case, it would be

proper to make the appropriate efforts in the realm of social

pedagogy. In extreme cases, it might be proper for those coun-

tries evaluating the problem to take more direct corrective ac-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

75

tion, even to isolating the deteriorating country until the appro-

priate corrections are well under way.

Let as adduce another example of a congenial nature: the

development of an adult human’s gifts, skills, realistic thought,

and natural psychological world view will be optimal where the

level and quality of his education and the demands of his pro-

fessional practice correspond to his individual talents. Achiev-

ing such a position provides personal, material, and moral ad-

vantages to him; society as whole also reaps benefits at the

same time. Such a person would then perceive it as social jus-

tice in relation to himself.

If various circumstances combine, including a given soci-

ety’s deficient psychological world view, individual’s are

forced to exercise functions which do not make full use of his

or her talents. When this happens, said person’s productivity is

no better, and often even worse, than that of a worker with

satisfactory talents. Such an individual then feels cheated and

inundated by duties which prevent him from achieving self-

realization. His thoughts wander from his duties into a world of

fantasy, or into matters which are of greater interest to him; in

his daydream world, he is what he should and deserves to be.

Such a person always knows if his social and professional ad-

justment has taken a downward direction; at the same time,

however, if he fails to develop a healthy critical faculty con-

cerning the upper limits of his own talents, his daydreams may

“fix on” an unfair world where “all you need is power”. Revo-

lutionary and radical ideas find fertile soil among such people

in downward social adaptations. It is in society’s best interests

to correct such conditions not only for better productivity, but

to avoid tragedies.

Another type of individual, on the other hand, may achieve

an important post because they belong to privileged social

groups or organizations in power while their talents and skills

are not sufficient for their duties, especially the more difficult

problems. Such persons then avoid the problematic and dedi-

cate themselves to minor matters quite ostentatiously. A com-

ponent of histrionics appears in their conduct and tests indicate

that their correctness of reasoning progressively deteriorates

after only a few years’ worth of such activities. In the face of

76

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

increasing pressures to perform at a level unattainable for them,

and in fear of being discovered as incompetent, they begin to

direct attacks against anyone with greater talent or skill, remov-

ing them from appropriate posts and playing an active role in

degrading their social and professional adjustment. This, of

course, engenders a feeling of injustice and can lead to the

problems of the downwardly adapted individual as described

above. Upwardly-adjusted people thus favor whip-cracking,

totalitarian governments which would protect their positions.

Upward and downward social adjustments, as well the

qualitatively improper ones, result in a waste of any society’s

basic capital, namely the talent pool of its members. This si-

multaneously leads to increasing dissatisfaction and tensions

among individuals and social groups; any attempt to approach

human talent and its productivity problematics as a purely pri-

vate matter must therefore be considered dangerously naive.

Development or involution in all areas of cultural, economic

and political life depend on the extent to which this talent pool

is properly utilized. In the final analysis, it also determines

whether there will be evolution or revolution.

Technically speaking, it would be easier to construct appro-

priate methods that enable us to evaluate the correlations be-

tween individual talents and social adjustment in a given coun-

try, than to deal with the prior proposition of the development

of psychological concepts. Conducting the proper tests would

furnish us a valuable index that we might call “the social order

indicator.” The closer the figure to +1.0, the more likely the

country in question would be to fulfill that basic precondition

for social order and take the proper path in the direction of

dynamic development. A low correlation would be an indica-

tion that social reform is needed. A near-zero or even negative

correlation should be interpreted as a danger-sign that revolu-

tion is imminent. Revolutions in one country often cause mani-

fold problems for other countries, so it is in the best interests of

all countries to monitor such conditions.

The examples adduced above do not exhaust the question of

causative factors influencing the creation of a social structure

which would adequately correspond to the laws of nature. Our

species-instinct level has already encoded the intuition that the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

77

existence of society’s internal structure, based on psychologi-

cal variations, is necessary; it continues to develop alongside

our basic intelligence, inspiring our healthy common sense.

This explains why the most numerous part of populations,

whose talents are near average, generally accepts its modest

social position in any country as long as the position fulfills the

indispensable requirements of proper social adjustment and

guarantees an equitable way of life no matter at what level of

society the individual finds their proper fit.

This average majority accepts and respects the social role of

people whose talents and education are superior, as long as

they occupy appropriate positions within the social structure.

The same people, however, will react with criticism, disrespect,

and even contempt, whenever someone as average as them-

selves compensates for his deficiencies by flaunting an up-

wardly-adjusted position. The judgments pronounced by this

sphere of average but sensible people can often be highly accu-

rate, which can and should be all the more remarkable if we

take into account that said people could not possibly have had

sufficient knowledge of many of the actual problems, be they

scientific, technical, or economic.21

An experienced politician can rarely assume that the diffi-

culties in the areas of economics, defense, or international pol-

icy will be fully understand by his constituency. However, he

can and should assume that his own comprehension of human

matters, and anything having to do with interpersonal relations

within said structure, will find an echo in this same majority of

his society’s members. These facts partially justify the idea of

democracy, especially if a particular country has historically

had such a tradition, the social structure is well developed, and

the level of education is adequate. Nevertheless, they do not

represent psychological data sufficient to raise democracy to

the level of a moral criterion in politics. A democracy com-

posed of individuals of inadequate psychological knowledge

can only devolve.

21 Very often false opinion polls are used to attempt to manipulate a society’s

perception of its officials. This never works for very long as, eventually,

incompetence is revealed to all. [Editor’s note.]

78

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

The same politician should be conscious of the fact that so-

ciety contains people who already carry the psychological re-

sults of social maladjustment. Some of these individuals at-

tempt to protect positions for which their skills are not com-

mensurate, while others fight to be allowed to use their talents.

Governing a country becomes increasingly difficult when such

battles begin to eclipse other important needs. That is why the

creation of a fair social structure continues to be a basic pre-

condition for social order and the liberation of creative values.

It also explains why the propriety and productivity of a struc-

ture-creation process constitute a criterion for a good political

system.

Politicians should also be aware that in each society there

are people whose basic intelligence, natural psychological

world view, and moral reasoning have developed improperly.

Some of these persons contain the cause within themselves,

others were subjected to psychologically abnormal people as

children. Such individuals’ comprehension of social and moral

questions is different, both from the natural and from the objec-

tive viewpoint; they constitute a destructive factor for the de-

velopment of society’s psychological concepts, social structure,

and internal bonds.

At the same time, such people easily interpenetrate the so-

cial structure with a ramified22 network of mutual pathological

conspiracies poorly connected to the main social structure.

These people and their networks participate in the genesis of

that evil which spares no nation. This substructure gives birth

to dreams of obtaining power and imposing one’s will upon

society, and is quite often actually brought about in various

countries, and during historical times as well. It is for this rea-

son that a significant portion of our consideration shall be de-

voted to an understanding of this age-old and dangerous source

of problems.

Some countries with a non-homogeneous population mani-

fest further factors which operate destructively upon the forma-

tion of social structure and the permanent developmental proc-

22 Showing one or more branches. In mathematics, ramification is a geomet-

ric term used for “branching out”. It is also used from the opposite perspec-

tive (branches coming together). [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

79

esses of a society’s psychological world view. Primarily among

these are the racial, ethnic, and cultural differences existing in

virtually every conquest-engendered nation. Memories of for-

mer sufferings and contempt for the vanquished continue to

divide the population for centuries. It is possible to overcome

these difficulties if understanding and goodwill prevail

throughout several generations.

Differences in religious beliefs and the moral convictions

related thereto continue to cause problems, albeit less danger-

ous than the above, unless aggravated by some doctrine of

intolerance or superiority of one faith above others. The crea-

tion of a social structure whose links are patriotic and supra-

religious has, after all, been demonstrated as possible.

All these difficulties become extremely destructive if a so-

cial or religious group, in keeping with its doctrine, demands

that its members be accorded positions which are in fact up-

ward-adjusted with relation to these people’s true talents.

A just social structure woven of individually adjusted per-

sons, i.e. creative and dynamic as a whole, can only take shape

if this process is subjected to its natural laws rather than some

conceptual doctrines. It benefits society as a whole for each

individual to be able to find his own way to self-realization

with assistance from a society which understands these laws,

individual interests and the common good.

One obstacle to the development of a society’s psychologi-

cal world view, the building of a healthy societal structure, and

the institution of proper forms for governing the nation, would

appear to be the enormous populations and vast distances of

giant countries. It is just precisely these nations which give rise

to the greatest ethnic and cultural variations. In a vast spreading

land containing hundreds of millions of people, individuals

lack the support of a familiar homeland and feel powerless to

exert an effect upon matters of high politics. The structure of

society becomes lost in wide-open spaces. What remains is

narrow, generally familial, links.

At the same time, governing such a country creates its own

unavoidable problems: giants suffer from what could be called

permanent macropathy (giant sickness), since the principal

authorities are far away from any individual or local matters.

80

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

The main symptom is the proliferation of regulations required

for administration; they may appear proper in the capital but

are often meaningless in outlying districts or when applied to

individual matters. Officials are forced to follow regulations

blindly; the scope of using their human reason and differentiat-

ing real situations becomes very narrow indeed. Such behav-

ioral procedures have an impact upon the society, which also

starts to think regulations instead of practical and psychological

reality. The psychological world view, which constitutes the

basic factor in cultural development and activates social life,

thus becomes involuted.

It thus behooves us to ask: Is good government possible?

Are giant countries capable of sustaining social and cultural

evolution? It would appear, rather, that the best candidates for

development are those countries whose populations number

between ten and twenty million, and where personal bonds

among citizens, and between citizens and their authorities, still

safeguard correct psychological differentiation and natural

relationships. Overly large countries should be divided into

smaller organisms enjoying considerable autonomy, especially

as regards cultural and economic matters; they could afford

their citizens a feeling of homeland within which their person-

alities could develop and mature.

If someone asked me what should be done to heal the

United States of America, a country which manifests symptoms

of macropathy, inter alia, I would advise subdividing that vast

nation into thirteen states--just like the original ones, except

correspondingly larger and with more natural boundaries. Such

states should then be given considerable autonomy. That would

afford citizens a feeling of homeland, albeit a smaller one, and

liberate the motivations of local patriotism and rivalry among

such states. This would, in turn, facilitate solutions to other

problems with a different origin.

~~~

Society is not an organism subordinating every cell to the

good of the whole; neither is it a colony of insects, where the

collective instinct acts like a dictator. However, it should also

avoid being a compendium of egocentric individuals linked

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

81

purely by economic interests and legal and formal organiza-

tions.

Any society is a socio-psychological structure woven of in-

dividuals whose psychological organization is the highest, and

thus the most variegated. A significant scope of man’s individ-

ual freedom derives from this state of affairs and subsists in an

extremely complicated relationship to his manifold psychologi-

cal dependencies and duties, with regard to this collective

whole.

Isolating an individual’s personal interest as if it were at war

with collective interests is pure speculation which radically

oversimplifies real conditions instead of tracking their complex

nature. Asking questions based on such schemes is logically

defective, since it contains erroneous suggestions.

In reality, many ostensibly contradictory interests, such as

individual vs. collective or those of various social groups and

substructures, could be reconciled if we could be guided by a

sufficiently penetrating understanding of the good of man and

society, and if we could overcome the operations of emotions

as well as some more or less primitive doctrines. Such recon-

ciliation, however, requires transferring the human and social

problems in question to a higher level of understanding and

acceptance of the natural laws of life. At this level, even the

most difficult problems turn out to have a solution, since they

invariably derive from the same insidious operations of psy-

chopathological phenomena. We shall deal with this question

toward the end of this book.

A colony of insects, no matter how well-organized socially,

is doomed to extinction whenever its collective instinct contin-

ues to operate according to the psychogenetic code, although

the biological meaning has disappeared. If, for instance, a

queen bee does not affect her nuptial flight in time because the

weather has been particularly bad, she begins laying unfertil-

ized eggs which will hatch nothing but drones. The bees con-

tinue to defend their queen, as required by their instinct; of

course, and when the worker bees die out the hive becomes

extinct.

At that point, only a “higher authority” in the shape of a

beekeeper can save such a hive. He must find and destroy the

82

SOME INDESPENSIBLE CONCEPTS

drone queen and insinuate a healthy fertilized queen into the

hive along with a few of her young workers. A net is required

for a few days to protect such a queen and her providers from

being stung by those bees loyal to the old queen. Then the hive

instinct accepts the new one. The apiarist generally suffers a

few painful stings in the process.

The following question derives from the above comparison:

Can the human hive inhabiting our globe achieve sufficient

comprehension of macrosocial pathological phenomenon

which is so dangerous, abhorrent, and fascinating at the same

time, before it is too late? At present, our individual and collec-

tive instincts and our natural psychological and moral world

view cannot furnish all the answers upon which to base skillful

counteractive measures.

Those fair-minded people who preach that all we have left

is to trust in the “Great Apiarist in the sky” and a return to His

commandments are glimpsing a general truth, but they also

tend to trivialize particular truths, especially the naturalistic

ones. It is the latter which constitute a basis for comprehending

phenomena and targeting practical action. The laws of nature

have made us very different from one another. Thanks to his

individual characteristics, exceptional life-circumstances, and

scientific effort, man may have achieved some mastery of the

art of objectively comprehending the phenomena of the above-

mentioned type, but we must underscore that this could only

occur because it was in accordance with the laws of nature.

If societies and their wise people are able to accept an ob-

jective understanding of social and sociopathological phenom-

ena, overcoming the emotionalism and egotism of the natural

world view for this purpose, they shall find a means of action

based on an understanding of the essence of the phenomena. It

will then become evident that a proper vaccine or treatment can

be found for each of the diseases scourging the earth in the

form of major or minor social epidemics.

Just as a sailor possessing an accurate nautical map enjoys

greater freedom of course-selection and maneuvering amid

islands and bays, a person endowed with a better comprehen-

sion of self, other people, and the complex interdependencies

of social life becomes more independent of the various circum-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

83

stances of life and better able to overcome situations which are

difficult to understand. At the same time, such improved

knowledge makes an individual more liable to accept his duties

toward society and to subordinate himself to the discipline

which arises as a corollary. Better informed societies also

achieve internal order and criteria for collective efforts. This

book is dedicated to reinforcing this knowledge by means of a

naturalistic understanding of phenomena, something heretofore

comprehended only by means of excessively moralistic catego-

ries of the natural world view.

In a wider perspective, a constantly improving grasp of the

laws governing social life, and its atypical secluded recesses,

must lead us to reflect upon the failings and deficiencies of

those social doctrines expounded to date, which were based on

an extremely primitive understanding of these laws and phe-

nomena. The distance is not far between such considerations

and a better understanding of the operations of these dependen-

cies in former and existing social systems; the same applies to

substantive critiques thereof. A new idea is about to be born

based upon this ever-deepening comprehension of natural laws,

namely the building of a new social system for nations.

Such a system would be better than any of its predecessors.

Building it is possible and necessary, not just some vague fu-

turistic vision. After all, a whole series of countries is now

dominated by conditions which have destroyed the structural

forms worked out by history and replaced them with social

systems inimical to creative functioning, systems which can

only survive by means of force. We are thus confronted with a

great construction project demanding wide-ranging and well-

organized work. The earlier we undertake the job, the more

time we will have to carry it out.

CHAPTER III

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

Ever since human societies and civilizations have been cre-

ated on our globe, people have longed for happy times full of

tranquility and justice, which would have allowed everyone to

herd his sheep in peace, search for fertile valleys, plow the

earth, dig for treasures, or build houses and palaces. Man de-

sires peace so as to enjoy the benefits accumulated by earlier

generations and to proudly observe the growth of future ones

he has begotten. Sipping wine or mead in the meantime would

be nice. He would like to wander about, becoming familiar

with other lands and people, or enjoy the star-studded sky of

the south, the colors of nature, and the faces and costumes of

women. He would also like to give free rein to his imagination

and immortalize his name in works of art, whether sculptured

in marble or eternalized in myth and poetry.

From time immemorial, then, man has dreamed of a life in

which the measured effort of mind and muscle would be punc-

tuated by well-deserved rest. He would like to learn nature’s

laws so as to dominate her and take advantage of her gifts. Man

enlisted the natural power of animals in order to make his

dreams come true, and when this did not meet his needs, he

turned to his own kind for this purpose, in part depriving other

humans of their humanity simply because he was more power-

ful.

Dreams of a happy and peaceful life thus gave rise to force

over others, a force which depraves the mind of its user. That is

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

85

why man’s dreams of happiness have not come true throughout

history. This hedonistic view of “happiness” contains the seeds

of misery and feed the eternal cycle whereby good times give

birth to bad times, which in turn cause the suffering and mental

effort which produce experience, good sense, moderation, and

a certain amount of psychological knowledge, all virtues which

serve to rebuild more felicitous conditions of existence.

During good times, people progressively lose sight of the

need for profound reflection, introspection, knowledge of oth-

ers, and an understanding of life’s complicated laws. Is it worth

pondering the properties of human nature and man’s flawed

personality, whether one’s own or someone else’s? Can we

understand the creative meaning of suffering we have not un-

dergone ourselves, instead of taking the easy way out and

blaming the victim? Any excess mental effort seems like point-

less labor if life’s joys appear to be available for the taking. A

clever, liberal, and merry individual is a good sport; a more

farsighted person predicting dire results becomes a wet-blanket

killjoy.

Perception of the truth about the real environment, espe-

cially an understanding of the human personality and its values,

ceases to be a virtue during the so-called “happy” times;

thoughtful doubters are decried as meddlers who cannot leave

well enough alone. This, in turn, leads to an impoverishment of

psychological knowledge, the capacity of differentiating the

properties of human nature and personality, and the ability to

mold minds creatively. The cult of power thus supplants those

mental values so essential for maintaining law and order by

peaceful means. A nation’s enrichment or involution regarding

its psychological world view could be considered an indicator

of whether its future will be good or bad.

During “good” times, the search for truth becomes uncom-

fortable because it reveals inconvenient facts. It is better to

think about easier and more pleasant things. Unconscious

elimination of data which are, or appear to be, inexpedient

gradually turns into habit, and then becomes a custom accepted

by society at large. The problem is that any thought process

based on such truncated information cannot possibly give rise

to correct conclusions; it further leads to subconscious substitu-

86

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

tion of inconvenient premises by more convenient ones,

thereby approaching the boundaries of psychopathology.

Such contented periods for one group of people - often

rooted in some injustice to other people or nations - start to

strangle the capacity for individual and societal consciousness;

subconscious factors take over a decisive role in life. Such a

society, already infected by the hysteroidal23 state, considers

any perception of uncomfortable truth to be a sign of “ill-

breeding”. J. G. Herder’s24 iceberg is drowned in a sea of falsi-

fied unconsciousness; only the tip of the iceberg is visible

above the waves of life. Catastrophe waits in the wings. In such

times, the capacity for logical and disciplined thought, born of

necessity during difficult times, begins to fade. When commu-

nities lose the capacity for psychological reason and moral

criticism, the processes of the generation of evil are intensified

at every social scale, whether individual or macrosocial, until

everything reverts to “bad” times.

We already know that every society contains a certain per-

centage of people carrying psychological deviations caused by

various inherited or acquired factors which produce anomalies

in perception, thought, and character. Many such people at-

tempt to impart meaning to their deviant lives by means of

social hyperactivity. They create their own myths and ideolo-

gies of overcompensation and have the tendency to egotisti-

cally insinuate to others that their own deviant perceptions and

the resulting goals and ideas are superior.

When a few generations’ worth of “good-time” insouciance

results in societal deficit regarding psychological skill and

moral criticism, this paves the way for pathological plotters,

23 Hysteria is a diagnostic label applied to a state of mind, one of unmanage-

able fear or emotional excesses. Here it is being used to describe “fear of

truth” or fear of thinking about unpleasant things so as to not “rock the boat”

of current contentment. [Editor’s note.]

24 Johann Gottfried Herder (1744-1803), a theologian by training and profes-

sion, greatly influenced German letters with his literary criticism and his

philosophy of history. Along with W. Goethe and Schiller, he made Weimar

the seat of German neohumanism. His analogy of national cultures as organic

beings had an enormous impact on modern historical consciousness. Nations,

he argued, possessed not only the phases of youth, maturity, and decline but

also singular, incomparable worth. His mixture of anthropology and history

was characteristic of the age. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

87

snake-charmers, and even more primitive impostors to act and

merge into the processes of the origination of evil. They are

essential factors in its synthesis. In the next chapter I shall at-

tempt to persuade my readers that the participation of patho-

logical factors, so underrated by the social sciences, is a com-

mon phenomenon in the processes of the origin of evil.

Those times which many people later recall as the “good old

days” thus provide fertile soil for future tragedy because of the

progressive devolution of moral, intellectual, and personality

values which give rise to Rasputin-like eras.

The above is a sketch of the causative understanding of real-

ity which in no way contradicts a teleological25 perception of

the sense of causality. Bad times are not merely the result of

hedonistic regression to the past; they have a historical purpose

to fulfill.

Suffering, effort, and mental activity during times of immi-

nent bitterness lead to a progressive, generally heightened,

regeneration of lost values, which results in human progress.

Unfortunately, we still lack a sufficiently exhaustive philoso-

phical grasp of this interdependence of causality and teleology

regarding occurrences. It seems that prophets were more clear-

sighted, in the light of the laws of creation, than philosophers

such as E. S. Russell26, R. B. Braithwaite27, G. Sommerhoff28,

and others who pondered this question.

25 Teleology is the supposition that there is design, purpose, directive princi-

ple, or finality in the works and processes of nature, and the philosophical

study of that purpose. [Editor’s note.]

26 Russell, E.S. 1916. Form and Function: A Contribution to the History of

Animal Morphology. London: Murray. [Editor’s note.]

27 Braithwaite, R.B. (1900-1990): British philosopher best known for his

theories in the philosophy of science and in moral and religious philosophy.

Braithwaite’s work in the philosophy of the physical sciences was important

for his theories on the nature of scientific inductive reasoning and the use of

models, as well as on the use of probabilistic laws. He also applied his scien-

tific background to his studies of moral and religious philosophy, particularly

in the application of mathematical game theory. In his book Theory of Games

as a Tool for the Moral Philosopher (1955), he demonstrated the ways in

which game theory could be used to arrive at moral choices and ethical deci-

sions. His classic work was Scientific Explanation: A Study of Theory, Prob-

ability and Law in Science (1953), on the methodology of natural science.

[Editor's note.]

28 G. Sommerhoff, Analytical Biology (O.U.P., 1950). [Editor’s note.]

88

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

When bad times arrive and people are overwhelmed by an

excess of evil, they must gather all their physical and mental

strength to fight for existence and protect human reason. The

search for some way out of the difficulties and dangers rekin-

dles long-buried powers of discretion. Such people have the

initial tendency to rely on force in order to counteract the

threat; they may, for instance, become “trigger-happy” or de-

pendent upon armies.

Slowly and laboriously, however, they discover the advan-

tages conferred by mental effort; improved understanding of

the psychological situation in particular, better differentiation

of human characters and personalities, and, finally, comprehen-

sion of one’s adversaries. During such times, virtues which

former generations relegated to literary motifs regain their real

and useful substance and become prized for their value. A wise

person capable of furnishing sound advice is highly respected.

How astonishingly similar were the philosophies of Socra-

tes and Confucius, those half-legendary thinkers who, albeit

near-contemporaries, resided at opposite ends of the great con-

tinent. Both lived during evil, bloody times and adumbrated a

method for conquering evil, especially regarding perception of

the laws of life and knowledge of human nature. They searched

for criteria of moral values within human nature and considered

knowledge and understanding to be virtues. Both men, how-

ever, heard the same wordless internal Voice warning those

embarking upon important moral questions: “Socrates, do not

do this”. That is why their efforts and sacrifices constitute per-

manent assistance in the battle against evil.

Difficult and laborious times give rise to values which fi-

nally conquer evil and produce better times. The succinct and

accurate analysis of phenomena, made possible thanks to the

conquest of the expendable emotions and egotism characteriz-

ing self-satisfied people, opens the door to causative behavior,

particularly in the areas of philosophical, psychological, and

moral reflection; this tips the scale to the advantage of good-

ness. If these values were totally incorporated into human-

kind’s cultural heritage, they could sufficiently protect nations

from the next era of errors and distortions. However, the col-

lective memory is impermanent and particularly liable to re-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

89

move a philosopher and his work from his context, namely his

time and place and the goals which he served.

Whenever an experienced person finds a moment of relative

peace after a difficult and painful effort, his mind is free to

reflect unencumbered by the expendable emotions and outdated

attitudes of the past, but aided by the cognizance of bygone

years. He thus comes closer to an objective understanding of

phenomena and a view of actual causative links, including such

links which cannot be understood within the framework of

natural language. He thus meditates upon an ever-expanding

circle of general laws while contemplating the meaning of

those former occurrences which separated the periods of his-

tory. We reach for ancient precepts because we understand

them better; they make it easier for us to understand both the

genesis and the creative meaning of unhappy times.

The cycle of happy, peaceful times favors a narrowing of

the world view and an increase in egotism; societies become

subject to progressive hysteria and to that final stage, descrip-

tively known to historians, which finally produces times of

despondency and confusion, that have lasted for millennia and

continue to do so. The recession of mind and personality which

is a feature of ostensibly happy times varies from one nation to

another; thus some countries manage to survive the results of

such crises with minor losses, whereas others lose nations and

empires. Geopolitical factors have also played a decisive role.

The psychological features of such crises doubtless bear the

stamp of the time and of the civilization in question, but one

common denominator must have been an exacerbation of soci-

ety’s hysterical condition. This deviation or, better yet, forma-

tive deficiency of character, is a perennial sickness of societies,

especially the privileged elites. The existence of exaggerated

individual cases, especially such characterized as clinical, is an

offshoot of the level of social hysteria, quite frequently corre-

lated with some additional causes such as carriers of minor

lesions of brain tissue. Quantitatively and qualitatively, these

individuals may serve to reveal and evaluate such times, as

indicated in history’s Book of San Michele 29. From the perspec-

29 Axel Munthe, (1857-1949) physician, psychiatrist, and writer, was born in

Oskarshamn, Sweden. He was educated at the University of Uppsala and at

90

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

tive of historical time, it would be harder to examine the re-

gression of the ability and correctness of reasoning or the in-

tensity of “Austrian talk”, although these approximate the crux

of the matter better and more directly.

In spite of above-mentioned qualitative differences, the du-

ration of these time-cycles tends to be similar. If we assume

that the extreme of European hysteria occurred around 1900

and returns not quite every two centuries, we find similar con-

ditions. Such cyclical isochronicity may embrace a civilization

and cross into neighboring countries, but it would not swim

oceans or penetrate into faraway and far different civilizations.

When the First World War broke out, young officers danced

and sang on the streets of Vienna: “Krieg, Krieg, Krieg! Es

wird ein schoener Krieg ...”. While visiting Upper Austria in

1978, I decided to drop in on the local parson, who was in his

seventies by then. When I told him about myself, I suddenly

realized he thought I was lying and inventing pretty stories. He

subjected my statements to psychological analysis, based on

this unassailable assumption and attempted to convince me that

his morals were lofty. When I complained to a friend of mine

about this, he was amused: “As a psychologist, you were ex-

tremely lucky to catch the survival of authentic Austrian talk

( die oesterreichische Rede). We young ones have been incapa-

ble of demonstrating it to you even if we wanted to simulate

it.”

In the European languages, “Austrian talk” has become the

common descriptive term for paralogistic30 discourse. Many

people using this term nowadays are unaware of its origin.

Within the context of maximum hysterical intensity in Europe

Montpellier in Paris where he received his M.D. He studied the work of the

French neurologist Jean Martin Charcot and used hypnosis in his own work

with the physical and psychological symptoms of his patients. He later be-

came physician to the Swedish Royal family. He became known as “the

modern St. Francis of Assissi” because he financed sanctuaries for birds. As a

writer Munthe recounted his own experiences as a physician and psychiatrist.

He is most famous for the autobiographical work The Story of San Michele

which was published in 1929. [Editor’s note.]

30 Paralogism: n. illogical or fallacious deduction. paralogical, paralogistic, a.

paralogize, v.i. be illogical; draw unwarranted conclusions. paralogist, n.

[Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

91

at the time, the authentic article represented a typical product of

conversive thinking: subconscious selection and substitution of

data leading to chronic avoidance of the crux of the matter. In

the same manner, the reflex assumption that every speaker is

lying is an indication of the hysterical anti-culture of mendac-

ity, within which telling the truth becomes “immoral”.

That era of hysterical regression gave birth to the great war

and the great revolution which extended into Fascism, Hitler-

ism, and the tragedy of the Second World War. It also pro-

duced the macrosocial phenomenon whose deviant character

became superimposed upon this cycle, screening and destroy-

ing its nature. Contemporary Europe is heading for the opposite

extreme of this historical sine curve. We could thus assume that

the beginning of the next century will produce an era of opti-

mal capability and correctness of reason, thus leading to many

new values in all realms of human discovery and creativity. We

can also foresee that realistic psychological understanding and

spiritual enrichment will be features of this era.

At the same time, America, especially the U.S.A., has

reached a nadir for the first time in its short history. Grey-

haired Europeans living in the U.S. today are struck by the

similarity between these phenomena and the ones dominating

Europe at the times of their youth. The emotionalism dominat-

ing individual, collective and political life, as well as the sub-

conscious selection and substitution of data in reasoning, are

impoverishing the development of a psychological world view

and leading to individual and national egotism. The mania for

taking offense at the drop of a hat provokes constant retaliation,

taking advantage of hyper-irritability and hypo-criticality on

the part of others.31 This can be considered analogous to the

European dueling mania of those times. People fortunate

enough to achieve a position higher than someone else are con-

temptuous of their supposed inferiors in a way highly reminis-

cent of czarist Russian customs. Turn-of-the-century Freudian

psychology finds fertile soil in this country because of the simi-

larity in social and psychological conditions.

America’s psychological recession drags in its wake an im-

paired socio-professional adaptation of this country’s people,

31 The litigious nature of Americans is known the world over. [Editor’s note.]

92

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

leading to a waste of human talent and an involution of societal

structure. If we were to calculate this country’s adaptation cor-

relation index, as suggested in the prior chapter, it would

probably be lower than the great majority of the free and civi-

lized nations of this world, and possibly lower than some coun-

tries which have lost their freedom.

A highly talented individual in the USA finds it ever more

difficult to fight his way through to self-realization and a so-

cially creative position. Universities, politics, and businesses

ever more frequently demonstrate a united front of relatively

untalented persons and even incompetent persons. The word

“overeducated” is heard more and more often. Such “overquali-

fied” individuals finally hide out in some foundation laboratory

where they are allowed to earn the Nobel prize as long as they

don’t do anything really useful. In the meantime, the country as

whole suffers due to a deficit in the inspirational role of highly

gifted individuals.

As a result, America is stifling progress in all areas of life,

from culture to technology and economics, not excluding po-

litical incompetence. When linked to other deficiencies, an

egotist’s incapability of understanding other people and nations

leads to political error and the scapegoating of outsiders.

Slamming the brakes on the evolution of political structures

and social institutions increases both administrative inertia and

discontent on the part of its victims.

We should realize that the most dramatic social difficulties

and tensions occur at least ten years after the first observable

indications of having emerged from a psychological crisis.

Being a sequel, they also constitute a delayed reaction to the

cause or are stimulated by the same psychological activation

process. The time span for effective countermeasures is thus

rather limited.

Is Europe entitled to look down on America for suffering

from the same sickness the former has succumbed to several

times in the past? Is America’s feeling of superiority toward

Europe derived from these past events and their inhuman and

tragic results? If so, is this attitude anything more than a harm-

fless anachronism? It would be most useful if the European

nations took advantage of their historical experience and more

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

93

modern psychological knowledge so as to help America most

effectively.

East Central Europe, now under Soviet domination,32 is part

of the European cycle, albeit somewhat delayed; the same ap-

plies to the Soviet empire, especially to the European portion.

There, however, tracking these changes and isolating them

from more dramatic phenomena eludes the possibilities of ob-

servation, even if it is only a matter of methodology. Even

there, however, there is progressive growth in the grass-roots

resistance of the regenerative power of healthy common sense.

Year by year, the dominant system feels weaker vis-a-vis these

organic transformations. May we add to this a phenomenon the

West finds totally incomprehensible, and which shall be dis-

cussed in greater detail: namely, the growing specific, practical

knowledge about the governing reality within countries whose

regimes are similar. This facilitates individual resistance and a

reconstruction of social links. Such processes shall, in the final

analysis, produce a watershed situation, although it will proba-

bly not be a bloody counter-revolution.

The question suggests itself: Will the time ever come when

this eternal cycle rendering the nations almost helpless can be

conquered? Can countries permanently maintain their creative

and critical activities at a consistently high level? Our era con-

tains many exceptional moments; our contemporary Macbeth

witches’ cauldron holds not only poisonous ingredients, but

also progress and understanding such as humanity has not seen

in millennia.

Upbeat economists point out that humanity has gained a

powerful slave in the form of electric energy and that war, con-

quest, and subjugation of other countries is becoming increas-

ingly unprofitable in the long run. Unfortunately, as we shall

see later in this work, nations can be pushed into economically

irrational desires and actions by other motives whose character

is meta-economic. That is why overcoming these other causes

and phenomena which give rise to evil is a difficult, albeit at

least theoretically attainable, task. However, in order to master

it, we must understand the nature and dynamics of said phe-

32 At the time of writing, 1984.

94

THE HYSTEROIDAL CYCLE

nomena: an old principle of medicine that I will repeat again

and again is: “Ignota, nulla curatio morbi. ”

One accomplishment of modern science, contributing to the

destruction of these eternal cycles, is the development of com-

munication systems which have linked our globe into one huge

“village”. The time cycles sketched herein used to run their

course almost independently in various civilizations at different

geographical locations. Their phases neither were, nor are,

synchronized. We can assume that the American phase lags 80

years behind the European. When the world becomes an inter-

related structure from the viewpoint of communicating both

information and news, different social contents and opinions

caused by unlike phases of said cycles, inter alia, will overflow

all boundaries and information security systems. This will give

rise to pressures which can change the causative dependencies

herein. A more plastic psychological situation thus emerges,

which increases the possibilities for pinpointed action based on

an understanding of the phenomena.

At the same time, in spite of many difficulties of a scien-

tific, social and political nature, we see the development of a

new community of factors which may eventually contribute to

the liberation of mankind from the effects of uncomprehended

historical causation. The development of science, whose final

goal is a better understanding of man and the laws of social

life, could, in the long run, cause public opinion to accept the

essential knowledge about human nature and the development

of the human personality, which will enable the harmful proc-

esses to be controlled. Some forms of international cooperation

and supervision will be needed for this.

The development of human personality and its capacity for

proper thinking and accurate comprehension of reality entails a

certain amount of risk and demands overcoming comfortable

laziness and applying the efforts of special scientific work un-

der conditions quite different from those under which we have

been raised.

Under such conditions, an egotistic personality, accustomed

to a comfortably narrow environment, superficial thinking, and

uncontrolled emotionalism, will experience very favorable

changes, which cannot be induced by anything else. Specially

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

95

altered conditions will cause such a personality to begin disin-

tegrating, thus giving rise to intellectual and cognitive efforts

and moral reflection.

One example of such a program of experience is the Ameri-

can Peace Corps. Young people travel to many poor develop-

ing countries in order to live and work there, often under primi-

tive conditions. They learn to understand other nations and

customs, and their egotism decreases. Their world view devel-

ops and becomes more realistic. They thus lose the characteris-

tic defects of the modern American character.

In order to overcome something whose origin is shrouded in

the mists of time immemorial, we often feel we must battle the

ever-turning windmills of history. However, the end goal of

such effort is the possibility that an objective understanding of

human nature and its eternal weaknesses, plus the resulting

transformation of societal psychology, may enable us effec-

tively to counteract or prevent the destructive and tragic results

sometime in the not too distant future.

Our times are exceptional, and suffering now gives rise to

better comprehension than it did centuries ago. This under-

standing and knowledge fit better into the total picture, since

they are based on objective data. Such a view therefore be-

comes realistic, and people and problems mature in action.

Such action should not be limited to theoretical contemplations,

but rather, acquire organization and form.

In order to facilitate this, let us consider the selected ques-

tions and the draft of a new scientific discipline which would

study evil, discovering its factors of genesis, insufficiently

understood properties, and weak spots, thereby outlining new

possibilities to counteract the origin of human suffering.

CHAPTER V

PATHOCRACY

The Genesis of the Phenomenon

The time-cycle sketched in Chapter III was referred to as

hysteroidal because the intensification or diminution of a soci-

ety’s hysterical condition can be considered its chief measure-

ment. It does not, of course, constitute the only quality subject

to change within the framework of certain periodicity. The

present chapter shall deal with the phenomenon which can

emerge from the phase of maximal intensification of hysteria.

Such a sequence does not appear to result from any relatively

constant laws of history; quite the contrary, some additional

circumstances and factors must participate in such a period of a

society’s general spiritual crisis and cause its reason and social

structure to degenerate in such a way as to bring about the

spontaneous generation of this worst disease of society. Let us

call this societal disease phenomenon “pathocracy”; this is not

the first time it has emerged during the history of our planet.

It appears that this phenomenon, whose causes also appear

to be potentially present in every society, has its own character-

istic process of genesis, only partially conditioned by, and hid-

den within, the maximal hysterical intensity of the above-

described cycle. As a result, unhappy times become exception-

ally cruel and enduring and their causes impossible to under-

stand within the categories of natural human concepts. Let us

therefore bring this process of the origin of pathocracy closer,

184

PATHOCRACY

methodically isolating it from other phenomena we can recog-

nize as being conditional or even accompanying it.

A psychologically normal, highly intelligent person called

to high office normally experiences doubts as to whether he

can meet the demands expected of him and seeks the assistance

of others whose opinions he values. At the same time, he feels

nostalgia for his old life, freer and less burdensome, to which

he would like to return after fulfilling his social obligations.

Every society worldwide contains individuals whose dreams

of power arise very early as we have already discussed. They

are generally discriminated against in some way by society,

which uses a moralizing interpretation with regard to their fail-

ings and difficulties, although these individuals are rarely

guilty of them in the precise terms of morality. They would like

to change this unfriendly world into something else. Dreams of

power also represent overcompensation for the feeling of hu-

miliation, the second angle in Adler’s rhombus.89 A significant

and active proportion of this group is composed of individuals

with various deviations who imagine this better world in their

own way, of which we are already familiar.

In the prior chapter, the readers have become acquainted

with examples of these deviations selected in such a way as to

permit us now to present the ponerogenesis of pathocracy and

to introduce the essential factors of this historical phenomenon

which is so difficult to understand. It has certainly appeared

many times in history, in various countries and in various so-

cial scales. However, no one has ever managed to identify it

objectively because it would hide in one of the ideologies char-

acteristic of the respective culture and era, developing in the

89 Austrian psychiatrist who rejected Sigmund Freud’s emphasis on sexuality

and theorized that neurotic behavior is an overcompensation for feelings of

inferiority. He argued that human personality could be explained teleologi-

cally, separate strands dominated by the guiding purpose of the individual’s

unconscious self ideal to convert feelings of inferiority to superiority (or

rather completeness). The desires of the self ideal were countered by social

and ethical demands. If the corrective factors were disregarded and the indi-

vidual over-compensated, then an inferiority complex would occur, the indi-

vidual becoming egocentric, power-hungry and aggressive or worse. Adler

believed that personality can be distinguished into the getting, avoiding,

ruling and socially useful types, i.e. the “rhombus”. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

185

very bosom of different social movements. Identification was

so difficult because the indispensable naturalistic knowledge

needed for proper classification of phenomena in this area did

not develop until our contemporary times. Thus, historians and

sociologists discern many similarities, but they possess no

identifying criteria because the latter belongs to another scien-

tific discipline.

Who plays the first crucial role in this process of the origin

of pathocracy, schizoids or characteropaths? It appears to be

the former; therefore, let us delineate their role first.

During stable times which are ostensibly happy, albeit de-

pendent upon injustice to other individuals and nations, doctri-

naire90 people believe they have found a simple solution to fix

the world. Such a historical period is always characterized by

an impoverished psychological world view, so that a schizoi-

dally impoverished psychological world view does not stand

out as odd during such times and is accepted as legal tender.

These doctrinaire individuals characteristically manifest a cer-

tain contempt with regard to moralists then preaching the need

to rediscover lost human values and to develop a richer, more

appropriate psychological world view.

Schizoid characters aim to impose their own conceptual

world upon other people or social groups, using relatively con-

trolled pathological egotism and the exceptional tenacity de-

rived from their persistent nature. They are thus eventually able

to overpower another individual’s personality, which causes

the latter’s behavior to turn desperately illogical. They may

also exert a similar influence upon the group of people they

have joined. They are psychological loners who then begin to

feel better in some human organization, wherein they become

zealots for some ideology, religious bigots, materialists, or

adherents of an ideology with satanic features. If their activities

consist of direct contact on a small social scale, their acquain-

tances generally just consider them to be eccentric, which lim-

its their ponerogenic role. However, if they manage to hide

their own personality behind the written word, their influence

90 Dogmatic: stubborn person of arbitrary or arrogant opinions who insists on

theory without regard for practicality or suitability. [Editor’s note.]

186

PATHOCRACY

may poison the minds of society on a wide scale and for a long

time.

The conviction that Karl Marx is the best example of this is

correct as he was the best-known figure of that kind. Frostig91,

a psychiatrist of the old school, included Engels and others into

a category he called “bearded schizoidal fanatics”. The famous

writings attributed to “Zionist Wise Men” at the turn of the

century begin with a typically schizoidal declaration.92 The

nineteenth century, especially its latter half, appears to have

been a time of exceptional activity on the part of schizoidal

individuals, often but not always of Jewish descent. After all

we have to remember that 97 % of all Jews do not manifest this

anomaly, and that it also appears among all European nations,

albeit to a markedly lesser extent. Our inheritance from this

period includes world-images, scientific traditions, and legal

concepts flavored with the shoddy ingredients of a schizoidal

apprehension of reality.

Humanists are prepared to understand that era and its legacy

within categories characterized by their own traditions. They

search for societal, ideational, and moral causes for known

phenomena. Such an explanation, however, can never consti-

tute the whole truth, since it ignores the biological factors

which participated in the genesis of the phenomena. Schizoidia

is the most frequent factor, albeit not the only one.

In spite of the fact that the writings of schizoidal authors

contain the above described deficiency, or even an openly for-

mulated schizoidal declaration which constitutes sufficient

91 Peter Jacob Frostig, 1896-1959. Professor of King John Kasimir University

in Lwow, (now Ukraine). I used his manual Psychiatria. Poland was then

under pathocratic rule and his works were removed from public libraries as

“ideologically improper”.

92 The “Protocols of the Elders of Zion” is now well known to have been a

hoaxed attribution to Jews. However, the contents of the Protocols are clearly

not “hoaxed ideas” since a reasonable assessment of the events in the United

States over the past 50 years or so gives ample evidence of the application of

these Protocols in order to bring about the current Neocon administration.

Anyone who wishes to understand what has happened in the U.S. only needs

to read the Protocols to understand that some group of deviant individuals

took them to heart. The document, “Project For A New American Century”,

produced by the Neoconservatives reads as if it had been inspired by the

Protocols. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

187

warning to specialists, the average reader accepts them not as a

view of reality warped by this anomaly, but rather as an idea to

which he should consider seriously based on his convictions

and his reason. That is the first mistake.

The oversimplified pattern of ideas, devoid of psychological

color and based on easily available data, tends to exert an in-

tense attracting influence on individuals who are insufficiently

critical, frequently frustrated as result of downward social ad-

justment, culturally neglected, or characterized by some psy-

chological deficiencies of their own. Such writings are particu-

larly attractive to a hystericized society. Others who may read

such writings will be immediately provoked to criticism based

on their healthy common sense, though they also they fail to

grasp the essential cause of the error: that it emerges from a

biologically deviant mind.

Societal interpretation of such writings and doctrinaire dec-

larations breaks down into main trifurcations, engendering

divisiveness and conflict. The first branch is the path of aver-

sion, based on rejection of the contents of the work due to per-

sonal motivations, differing convictions, or moral revulsion.

These reactions contain the component of a moralistic interpre-

tation of pathological phenomena.

The second and third branches relate to two distinctly dif-

ferent apperception types among those persons who accept the

contents of such works: the critically-corrective and the patho-

logical.

The critically-corrective approach is taken by people whose

feel for psychological reality is normal and they tend to incor-

porate the more valuable elements of the work. They then

trivialize the obvious errors and fill in the missing elements of

the schizoid deficiencies by means of their own richer world

view. This gives rise to a more sensible, measured, and thus

creative interpretation, but is cannot be completely free from

the influence of the error frequently adduced above.

Pathological acceptance is manifested by individuals with

psychological deficiencies of their own: diversiform deviations,

whether inherited or acquired, as well as by many people bear-

ing personality malformations or who have been injured by

social injustice. That explains why this scope is wider than the

188

PATHOCRACY

circle drawn by direct action of pathological factors. Pathologi-

cal acceptance of schizoidal writings or declarations by other

deviants often brutalizes the authors’ concepts and promotes

ideas of force and revolutionary means.

The passage of time and bitter experience has unfortunately

not prevented this characteristic misunderstanding born of

schizoid nineteenth-century creativity, with Marx’s works at

the fore, from affecting people and depriving them of their

common sense.

If only for purposes of the above-mentioned psychological

experiment, it is good practice for developing awareness of this

pathological factor by searching the works of K. Marx for sev-

eral statements with these characteristic deficits. When such a

study is conducted by several people with varied world views,

the experiment will show how a clear picture of reality can be

restored, and it becomes easier to find a common language.

Schizoidia has thus played an essential role as one of the

factors in the genesis of the evil threatening our contemporary

world. Practicing psychotherapy upon the world will therefore

demand that the results of such evil be eliminated as skillfully

as possible.

The first researchers – the author and his colleagues - at-

tracted by the idea of objectively understanding this phenome-

non initially failed to perceive the role of characteropathic

personalities in the genesis of pathocracy. However, when we

attempted to reconstruct the early phase of said genesis, we had

to acknowledge that characteropaths played a significant role in

this process.

We already know from the preceding chapter how their de-

fective experiential and thought patterns take hold in human

minds, insidiously destroying their way of reasoning and their

ability to utilize their healthy common sense. This role has also

proved essential because their activities as fanatical leaders or

spellbinders in various ideologies open the door to psycho-

pathic individuals and the view of the world they want to im-

pose.

In the ponerogenic process of the pathocratic phenomenon,

characteropathic individuals adopt ideologies created by doc-

trinaire, often schizoidal people, recast them into an active

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

189

propaganda form, and disseminate it with their characteristic

pathological egotism and paranoid intolerance for any philoso-

phies which may differ from their own. They also inspire fur-

ther transformation of this ideology into its pathological coun-

terpart. Something which had a doctrinaire character and circu-

lated in numerically limited groups is now activated at societal

level, thanks to their spellbinding abilities.

It also appears that this process tends to intensify with time;

initial activities are undertaken by persons with milder charac-

teropathic features, who are easily able to hide their aberrations

from others. Paranoid individuals then become principally ac-

tive. Toward the end of the process, an individual with frontal

characteropathy and the highest degree of pathological egotism

can easily take over leadership.

As long as the characteropathic individuals play a dominant

role within a social movement affected by the ponerogenic

process, the ideology, whether doctrinaire from the outset or

later vulgarized and further perverted by these latter people,

continues to keep and maintain its content link with the original

prototype. The ideology continuously affects the movement’s

activities and remains an essential justifying motivation for

many. In this phase, therefore, such a union does not move in

the direction of criminal acts on a mass scale. To a certain ex-

tent, at this stage, one can still define such a movement or un-

ion by the name of its original ideology.

In the meantime, however, the carriers of other (mainly he-

reditary) pathological factors become engaged in this already

sick social movement and proceed with the work of final trans-

formation of the contents – both ideological and human - of

such a union in such a way that it becomes a pathological cari-

cature of its original ideology. This is effected under the ever-

growing influence of psychopathic personalities of various

types, with particular emphasis on the inspiration role of essen-

tial psychopathy.

Such a situation eventually engenders a wholesale show-

down: the adherents of the original ideology are shunted aside

or terminated. (This group includes many characteropaths,

especially of the lesser and paranoidal varieties.) The ideologi-

cal motivations and the double talk they created then are util-

190

PATHOCRACY

ized to hide the actual new contents of the phenomenon. From

this time on, using the ideological name of the movement in

order to understand its essence becomes a keystone of mis-

takes.

Psychopathic individuals generally stay away from social

organizations characterized by reason and ethical discipline.

After all, such organizations are created by that other world of

normal people so foreign to them. They hold various social

ideologies in contempt, while, at the same time, easily discern-

ing all their actual failings. However, once the process of pon-

eric transformation of some human union into its yet undefined

cartoon counterpart has begun and advanced sufficiently, they

perceive this fact with almost infallible sensitivity: a circle has

been created wherein they can hide their failings and psycho-

logical differentness, find their own modus vivendi, and maybe

even realize their youthful Utopian dream of a world where

they are in power and all those other, “normal people”, are

forced into servitude. They then begin infiltrating the rank and

file of such a movement; pretending to be sincere adherents

poses no difficulty for the psychopath, since it is second nature

for them to play a role and hide behind the mask of normal

people.

The psychopaths’ interest in such movements is not an ex-

clusive result of their egoism and lack of moral scruples. These

people have in fact been hurt by nature and society.93 An ideol-

93 It is important to note here that it is not meant that the psychopath has been

“emotionally” hurt, or that such “hurt” has contributed to their state of being.

Rather, as the author explained to me in private correspondence: “For them

you are their worst enemy. You are hurting them very painfully. For a psy-

chopath, revealing his real condition, tearing down his Cleckley mask, brings

the end of his self-admiration. You are threatening them with destruction of

their secret world, and bring to null their dreams of ruling and introducing [a

social system where they can rule and be served]. When his real condition is

publicly revealed, a psychopath feels like a wounded animal.

“You are partly right in finding some similarity of the essential psychopath

with the thought [processes] of a crocodile. They are somewhat mechanical.

But, are they guilty that they have inherited an abnormal gene, and that their

instinctive substratum is different from that of the majority of the human

population? Such a person is not able to feel like a normal person, or to un-

derstand a person bearing a normal instinctive endowment. [It is important]

to try to understand the psychopath, and have some pity for them [as you

would have pity for a crocodile and its right to exist in nature]. Limiting the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

191

ogy liberating a social class or a nation from injustice may thus

seem to them to be friendly; unfortunately it also gives rise to

unrealistic hopes that they themselves will be liberated as well.

The pathological motivations which appeared in a union at the

time it begins to be affected by the ponerogenic process strikes

them as familiar and hope-inspiring. They therefore insinuate

themselves into such a movement preaching revolution and war

against that unfair world so foreign to them.

They initially perform subordinate functions in such a

movement and execute the leaders’ orders, especially whenever

something needs to be done which inspires revulsion in oth-

ers.94 Their evident zealotry and cynicism gives rise to criticism

role of psychopaths in ponerogenesis, particularly in the case of the tragedies

they cause women, thus reducing their numbers, is the real aim.

“Take as well in your consideration that in the whole pool of pathological

factors taking part in ponrogenezis all kinds of psychopathies make up some-

thing less than half. The other pathologic conditions, usually not hereditary,

make up more than other half. Stalin was not a psychopath. He was a case of

frontal characteropathy due to the damage of frontal centers (10A&B) caused

be a disease he suffered as a newborn. This produces dramaticaly dangerous

characters.” [Editor’s note.]

94 Here, we cannot help but think of Karl Rove, Dick Cheney, and Donald

Rumsfeld, protégés of the neocon philosopher, Leo Strauss. Strauss evi-

dences typical schizoidal doctrinaire characteristics.

“Like Plato, Strauss believed that the supreme political ideal is the rule of the

wise. But the rule of the wise is unattainable in the real world. Now, accord-

ing to the conventional wisdom, Plato realised this, and settled for the rule of

law. But Strauss did not endorse this solution entirely. Nor did he think that it

was Plato's real solution - Strauss pointed to the ‘nocturnal council’ in Plato's

Laws to illustrate his point.

“The real Platonic solution as understood by Strauss is the covert rule of the

wise. This covert rule is facilitated by the overwhelming stupidity of the

gentlemen. The more gullible and unperceptive they are, the easier it is for

the wise to control and manipulate them. [...]

“For Strauss, the rule of the wise is not about classic conservative values like

order, stability, justice, or respect for authority. The rule of the wise is in-

tended as an antidote to modernity. Modernity is the age in which the vulgar

many have triumphed. It is the age in which they have come closest to having

exactly what their hearts desire - wealth, pleasure, and endless entertainment.

But in getting just what they desire, they have unwittingly been reduced to

beasts.

“Nowhere is this state of affairs more advanced than in America. And the

global reach of American culture threatens to trivialise life and turn it into

entertainment. This was [a] terrifying [...] spectre for Strauss. […]

192

PATHOCRACY

on the part of the union’s more reasonable members, but it also

earns the respect of some its more extreme revolutionaries.

They thus find protection among those people who earlier

played a role in the movement’s ponerization, and repay the

favor with compliments or by making things easier for them.

Thus they climb up the organizational ladder, gain influence,

and almost involuntarily bend the contents of the entire group

to their own way of experiencing reality and to the goals de-

rived from their deviant nature. A mysterious disease is already

raging inside the union. The adherents of the original ideology

feel ever more constricted by powers they do not understand;

they start fighting with demons and making mistakes.

If such a movement triumphs by revolutionary means and in

the name of freedom, the welfare of the people, and social jus-

tice, this only brings about further transformation of a govern-

mental system thus created into a macrosocial pathological

phenomenon. Within this system, the common man is blamed

for not having been born a psychopath, and is considered good

for nothing except hard work, fighting and dying to protect a

system of government he can neither sufficiently comprehend

nor ever consider to be his own.

An ever-strengthening network of psychopathic and related

individuals gradually starts to dominate, overshadowing the

others. Characteropathic individuals who played an essential

“[Strauss was] convinced that liberal economics would turn life into enter-

tainment and destroy politics.[...] [Strauss] thought that man's humanity

depended on his willingness to rush naked into battle and headlong to his

death. Only perpetual war can overturn the modern project, with its emphasis

on self-preservation and ‘creature comforts.’ Life can be politicised once

more, and man’s humanity can be restored.

“This terrifying vision fits perfectly well with the desire for honour and glory

that the neo-conservative gentlemen covet. It also fits very well with the

religious sensibilities of gentlemen. The combination of religion and nation-

alism is the elixir that Strauss advocates as the way to turn natural, relaxed,

hedonistic men into devout nationalists willing to fight and die for their God

and country.

“I never imagined when I wrote my first book on Strauss that the unscrupu-

lous elite that he elevates would ever come so close to political power, nor

that the ominous tyranny of the wise would ever come so close to being

realised in the political life of a great nation like the United States. But fear is

the greatest ally of tyranny.” (Shadia Drury, professor of political theory at

the University of Regina in Saskatchewan). [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

193

role in ponerizing the movement and preparing for revolution,

are also eliminated. Adherents of the revolutionary ideology

are unscrupulously “pushed into a counter-revolutionary posi-

tion”. They are now condemned for “moral” reasons in the

name of new criteria whose paramoralistic essence they are not

in a position to comprehend. Violent negative selection of the

original group now ensues. The inspirational role of essential

psychopathy is now also consolidated; it remains characteristic

for the entire future of this macrosocial pathological phenome-

non.

In spite of these transformations, the pathological block of

the revolutionary movement remains a minority, a fact which

cannot be changed by propaganda pronouncements about the

moral majority adhering to the new, more glorious version of

the ideology. The rejected majority and the very forces which

naively created such power to begin with, start mobilizing

against the block of psychopaths who have taken over. Ruth-

less confrontation with these forces is seen by the psychopathic

block as the only way to safeguard the long-term survival of

the pathological authority. We must thus consider the bloody

triumph of a pathological minority over the movement’s major-

ity to be a transitional phase during which the new contents of

the phenomenon coagulate.

The entire life of a society thus affected then becomes sub-

ordinated to deviant thought-criteria and permeated by their

specific experiential mode, especially the one described in the

section on essential psychopathy. At this point, using the name

of the original ideology to designate this phenomenon is mean-

ingless and becomes an error rendering its comprehension

more difficult.

I shall accept the denomination of pathocracy for a system

of government thus created, wherein a small pathological mi-

nority takes control over a society of normal people. The name

thus selected, above all, emphasizes the basic quality of the

macrosocial psychopathological phenomenon, and differenti-

ates it from the many possible social systems dominated by

normal people’s structure, custom, and law.

I tried to find a name which would more clearly designate

the psychopathological, even psychopathic quality of such a

194

PATHOCRACY

government, but I gave up because of certain perceived phe-

nomena (to be referred to below) and for practical considera-

tions (to avoid lengthening the denomination). Such a name

sufficiently indicates the phenomenon’s basic quality and also

emphasizes that the ideological cloak (or some other ideology

which cloaked similar phenomena in the past) does not consti-

tute its essence. When I happened to hear that a Hungarian

scientist unknown to me had already used this term, my deci-

sion was finalized. I think this name is consistent with the de-

mands of semantics, since no concise term can adequately

characterize such a complex phenomenon. I shall also hence-

forth designate the social systems wherein the links of normal

people dominate in any way as “the systems of normal man”.

More on the Contents of the Phenomenon

The achievement of absolute domination by pathocrats in

the government of a country cannot be permanent since large

sectors of the society become disaffected by such rule and

eventually find some way of toppling it. This is part of the

historical cycle, easily discerned when history is read from a

ponerological point of view. Pathocracy at the summit of gov-

ernmental organization also does not constitute the entire pic-

ture of the “mature phenomenon”. Such a system of govern-

ment has nowhere to go but down.

In a pathocracy, all leadership positions, (down to village

headman and community cooperative managers, not to mention

the directors of police units, and special services police person-

nel, and activists in the pathocratic party) must be filled by

individuals with corresponding psychological deviations,

which are inherited as a rule. However, such people constitute

a very small percentage of the population and this makes them

more valuable to the pathocrats. Their intellectual level or pro-

fessional skills cannot be taken into account, since people rep-

resenting superior abilities are even harder to find. After such a

system has lasted several years, one hundred percent of all the

cases of essential psychopathy are involved in pathocratic ac-

tivity; they are considered the most loyal, even though some of

them were formerly involved on the other side in some way.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

195

Under such conditions, no area of social life can develop

normally, whether in economics, culture, science, technology,

administration, etc. Pathocracy progressively paralyzes every-

thing. Normal people must develop a level of patience beyond

the ken of anyone living in a normal man’s system just in order

to explain what to do and how to do it to some obtuse medioc-

rity of a psychological deviant who has been placed in charge

of some project that he cannot even understand, much less

manage. This special kind of pedagogy – instructing deviants

while avoiding their wrath - requires a great deal of time and

effort, but it would otherwise not be possible to maintain toler-

able living conditions and necessary achievements in the eco-

nomic area or intellectual life of a society. Even with such ef-

forts, pathocracy progressively intrudes everywhere and dulls

everything.

Those people who initially found the original ideology at-

tractive eventually come to the realization that they are in fact

dealing with something else that has taken its place under the

old name. The disillusionment experienced by such former

ideological adherents is bitter in the extreme. Thus, the patho-

logical minority’s attempts to retain power will be threatened

by the society of normal people, whose criticism keeps grow-

ing.

Therefore, to mitigate the threat to their power, the

pathocrats must employ any and all methods of terror and ex-

terminatory policies against individuals known for their patri-

otic feelings and military training; other, specific “indoctrina-

tion” activities such as those we have presented are also util-

ized. Individuals lacking the natural feeling of being linked to

normal society become irreplaceable in either of these activi-

ties. Again, the foreground of this type of activity is occupied

by cases of essential psychopathy, followed by those with simi-

lar anomalies, and finally by people alienated from the society

in question as a result of racial or national differences.

The phenomenon of pathocracy matures during this period:

an extensive and active indoctrination system is built, with a

suitably refurbished ideology constituting the vehicle or Trojan

horse for the purpose of pathologizing the thought processes of

individuals and society. The goal- forcing human minds to

196

PATHOCRACY

incorporate pathological experiential methods and thought-

patterns, and consequently accepting such rule - is never

openly admitted. This goal is conditioned by pathological ego-

tism, and the possibility of accomplishing it strikes the

pathocrats as not only indispensable, but feasible. Thousands of

activists must therefore participate in this work. However, time

and experience confirm what a psychologist may have long

foreseen: the entire effort produces results so very limited that

it is reminiscent of the labors of Sisyphus. It only results in

producing a general stifling of intellectual development and

deep-rooted protest against affront-mongering “hypocrisy”.

The authors and executors of this program are incapable of

understanding that the decisive factor making their work diffi-

cult is the fundamental nature of normal human beings – the

majority.

The entire system of force, terror, and forced indoctrination,

or, rather, pathologization, thus proves effectively unfeasible,

which causes the pathocrats no small measure of surprise. Re-

ality places a question mark on their conviction that such

methods can change people in such fundamental ways so that

they can eventually recognize this pathocratic kind of govern-

ment as a “normal state”.

During the initial shock, the feeling of social links between

normal people fade. After that has been survived, however, the

overwhelming majority of people begin to manifest their own

phenomenon of psychological immunization. Society simulta-

neously starts collecting practical knowledge on the subject of

this new reality and its psychological properties.

Normal people slowly learn to perceive the weak spots of

such a system and utilize the possibilities of more expedient

arrangement of their lives. They begin to give each other ad-

vice in these matters, thus slowly regenerating the feelings of

social links and reciprocal trust. A new phenomenon occurs:

separation between the pathocrats and the society of normal

people. The latter have an advantage of talent, professional

skills, and healthy common sense. They therefore hold certain

very advantageous cards. The pathocracy finally realizes that it

must find some modus vivendi or relations with the majority of

society: “After all, somebody’s got to do the work for us.”

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

197

There are other needs and pressures felt by the pathocrats,

especially from outside. The pathological face must be hidden

from the world somehow, since recognition of the deviant rul-

ership by world opinion would be a catastrophe. Ideological

propaganda alone would then be an inadequate disguise. Pri-

marily in the interests of the new elite and its expansionary

plans, a pathocratic state must maintain commercial relations

with the countries of normal man. The pathocratic state aims to

achieve international recognition as a certain kind of political

structure; and it fears recognition in terms of a true clinical

diagnosis.

All this makes pathocrats tend to limit their measures of ter-

ror, subjecting their propaganda and indoctrination methods to

a certain cosmetology, and to accord the society they control

some margin of autonomous activity, especially regarding cul-

tural life. The more liberal pathocrats would not be averse to

giving such a society a certain minimum of economic prosper-

ity in order to reduce the irritation level, but their own corrup-

tion and inability to administer the economy prevents them

from doing so.

And so, with the above considerations being brought to the

forefront of pathocratic attention, this great societal disease

continues to run its course through a new phase: methods of

activity become milder, and there is coexistence with countries

whose structure is that of normal man.

Any psychopathologist studying this phenomenon will be

reminded of the dissimulative state or phase of a patient at-

tempting to play the role of a normal person, hiding his patho-

logical reality although he continues to be sick or abnormal.

Let as therefore use the term “the dissimulative phase of

pathocracy” for the state of affairs wherein a pathocratic sys-

tem ever more skillfully plays the role of a normal sociopoliti-

cal system with “different” doctrinal institutions.

In this phase, normal people within the country ruled by

pathocrats become resistant and adapt themselves to the situa-

tion. On the outside, however, this phase is marked by out-

standing ponerogenic activity. The pathological material of this

system can all-too-easily infiltrate into other societies, particu-

larly if they are more primitive, and all the avenues of

198

PATHOCRACY

pathocratic expansion are facilitated because of the decrease of

commonsensical criticism on the part of the nations constitut-

ing the territory of expansionism.

Meanwhile, in the pathocratic country, the active structure

of government rests in the hands of psychopathic individuals,

and essential psychopathy plays a starring role, especially dur-

ing the dissimulative phase. However, individuals with obvious

pathological traits must be removed from certain areas of activ-

ity: namely, political posts with international exposure, where

such personalities could betray the pathological contents of the

phenomenon. Individuals with obvious pathological traits are

also limited in their ability to exercise diplomatic functions or

to become fully cognizant with the political situations of the

countries of normal man. Therefore, the persons selected for

such positions are chosen because they have thought-processes

more similar to the world of normal people; in general, they are

sufficiently connected to the pathological system to provide a

guarantee of loyalty.95 An expert in various psychological

anomalies can nevertheless discern the discreet deviations upon

which such links are based. Another factor to be noted is the

great personal advantages accorded to such demi-normal indi-

viduals by the pathocracy. Small wonder, then, that such loy-

alty is sometimes deceptive. This applies in particular to the

sons of typical pathocrats, who of course enjoy trust because

they have been reared to allegiance since infancy; if through

some happy genetic coincidence they have not inherited patho-

logical properties, their nature takes precedence over nurture.

Similar needs apply to other areas as well. The building di-

rector for a new factory is often someone barely connected

with the pathocratic system but whose skills are essential. Once

the plant is operational, administration is taken over by

pathocrats, which then often leads to technical and financial

ruin.

The army similarly needs people endowed with perspicacity

and essential qualifications, especially in the area of modern

weapons and warfare. At crucial moments, healthy common

sense can override the results of pathocratic drill. In such a

state of affairs, many people are forced to adapt, accepting the

95 Condoleezza Rice and Colin Powell come to mind here. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

199

ruling system as a status quo, but also criticizing it. They fulfill

their duties amid doubts and conflicts of conscience, always

searching for a more sensible way out which they discuss

within trusted circles. In effect, they are always hanging in a

limbo between pathocracy and the world of normal people.

Deficiently faithful people have been and are a factor of the

pathocratic system’s internal weakness.

The following questions thus suggest themselves: what

happens if the network of understanding among psychopaths

achieves power in leadership positions with international expo-

sure? This can happen, especially during the later phases of the

phenomenon. Goaded by their character, such deviant people

thirst for just that even though it ultimately conflicts with their

own life interest, and so they are removed by the less patho-

logical, more logical wing of the ruling apparatus. Such devi-

ants do not understand that a catastrophe would otherwise en-

sue. Germs are not aware that they will be burned alive or bur-

ied deep in the ground along with the human body whose death

they are causing.

If the many managerial positions are assumed by individu-

als deprived of sufficient abilities to feel and understand the

majority of other people, and who also exhibit deficiencies in

technical imagination and practical skills - (faculties indispen-

sable for governing economic and political matters) - this then

results in an exceptionally serious crisis in all areas, both

within the country in question and with regard to international

relations. Within, the situation becomes unbearable even for

those citizens who were able to feather their nest into a rela-

tively comfortable modus vivendi. Outside, other societies start

to feel the pathological quality of the phenomenon quite dis-

tinctly. Such a state of affairs cannot last long. One must then

be prepared for ever more rapid changes, and also behave with

great circumspection.

Pathocracy is a disease of great social movements followed

by entire societies, nations, and empires. In the course of hu-

man history, it has affected social, political, and religious

movements, as well as the accompanying ideologies, character-

istic for the time and the ethnological conditions, and turned

them into caricatures of themselves. This occurs as a result of

200

PATHOCRACY

the activities of similar etiological factors in this phenomenon,

namely the participation of pathological agents in a pathody-

namically similar process. That explains why all the pathocra-

cies of the world are and have been so similar in their essential

properties. Contemporaneous ones easily find a common lan-

guage, even if the ideologies nourishing them and protecting

their pathological contents from exposure differ widely.

Identifying these phenomena through history and properly

qualifying them according to their true nature and contents, not

according to the ideology in question, which succumbed to the

characteristic process of caricaturization, is a job for historians.

However, it must be understood that the primary ideology was

undoubtedly socially dynamic and contained creative elements,

otherwise it would have been incapable of nurturing and pro-

tecting the pathocratic phenomenon from recognition and criti-

cism for very long. It would also have been incapable of fur-

nishing the pathological caricature with the tools for imple-

menting its expansionist goals on the outside.

Defining the moment at which a movement has been trans-

formed into something we can call a pathocracy as a result of

the ponerogenic process is a matter of convention. The process

is temporally cumulative and reaches a point of no return at

some particular moment. Eventually, however, internal con-

frontation with the adherents of the original ideology occurs,

thus finally affixing the seal of the pathocratic character of the

phenomenon. Naziism most certainly passed this point of no

return, but was prevented from all-out confrontation with the

adherents of the original ideology because the Allied armies

smashed its entire military might.

Pathocracy and Its Ideology

It should be noted that a great ideology with mesmerizing

values can also easily deprive people of the capacity for self-

critical control over their behavior. The adherents of such ideas

tend to lose sight of the fact that the means used, not just the

end, will be decisive for the result of their activities. Whenever

they reach for overly radical methods of action, still convinced

that they are serving their idea, they are not aware that their

goal has already changed. The principle “the end justifies the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

201

means” opens the door to a different kind of person for whom a

great idea is useful for purposes of liberating themselves from

the uncomfortable pressure of normal human custom. Every

great ideology thus contains danger, especially for small minds.

Therefore, every great social movement and its ideology can

become a host upon which some pathocracy initiates its para-

sitic life.

The ideology in question may have been marked by deficits

in truth and moral criteria from the very outset, or by the ef-

fects of activities by pathological factors. The original, very

high-minded idea, may also have succumbed to early contami-

nation characteristic of a particular time and social circum-

stance. If such an ideology is infiltrated by foreign, local cul-

tural material which, being heterogeneous, destroys the original

coherent structure of the idea, the actual value may become so

enfeebled that it loses some of its attractiveness for reasonable

people. Once weakened, however, the sociological structure

can succumb to further degeneration, including the activation

of pathological factors, until it has become transformed into its

caricature: the name is the same, but the contents are different.

Differentiating the essence of the pathological phenomenon

from its contemporary ideological host is thus a basic and nec-

essary task, both for scientific-theoretical purposes and for

finding practical solutions for the problems derived from the

existence of the above-mentioned macrosocial phenomena.

If, in order to designate a pathological phenomenon, we ac-

cept the name furnished by the ideology of a social movement

which succumbed to degenerative processes, we lose any abil-

ity to understand or evaluate that ideology and its original con-

tents or to effect proper classification of the phenomenon, per

se. This error is not semantic; it is the keystone of all other

comprehension errors regarding such phenomena, rendering us

intellectually helpless, and depriving us of our capacity for

purposeful, practical action.

This error is based upon compatible propaganda elements of

incompatible social systems. This has, unfortunately, become

much too common and is reminiscent of the very first clumsy

attempts to classify mental diseases according to the systems of

delusions manifested by the patients. Even today, people who

202

PATHOCRACY

have not received training in this field will consider a sick per-

son who manifests sexual delusions to be crazy in this area, or

someone with religious delusions to be a “religious maniac”.

The author has even encountered a patient who insisted that he

had become the object of cold and hot rays (paresthesia) on the

basis of a special agreement concluded by the U.S.A. and the

U.S.S.R.

As early as the end of the nineteenth century, famous pio-

neers of contemporary psychiatry correctly distinguished be-

tween the disease and the patient’s system of delusions. A dis-

ease has its own etiological causes, whether determined or not,

and its own pathodynamics and symptomatics which distin-

guish its nature. Various delusional systems can become mani-

fest within the same disease, and similar systems can appear in

various diseases. The delusions, which have sometimes become

so systemic that they convey the impression of an actual story,

originate in the patient’s nature and intelligence, especially in

the imaginations of the environment within which he grew up.

These can be disease-induced caricaturizations of his former

political and social convictions. After all, every mental illness

has its particular style of deforming human minds, producing

nuanced but characteristic differences known for some time to

psychiatrists, and which help them render a diagnosis.

Thus deformed, the world of former fantasies is put to work

for a different purpose: concealing the dramatic state of the

disease from one’s own consciousness and from public opinion

for as long as possible. An experienced psychiatrist does not

attempt premature disillusionment of such a delusional system;

that would provoke the patient’s suicidal tendencies. The doc-

tor’s main object of interest remains the disease he is trying to

cure. There is usually insufficient time to discuss a patient’s

delusions with him unless it becomes necessary for reasons of

the safety of said patient and other people. Once the disease has

been cured, however, psychotherapeutic assistance in reinte-

grating the patient into the world of normal thought is defi-

nitely indicated.

If we effect a sufficiently penetrating analysis of the phe-

nomenon of pathocracy and its relationship to its ideology, we

are faced with a clear analogy to the above described relation-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

203

ship now familiar to all psychiatrists. Some differences will

appear later in the form of details and statistical data, which

can be interpreted both as a function of the above-mentioned

characteristic style of caricaturizing an ideology, pathocracy

effects, and as a result of the macrosocial character of the phe-

nomenon.

As a counterpart of disease, pathocracy has its own etiologi-

cal factors which make it potentially present in every society,

no matter how healthy. It also has its own pathodynamic proc-

esses which are differentiated as a function of whether the

pathocracy in question was born in that particular country

(primary pathocracy), was artificially infected in the country by

some other system of the kind, or was imposed by force.

We have already sketched above the ponerogenesis and

course of such a macrosocial phenomenon in its primary form,

intentionally refraining from mentioning any particular ideol-

ogy. We shall soon address the other two courses mentioned

above.

The ideology of pathocracy is created by caricaturizing the

original ideology of a social movement in a manner character-

istic of that particular pathological phenomenon. The above-

mentioned hysteroidal states of societies also deform the con-

temporary ideologies of the times in question, using a style

characteristic for them. Just as doctors are interested in disease,

the author has become primarily interested in the pathocratic

phenomenon and the analysis thereof. In a similar manner, the

primary concern of those people who have assumed responsi-

bility for the fate of nations should be curing the world of this

heretofore mysterious disease. The proper time will come for

critical and analytical attitudes toward ideologies which have

become the “delusional systems” of such phenomena during

historical times. We should at present focus our attention upon

the very essence of the macrosocial pathological phenomena.

Understanding the nature of a disease is basic to any search

for the proper methods of treatment. The same applies by anal-

ogy with regard to that macrosocial pathological phenomenon,

especially since, in the latter case, mere understanding of the

nature of the disease starts curing human minds and souls.

Throughout the entire process, reasoning approximated to the

204

PATHOCRACY

style elaborated by medicine is the proper method which leads

to untangling the contemporary Gordian knot.

A pathocracy’s ideology changes its function, just as occurs

with a mentally ill person’s delusional system. It stops being a

human conviction outlining methods of action and takes on

other duties which are not openly defined. It becomes a dis-

guising story concealing the new reality from people’s critical

consciousness, both inside and outside one’s nation. The first

function – a conviction outlining methods of action - soon be-

comes ineffective for two reasons: on the one hand, reality

exposes the methods of action as unworkable; on the other

hand, the masses of common people notice the contemptuous

attitude toward the ideology represented by the pathocrats

themselves. For that reason, the main operational theater for the

ideology consists of nations remaining outside the immediate

ambit of the pathocracy, since that world tends to continue

believing in ideologies. The ideology thus becomes the instru-

ment for external action to a degree even greater than in the

above-mentioned relationship between the disease and its delu-

sional system.

Psychopaths are conscious of being different from normal

people. That is why the “political system” inspired by their

nature is able to conceal this awareness of being different. They

wear a personal mask of sanity and know how to create a mac-

rosocial mask of the same dissimulating nature. When we ob-

serve the role of ideology in this macrosocial phenomenon,

quite conscious of the existence of this specific awareness of

the psychopath, we can then understand why ideology is rele-

gated to a tool-like role: something useful in dealing with those

other naive people and nations. Pathocrats must nevertheless

appreciate the function of ideology as being something essen-

tial in any ponerogenic group, especially in the macrosocial

phenomenon which is their “homeland”. This factor of aware-

ness simultaneously constitutes a certain qualitative difference

between the two above-mentioned relationships. Pathocrats

know that their real ideology is derived from their deviant na-

tures, and treat the “other” – the masking ideology - with

barely concealed contempt. And the common people eventually

begin to perceive this as noted above.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

205

Thus, a well-developed pathocratic system no longer has a

clear and direct relationship to its original ideology, which it

only keeps as its primary, traditional tool for action and mask-

ing. For practical purposes of pathocratic expansion, other ide-

ologies may be useful, even if they contradict the main one and

heap moral denunciation upon it. However, these other ideolo-

gies must be used with care, refraining from official acknow-

ledgement within environments wherein the original ideology

can be made to appear too foreign, discredited, and useless.

The main ideology succumbs to symptomatic deformation,

in keeping with the characteristic style of this very disease and

with what has already been stated about the matter. The names

and official contents are kept, but another, completely different

content is insinuated underneath, thus giving rise to the well

known double talk phenomenon within which the same names

have two meanings: one for initiates, one for everyone else.

The latter is derived from the original ideology; the former has

a specifically pathocratic meaning, something which is known

not only to the pathocrats themselves, but also is learned by

those people living under long-term subjection to their rule.

Doubletalk is only one of many symptoms. Others are the

specific facility for producing new names which have sugges-

tive effects and are accepted virtually uncritically, in particular

outside the immediate scope of such a system’s rule.96 We must

thus point out the paramoralistic character and paranoidal

qualities frequently contained within these names. The action

of paralogisms and paramoralisms in this deformed ideology

becomes comprehensible to us based on the information pre-

sented in Chapter IV. Anything which threatens pathocratic

rule becomes deeply immoral. 97This also applies to the concept

of forgiving the pathocrats themselves; it is extremely danger-

ous and thus “immoral”.

We thus have the right to invent appropriate names which

would indicate the nature of the phenomena as accurately as

96 “Extraordinary rendition” as the nomenclature for illegally transporting

prisoners to countries where torture is practiced comes immediately to mind

as an example. [Editor’s note.]

97 Example: “You are with us, or you are against us.” And being “against us”

means that “you are a terrorist” and thus, immoral. [Editor’s note.]

206

PATHOCRACY

possible, in keeping with our recognition and respect for the

laws of the scientific methodology and semantics. Such accu-

rate terms will also serve to protect our minds from the sugges-

tive effects of those other names and paralogisms, including the

pathological material the latter contain.

The Expansion of the Pathocracy

The world’s tendency to fasten its gaze adoringly upon its

rulers has a long tradition dating back to the times when sover-

eigns could virtually ignore their subjects’ opinions. However,

rulers have always been dependent upon the social and eco-

nomic situation in their country, even long ago, and even in

pathocratic systems, and the influence of various social groups

has reached their thrones by various means.

Much too common is the pattern of error which reasons that

purportedly autocratic leaders of countries affected by this

pathocracy actually possess decision-making powers in areas

which they in fact do not. Millions of people, including minis-

ters and members of parliaments, ponder the dilemma of

whether such a ruler could not, under certain circumstances,

modify his convictions somewhat and relinquish his dreams of

conquering the world; they continue hope that this will be the

eventual outcome.98 People with personal experience in such a

system may attempt to persuade them that their dreams, al-

though decent, lack a foundation in reality, but at the same time

they sense a lack of concrete arguments on their part. Such an

explanation is in fact impossible within the realm of the natural

language of psychological concepts; only an objective compre-

hension of the historical phenomenon and its essentially devi-

ant nature permits light to be shed upon the causes of the per-

ennial deceitfulness of this macrosocial pathological phenome-

non.

98 This is especially true in the present day when the leaders and parliaments

of many other countries, unhappy with the Bush Neocon administration,

think that diplomacy or new elections in the U.S. will “set things right”. They

do not understand the full nature of Pathocracy and that the psychopaths in

the shadows of this phenomenon will never relinquish control without blood-

shed. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

207

The actions of this phenomenon affect an entire society,

starting with the leaders and infiltrating every village, small

town, factory, business, or farm. The pathological social struc-

ture gradually covers the entire country, creating a “new class”

within that nation. This privileged class of deviants feels per-

manently threatened by the “others”, i.e. by the majority of

normal people. Neither do the pathocrats entertain any illu-

sions about their personal fate should there be a return to the

system of normal man.

A normal person deprived of privilege or high position will

go about finding and performing some work which will earn

him a living; but pathocrats never possessed any solid practical

talent, and the time frame of their rule eliminates any residual

possibilities of adapting to the demands of normal work. If the

laws of normal man were to be reinstated, they and theirs could

be subjected to judgment, including a moralizing interpretation

of their psychological deviations; they would be threatened by

a loss of freedom and life, not merely a loss of position and

privilege. Since they are incapable of this kind of sacrifice, the

survival of a system which is the best for them becomes a

moral imperative. Such a threat must be battled by means of

any and all psychological and political cunning implemented

with a lack of scruples with regard to those other “inferior-

quality” people that can be shocking in its depravity.99

In general, this new class is in the position to purge its lead-

ers should their behavior jeopardize the existence of such a

system. This could occur particularly if the leadership wished

to go too far in compromising with the society of normal peo-

ple, since their qualifications make them essential for produc-

tion. The latter is more a direct threat to the lower echelons of

the pathocratic elite than to the leaders.

Pathocracy survives thanks to the feeling of being threat-

ened by the society of normal people, as well as by other coun-

tries wherein various forms of the system of normal man per-

sist. For the rulers, staying on the top is therefore the classic

problem of “to be or not to be”.

99 This should be kept firmly in mind by those who think that getting rid of

George W. Bush and the Neocons will change anything. [Editor’s note.]

208

PATHOCRACY

We can thus formulate a more cautious question: can such a

system ever waive territorial and political expansion abroad

and settle for its present possessions? What would happen if

such a state of affairs ensured internal peace, corresponding

order, and relative prosperity within the nation? The over-

whelming majority of the country’s population would then

make skillful use of all the emerging possibilities, taking ad-

vantage of their superior qualifications in order to fight for an

ever-increasing scope of activities; thanks to their higher birth

rate, their power will increase. This majority will be joined by

some sons from the privileged class who did not inherit the

pathological genes. The pathocracy’s dominance will weaken

imperceptibly but steadily, finally leading to a situation

wherein the society of normal people reaches for power. This is

a nightmare vision to the psychopaths.

Thus, the biological, psychological, moral, and economic

destruction of the majority of normal people becomes, for the

pathocrats, a “biological” necessity. Many means serve this

end, starting with concentration camps and including warfare

with an obstinate, well-armed foe who will devastate and de-

bilitate the human power thrown at him, namely the very power

jeopardizing pathocrats rule: the sons of normal man sent out to

fight for an illusionary “noble cause.” Once safely dead, the

soldiers will then be decreed heroes to be revered in paeans,

useful for raising a new generation faithful to the pathocracy

and ever willing to go to their deaths to protect it.

Any war waged by a pathocratic nation has two fronts, the

internal and the external. The internal front is more important

for the leaders and the governing elite, and the internal threat is

the deciding factor where unleashing war is concerned. In pon-

dering whether to start a war against the pathocratic country,

other nations must therefore give primary consideration to the

fact that such a war can be used as an executioner of the com-

mon people whose increasing power represents incipient jeop-

ardy for the pathocracy. After all, pathocrats give short shrift to

blood and suffering of people they consider to be not quite

conspecific. Kings may have suffered due to the death of their

knights, but pathocrats never do: “We have a lot of people

here.” Should the situation be, or become, ripe in such a coun-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

209

try, however, anyone furnishing assistance to the nation will be

blessed by it; anyone withholding it will be cursed.

Pathocracy has other internal reasons for pursuing expan-

sionism through the use of all means possible. As long as that

“other” world governed by the systems of normal man exists, it

inducts into the non-pathological majority a certain sense of

direction. The non-pathological majority of the country’s popu-

lation will never stop dreaming of the reinstatement of the

normal man’s system in any possible form. This majority will

never stop watching other countries, waiting for the opportune

moment; its attention and power must therefore be distracted

from this purpose, and the masses must be “educated” and

channeled in the direction of imperialist strivings. This goal

must be pursued doggedly so that everyone knows what is be-

ing fought for and in whose name harsh discipline and poverty

must be endured. The latter factor – creating conditions of pov-

erty and hardship - effectively limits the possibility of “subver-

sive” activities on the part of the society of normal people.

The ideology must, of course, furnish a corresponding justi-

fication for this alleged right to conquer the world and must

therefore be properly elaborated. Expansionism is derived from

the very nature of pathocracy, not from ideology, but this fact

must be masked by ideology.100 Whenever this phenomenon

has been witnessed in history, imperialism was always its most

demonstrative quality.

On the other hand, there are countries with normal man’s

governments wherein the overwhelming majority of societies

shudders to think a similar system could be imposed on them.

The governments of such nations thereupon do everything they

can within the framework of their possibilities and their under-

standing of the phenomenon in order to contain its expansion.

The citizens of those countries would sigh with relief if some

upheaval were to replace this malevolent and incomprehensible

system with a more human, more easily understood, govern-

mental method with whom peaceful coexistence would be pos-

sible.

100 Example: the events of September 11, 2001, undoubtedly manufactured

by the Pathocracy. [Editor’s note.]

210

PATHOCRACY

Such countries thus undertake various means of action for

this purpose, their quality depending on the possibility of un-

derstanding that other reality. Such efforts resonate within the

country, and the military power of normal man’s countries

limits the pathocracy’s possibilities of armed maneuvers.

Weakening those countries that could possibly stand against

the pathocracy, especially by utilizing the response pathocracy

awakens in some of their deviant citizens, again becomes a

matter of the pathocracy’s survival.

Economic factors constitute a non-negligible part of the mo-

tivation for this expansionist tendency. Since the managerial

functions have been taken over by individuals with mediocre

intelligence and pathological character traits, the pathocracy

becomes incapable of properly administering anything at all.

The area suffering most severely must always be whichever

one requires a person to act independently, not wasting time

searching for the proper way to behave. Agriculture is depend-

ent upon changing climate conditions and the appearance of

pests and plant diseases. A farmer’s personal qualities have

thus been an essential factor of success in this area, as it was

for many centuries. Pathocracy therefore invariably brings

about food shortages.

However, many countries with normal man’s systems

abound in sufficiency of industrial products and experience

problems with their food surpluses and temporary economic

recessions even though the citizens are by no means over-

worked. The temptation to dominate such a country and its

prosperity, that perennial imperialist motive, thus becomes

even more strong in the pathocracy. The collected prosperity of

the conquered nation can be exploited for a time, the citizens

forced to work harder for paltry remuneration. For the moment,

no thought is given to the fact that introducing a pathocratic

system within such a country will eventually cause similar

unproductive conditions; after all psychological deviance, by

definition, indicates a lack of self-knowledge in this area. Un-

fortunately, the idea of conquering rich countries also moti-

vates the minds of many poor non-pathological fellows suffer-

ing under the pathocracy, but not understanding why, and who

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

211

would like to use this opportunity to grab something for them-

selves and eat their fill of good food.

As has been the case for centuries, military power is of

course the primary means for achieving these ends. Throughout

the centuries, though, whenever history has registered the ap-

pearance of the phenomenon of pathocracy, (regardless of the

ideological cloak covering it), specific measures of influence

have also become apparent: something in the order of specific

intelligence in the service of international intrigue facilitating

conquest. This quality is derived from the above-discussed

personality characteristics inspiring the overall phenomenon; it

should constitute data for historians to identify this type of

phenomenon throughout history.

People exist everywhere in the world with specifically sus-

ceptible deviant personalities; even a faraway pathocracy

evokes a resonating response in them, working on their under-

lying feeling that “there is a place for people like us there”.

Uncritical, frustrated, and abused people also exist everywhere,

and they can be reached by appropriately elaborated propa-

ganda. The future of a nation is greatly dependent on how

many such people it contains. Thanks to its specific psycho-

logical knowledge and its conviction that normal people are

naive, a pathocracy is able to improve its “anti-

psychotherapeutic” techniques, and pathologically egotistical

as usual, to insinuate its deviant world of concepts to others in

other countries, thus making them susceptible to conquest and

domination.

The most frequently used methods include paralogistic and

conversion methods such as the projection of one’s own quali-

ties and intention onto other persons, social groups, or nations,

paramoral indignation, and reverse blocking. This last method

is a pathocratic favorite used on the mass scale, driving the

minds of average people into a dead end because, as a result, it

causes them to search for the truth in the “golden mean” be-

tween the reality and its opposite.101

101 This is being very effectively used at the present time under the guise of

“The War on Terror”, a completely manufactured device that utilizes “false

flag operations” to herd people into “support camps” for the U.S. imperialist

agenda. [Editor’s note.]

212

PATHOCRACY

We should thus point out that although various works in the

area of psychopathology contain descriptions of most of these

near-hypocritical methods, an overall summary filling the gaps

observed is absent and sorely needed. How much better it

would be if the people and governments of normal man’s coun-

tries could take advantage of such a work and behave like an

experienced psychologist, noting the reproaches heaped upon

them in the course of projection and turning around statements

whose character indicate reverse blocking. A bit of analytical

cosmetics would then produce a low-cost list of a pathocratic

empire’s intentions.102

Law has become the measure of right within the countries

of normal human systems. We often forget how imperfect a

creation of human minds it really is, how dependent it is on

formulations based upon data which legislators can understand.

In legal theory, we accept its regulatory nature as a given and

consequently agree that in certain cases its activities may not

be quite concurrent with human reality. Understood thus, the

law furnishes insufficient support for counteracting a phe-

nomenon whose character lies outside of the possibilities of the

legislators’ imagination. Quite the contrary: pathocracy knows

how to take advantage of the weaknesses of such a legalistic

manner of thinking.

However, this macrosocial phenomenon’s internal actions

and external expansion are based upon psychological data. As

such, regardless of how these data are deformed within the

pathocrats’ personalities, its cunning is vastly superior to nor-

mal people’s legal systems. This makes pathocracy the social

system of the future, albeit in the shape of a caricature.

Therefore, the future for normal man belongs to social sys-

tems which are based on an improved comprehension of man

in all his psychological variations; evolution in this direction

can, among other things, ensure greater resistance to the expan-

102 This is currently being done, and quite well, by alternative news sources

on the internet, bloggers, and many “ordinary” people who can easily see

what is going on. Unfortunately, to date, no ruling party in any significant

country with the power to stand against the pathocracy of the U.S. has man-

aged to think that far. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

213

sionary methods this macrosocial phenomenon uses in its quest

to dominate the world.

Pathocracy Imposed by Force

The genesis of pathocracy in any country is so lengthy a

process that it is difficult to pinpoint when it began. If we take

into consideration those historical examples which should be

qualified in that regard, we will most frequently observe the

figure of an autocratic ruler whose mental mediocrity and in-

fantile personality finally opened the door to the ponerogenesis

of the phenomenon. Wherever a society’s common sense is

sufficiently influential, its self-preservation instinct is able to

overcome this ponerogenic process rather early. Things are

different when an active nucleus of this disease already exists

and can dominate by means of infection or the imposition of

force.

Whenever a nation experiences a “system crisis” or a hy-

peractivity of ponerogenic processes within, it becomes the

object of a pathocratic penetration whose purpose is to serve

up the country as booty. It will then become easy to take ad-

vantage of its internal weaknesses and revolutionary move-

ments in order to impose rule on the basis of a limited use of

force. Conditions such as a great war or a country’s temporary

weakness can sometimes cause it to submit to the violence of a

pathocratic neighbor country (against their will) whose system

did not exhibit such wide-scope infirmities earlier. After forci-

ble imposition of such a system the course of pathologization

of life becomes different; and such a pathocracy will be less

stable, its very existence dependent upon the factor of never-

ending outside force.

Let us now address the latter situation first: Brute force

must first stifle the resistance of an exhausted nation; people

possessing military or leadership skills must be disposed of,

and anyone appealing to moral values and legal principles must

be silenced. The new principles are never explicitly enunciated.

People must learn the new unwritten law via painful experi-

ence. The stultifying influence of this deviant world of con-

cepts finishes the job, and common sense demands caution and

endurance.

214

PATHOCRACY

This is followed by a shock which appears as tragic as it is

frightening. Some people from every social group, whether

abused paupers, aristocrats, officials, literati, students, scien-

tists, priests, atheists, or nobodies known to no one, suddenly

start changing their personality and world view. Decent Chris-

tians and patriots just yesterday, they now espouse the new

ideology and behave contemptuously to anyone still adhering

to the old values. Only later does it become evident that this

ostensibly avalanche-like process has its natural limits. With

time, the society becomes stratified based on factors entirely

different from the old political convictions and social links. We

already know the causes for this.

Through direct contact with the pathocracy, society simul-

taneously begins to sense that its true content is different from

the ideologies disseminated earlier, while the country was still

independent. This divergence is a traumatizing factor, because

it questions the value of accepted convictions. Years must pass

before the mind has adapted to the new concepts. When those

of us who have experienced this then travel to Western Europe,

or especially to the United States, people who still believe the

original ideologies, the mask that was presented by the pathoc-

racy, strike us as being silly.

Pathocracy imposed by force arrives in a finished form, we

could even call it ripe. People observing it close up were un-

able to distinguish the earlier phases of its development, when

the schizoidals and characteropaths were in charge. The need

for the existence of these phases and their character had to be

reconstructed in this work on the basis of historical data.

In an imposed system, psychopathic material is already

dominant; it was perceived as something contrary to human

nature, virtually bereft of the mask of ideology rendered ever

less necessary in a conquered country, but nevertheless still

masked by its incomprehensibility to people who are still trying

to think in the categories of a natural world view.

We at first perceived the old system of categories and un-

derstanding as painfully inadequate for purposes of compre-

hending the reality which had overwhelmed us. The essential

objective categories we needed to classify what we observed

would not be created until many years of effort had passed.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

215

Individuals with deviant characteristics, scattered throughout

society, however, unerringly sensed that the time had come for

their dreams to come true, the time to exact revenge upon those

“others” who had abused and humiliated them before. This

violent formative process of pathocracy lasted barely eight

years or so, thereupon making a similarly escalated transforma-

tion into the dissimulative phase.

The system functions, psychological mechanisms, and mys-

terious causative links in a country upon which a quasi-political

structure was imposed are basically analogous to those of the

country which gave rise to the phenomenon. The system

spreads downward until it reaches every village and every hu-

man individual. The actual contents and internal causes of this

phenomenon also manifest no essential difference, regardless

of whether we make our observation in the capital or in some

outlying small town. If the entire organism is sick, diagnostic

biopsy tissue can be collected wherever this can be performed

most expediently. Those who live in countries with normal

human systems attempting to understand this other system by

means of their imagination, or by penetrating the walls of the

Kremlin where it is assumed that the intentions of the highest

authorities are concealed, do not realize that this is a very oner-

ous method to do something that can be done more efficiently.

In order to perceive the essence of the phenomenon, we can

more easily situate ourselves in a small town, where it is much

easier to peek backstage and analyze the nature of such a sys-

tem.

However, some of the differences in the nature of the

pathocratic phenomenon between the originating country and

the country on which it is forcibly imposed turn out to be per-

manent. The system will always strike the society that has been

taken over as something foreign associated with the other coun-

try. The society’s historical tradition and culture constitute a

connection to those strivings aimed in the direction of normal

man’s structures. The more mature cultural formations in par-

ticular prove the most highly resistant to the system’s destruc-

tive activities. The subjugated nation finds support and inspira-

tion for its psychological and moral resistance in its own cul-

tural, religious, and moral traditions. These values, elaborated

216

PATHOCRACY

through centuries, cannot easily be destroyed or co-opted by

pathocracy; quite the contrary, they even embark upon a more

intensive life in the new society. These values progressively

cleanse themselves of patriotic buffoonery, and their principal

contents become more real in their eternal meaning. If forced

by necessity, the culture of the country in question is concealed

in private homes or disseminated via conspiracy; however, it

continues to survive and develop, creating values which could

not have arisen during happier times.

As a result, such a society’s opposition becomes ever more

enduring, ever more skillfully effected. It turns out that those

who believed they could impose such a system, trusting that it

would then function on the pathocracy’s autonomic mecha-

nisms, were overly optimistic. Imposed pathocracy always

remains an alien system to the extent that, if it should fall in the

country of its birth, its endurance within the subjugated nation

would only be a matter of weeks.

Artifically Infected Pathocracy

and Psychological Warfare

If a nucleus of this macrosocial pathological phenomenon

already exists in the world, always cloaking its true quality

behind an ideological mask of some political system, it irradi-

ates into other nations via coded news difficult for normal peo-

ple to understand, but easy to read for psychopathic individu-

als. “That’s the place for us, we now have a homeland where

our dreams about ruling those “others” can come true. We can

finally live in safety and prosperity.” The more powerful this

nucleus and the pathocratic nation, the wider the scope of its

inductive siren-call, heard by individuals whose nature is corre-

spondingly deviant, as though they were superheterodyne re-

ceivers naturally attuned to the same wave-length. Unfortu-

nately, what is being used today is real radio transmitters in the

hundreds of kilowatts, as well as loyal covert agents of pathoc-

racy networking our planet.

Whether directly or indirectly, i.e. by means of deviant

“agents”, this call of pathocracy, once appropriately “decked-

out”, reaches a significantly wider circle of people, including

both individuals with various psychological deviations and

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

217

those who are frustrated, deprived of the opportunity to earn an

education and make use of their talents, physically or morally

injured, or simply primitive. The scope of the response to this

call may vary in proportion, but nowhere will it represent the

majority. Nonetheless, the home-bred spellbinders who arise

never take into account the fact that they are not able to enrap-

ture the majority. 103

Various nations’ different degrees of resistance to this activ-

ity depend upon many factors, such as prosperity and its equi-

table distribution, the society’s educational level (especially

that of the poorer classes), the proportion of participation of

individuals who are primitive or have various deviations, and

the current phase of the hysteroidal cycle. Some nations have

developed immunity as a result of more direct contact with the

phenomenon, something we shall discuss in the next chapter.

In countries just emerging from primeval conditions and

lacking political experience, an appropriately elaborated revo-

lutionary doctrine reaches its society’s autonomous substratum

and finds people who treat it like ideational reality. This also

occurs in nations where an over-egoistical ruling class defends

its position by means of naively moralizing doctrines, where

injustice is rampant, or where an intensification of the hysteria

level stifles the operation of common sense. People who have

become accustomed to revolutionary catchwords no longer

watch to make sure that whoever expounds such an ideology is

a truly sincere adherent, and not just someone using the mask

of ideology to conceal other motives derived from his deviant

personality.

103 Noticable in any country. In the present day, when the United States is

well on the way to becoming a full-blown pathocracy, and is thus the source

of the contamination, spellbinders for the deviant reality promote “American

style” economics and “culture,” and are even viewed by their fellow coun-

trymen as “America-ophiles”. Most people do not understand that the first

step to becoming part of the Global pathocracy that America is attempting to

impose on the world is to become part of the economic system as it is formu-

lated in America. A recent example of a country rejecting this maneuver is

France’s rejection of the European Constitution, a document focusing on the

neo-liberal transformation of the European economy along the lines of the

U.S. model. [Editor’s note.]

218

PATHOCRACY

In addition to these spellbinders, we can find another kind

of preacher of revolutionary ideas, one whose status is basi-

cally linked to the money he receives for his activities. How-

ever, it is unlikely that its ranks include people who could be

characterized as psychologically normal with no reservations

on the basis of the above-mentioned criteria. Their indifference

to the human suffering caused by their own activities is derived

from deficiencies in their perceived value of societal links or

their capacity to foresee the results of their activities.

In ponerogenic processes, moral deficiencies, intellectual

failings, and pathological factors intersect in a time-space

causative network giving rise to individual and national suffer-

ing.

Any war waged with psychological weapons costs only a

fraction as much as classical warfare, but it does have a cost,

especially when it is being waged simultaneously in many

countries throughout the world.

People acting in the name of pathocracy’s interests may ef-

fect their activities in parallel, under the banner of some tradi-

tional or other ideology, or even with the assistance of a con-

tradictory ideology battling the traditional one. In these latter

cases, the service must be performed by individuals whose

response to the call of the pathocracy is sufficiently vehement

so as to prevent the self-suggestive activities of the other ideol-

ogy they are using from weakening the links with their actual

hopes for power.

Whenever a society contains serious social problems, there

will also be some group of sensible people striving to improve

the social situation by means of energetic reforms, so as to

eliminate the cause of social tension. Others consider it their

duty to bring about a moral rejuvenation of society. Elimina-

tion of social injustice and reconstruction of the country’s mor-

als and civilization could deprive a pathocracy of any chance to

take over. Such reformers and moralists must therefore be con-

sistently neutralized by means of liberal or conservative posi-

tions and appropriately suggestive catchwords and paramoral-

isms; if necessary, the best among them has to be murdered.

Psychological warfare strategists must decide rather early

on which ideology would be most efficient in a particular coun-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

219

try because of its adaptability to said nation’s traditions. After

all, the appropriately adapted ideology must perform the func-

tion of a Trojan horse, transporting pathocracy into the country.

These various ideologies are then gradually conformed to one’s

own original master plan. Finally, off comes the mask.

At the right time, local partisans are organized and armed,

with recruits picked from dissatisfied localities; leadership is

provided by trained officers familiar with the secret idea as

well as the operative idea concocted for propagation in the

country in question. Assistance must then be given so groups of

conspirators adhering to the concocted ideology can stage a

coup d’état, whereupon an iron-fisted government is installed.

Once this has been brought about, the diversionary partisans’

activities are stymied – they are made out to be patsies - so that

the new authorities can take credit for bringing about internal

peace. Any hoodlum who cannot or will not submit to the new

decrees is “gently” invited before his former leader and shot in

the back of the head. This is the new reality.

This is how such governmental systems are born. A network

of pathological ponerogenical factors is already active, as is the

inspirational role of essential psychopathy. However, that does

not yet represent a complete picture of pathocracy. Many local

leaders and adherents persist in their original convictions

which, albeit radical, strike them as serving the good of a much

larger proportion of formerly abused persons, not just a few

percent of pathocrats and the interests of a would-be world

wide empire.

Local leaders continue to think along the lines of social

revolution, appealing to the political goals they truly believe in.

They demand that the “friendly power” furnish them not only

the promised assistance, but also a certain measure of auton-

omy they consider crucial. They are not sufficiently familiar

with the mysterious “us-and-them” dichotomy. At the same

time they are instructed and ordered to submit to the dictates of

unclear ambassadors whose meaning and purpose are hard to

understand. Frustration and doubt thus grow; their nature is

ideological, nationalistic, and practical.

Conflict progressively increases, especially when wide cir-

cles of society begin to doubt whether those people allegedly

220

PATHOCRACY

acting in the name of some great ideology do in fact believe in

it. Thanks to experience and contact with the pathocratic na-

tion, similarly wide circles simultaneously increase their prac-

tical knowledge about the reality and behavioral methods of

that system. Should such a semi-colony thus achieve too much

independence or even decide to defect, too much of this knowl-

edge could then reach the consciousness of normal man’s coun-

tries. This could represent a serious defeat for pathocracy.

Ever-increasing control is thus necessary until full pathoc-

racy can be achieved. Those leaders whom the central authori-

ties consider to be effectively transitional can be eliminated

unless they indicate a sufficient degree of submission. Geopo-

litical conditions are generally decisive in this area. That ex-

plains why it is easier for such leaders to survive on an outlying

island than in countries bordering the empire. Should such

leaders manage to maintain a larger degree of autonomy by

concealing their doubts, they might be able to take advantage

of their geopolitical position if the conditions are amenable.

During such a phase of crisis of trust, circumspect policy on

the part of normal man’s countries could still tip the scales in

favor of a structure which may be revolutionary and leftist, but

not pathocratic. However, this is not the only missing consid-

eration; another primary one is the lack of objective knowledge

about the phenomenon, something which would make such

policy possible. Emotional factors, coupled with a moralizing

interpretation of pathological phenomena, frequently play

much too great a part in political decision-making.

No full-fledged pathocracy can develop until the second up-

heaval and the purging of its transitional leadership, which

was insufficiently loyal thereto. This is the counterpart of a

showdown with the true adherents of the ideology within the

genesis of the original pathocracy, which can then develop, due

both to the appropriately imposed leaders and to the activity of

this phenomenon’s autonomous ponerogenic mechanisms.

After the initial governmental period, brutal, bloody, and

psychologically naive, such a pathocracy thereupon begins its

transformation into its dissimulative form, which has already

been described in discussing the genesis of the phenomenon

and the force-imposed pathocracy. During this period not even

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

221

the most skillful outside policy can possibly undermine the

existence of such a system. The period of weakness is still to

come: when a mighty network of the society of normal people

is formed.

The above lapidary description of an infectious imposition

of pathocracy indicates that this process repeats all the phases

of independent ponerogenesis condensed in time and content.

Underneath the rulership of its incompetent administrative

predecessors, we can even discern a period of hyperactivity on

the part of schizoidal individuals mesmerized by the vision of

their own rule based on contempt for human nature, especially

if they are numerous within a given country. They do not real-

ize that pathocracy will never make their dreams come true; it

will rather shunt them into the shadows, since individuals with

whom we are already familiar will become the leaders.

A pathocracy thus generated will be more strongly im-

printed upon the subjugated country than one imposed by

force. At the same time, however, it maintains certain charac-

teristics of its divergent content, sometimes referred to as

“ideological” although it is in fact a derivate of the different

ethnological substratum upon which its scion was grafted.

Should conditions such as a nation’s numerical plentitude, wide

extension, or geographic isolation permit independence from

the primary pathocratic nation, more measured factors and the

society of normal people will thus find some way of influenc-

ing the governmental system, taking advantage of the opportu-

nities afforded by the dissimulative phase. In the presence of

advantageous conditions and skillful outside assistance, this

could lead to progressive depathologization of the system.

General Considerations

The path to comprehending the true contents of the phe-

nomenon and its internal causality can only be opened by over-

coming natural reflexes and emotions, and the tendency toward

moralizing interpretations, followed by assembling data elabo-

rated in difficult everyday clinical work and subsequent gener-

alizations in the form of theoretical ponerology. Such compre-

hension naturally also encompasses those who would create

such an inhuman system.

222

PATHOCRACY

The problem of biological determination of the behavior of

deviants is thus sketched in all its expressiveness, showing

primarily how their capacity for moral judgments and their

field of behavior selection is narrowed well below the levels

available to a normal person. The attitude of understanding

even one’s enemies is the most difficult for us humans. Moral

condemnation proves to be an obstacle along the path toward

curing the world of this disease.

A result of the character of the phenomenon described in

this chapter is that no attempt to understand its nature or to

track its internal causative links and diachronic transformations

would be possible if all we had at our disposal were the natural

language of psychological, social, and moral concepts even in

that partially perfected form used by the social sciences. It

would also be impossible to predict subsequent phases in the

development of this phenomenon or to distinguish its weak

times and weak spots for purposes of counteraction.

Elaboration of an appropriate and sufficiently comprehen-

sive conceptual language was thus indicated as essential; it

required more time and effort than studying the phenomenon

itself. It has therefore become necessary to bore readers some-

what by introducing this conceptual language in a manner both

parsimonious and adequate, which would at the same time be

comprehensible to those readers not trained in the area of psy-

chopathology.

Anyone who wants to repair television sets instead of mak-

ing them worse must first familiarize himself with electronics,

which is also beyond the ambit of our natural conceptual lan-

guage. However, upon learning to understand this macrosocial

phenomenon in the corresponding reference system, a scientist

stands in wonder as though before the open tomb of Tutank-

hamen for a while before he is able to understand the living

laws of the phenomenon with ever greater speed and skill,

thereupon complementing this comprehension with a huge

array of detailed data.

The first conclusion which suggested itself soon after meet-

ing with the “professor” introduced at the beginning of this

volume, was that the phenomenon’s development is limited by

nature in terms of the participation of susceptible individuals

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

223

within a given society. The initial evaluation of approximately

6% amenable individuals proved realistic; progressively col-

lected detailed statistical data assembled later were unable to

refute it. This value varies from country to country in the mag-

nitude of about one percentage point upward or downward.

Quantitatively speaking, this number is broken down into 0.6%

essential psychopaths, i.e. about 1/10 of this 6 %. However,

this anomaly plays a disproportionate role compared to the

numbers by saturating the phenomenon as a whole with its own

quality of thought and experience.

Other psychopathies, known as asthenic, schizoidal,

anankastic, hysterical, et al., definitely play second fiddle al-

though, in sum, they are much more numerous. Relatively

primitive skirtoidal individuals become fellow-travelers,

goaded by their lust for life, but their activities are limited by

considerations of their own advantage. In non-semitic nations,

schizoidia are somewhat more numerous than essential psy-

chopaths; although highly active in the early phases of the

genesis of the phenomenon, they betray an attraction to pathoc-

racy as well as the rational distance of efficient thinking; Thus

they are torn between such a system and the society of normal

people.

Persons less distinctly inclined in the pathocratic direction

include those affected by some states caused by the toxic ac-

tivities of certain substances such as ether, carbon monoxide,104

and possibly some endotoxins, under the condition that this

occurred in childhood.105

104 Considering the fact that the last attempt to impose a Pathocracy on the

global scale, Naziism, campaigned vigorously against smoking, and the

current U.S. pathocracy is also behind the global attempt to “stamp out smok-

ing” as a “health hazard”, all the while generously distributing depleted

uranium, a far more dangerous substance, into the environment, as well as

refusing to join any environmental preservation activities, one has to wonder

if there is not some connection here? If carbon monoxide, one of the primary

substances inhaled when smoking, actually produces a state or condition that

is a defense against the mental predations of pathocrats, no wonder they wish

to eliminate it. That also suggests that all of the so-called “data” supporting

the anti-smoking campaign is possibly “cooked”. [Editor’s note.]

105 i.e., So-called “second hand smoke”. This actually suggests that second-

hand smoke can have highly beneficial effects on children specifically in

terms of immunizing them against psychopathic take-over! [Editor’s note.]

224

PATHOCRACY

Among individuals carrying other indications of brain-tissue

damage, only two described types have a somewhat measured

inclination, namely frontal and paranoidal characteropaths. In

the case of frontal characteropathy, this is principally the result

of an incapacity for self-critical reflection and an incapacity for

the abandonment of a dead-end street into which one has

thoughtlessly stumbled. Paranoidal individuals expect uncriti-

cal support within such a system. In general however, the carri-

ers of various kinds of brain-tissue damage lean clearly toward

the society of normal people, and as a result of their psycho-

logical problems, ultimately suffer even more than healthy

people under pathocracy.

It also turned out that the carriers of some physiological

anomalies known to physicians and sometimes to psycholo-

gists, and which are primarily hereditary in nature, manifest

split tendencies similar to schizoids. In a similar manner, peo-

ple whom nature has unfortunately saddled with a short life and

an early cancer-related death frequently indicate a characteris-

tic and irrational attraction for this phenomenon. These latter

observations were decisive in my agreeing to call the phe-

nomenon by this name, which had originally struck me as se-

mantically overly loose. An individual’s decreased resistance

to the effects of pathocracy and his attraction to this phenome-

non appear to be a holistic response of person’s organism, not

merely of his psychological makeup alone.

Approximately 6% of the population constitutes the active

structure of the new rulership, which carries its own peculiar

consciousness of its own goals. Twice as many people consti-

tute a second group: those who have managed to warp their

personalities to meet the demands of the new reality. This leads

to attitudes which can already be interpreted within the catego-

ries of the natural psychological world view, i.e. the errors we

are committing are much smaller. It is of course not possible to

draw an exact boundary between these groups; the separation

adduced here is merely descriptive in nature.

This second group consists of individuals who are, on the

average, weaker, more sickly, and less vital. The frequency of

known mental diseases in this group is at twice the rate of the

national average. We can thus assume that the genesis of their

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

225

submissive attitude toward the regime, their greater susceptibil-

ity to pathological effects, and their skittish opportunism in-

cludes various relatively impalpable anomalies. We observe

not only physiological anomalies, but also the kinds described

above at the lowest intensity, with the exception of essential

psychopathy.

The 6% group constitute the new nobility; the 12% group

gradually forms the new bourgeoisie, whose economic situa-

tion is the most advantageous. Adapting to the new conditions,

not without conflicts of conscience, transforms this latter group

into both dodgers and, simultaneously, intermediaries between

the oppositional society and the active ponerological group,

whom they can talk to in the appropriate language. They play

such a crucial role within this system that both sides must take

them into account. Since their technical capacities and skills

are better than those of the active pathocratic group, they as-

sume various managerial positions. Normal people see them as

persons they can approach, generally without being subjected

to pathological arrogance.

So it is that only 18% of the country’s population is in favor

of the new system of government; but concerning the layer we

have called the bourgeoisie, we may even be doubtful of the

sincerity of their attitudes. This is the situation in the author’s

homeland. This proportion can be variously estimated in other

countries, from 15% in Hungary to 21% in Bulgaria, but it is

never more than a relatively small minority.

The great majority of the population forms the society of

normal people, gradually creating an informal communications

network. It behooves us to wonder why these people reject the

advantages conformity affords, consciously preferring the op-

posing role: poverty, harassment, and curtailment of human

freedoms. What ideals motivate them? Is this merely a kind of

romanticism representing ties to tradition and religion? Still, so

many people with a religious upbringing change their world

view to that of the Pathocrats very quickly. The next chapter is

dedicated to this question.

For the moment, let us limit ourselves to stating that a per-

son with a normal human instinctive substratum, good basic

intelligence, and full faculties of critical thought would have a

226

PATHOCRACY

difficult time accepting such a compromise; it would devastate

his personality and engender neurosis. At the same time, such a

system easily distinguishes and separates him from its own

kind regardless of his sporadic hesitations. No method of

propaganda can change the nature of this macrosocial phe-

nomenon or the nature of a normal human being. They remain

foreign to each other.

The above-described subdivision into three sections should

not be identified with membership in any party, which is offi-

cially ideological but in fact pathocratic. Such a system con-

tains many normal people forced to join such a party by various

circumstances, and who must pretend as best they can to repre-

sent said party’s more reasonable adherents. After a year or two

of obtusely executed instructions, they start becoming inde-

pendent and reestablishing their severed ties to society. Their

former friends begin to get the gist of their double game. This

is the situation of large numbers of the adherents of the former

ideology, which is now fulfilling its changed function. They are

also the first to protest that this system does not truly represent

their old political beliefs. We must also remember that spe-

cially trusted people, whose loyalty to the pathocracy is a fore-

gone conclusion due to their psychological nature and the

functions they perform, have no need to belong to the party;

they stand above it.

After a typical pathocratic structure has been formed, the

population is effectively divided – polarized - according to

completely different lines from what someone raised outside

the purview of this phenomenon might imagine, and in a man-

ner whose actual conditions are also impossible to comprehend

for someone lacking essential specialized training. However, an

intuitive sense for these causes gradually forms among the

majority of society in a country affected by the phenomenon. A

person raised in a normal man’s system is accustomed since

childhood to seeing economic and ideological problems in the

foreground, possibly also the results of social injustice. Such

concepts have proved illusory and ineffective in a most tragic

manner: the macrosocial phenomenon has its own properties

and laws which can only be studied and comprehended within

the appropriate categories.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

227

However, in leaving behind our old natural method of com-

prehension and learning to track the internal causality of the

phenomenon, we marvel at the surprising exactness with which

the latter turns out to be subjected to its own regular laws. With

regard to individuals, there is always a greater scope of some

individualism and environmental influences. In statistical

analyses these variable factors disappear and the essential con-

stant characteristics surface. The entirety is thus clearly subject

to causative determination. This explains the relative ease of

transition from studying causation to predicting future changes

in the phenomenon. In time, the adequacy of collected knowl-

edge has been confirmed by the accuracy of these predictions.

Let us now take individual cases into consideration. For in-

stance: we meet two people whose behavior makes us suspect

they are psychopaths, but their attitudes to the pathocratic sys-

tem are quite different; the first is affirmative, the second pain-

fully critical. Studies on the basis of tests detecting brain tissue

damage will indicate such pathology in the second person, but

not in the first; in the second case we are dealing with behavior

which may be strongly reminiscent of psychopathy, but the

substratum is different.

If a carrier of an essential psychopathy gene was a member

of the decidedly anti-communist government party before the

war, he will be treated as an “ideological enemy” during the

pathocracy’s formative period. However, he soon appears to

find a modus vivendi with the new authorities and enjoys a

certain amount of tolerance. The moment when he becomes

transformed into an adherent of the new “ideology” and finds

the way back to the ruling party is only a matter of time and

circumstance.

If the family of a typical zealous pathocrat produces a son

who does not inherit the appropriate gene, thanks to a happy

genetic coincidence, (or he was born from a bio-

psychologically normal partner), such a son will be raised in

the corresponding youth organization, faithful to the ideology

and the party, which he joins early. By mature manhood, how-

ever, he will begin to list toward the society of normal people.

The opposition, that world which feels and thinks normally,

becomes ever closer to him; therein he finds himself and a set

228

PATHOCRACY

of values unknown – yet familiar - to him. A conflict eventu-

ally arises between himself and his family, party, and environ-

ment, under conditions which may be more or less dramatic.

This starts out with critical statements and the writing of rather

naive appeals requesting changes in the party, in the direction

of healthy common sense, of course. Such people then finally

begin to do battle on society’s side, enduring sacrifices and

suffering. Others decide to abandon their native country and

wander foreign lands, lonely among people who cannot under-

stand them or the problems under which they were raised.

With regard to the phenomenon as whole, one can predict

its primary properties and processes of change and estimate the

time at which they will occur. Regardless of its genesis, no

pathocratic activation of the population of a country affected by

this phenomenon can exceed the above discussed boundaries

set by biological factors.

The phenomenon will develop according to the patterns we

have already described, gnawing ever deeper into the country’s

social fabric. The resulting pathocratic monoparty will bifur-

cate from the very outset: one wing is consistently pathological

and earns nicknames such as “doctrinarian”, “hard-headed”,

“beton”, etc. The second is considered more liberal, and in fact

this is where the reverberation of the original ideology remains

alive for the longest. The representatives of this second wing

try as hard as their shrinking powers permit to bend this strange

reality into a direction more amenable to human reason, and

they do not lose complete touch with society’s links. The first

internal crisis of weakness occurs some ten years after such a

system has emerged; as a result, the society of normal people

gains a bit more freedom. During this time frame, skillful out-

side action can already count on internal cooperation.

Pathocracy corrodes the entire social organism, wasting its

skills and power.

The effects of the more ideational wing of the party and its

enlivening influence upon the workings of the entire country

gradually weaken. Typical pathocrats take over all the manage-

rial functions in a totally destroyed structure of a nation. Such a

state must be short-term, since no ideology can vivify it. The

time comes when the common masses of people want to live

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

229

like human beings again and the system can no longer resist.

There will be no great counter-revolution; a more or less

stormy process of regeneration will instead ensue.

Pathocracy is even less of a socioeconomic system than a

social structure or political system. It is a macrosocial disease

process affecting entire nations and running the course of its

characteristic pathodynamic properties. The phenomenon

changes too quickly in time for us to be able to comprehend it

in categories which would imply a certain stability, not ruling

out the evolutionary processes to which social systems are

subject. Any way of comprehending the phenomenon by im-

puting certain enduring properties to it thus quickly causes us

to lose sight of its current contents. The dynamics of transfor-

mation in time is part of the nature of the phenomenon; we

cannot possibly achieve comprehension from outside its pa-

rameters.

As long as we keep using methods of comprehending this

pathological phenomenon, which apply certain political doc-

trines whose contents are heterogeneous with regard to its true

nature, we will not be able to identify the causes and properties

of the disease. A prepared ideology will be able to cloak the

essential qualities from the minds of scientists, politicians, and

common people. In such a state of affairs, we will never elabo-

rate any causatively active methods which could stifle the phe-

nomenon’s pathological self-reproduction or its expansionist

external influences. Ignota nulla curatio morbi!

However, once we understand a disease’s etiological factors

and their activities as well as the pathodynamics of its changes,

we find that the search for a curative method generally be-

comes much easier. Something similar applies with regard to

the macrosocial pathological phenomenon discussed above.

CHAPTER VI

NORMAL PEOPLE

UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

As adduced above, the anomaly distinguished as essential

psychopathy inspires the overall phenomenon in a well-

developed pathocracy and betrays biological analogies to the

well known phenomenon called Daltonism, color-blindness or

near-blindness as regard to red and green. For the purpose of an

intellectual exercise, let us thus imagine that Daltonists have

managed to take over power in some country and have forbid-

den the citizens from distinguishing these colors, thus eliminat-

ing the distinction between green (unripe) and ripe tomatoes.

Special vegetable patch inspectors armed with pistols and pick-

ets would patrol the areas to make sure the citizens were not

selecting only ripe tomatoes to pick, which would indicate that

they were distinguishing between red and green. Such inspec-

tors could not, of course, be totally color-blind themselves

(otherwise they could not exercise this extremely important

function), They could not suffer more than near-blindness as

regards these colors. However, they would have to belong to

the clan of people made nervous by any discussion about col-

ors.

With such authorities around, the citizens might even be

willing to eat a green tomato and affirm quite convincingly that

it was ripe. But once the severe inspectors left for some other

garden far away, there would be the shower of comments it

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

231

does not behoove me to reproduce in a scientific work. The

citizens would than pick nicely vine-ripened tomatoes, make a

salad with cream, and add a few drops of rum for flavor.

May I suggest that all normal people whom fate has forced

to live under pathocratic rule make the serving of a salad ac-

cording to the above recipe into a symbolic custom. Any guest

recognizing the symbol by its color and aroma will refrain from

making any comments. Such a custom might hasten the rein-

stallation of a normal man’s system.

The pathological authorities are convinced that the appro-

priate pedagogical, indoctrinational, propaganda, and terrorist

means can teach a person with a normal instinctive substratum,

range of feelings, and basic intelligence to think and feel ac-

cording to their own different fashion. This conviction is only

slightly less unrealistic, psychologically speaking, than the

belief that people able to see colors normally can be broken of

this habit.

Actually, normal people cannot get rid of the characteristics

with which the Homo sapiens species was endowed by its

phylogenetic past. Such people will thus never stop feeling and

perceiving psychological and socio-moral phenomena in much

the same way their ancestors had been doing for hundreds of

generations. Any attempt to make a society subjugated to the

above phenomenon “learn” this different experiential manner

imposed by pathological egotism is, in principle, fated for fail-

ure regardless of how many generations it might last. It does,

however, call forth a series of improper psychological results

which may give the pathocrats the appearance of success.

However, it also provokes society to elaborate pinpointed,

well-thought-out self-defense measures based on its cognitive

and creative efforts.

Pathocratic leadership believes that it can achieve a state

wherein those “other” people’s minds become dependent by

means of the effects of their personality, perfidious pedagogical

means, the means of mass-disinformation, and psychological

terror; such faith has a basic meaning for them. In their concep-

tual world, pathocrats consider it virtually self-evident that the

“others” should accept their obvious, realistic, and simple way

of apprehending reality. For some mysterious reason, though,

232

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

the “others” wriggle out, slither away, and tell each other jokes

about pathocrats. Someone must be responsible for this: pre-

revolutionary oldsters, or some radio stations abroad. It thus

becomes necessary to improve the methodology of action, find

better “soul engineers” with a certain literary talent, and isolate

society from improper literature and any foreign influence.

Those experiences and intuitions whispering that this is a Sisy-

phean labor must be repressed from the field of consciousness

of the pathocrat.

The conflict is thus dramatic for both sides. The first feels

insulted in its humanity, rendered obtuse, and forced to think in

a manner contrary to healthy common sense. The other stifles

the premonition that if this goal cannot be reached, sooner or

later things will revert to normal man’s rule, including their

vengeful lack of understanding of the pathocrats’ personalities.

So if it does not work, it is best not to think about the future,

just prolong the status quo by means of the above-mentioned

efforts. Toward the end of this book, it will behoove us to con-

sider the possibilities for untying this Gordian knot.

However, such a pedagogical system, rife with pathological

egotisation and limitations, produces serious negative results,

especially in those generations unfamiliar with any other condi-

tions of life. Personality development is impoverished, particu-

larly regarding the more subtle values widely accepted in socie-

ties. We observe the characteristic lack of respect for one’s

own organism and the voice of nature and instinct, accompa-

nied by brutalization of feelings and customs, to be explained

away by the excuse of injustice. The tendency to be morally

judgmental in interpreting the behavior of those who caused

one’s suffering sometimes leads to a demonological world

view. At the same time, adaptation and resourcefulness within

these different conditions become the object of cognition.

A person who has been the object of the egotistic behavior

of pathological individuals for a long time becomes saturated

with their characteristic psychological material to such an ex-

tent that we can frequently discern the kind of psychological

anomalies which affected him. The personalities of former

concentration-camp inmates were saturated with generally

psychopathic material ingested from camp commanders and

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

233

tormentors, creating a phenomenon so widespread that it later

became a primary motive to seek psychotherapy. Becoming

aware of this makes it easier for them to throw off this burden

and re-establish contact with the normal human world. In par-

ticular, being shown appropriate statistical data concerning the

appearance of psychopathy in a given population facilitates

their search for understanding of their nightmare years and a

rebuilding of trust in their fellow man.

This kind of psychotherapy would be extremely useful for

those people who need it most, but it has unfortunately proved

too risky for a psychotherapist. Patients easily make connective

transfers, unfortunately all too often correct, between the in-

formation learned during such therapy (particularly in the area

of psychopathy) and the reality surrounding them under the

rule of so-called “popular democracy”. Former camp inmates

are unhappily unable to hold their tongues in check, which

causes intervention on the part of political authorities.

When American soldiers returned from North Vietnamese

prison camps, many of them proved to have been subjected to

indoctrination and other methods of influencing by pathologi-

cal material. A certain degree of transpersonification appeared

in many of these. In the U.S.A. this was called “programming”

and outstanding psychotherapists proceeded to effect therapy

for the purpose of deprogramming them. It turned out that they

met with opposition and critical commentary concerning their

skills, among other things. When I heard about this, I breathed

a deep sigh and thought: Dear God, what interesting work that

would make for a psychotherapist who understands such mat-

ters well.

The pathocratic world, the world of pathological egotism

and terror, is so difficult to understand for people raised outside

the scope of this phenomenon that they often manifest childlike

naiveté, even if they have studied psychopathology and are

psychologists by profession. There are no real data in their

behavior, advice, rebukes, and psychotherapy. That explains

why their efforts are boring and hurtful and frequently come to

naught. Their egotism transforms their good will into bad re-

sults.

234

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

If someone has personally experienced such a nightmarish

reality, he considers people who have not progressed in under-

standing it within the same time frame to be simply presump-

tuous, sometimes even malicious. In the course of his experi-

ence and contact with this macrosocial phenomenon, he has

collected a certain amount of practical knowledge about the

phenomenon and its psychology and learned to protect his own

personality. This experience, unceremoniously rejected by

“people who don’t understand anything”, becomes a psycho-

logical burden for him, forcing him to live within a narrow

circle of persons whose experiences have been similar. Such a

person should rather be treated as the bearer of valuable scien-

tific data; understanding would constitute at least partial

psychotherapy for him, and would simultaneously open the

door to a comprehension of reality.

I would here like to remind psychologists that these kinds of

experiences and their destructive effects upon the human per-

sonality are not unknown to scientific practice and experience.

We often meet with patients requiring appropriate assistance:

individuals raised under the influence of pathological, espe-

cially psychopathic, personalities who were forced with a

pathological egotism to accept an abnormal way of thinking.

Even an approximate determination of the type of pathological

factors which operated on him allow us to pinpoint psycho-

therapeutic measures. In practice we most frequently meet

cases wherein such a pathological situation operated on a pa-

tient’s personality in early childhood, as a result of which we

must utilize long term measures and work very carefully, using

various techniques, in order to help him develop his true per-

sonality.

Children under parental pathocratic rule are “protected” un-

til school age. Then they meet with decent, normal people who

attempt to limit the destructive influences as much as possible.

The most intense effects occur during adolescence and the

ensuing time frame of intellectual maturation which can occur

with the input of decent people. This rescues the society of

normal people from deeper deformations in personality devel-

opment and widespread neurosis. This period remains within

persistent memory and is thus amenable to insight, reflection,

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

235

and disillusion. Such people’s psychotherapy would consist

almost exclusively of utilizing the correct knowledge of the

essence of the phenomenon.

Regardless of the social scale within which human indi-

viduals were forcibly reared by pathological persons, whether

individual, group, societal, or macrosocial, the principles of

psychotherapeutic action will thus be similar, and should be

based upon data known to us, and an understanding of the psy-

chological situation. Making a patient aware of the kind of

pathological factors which affected him, and jointly under-

standing the results of such effects, is basic to such therapy. We

do not utilize this method if, in an individual case, we have

indications that the patient has inherited this factor. However,

such limitations should not be consistent with regard to macro-

social phenomena affecting the welfare of entire nations.

From the Perspective of Time

If a person with a normal instinctive substratum and basic

intelligence has already heard and read about such a system of

ruthless autocratic rule “based on a fanatical ideology”, he feels

he has already formed an opinion on the subject. However,

direct confrontation with the phenomenon will inevitably pro-

duce in him the feeling of intellectual helplessness. All his

prior imaginings prove to be virtually useless; they explain next

to nothing. This provokes a nagging sensation that he and the

society in which he was educated were quite naive.

Anyone capable of accepting this bitter void with an aware-

ness of his own nescience, which would do a philosopher

proud, can also find an orientation path within this deviant

world. However, egotistically protecting his world view from

disintegrative disillusionment and attempting to combine them

with observations from this new divergent reality, only reaps

mental chaos. The latter has produced unnecessary conflicts

and disillusionment with the new rulership in some people;

others have subordinated themselves to the pathological reality.

One of the differences observed between a normally resistant

person and somebody who has undergone a transpersonifica-

tion is that the former is better able to survive this disintegrat-

236

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

ing cognitive void, whereas the latter fills the void with the

pathologic propaganda material without sufficient controls.

When the human mind comes into contact with this new re-

ality so different from any experiences encountered by a person

raised in a society dominated by normal people, it releases

psychophysiological shock symptoms in the human brain with

a higher tonus of cortex inhibition and a stifling of feelings,

which then sometimes gush forth uncontrollably. The mind

then works more slowly and less keenly because the associative

mechanisms have become inefficient. Especially when a person

has direct contact with psychopathic representatives of the new

rule, who use their specific experience so as to traumatize the

minds of the “others” with their own personalities, his mind

succumbs to a state of short-term catatonia. Their humiliating

and arrogant techniques, brutal paramoralizations, and so forth

deaden his thought processes and his self-defense capabilities,

and their divergent experiential method anchors in his mind. In

the presence of this kind of phenomenon, any moralizing

evaluation of a person’s behavior in such a situation thus be-

comes inaccurate at best.

Only once these unbelievably unpleasant psychological

states have passed, thanks to rest in benevolent company, is it

possible to reflect, always a difficult and painful process, or to

become aware that one’s mind and common sense have been

fooled by something which cannot fit into the normal human

imagination.

Man and society stand at the beginning of a long road of

unknown experiences which, after much trial and error, finally

leads to a certain hermetic knowledge of what the qualities of

the phenomenon are and how best to build up psychological

resistance thereto. Especially during the dissimulative phase,

which makes it possible to adapt to life in this different world

and thus arrange more tolerable living conditions. We shall

then be able to observe psychological phenomena, knowledge,

immunization, and adaptation such as could not have been

predicted before and which cannot be understood in the world

remaining under the rule of normal man’s systems. A normal

person, however, can never completely adapt to a pathological

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

237

system; it is easy to be pessimistic about the final results of

this.

Such experiences are exchanged during evening discussions

among a circle of friends, thereby creating within people’s

minds a kind of cognitive conglomeration which is initially

incoherent and contains factual deficiencies. The participation

of moral categories in such a comprehension of the macrosocial

phenomenon, and the manner in which particular individuals

behave, is proportionally much greater within such a new

world view than the above adduced scientific knowledge would

dictate. The ideology officially preached by the pathocracy

continues to retain its ever-diminishing suggestive powers until

such time as human reason manages to localize it as something

subordinate, which is not descriptive of the essence of phe-

nomenon.

Moral and religious values, as well as a nation’s centuries-

old cultural heritage, furnish most societies with support for the

long road of both individual and collective searching through

the jungle of strange phenomena. This apperceptive capacity

possessed by people within the framework of the natural world

view contains a deficiency which hides the nucleus of the phe-

nomenon for many years. Under such conditions, both instinct

and feelings, and the resulting basic intelligence, play instru-

mental roles, stimulating man to make selections which are to a

great extent subconscious.

Under the conditions created by imposed pathocratic rule in

particular, where the described psychological deficiencies are

decisive in joining the activities of such a system, our natural

human instinctive substratum is an instrumental factor in join-

ing the opposition.

Similarly, the environmental, economic, and ideological

motivations which influenced the formation of an individual

personality, including those political attitudes which were as-

sumed earlier, play the role of modifying factors, though they

are not as enduring in time. The activity of these latter factors,

albeit relatively clear with relation to individuals, disappear

within the statistical approach and diminish through the years

of pathocratic rule. The decisions and the choices made for the

side of the society of normal people are once again finally de-

238

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

cided by factors usually inherited by biological means, and thus

not the product of the person’s option, and predominantly in

subconscious processes.

Man’s general intelligence, especially his intellectual level,

plays a relatively limited role in this process of selecting a path

of action, as expressed by statistically significant but low corre-

lation (-0.16). The higher a person’s general level of talent, the

harder it usually is for him to reconcile himself with this differ-

ent reality and to find a modus vivendi within it.

At the same time, there are gifted and talented people who

join the pathocracy, and harsh words of contempt for the sys-

tem can be heard on the part of simple, uneducated people.

Only those people with the highest degree of intelligence,

which, as mentioned, does not accompany psychopathies, are

unable to find meaning to life within such a system.106 They are

sometimes able to take advantage of their superior mentality in

order to find exceptional ways in which to be useful to others.

Wasting the best talents spells eventual catastrophe for any

social system.

Since those factors subject to the laws of genetics prove de-

cisive, society becomes divided, by means of criteria not

known before, into the adherents of the new rule, the new mid-

dle class mentioned above, and the majority opposition. Since

the properties which cause this new division appear in more or

less equal proportions within any old social group or level, this

new division cuts right through the traditional layers of society.

If we treat the former stratification, whose formation was deci-

sively influenced by the talent factor, as horizontal, the new

one should be referred to as vertical. The most instrumental

factor in the latter is good basic intelligence which, as we al-

ready know, is widely distributed throughout all social groups.

Even those people who were the object of social injustice in

the former system and then bestowed with another system,

which allegedly protected them, slowly start criticizing the

latter. Even though they were forced to join the pathocratic

party, most of the former prewar Communists in the author’s

106 Historically, pathocracies target the intelligentsia for elimination first. As

!obaczewski points out, this wasting of the best minds and talents eventually

leads to catastrophe. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

239

homeland later gradually became critical, using the most em-

phatic of language. They were first to deny that the ruling sys-

tem was Communist in nature, persuasively pointing out the

actual differences between the ideology and reality. They tried

to inform their comrades in still independent countries of this

by letters. Worried about this “treason”, these comrades trans-

mitted such letters to their local party in those other countries,

from where these were returned to the security police of the

country of origin. The authors of the letters paid with their lives

or with years of prison; no other social group was finally sub-

jected to such stringent police surveillance as were they.

Regardless of whatever our evaluation of Communist ideol-

ogy or the parties might be, we are presumably justified in

believing that the old Communists were quite competent to

distinguish what was and what was not in accordance with their

ideology and beliefs. Their highly emphatic statements on the

subject, quite popular among Poland’s old Communists circles,

are impressive or even persuasive.107 Because of the operational

language used therein, however, we must designate them as

overly moralizing interpretations not in keeping with the char-

acter of this work. At the same time, we must admit that the

majority of Poland’s prewar Communists were not psycho-

paths.

From the point of view of economics and reality, any sys-

tem wherein most of the property and workplaces are state

owned de jure and de facto is state capitalism and not Commu-

nism. Such a system exhibits the traits of a primitive nine-

teenth-century capitalist exploiter who had an insufficient grasp

of his role in society and of how his interests were linked to his

workers’ welfare. Workers are very much aware of these traits,

especially if they have collected a certain amount of knowledge

in connection with their political activities.

A reasonable socialist aiming to replace capitalism with

some system in conformity with his idea, which would be

based on worker participation in the administration of the work

place and the profits, will reject such a system as the “worst

variety of capitalism”. After all, concentrating capital and rul-

107 “A hoard of sons of bitches who climbed up to the feeding trough upon

the backs of the working class.”

240

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

ership in one place always leads to degeneration. Capital must

be subject to the authority of fairness. Eliminating such a de-

generate form of capitalism should thus be a priority task for

any socialist. Nonetheless, such reasoning by means of social

and economic categories obviously misses the crux of the mat-

ter.

The experience of history teaches us that any attempt to re-

alize the Communist idea by way of revolutionary means,

whether violent or underhanded, leads to a skewing of this

process in the direction of anachronic and pathological forms

whose essence and contents remain inaccessible to minds util-

izing the concepts of the natural world view. Evolution con-

structs and transforms faster than revolution, and without such

tragic complications.

One of the first discoveries made by a society of normal

people is that it is superior to the new rulers in intelligence and

practical skills, no matter what geniuses they seek to appear to

be. The knots stultifying reason are gradually loosened, and

fascination with the new rulership’s non-existent secret knowl-

edge and plan of action begins to diminish, followed by famili-

arization with the accurate knowledge about this new deviant

reality.

The world of normal people is always superior to the devi-

ant one whenever constructive activity is needed, whether it be

the reconstruction of a devastated country, the area of technol-

ogy, the organization of economic life, or scientific and medi-

cal work. “They want to build things, but they can’t get much

done without us.” Qualified experts are frequently able to make

certain demands; unfortunately, they are just as often only con-

sidered qualified until the job has been done, at which point

they can be eliminated. Once the factory has started up, the

experts can leave; management will be taken over by someone

else, incapable of further progress, under whose leadership

much of the effort expended will be wasted.

As we have already pointed out, every psychological anom-

aly is in fact a kind of deficiency. Psychopathies are based

primarily upon deficiencies in the instinctive substratum; how-

ever, their influence exerted upon the mental development of

others also leads to deficiencies in general intelligence, as dis-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

241

cussed above. This deficiency of intelligence in a normal per-

son, induced by psychopathy, is not compensated by the special

psychological knowledge we observe among some psycho-

paths. Such knowledge loses its mesmerizing power when

normal people learn to understand these phenomena as well.

The psychopathologist was thus not surprised by the fact that

the world of normal people is dominant regarding skill and

talent. For that society, however, this represented a discovery

which engendered hope and psychological relaxation.

Since our intelligence is superior to theirs, we can recognize

them and understand how they think and act. This is what a

person learns in such a system on his own initiative, forced by

everyday needs. He learns it while working in his office,

school, or factory, when he needs to deal with the authorities,

and when he is arrested, something only a few people manage

to avoid. The author and many others learned a good deal about

the psychology of this macrosocial phenomenon during com-

pulsory indoctrinational schooling. The organizers and lectur-

ers cannot have intended such a result. Practical knowledge of

this new reality thus grows, thanks to which the society gains a

resourcefulness of action which enables it to take ever better

advantage of the weak spots of the rulership system. This per-

mits gradual reorganization of societal links, which bears fruit

with time.

This new science is incalculably rich in casuist108 detail; I

would nevertheless characterize it as overly literary. It contains

knowledge and a description of the phenomenon in the catego-

ries of the natural world view, correspondingly modified in

accordance with the need to understand matters which are in

fact outside the scope of its applicability. This also opens the

door to the creation of certain doctrines which merit separate

study because they contain a partial truth, such as a de-

monologica l interpretation of the phenomenon.

The development of familiarity with the phenomenon is ac-

companied by development of communicative language, by

108 Casuistry (argument by cases) is an attempt to determine the correct re-

sponse to a moral problem, often a moral dilemma, by drawing conclusions

based on parallels with agreed responses to pure cases, also called paradigms.

Casuistry is a method of ethical case analysis. [Editor’s note.]

242

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

means of which society can stay informed and issue warnings

of danger. A third language thus appears alongside the ideo-

logical doubletalk described above; in part, it borrows names

used by the official ideology in their transformed modified

meanings. In part, this language operates with words borrowed

from still more lively circulating jokes. In spite of its strange-

ness, this language becomes a useful means of communication

and plays a part in regenerating societal links. Lo and behold,

this language can be translated and communicated in relations

with residents of other countries with analogous governmental

systems, even if the other country’s “official ideology” is dif-

ferent. However, in spite of efforts on the part of literati and

journalists, this language remains only communicative inside;

it becomes hermetic outside the scope of the phenomenon,

uncomprehended by people lacking the appropriate personal

experience.

The specific role of certain individuals during such times is

worth pointing out; they participate in the discovery of the

nature of this new reality and help others find the right path.

They have a normal nature but experienced an unfortunate

childhood, being subjected very early to the domination of

individuals with various psychological deviations, including

pathological egotism and methods of terrorizing others. The

new rulership system strikes such people as a large scale socie-

tal multiplication of what they knew from personal experience.

From the very outset, such individuals saw this reality much

more prosaically, immediately treating the ideology in accor-

dance with the paralogistic stories well known to them, whose

purpose was to cloak the bitter reality of their youthful experi-

ences. They soon reach the truth, since the genesis and nature

of evil are analogous irrespective of the social scale in which it

appears.

Such people are rarely understood in happy societies, but

they were invaluable then; their explanations and advice

proved accurate and were transmitted to others joining the net-

work of this apperceptive heritage. However, their own suffer-

ing was doubled, since this was too much of a similar kind of

abuse for one life to handle. They therefore nursed dreams of

escaping into the freedom still existing in the outside world.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

243

Finally, society sees the appearance of individuals who have

collected exceptional intuitive perception and practical knowl-

edge in the area of how pathocrats think and how such a system

of rule operates. Some of them become so proficient in their

deviant language and its idiomatics that they are able to use it,

much like a foreign language they have learned well. Since

they are able to decipher the rulership’s intentions, such people

then offer advice to people who are having trouble with the

authorities. These advocates of the society of normal people

play a irreplaceable role in the life of society.

The pathocrats, however, can never learn to think in normal

human categories. At the same time, the inability to predict the

reaction of normal people to such an authority also leads to the

conclusion that the system is rigidly causative and lacking in

the natural freedom of choice.

This new science, expressed in language derived from a de-

viant reality, is something foreign to people who wish to under-

stand this macrosocial phenomenon but think in the categories

of the countries of normal man. Attempts to understand this

language produce a certain feeling of helplessness which gives

rise to the tendency of creating one’s own doctrines, built from

the concepts of one’s own world and a certain amount of ap-

propriately co-opted pathocratic propaganda material. Such a

doctrine, for example, would be the American anti-Communist

propaganda. Such twisted and distorted concepts makes it even

more difficult to understand that other reality. May the objec-

tive description adduced herein enable them to overcome the

impasse thus engendered.

In countries subjected to pathocratic rule, this knowledge

and language, especially human experience, create a mediating

concatenation in such a way that most people could assimilate

this objective description of the phenomenon without major

difficulties with the help of active apperception. Difficulties

will only be encountered by the oldest generation and a certain

proportion of young people raised in the system from child-

hood, and these are psychologically understandable.

I was once referred a patient who had been an inmate in a

Nazi concentration camp. She came back from that hell in such

exceptionally good condition that she was able to marry and

244

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

bear three children. However, her child rearing methods were

so extremely iron-fisted as to be reminiscent of the concentra-

tion camp life so stubbornly persevering in former prisoners.

The children’s reaction was neurotic protest and aggressiveness

against other children.

During the mother’s psychotherapy, we recalled the figures

of male and female SS officers to her mind, pointing out their

psychopathic characteristics (such people were primary re-

cruits). In order to help her eliminate their pathological mate-

rial from her person, I furnished her with the approximate sta-

tistical data regarding the appearance of such individuals

within the population as a whole. This helped her reach a more

objective view of that reality and re-establish trust in the soci-

ety of normal people.

During the next visit, the patient showed to me a little card

on which she had written the names of local pathocratic nota-

bles and added her own diagnoses, which were largely correct.

So I made a hushing gesture with my finger and admonished

her with emphasis that we were dealing only with her prob-

lems. The patient understood and, I am sure, she did not make

her reflections on the matter known in the wrong places.

Parallel to the development of practical knowledge and a

language of insider communication, other psychological phe-

nomena take form; they are truly significant in the transforma-

tion of social life under pathocratic rule, and discerning them is

essential if one wishes to understand individuals and nations

fated to live under such conditions and to evaluate the situation

in the political sphere. They include people’s psychological

immunization and their adaptation to life under such deviant

conditions.

The methods of psychological terror (that specific

pathocratic art), the techniques of pathological arrogance, and

the striding roughshod into other people’s souls initially have

such traumatic effects that people are deprived of their capacity

for purposeful reaction; I have already adduced the psycho-

physiological aspects of such states. Ten or twenty years later,

analogous behavior is already recognized as well known buf-

foonery and does not deprive the victim of his ability to think

and react purposefully. His answers are usually well-thought-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

245

out strategies, issued from the position of a normal person’s

superiority and often laced with ridicule. When Man can look

suffering and even death in the eye with the required calm, a

dangerous weapon falls out of the ruler’s hands.

We have to understand that this process of immunization is

not merely a result of the above-described increase in practical

knowledge of the macrosocial phenomenon. It is the effect of a

many-layered, gradual process of growth in knowledge, famili-

arization with the phenomenon, creation of the appropriate

reactive habits, and self-control, with an overall conception,

and moral principles, being worked out in the meantime. After

several years, the same stimuli which formerly caused chilly

spiritual impotence or mental paralysis now provoke the desire

to gargle with something strong so as to get rid of this filth.

There was a time when many people dreamed of finding

some pill which would make it easier to endure dealing with

the authorities or attending the forced indoctrination sessions

generally chaired by a psychopathic character. Some antide-

pressants did in fact prove to have the desired effect. Twenty

years later, this had been forgotten entirely.

~~~

When I was arrested for the first time in 1951, force, arro-

gance, and psychopathic methods of forcible confession de-

prived me almost entirely of my self-defense capabilities. My

brain stopped functioning after only a few days without water,

to such a point that I couldn’t even properly remember the

incident which resulted in my sudden arrest. I was not even

aware that it had been purposely provoked and that conditions

permitting self-defense did in fact exist. They did almost any-

thing they wanted to me.

When I was arrested for last time in 1968, I was interro-

gated by five fierce-looking security functionaries. At one par-

ticular moment, after thinking through their predicted reac-

tions, I let my gaze take in each face sequentially with great

attentiveness. The most important one asked me, “What’s on

your mind, buster, staring at us like that?” I answered without

any fear of consequences: “I’m just wondering why so many of

the gentlemen in your line of work end up in a psychiatric hos-

pital.” They were taken aback for a while, whereupon the same

246

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

man exclaimed, “Because it’s such damned horrible work!” “I

am of the opinion that it’s the other way round”, I calmly re-

sponded. Then I was taken back to my cell.

Three days later, I had the opportunity to talk to him again,

but this time he was much more respectful. Then he ordered me

to be taken away - outside, as it turned out. I rode the streetcar

home past a large park, still unable to believe my eyes. Once in

my room, I lay down on the bed; the world was not quite real

yet, but exhausted people fall asleep quickly. When I awoke, I

spoke out loud: “Dear God, aren’t you supposed to be in

charge here in this world?!”

~~~

At that time, I knew not only that up to 1/5 of all secret po-

lice officials wind up in psychiatric hospitals, I also knew that

their “occupational disease” is the congestive dementia for-

merly encountered only among old prostitutes. Man cannot

violate the natural human feelings inside him with impunity, no

matter what kind of profession he performs. From that view-

point, Comrade Captain was partially right. At the same time,

however, my reactions had become resistant, a far cry from

what they had been seventeen years earlier.

All these transformations of human consciousness and un-

consciousness result in individual and collective adaptation to

living under such a system. Under altered conditions of both

material and moral limitations, an existential resourcefulness

emerges which is prepared to overcome many difficulties. A

new network of the society of normal people is also created for

self-help and mutual assistance.

This society acts in concert and is aware of the true state of

affairs; it begins to develop ways of influencing various ele-

ments of authority and achieving goals which are socially use-

ful. Patiently instructing and convincing the rulership’s medio-

cre representatives takes considerable time and requires peda-

gogical skills. Therefore, the most even-tempered people are

selected for this job, people with sufficient familiarity with

their psychology and a specific talent for influencing

pathocrats. The opinion that society is totally deprived of any

influence upon government in such a country is thus inaccu-

rate. In reality, society does co-govern to a certain extent,

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

247

sometimes succeeding and sometimes failing in its attempt to

create more tolerable living conditions. This, however, occurs

in a manner totally different from what happens in democratic

countries.

These cognitive processes, psychological immunization,

and adaptation, permit the creation of new interpersonal and

societal links, which operate within the scope of the large ma-

jority we have already called the “society of normal people”.

These links extend discretely into the world of the regime’s

middle class, among people who can be trusted to a certain

extent. In time, the social links created are significantly more

effective than those active in societies governed by normal

human systems. Exchange of information, warnings, and assis-

tance encompass the entire society. Whoever is able to do so

offers aid to anyone who finds himself in trouble, often in such

a way that the person helped does not even know who rendered

the assistance. However, if he caused his misfortune by his

own lack of circumspection with regard to the authorities, he

meets with reproach, but never the withholding of assistance.

It is possible to create such links because this new division

of society gives only limited consideration to factors such as

the level of talent, education or traditions attached to the former

social layers. Neither do reduced prosperity differences dis-

solve these links. One side of this division contains those of the

highest mental culture, simple ordinary people, intellectuals,

headwork specialists, factory workers, and peasants joined by

the common protest of their human nature against the domina-

tion of para-human experiential and governmental methods.

These links engender interpersonal understanding and fellow-

feeling among people and social groups formerly divided by

economic differences and social traditions. The thought proc-

esses serving these links are of a more psychological character,

able to comprehend someone else’s motivations. At the same

time, the ordinary folk retain respect for people who have been

educated and represent intellectual values. Certain social and

moral values also appear and may prove to be permanent.

The genesis, however, of this great interpersonal solidarity

only becomes comprehensible when we know the nature of the

pathological macrosocial phenomenon which brought about the

248

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

liberation of such attitudes, complete with recognition of one’s

own humanity and that of others. Another reflection suggests

itself, namely how very different these great links are from

America’s “competitive society”, for whom the former – eco-

nomic and social differences - represent something which is

operational even though it crosses the boundaries of the imagi-

nation.

One would think that a nation’s cultural and intellectual life

would quickly degenerate when subjected to the country’s iso-

lation from the cultural and scientific links with other nations,

pathocratic limitations upon the development of one’s thought,

a censorship system, the mental level of the executives, and all

those other attributes of such rule. Reality nevertheless does

not validate such pessimistic predictions.

The necessity for constant mental effort so crucial for find-

ing some tolerable way of life, not totally bereft of moral sense

within such a deviant reality, causes the development of realis-

tic perception, especially in the area of socio-psychological

phenomena. Protecting one’s mind from the effects of paralo-

gistic propaganda, as well as one’s personality from the influ-

ence of paramoralisms and the other techniques already de-

scribed, sharpens controlled thinking processes and the ability

to discern these phenomena. Such training is also a special kind

of common man’s university.

During such times, society reaches for historical sources in

searching for the ancient causes of its misfortunes and for ways

to improve its fate in the future. Scientific and societal minds

laboriously review the national history in quest of interpreta-

tions of the facts which would be more profound from the point

of view of psychological and moral realism. We soberly dis-

cern what happened years and centuries ago, perceiving the

errors of former generations and the results of intolerance or

emotionally weighted decision-making. Such a great review of

individual, social, and historical world views in this search for

meaning of life and history is a product of unhappy times and

will help along the way back to happy ones.

Another object of consideration became: moral problems

applicable in individual life as well as in history and politics.

The mind starts reaching ever deeper in this area, achieving

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

249

ever more subtle understanding of the matter, because it is

precisely in this world that the old oversimplifications proved

to be unsatisfactory. An understanding of other people, includ-

ing those who commit errors and crimes, appears in a problem-

solving way which was formerly underrated. Forgiveness is

only one step beyond understanding. As Mme. de Stael wrote:

“Tout comprendere, c’est tout pardoner”109.

A society’s religion is affected by analogous transforma-

tions. The proportion of the people maintaining religious be-

liefs is not significantly affected, particularly in countries

wherein the pathocracy was imposed; it does, however, un-

dergo a modification of the contents and quality of such beliefs

in such a way that religion in time becomes more attractive to

people raised indifferent to faith. The old religion, dominated

by tradition, ritual, and insincerity, now becomes transformed

into faith, conditioned by necessary studies and convictions

which determine behavioral criteria.

Anyone reading the Gospel during such times finds some-

thing that is hard to understand for other Christians. So real is

the similarity between the social relations, there under the gov-

ernment of ancient pagan Rome, and these under the atheistic

pathocracy, that the reader imagines the situations described

more easily and senses the reality of occurrences more vividly.

Such reading also furnishes him with encouragement and ad-

vice which he can use in his situations. Thus, during brutal

times of confrontation with evil, human capabilities of dis-

criminating phenomena become subtler; apperceptive and

moral sensibility develops. Critical faculties sometimes border

with cynicism.

~~~

“I once got into a mountain-bound bus full of young high-

school and university students. During the trip, song filled the

vehicle and the neighboring hills. Old prewar songs both witty

and frivolous Le"mian’s110 poems: ‘Our ancestor Noah was a

brave man...’, and others. The text, however, had been cor-

109 “To understand all is to forgive all.”

110 Boles"aw Le#mian (born Boles"aw Lesman; 18781-1937) was a Polish

poet, artist and member of the Polish Academy of Literature. He was one of

the most influential poets of the early 20th century in Poland.[Editor’s note.]

250

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

rected with humor and literary talent, eliminating whatever

irritated these young people raised during difficult times. Was

it an unintended result?”

~~~

As a result of all these transformations, including the de-

egotization of thought and attitude connected thereto, society

becomes capable of a mental creativity which goes beyond

normal conditions. This effort could be useful in any cultural,

technical, or economic area if the authorities did not oppose

and stifle it because they feel threatened by such activity.

Human genius is not born of lazy prosperity and among

genteel camaraderie, but rather stands in perpetual confronta-

tion with a recalcitrant reality which is different from ordinary

human imaginations. Under such conditions, wide-scale theo-

retical approaches are found to have practical existential value.

The old system of thought which remains in use in free coun-

tries starts to look backward, naive, and bereft of feeling of

values.

If nations which arrived at such a state were to regain their

freedom, many valuable accomplishments of human thought

would mature within a short time. No excessive fears would be

in order as to whether such a nation would then be capable of

elaborating a workable socio-economic system. Quite the con-

trary: the absence of egoistical pressure groups, the conciliatory

nature of a society which has years of bitter experience behind

it, and the penetrating, morally profound thought processes

would permit the way out to be found relatively rapidly. Dan-

ger and difficulty would rather come from outside pressures on

the part of nations which do not adequately understand the

conditions in such a country. But unfortunately, the pathocracy

cannot be dosed as a bitter medicine!

The older generation, raised in a normal man’s country,

generally reacts by developing the above-mentioned skills, i.e.

by enrichment; the younger generation, however, was raised

under pathocratic rule and thus succumbs to a greater world

view impoverishment, reflex rigidification of personality, and

domination by habitual structures, those typical results of the

operation of pathological personalities. Paralogistic propaganda

and its corresponding indoctrination are consciously rejected;

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

251

however, this process demands time and effort which could

better be used for active apperception of valuable contents. The

latter are accessible only with difficulty, due both to limitations

and to apperceptive problems. There arises the feeling of a

certain void which is hard to fill. In spite of human good will,

certain paralogisms and paramoralisms, as well as cognitive

materialism, anchor and persevere in brains. The human mind

is not able to disprove every single falsity which has been sug-

gested to it.

The emotional life of people raised within such a deviant

psychological reality is also fraught with difficulties. In spite of

critical reason, a certain saturation of a youngster’s personality

with pathological psychological material is unavoidable, as is a

degree of primitivization and rigidity of feelings. The constant

efforts to control one’s emotions, so as to avoid having some

stormy reaction provoke repression on the part of a vindictive

and retentive regime, cause feelings to be repressed into a role

of something rather problematic, something which should not

be given a natural outlet. Suppressed emotional reactions sur-

face later, when the person can afford to express them; they are

delayed and inappropriate to the situation at hand. Worries

about the future awaken egotism among people thus adapted to

life in a pathological social structure.

Neurosis is a natural response of human nature if a normal

person is subordinated to domination of pathological people.

The same applies to the subordination of a society and its

members to a pathological system of authority. In a pathocratic

state, every person with a normal nature thus exhibits a certain

chronic neurotic state, controlled by the efforts of reason. The

intensity of these states varies among individuals, depending

upon different circumstances, usually more serious in direct

proportion to the individual’s intelligence. Psychotherapy upon

such people is only possible and effective if we can rely on

adequate familiarity with the causes of these states. Western

educated psychologists thus prove completely impractical with

regard to such patients.

A psychologist working in such a country must develop

special operational techniques unknown and even unfathom-

able to specialists practicing in the free world. They have the

252

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

purpose of partially liberating the voice of instinct and feeling

from this abnormal over-control, and of rediscovering the voice

of nature’s wisdom within, but this must be done in such a way

as to avoid exposing the patient to the unfortunate results of

excessive freedom of reaction in the conditions under which he

must live. A psychotherapist must operate carefully, with the

help of allusions, because only rarely may he openly inform the

patient of the system’s pathological nature. However, even

under such conditions, we can achieve a greater experiential

freedom, more appropriate thought processes, and better deci-

sion making capabilities. As a result of all this, the patient sub-

sequently behaves with greater caution and feels much safer.

If Western radio stations, unhampered by the fears of psy-

chologists on the other side, abandoned the simple counter

propaganda in favor of a similar psychotherapeutic technique,

they would contribute mightily to the future of countries still

under pathocratic rule today. Toward the end of this book, I

shall attempt to persuade the reader that psychological matters

are as important to the future as grand politics or powerful

weapons.

Understanding

Comprehending those normal people, whether outstanding

or average, fated to live under pathocratic rule, their human

nature and their responses to this basically deviant reality, their

dreams, their methods of comprehending such a reality (includ-

ing all the difficulties along the road), and their need to adapt

and become resistant (including the side-effects) is a sine qua

non precondition for learning the behavior that would effec-

tively assist them in their efforts to achieve a normal man’s

system. It would be psychologically impossible for a politician

in a free country to incorporate the practical knowledge such

people acquired over many years of day to day experience.

This knowledge cannot be transmitted; no journalistic or liter-

ary efforts will ever achieve anything in this area. However, an

analogous science formulated in objective naturalistic language

can be communicated in both directions. It can be assimilated

by people who have no such specific experiences; it can also be

back transmitted over there where a great need for this science

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

253

exists as do the minds which are already prepared to receive it.

Such a science would actually act upon their battered personali-

ties in much the same way as the best of medicines. Mere

awareness that one was subject to the influence of a mental

deviant is in and of itself a crucial part of treatment.

Whoever wants to maintain the freedom of his country and

of the world already threatened by this macrosocial pathologi-

cal phenomenon, whoever would like to heal this sick planet of

ours, should not only understand the nature of this great dis-

ease, but should also be conscious of potentially regenerative

healing powers.

Every country within the scope of this macrosocial phe-

nomenon contains a large majority of normal people living and

suffering there who will never accept pathocracy; their protest

against it derives from the depths of their own souls and their

human nature as conditioned by properties transmitted by

means of biological heredity. The forms of this protest and the

ideologies by which they would like to realize their natural

wishes may nevertheless change.

The ideology or societal structure via which they would like

to regain their human right to live in a normal man’s system

are, however, of secondary importance to these people. There

are of course differences of opinion in this area, but they are

not likely to lead to overly violent conflict among persons who

see before them a goal worthy of sacrifice.

Those whose attitudes are more penetrating and balanced

see the original ideology as it was before its caricaturization by

the ponerization process, as the most practical basis for effect-

ing society’s aims. Certain modifications would endow this

ideology with a more mature form more in keeping with the

demands of present times; it could thereupon serve as the foun-

dation for a process of evolution, or rather transformation, into

an socio-economic system capable of adequate functioning.

The author’s convictions are somewhat different. Grave dif-

ficulties could be caused by outside pressure aiming at the in-

troduction of an economic system which has lost its historically

conditioned roots in such a country.

People who have long had to live in the strange world of

this divergence are therefore hard to understand for someone

254

NORMAL PEOPLE UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

who has fortunately avoided that fate. Let us refrain from im-

posing imaginings upon them which are only meaningful

within the world of normal man’s governments; let us not pi-

geonhole them into any political doctrines which are often

quite unlike the reality they are familiar with. Let us welcome

them with feelings of human solidarity, reciprocal respect, and

a greater trust in their normal human nature and their reason.

CHAPTER VII

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

UNDER PATHOCRATIC RULE

If there were ever such a thing as a country with a commu-

nist structure as envisaged by Karl Marx, wherein the working

people’s leftist ideology would be the basis for government,

which, I believe, would be stern, but not bereft of healthy hu-

manistic thought, the contemporary social, bio-humanistic, and

medical sciences would be considered valuable and be appro-

priately developed and used for the good of the working peo-

ple. Psychological advice for youth and for persons with vari-

ous personal problems would naturally be the concern of the

authorities and of society as a whole. Seriously ill patients

would have the advantage of correspondingly skillful care.

However, quite the opposite is the case within a pathocratic

structure.

When I came to the West, I met people with leftist views

who unquestioningly believed that communist countries existed

in more or less the form expounded by American versions of

communist political doctrines. These persons were almost cer-

tain that psychology and psychiatry must enjoy freedom in

those countries referred to as communist, and that matters were

similar to what was mentioned above. When I contradicted

them, they refused to believe me and kept asking why, “why

256

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

isn’t it like that?” What can politics have to do with psychiatry?

111

My attempts to explain what that other reality looks like met

with the difficulties we are already familiar with, although

some people had previously heard about the abuse of psychia-

try. However, such “whys” kept cropping up in conversation,

and remained unanswered.

The situation in these scientific areas, of social and curative

activities, and of the people occupied in these matters, can only

be comprehended once we have perceived the true nature of

pathocracy in the light of the ponerological approach.

Let us thus imagine something which is only possible in

theory, namely, that a country under pathocratic rule is inadver-

tently allowed to freely develop these sciences, enabling a

normal influx of scientific literature and contacts with scientists

in other countries. Psychology, psychopathology, and psychia-

try would flourish abundantly and produce outstanding repre-

sentatives.

What would the result be?

111 In 1950, the Russian Academy of Sciences determined everyone would

follow the theory of the Moscow professor Andrei Snezhnevsky, which held

that “anybody could suffer from ‘slowly progressing schizophrenia’. One

could suffer from it without knowing, but once Snezhnevsky or one of his

followers had ascertained that you were ill with it, you had to be locked up

and knocked down with sedatives immediately, or the disease would ‘pro-

gress’. ...dissidents are simply locked up in a psychiatric institution and said

to be insane.”

Up until his death in 1987 Snezhnevsky denied that his theory was being

abused by the Soviet regime. But his former assistants now admit, that he

knew “all too well” what was going on. The only problem is, that those assis-

tants still talk about it only on the sly. They work at the Moscow institutes

where the scientific successors of Snezhnevsky are still in charge. This clique

of about thirty or forty psychiatrists at the time controlled all the important

institutes for scientific research in Moscow and this is practically the same up

to now. The consequence of Snezhnevsky’s ideas, apart from the fact that

they were used as a means of repression, is that psychiatry in the former

Soviet Union “is confronted with a gap of about fifty years”. Western litera-

ture on psychiatry was forbidden in the Soviet Union, psychiatrists who stood

up against the political abuse of their science ended up behind bars or were

themselves declared to be “insidiously schizophrenic” . “A Mess in Psychia-

try”, an interview with Robert van Voren, General Secretary of Geneva Ini-

tiative on Psychiatry, published in the Dutch newspaper De Volkskrant on

August 9, 1997 [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

257

This accumulation of proper knowledge would, within a

very short time, enable the undertaking of investigations whose

meaning we already understand. Missing elements and insuffi-

ciently investigated questions would be complemented and

deepened by means of the appropriate detailed research. The

diagnosis of the pathocratic state of affairs would then be

elaborated within the first dozen or so years of the formation of

the pathocracy, especially if the latter is imposed. The basis of

the deductive rationale would be significantly wider than any-

thing the author can present here, and would be illustrated by

means of a rich body of analytical and statistical material.

Once transmitted to world opinion, such a diagnosis would

quickly become incorporated into it that opinion, forcing naive

political and propaganda doctrines out of societal conscious-

ness. It would reach the nations that were the objects of the

pathocratic empire’s expansionist intentions. This would render

the usefulness of any such propagandized ideology as a

pathocratic Trojan horse doubtful at best.

In spite of differences among them, other countries with

normal human systems would be united by characteristic soli-

darity in the defense of an understood danger, similar to the

solidarity linking normal people living under pathocratic rule.

This consciousness, popularized in the countries affected by

this phenomenon, would simultaneously reinforce psychologi-

cal resistance on the part of normal human societies and furnish

them with new measures of self defense.

Can any pathocratic empire risk permitting such a possibil-

ity?

In times when the above-mentioned disciplines are develop-

ing swiftly in many countries, the problem of preventing such a

psychiatric threat becomes a matter of “to be or not to be” for

pathocracy. Any possibility of such a situation emerging must

thus be staved off prophylactically and skillfully, both within

and without the empire. At the same time, the empire is able to

find effective preventive measures thanks to its consciousness

of being different as well as that specific psychological knowl-

edge of psychopaths with which we are already familiar, par-

tially reinforced by academic knowledge.

258

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

Both inside and outside the boundaries of countries affected

by the above-mentioned phenomenon, a purposeful and con-

scious system of control, terror, and diversion is thus set to

work.

Any scientific papers published under such governments or

imported from abroad must be monitored to ascertain that they

do not contain any data which could be harmful to the pathoc-

racy. Specialists with superior talent become the objects of

blackmail and malicious control. This of course causes the

results to become inferior with reference to these areas of sci-

ence.

The entire operation must of course be managed in such a

way as to avoid attracting the attention of public opinion in

countries with normal human structures. The effects of such a

“bad break” could be too far-reaching. This explains why peo-

ple caught doing investigative work in this area are destroyed

without a sound and suspicious persons are forced abroad to

become the objects of appropriately organized harassment

campaigns there.112

Battles are thus being fought on secret fronts which may be

reminiscent of the Second World War. The soldiers and leaders

fighting in various theaters were not aware that their fate de-

pended on the outcome of that other war, waged by scientists

and other soldiers, whose goal was preventing the Germans

from producing the atom bomb. The Allies won that battle, and

the United States became the first to possess this lethal weapon.

For the present, however, the West keeps losing scientific and

political battles on this new secret front. Lone fighters are

looked upon as odd, denied assistance, or forced to work hard

for their bread. Meanwhile, the ideological Trojan horse keeps

invading new countries.

An examination of the methodology of such battles, both on

the internal and the external fronts, points to that specific

pathocratic knowledge so difficult to comprehend in the light

of the natural language of concepts. In order to be able to con-

trol people and those relatively non-popularized areas of sci-

112 This is also why !obaczewski was deprived of the data he had assembled

over so many years that would have supported the information presented in

this book. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

259

ence, one must know, or be able to sense, what is going on and

which fragments of psychopathology are most dangerous. The

examiner of this methodology thus also becomes aware of the

boundaries and imperfections of this self-knowledge and prac-

tice, i.e. the other side’s weaknesses, errors, and gaffes, and

may manage to take advantage of them.

In nations with pathocratic systems, supervision over scien-

tific and cultural organizations is assigned to a special depart-

ment of especially trusted people, a “Nameless Office” com-

posed almost entirely of relatively intelligent persons who be-

tray characteristic psychopathic traits. These people must be

capable of completing their academic studies, albeit sometimes

by forcing examiners to issue generous evaluations. Their tal-

ents are usually inferior to those of average students, especially

regarding psychological science. In spite of that, they are re-

warded for their services by obtaining academic degrees and

positions and are allowed to represent their country’s scientific

community abroad. As especially trusted individuals, they are

allowed to not participate in local meetings of the party, and

even to avoid joining it entirely. In case of need, they might

then pass for non-party. In spite of that, these scientific and

cultural superintendents are well known to the society of nor-

mal people, who learn the art of differentiation rather quickly.

They are not always properly distinguished from agents of the

political police; although they consider themselves to be in a

better class than the latter, they must nevertheless cooperate

with them.

We often meet with such people abroad, in the countries of

normal people, where various foundations and institutes give

them scientific grants with the conviction that they are thereby

assisting the development of proper knowledge in countries

under “communist” governments. These benefactors do not

realize that they are rendering a disservice to such science and

to real scientists by allowing the supervisors to attain a certain

semi-authentic authority, and by allowing them to become

more familiar with whatever they shall later deem to be dan-

gerous.

After all, those people shall later have the power to permit

someone to take a doctorate, embark upon a scientific career,

260

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

achieve academic tenure, and become promoted. Very medio-

cre scientists themselves, they attempt to knock down more

talented persons, governed both by self-interest and that typical

jealousy which characterizes a pathocrat’s attitude toward nor-

mal people. They will be the ones monitoring scientific papers

for their “proper ideology” and attempting to ensure that a

good specialist will be denied the scientific literature he

needs.113

Controls are exceptionally malicious and treacherous in the

psychological sciences in particular, for reasons now under-

standable to us. Written and unwritten lists are compiled for

subjects that may not be taught, and corresponding directives

are issued to appropriately distort other subjects. This list is so

vast in the area of psychology that nothing remains of this sci-

ence except a skeleton picked bare of anything that might be

subtle or penetrating.

A psychiatrist’s required curriculum contains neither the

minimal knowledge from the areas of general, developmental,

and clinical psychology, nor the basic skills in psychotherapy.

Due to such a state of affairs, the most mediocre or privileged

of physicians become a psychiatrist after a course of study

lasting only weeks. This opens the door of psychiatric careers

to individuals who are by nature inclined to serving the

pathocratic authority, and it has fateful repercussions upon the

level of the treatment. It later permits psychiatry to be abused

for purposes for which it should never be used.114

113 Based on many reports of the past 5 years, it seems that the United States

is well on its way to having a similar system. In fact, careful analysis indi-

cates that such a system has been in place for some time now. [Editor’s note.]

114 In Ukraine brain surgery is being performed on schizophrenics. “Ukraine

is confronted with a lack of money, which means no money to buy medi-

cines, so they look for alternative methods of treatment. Then there are psy-

chiatrists in Dnepropetrovsk who think: suppose we cut away a piece of

brain, then we can get rid of schizophrenia cheaply.’ Van Voren imagines

what they might think: ‘Maybe we’ll even get the Nobel prize! One can never

know!.’

“ ‘On the other hand’, he continues, ‘they know just as well that this kind of

operation is not really accepted. So these schizophrenics become supposedly

epileptic, since in extreme cases of epilepsy surgery might be performed.

Under this pretext they cut away pieces of brain.’ The Institute of Neurosur-

gery in Kiev goes even further: there, brain tissue of aborted embryos is

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

261

Since they are undereducated, these psychologists then

prove helpless in the face of many human problems, especially

in cases where detailed knowledge is needed. Such knowledge

must then be acquired on one’s own, a feat not everyone is able

to manage.

Such behavior carries in its wake a good deal of damage

and human injustice in areas of life which have nothing what-

soever to do with politics. Unfortunately, however, such behav-

ior is necessary from the pathocrat’s point of view in order to

prevent these dangerous sciences from jeopardizing the exis-

tence of a system they consider the best of all possible worlds.

Specialists in the areas of psychology and psychopathology

would find an analysis of this system of prohibitions and rec-

ommendations to be highly interesting. This makes it possible

implanted in the brains of mentally disabled people. ‘They say they can cure

disabled people that way. Of course nothing happens or their situation even

worsens, but they ask thousands of dollars for it.’

“In Ukrainian psychiatry insulin is being used as a tranquillizer, i.e. it is

administered in such doses, that the patient lapses into a coma. ‘A kill or cure

remedy. It is being applied in high doses, while diabetics are dying because

there is not enough insulin. Nonsense, absolute nonsense.’ He continues:

‘Electroshocks, on large scale.’ In the Central Psychiatric Institution in Kiev

they are given a dozen a time, without anaesthesia or muscle-relaxant drugs.

Once patients have been given a clean bill of health, they can get another

dozen of shocks on the day of departure: ‘something like a severance pay.

And all of this is happening now’, concludes Van Voren, ‘it is happening

today, at this very moment.’

“In Russian newspapers one can freely write about the political abuse of

psychiatry. But officially the doctrine of Snezhnevsky was never revoked.

Most psychiatrists in Moscow still even believe in it. ‘As a consequence, no

structural change is possible in Moscow. Even now people who hold a posi-

tion at one of those institutes and who want to talk in public about the abuse

of psychiatry are being told that they should better shut up or find themselves

a job elsewhere. This way much of the old power is maintained.’

“Under the pretext of ‘progressing schizophrenia’ dissidentss are still being

locked up in the former Soviet Union, but mainly in the provinces and it is

not so ‘easy’ to do anymore, says Van Voren.

People who are unwelcome to the local authorities might land in an institu-

tion, but nowadays there are organisations for human rights and media who

can get them out. In Turkmenistan it still happens officially. ‘That is a mu-

seum of the old Stalinist Soviet Union and there the theory has been re-

stored.’” “A Mess in Psychiatry”, an interview with Robert van Voren, Gen-

eral Secretary of Geneva Initiative on Psychiatry, published in the Dutch

newspaper De Volkskrant on August 9, 1997.[Editor’s note.]

262

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

to realize that this may be one of the roads via which we can

reach the crux of the matter or the nature of this macrosocial

phenomenon. The prohibitions engulf depth psychology, the

analysis of the human instinctive substratum, together with

analysis of dreams.

As already pointed out in the chapter introducing some in-

dispensable concepts, an understanding of human instinct is a

key to understanding man; however, a knowledge of said in-

stinct’s anomalies also represents a key to understanding

pathocracy.

Although used ever more rarely in psychological practice,

dream analysis shall always remain the best school of psycho-

logical thought; that makes it dangerous by nature. Conse-

quently, even research on the psychology of mate selection is

frowned upon, at best.

The essence of psychopathy may not, of course, be re-

searched or elucidated. Darkness is cast upon this matter by

means of an intentionally devised definition of psychopathy

which includes various kinds of character disorders, together

with those caused by completely different and known causes.115

This definition must be memorized not only by every lecturer

in psychopathology, psychiatrist, and psychologist, but also by

some political functionaries with no education in that area.

This definition must be used in all public appearances

whenever it is for some reason impossible to avoid the subject.

However, it is preferable for a lecturer in such areas to be

someone who always believes whatever is most convenient in

his situation, and whose intelligence does not predestine him to

delve into subtle differentiations of a psychological nature.

It is also worth pointing out here that the chief doctrine of

said system reads “Existence defines consciousness”. As such,

it belongs to psychology rather than to any political doctrine.

This doctrine actually contradicts a good deal of empirical data

indicating the role of hereditary factors in the development of

man’s personality and fate. Lecturers may refer to research on

identical twins, but only in a brief, cautious, and formal fash-

115 This is also the case in the U.S. as noted in several articles by Robert

Hare. [Editor’s note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

263

ion. Considerations on this subject may, however, not be pub-

lished in print.

We return once more to this system’s peculiar psychological

“genius” and its self-knowledge. One might admire how the

above mentioned definitions of psychopathy effectively blocks

the ability to comprehend phenomena covered therein. We may

investigate the relationships between these prohibitions and the

essence of the macrosocial phenomenon they in fact mirror.

We may also observe the limits of these skills and the errors

committed by those who execute this strategy. These shortcom-

ings are skillfully taken advantage of for purposes of smug-

gling through some proper knowledge on the part of the more

talented specialists, or by elderly people no longer fearful for

their careers or even their lives.

The “ideological” battle is thus being waged on territory

completely unperceived by scientists living under governments

of normal human structures and attempting to imagine that

other reality. This applies to all people denouncing “Commu-

nism”, as well as those for whom this ideology has become

their faith.

Shortly after arriving in the U.S.A. , I was handed a news-

paper by a young black man on some street in Queens, N.Y. I

reached for my purse, but he waved me off; the paper was free.

The front page showed a picture of a young and handsome

Brezhnev decorated with all the medals he did not in fact re-

ceive until much later. On the last page, however, I found a

quite well-worked-out summary of investigations performed at

the University of Massachusetts on identical twins raised sepa-

rately. These investigations furnished empirical indications for

the important role of heredity, and the description contained a

literary illustration of the similarity of the fates of twin pairs.

How far “ideologically disorientated” the editors of this paper

must have been to publish something which could never have

appeared in the area subjected to a supposedly Communist

system.116

116 The freedom that !obaczewski noted in the U.S. in the 1980 is fast being

replaced by an almost total pathocracy. It won’t be long before such articles

are censored in U.S. newspapers as well, unless, of course, the study is “de-

signed” to prove the superiority of psychopathy. [Editor’s note.]

264

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

In that other reality, the battlefront crosses every study of

psychology and psychiatry, every psychiatric hospital, every

mental health consultation center, and the personality of every-

one working in these areas. What takes place there: hidden

thrust-and-parry duels, a smuggling through of true scientific

information and accomplishments, and harassment.

Some people become morally derailed under these condi-

tions, whereas others create a solid foundation for their convic-

tions and are prepared to undertake difficulty and risk in order

to obtain honest knowledge so as to serve the sick and needy.

The initial motivation of this latter group is thus not political in

character, since it derives from their good will and professional

decency. Their consciousness of the political causes of the

limitations and the political meaning of this battle is raised

later, in conjunction with experience and professional maturity,

especially if their experience and skills must be used in order to

save persecuted people.

In the meantime, however, the necessary scientific data and

papers must be obtained somehow, taking difficulties and other

people’s lack of understanding into account. Students and be-

ginning specialists not yet aware of what was removed from

the educational curricula attempt to gain access to the scientific

data stolen from them. Science starts to be degraded at a worri-

some rate once such awareness is missing.

~~~

We need to understand the nature of the macrosocial phe-

nomenon as well as that basic relationship and controversy

between the pathological system and those areas of science

which describe psychological and psychopathological phenom-

ena. Otherwise, we cannot become fully conscious of the rea-

sons for such a government’s long published behavior.

A normal person’s actions and reactions, his ideas and

moral criteria, all too often strike abnormal individuals as ab-

normal. For if a person with some psychological deviations

considers himself normal, which is of course significantly eas-

ier if he possesses authority, then he would consider a normal

person different and therefore abnormal, whether in reality or

as a result of conversive thinking. That explains why such peo-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

265

ple’s government shall always have the tendency to treat any

dissidents as “mentally abnormal”.

Operations such as driving a normal person into psycho-

logical illness and the use of psychiatric institutions for this

purpose take place in many countries in which such institutions

exist. Contemporary legislation binding upon normal man’s

countries is not based upon an adequate understanding of the

psychology of such behavior, and thus does not constitute a

sufficient preventive measure against it.

Within the categories of a normal psychological world

view, the motivations for such behavior were variously under-

stood and described: personal and family accounts, property

matters, intent to discredit a witness’ testimony, and even po-

litical motivations. Such defamatory suggestions are used par-

ticularly often by individuals who are themselves not entirely

normal, whose behavior has driven someone to a nervous

breakdown or to violent protest. Among hysterics, such behav-

ior tends to be a projection onto other people of one’s own self-

critical associations. A normal person strikes a psychopath as a

naive, smart-alecky believer in barely comprehensible theories;

calling him “crazy” is not all that far away.

Therefore, when we set up a sufficient number of examples

of this kind or collect sufficient experience in this area, another

more essential motivational level for such behavior becomes

apparent. What happens as a rule is that the idea of driving

someone into mental illness issues from minds with various

aberrations and psychological defects. Only rarely does the

component of pathological factors take part in the ponerogene-

sis of such behavior from outside its agents. Well thought out

and carefully framed legislation should therefore require testing

of individuals whose suggestions that someone else is psycho-

logically abnormal are too insistent or too doubtfully founded.

On the other hand, any system in which the abuse of psy-

chiatry for allegedly political reasons has become a common

phenomenon should be examined in the light of similar psycho-

logical criteria extrapolated onto the macrosocial scale. Any

person rebelling internally against a governmental system,

which shall always strike him as foreign and difficult to under-

stand, and who is unable to hide this well enough, shall thus

266

PSYCHOLOGY AND PSYCHIATRY

easily be designated by the representatives of said government

as “mentally abnormal”, someone who should submit to psy-

chiatric treatment. A scientifically and morally degenerate psy-

chiatrist becomes a tool easily used for this purpose. Thus is

born the sole method of terror and human torture unfamiliar

even to the secret police of Czar Alexander II.

The abuse of psychiatry for purposes we already know thus

derives from the very nature of pathocracy as a macrosocial

psychopathological phenomenon. After all, that very area of

knowledge and treatment must first be degraded to prevent it

from jeopardizing the system itself by pronouncing a dramatic

diagnosis, and must then be used as an expedient tool in the

hands of the authorities. In every country, however, one meets

with people who notice this and act astutely against it.

The pathocracy feels increasingly threatened by this area

whenever the medical and psychological sciences make pro-

gress. After all, not only can these sciences knock the weapon

of psychological conquest right out of its hands; they can even

strike at its very nature, and from inside the empire, at that.

A specific perception of these matters therefore bids the

pathocracy to be “ideationally alert” in this area. This also ex-

plains why anyone who is both too knowledgeable in this area

and too far outside the immediate reach of such authorities

should be accused of anything that can be trumped up, includ-

ing psychological abnormality.

CHAPTER VIII

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

Monotheistic faith strikes a contemporary thinker primarily

as an incomplete induction derived from ontological knowl-

edge about the laws governing microcosmic and macrocosmic

material and organic and psychological life, as well as being a

result of certain encounters accessible by means of introspec-

tion. The rest complements this induction by means of items

man gains by other ways and accepts either individually or in

accordance with the dictates of his religion and creed. A sound-

less, wordless voice unconsciously awakens our associations,

reaches our awareness in the quiet of mind, and either comple-

ments or rebukes our cognition; this phenomenon is every bit

as true as whatever has become accessible to science thanks to

modern investigative methods.

In perfecting our cognition in the psychological field and at-

taining truths formerly available only to mystics, we render

ever narrower the space of nescience which until recently sepa-

rated the realm of spiritual perception from naturalistic science.

Sometime in the not too distant future, these two cognitions

will meet and certain divergences will become self evident. It

would thus be better if we were prepared for it. Almost from

the outset of my deliberations on the genesis of evil, I have

been conscious of the fact that the investigative results con-

cisely presented in this work can be used to further complete

that space which is so hard for the human mind to enter.

268

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

The ponerological approach throws new light upon age-old

questions heretofore regulated by the dictates of moral systems

and must of necessity bring about a revision in thought meth-

ods. As a Christian, the author was initially apprehensive that

this would cause dangerous collisions with ancient tradition.

Studying the question in the light of the Scriptures caused these

apprehensions gradually to fade away. Rather, this now appears

to be the way to bring our thought processes closer to that

original and primeval method of perceiving moral knowledge.

Quite characteristically, reading the Gospels can provide teach-

ings clearly convergent with the method of understanding evil

derived from naturalistic investigations on its origin. At the

same time, we must foresee that the process of correction and

conformation will be laborious and time consuming, which

ultimately will probably prevent any major tumult.

Religion is an eternal phenomenon. A sometimes overly ac-

tive imagination would at first complement whatever esoteric

perception could not handle. Once civilization and its concur-

rent discipline of thought reaches a certain level of develop-

ment, a monotheistic idea tends to emerge, generally as a con-

viction of a certain mental elite. Such development in religious

thought can be considered a historical law rather than individ-

ual discovery by such people like Zarathustra or Socrates. The

march of religious thought through history constitutes an indis-

pensable factor of the formation of human consciousness.

Acceptance of religion’s basic truths opens to man a whole

field of possible cognition wherein his mind can search for the

truth. At that point, we also free ourselves of certain psycho-

logical impediments and gain a certain freedom of cognition in

areas accessible to naturalistic perception. Rediscovering the

true, ancient, religious values strengthens us, showing us the

meaning of life and history. It also facilitates our introspective

acceptance of phenomena within ourselves for which naturalis-

tic perception proves insufficient. Parallel to our self knowl-

edge, we also develop our ability to understand other people,

thanks to the acceptance of the existence of an analogous real-

ity within our neighbor.

These values become priceless whenever man is forced into

maximum mental effort and profound deliberations in action so

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

269

as to avoid stumbling into evil, danger, or exceptional difficul-

ties. If there is no possibility of apprehending a situation fully,

but a way out must nevertheless be found for one’s self, family,

or nation, we are indeed fortunate if we can hear that silent

voice within saying “Don’t do this” or “trust me, do this”.

We could thus say that this cognition and faith simultane-

ously supporting our mind and multiplying our spiritual

strength constitute the sole basis for survival and resistance in

situations wherein a person or nation is threatened by the prod-

ucts of ponerogenesis, which cannot be measured in the catego-

ries of the natural world view. That is the opinion of many

righteous people. We cannot contradict the basic value of such

a conviction, but if it leads to contemptuous treatment of objec-

tive science in this area and reinforces the egotism of the natu-

ral world view, people holding this conviction are unaware of

the fact that they are no longer acting in good faith.

No major religion indicates the nature of the macrosocial

pathological phenomenon; therefore we cannot consider relig-

ious dictates as a specific basis for overcoming this great his-

torical disease. Religion is neither a specific serum nor an ae-

tiotropically active antibiotic with regard to the phenomenon of

pathocracy. Although it constitutes a regenerative factor for the

spiritual strength of individuals and societies, religious truth

does not contain the specific naturalistic knowledge which is

essential for understanding the pathology of the phenomenon,

and which is simultaneously a curative and a resistance gener-

ating factor for human personalities. Rather, religious faith and

the phenomenon of pathocracy are in fact at different levels of

reality, the latter being more earthy. That also explains why

there can be no true collision between religion and the pone-

rological knowledge about the macrosocial pathological phe-

nomenon.

If we based our societal defense and treatment with regard

to destructive influences of pathocracy only upon the truest

religious values, this would be reminiscent of curing an insuffi-

ciently comprehended disease exclusively by measures which

strengthen body and soul. Such general therapy may furnish

satisfactory results in many cases, but it will prove insufficient

270

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

in others. This macrosocial disease belongs to the latter cate-

gory.

The fact that this pathocratic phenomenon, which has

spread to the most wide-ranging scale in human history, dem-

onstrates hostility to any and all religion does not imply the

conclusion that it is the opposite of religion. This dependence

would be structured differently under other historical and con-

temporary conditions. In the light of historical data, it appears

obvious that religious systems have also succumbed to ponero-

genic processes and manifested the symptoms of a similar dis-

ease.117

The specific basis for healing our sick world, which is also a

curative factor for restoring full reasoning capabilities to the

human personality, must therefore be the kind of science which

renders the essence of the phenomenon evident and describes it

in sufficiently objective language. Resistance to the acceptance

of such knowledge is often justified by religious motivation; it

is largely caused by the egotism of the natural world view in its

traditional overrating of its values and fear of disintegration,

and it must be constructively overcome.

~~~

The pathocratic phenomenon has appeared many times in

history, feeding parasitically upon various social movements,

deforming their structures and ideologies in a characteristic

fashion. It must therefore have met with various religious sys-

tems and with a variety of historical and cultural backgrounds.

Two basic possibilities for a relationship between this phe-

nomenon and a religious system can thus be adduced. The first

occurs when the religious association itself succumbs to infec-

tion and the ponerogenic process, which leads to development

of the above-mentioned phenomena within it. The second pos-

sibility emerges if a pathocracy develops as a parasite upon

some social movement whose character is secular and political,

which must inevitably lead to collision with religious organiza-

tions.

117 Not to mention the fact that currently, the neocon-Bush administration is

using Christianity as the ideology by which they mask pathocracy. [Editor’s

note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

271

In the first case, the religious association succumbs to de-

struction from within, its organism becomes subordinated to

goals completely different from the original idea, and its the-

osophic and moral values fall prey to characteristic deforma-

tion, thereupon serving as a disguise for domination by patho-

logical individuals. The religious idea then becomes both a

justification for using force and sadism against nonbelievers,

heretics, and sorcerers, and a conscience drug for people who

put such inspirations into effect.118

Anyone criticizing such a state of affairs is condemned with

paramoral indignation, allegedly in the name of the original

idea and faith in God, but actually because he feels and thinks

within the categories of normal people. Such a system retains

the name of the original religion and many other specific

names, swearing on the prophet’s beard while using this for its

doubletalk. Something which was to be originally an aid in the

comprehension of God’s truth now scourges nations with the

sword of imperialism.

When such phenomena are long-lasting, those people who

have retained their faith in religious values will condemn such

a state of affairs, thereby indicating that it diverges widely from

the truth. They will unfortunately do so without understanding

the nature and causes of the pathological phenomenon, i.e. in

moral categories, thus committing the malignant error with

which we are already familiar. They shall take advantage of

some amenable geopolitical situation in protesting such a state

of affairs, breaking away from the original system and creating

various sects and denominations.

This kind of breakdown can be considered a characteristic

consequence of any movement’s infection by this disease, be it

religious or secular. Religious conflict thereupon assumes the

character of political partitions, giving rise to warfare among

various believers in the same God.

As we know, this state evolves into the dissimulative phase

once human rancor starts to become exhausted; however, this

form will be much more long-lasting than a pathocracy feeding

on a secular movement. Human individuals cannot easily con-

tain the entire process within their frame of reference, since

118 As is the case in the United States and Israel today. [Editor’s note.]

272

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

such a state spans many generations; their criticism will thus be

limited to the questions they are immediately familiar with.

However, this gives rise to a gradual but uncoordinated pres-

sure front of reasonable people, thereby instigating some kind

of evolution within any group thus engendered. Such evolution

will aim at reactivating the original religious values or at

overcoming the deformations.

Whether this process achieves its definitive goals depends

upon two conditions: If the original idea was contaminated by

some pathological factor from the outset, the goal is unreach-

able. If it is attainable, our asymptomatic approximation will

place us in a position wherein the definitive elimination of the

effects of the surmounted illness requires an objective view of

its essence and history. Otherwise it is impossible to eliminate

the leftover pathological deformations which would survive as

a factor opening the door to renewed contamination.

Some religious groups may have been started by persons

who were carriers of certain psychological anomalies. Particu-

lar attention should be focused upon largely paranoidal charac-

teropathies and their above-discussed role in instigating new

phases of ponerogenesis. For such people, the world of normal

human experience (including religious experience) succumbs

to deformation; spellbinding of self and others easily follows,

imposed upon other people by means of pathological egotism.

We can observe marginal Christian sects today whose begin-

nings were doubtless of this nature.

If a religion which later fell apart into numerous doctrinal

variations had such a beginning, the above-mentioned regen-

erative processes effected by healthy common sense will bring

about a point of advancement that the said religion’s ministers

perceive to be a threat to the religion’s existence. Protecting

their own faith and social position will then cause them to em-

ploy violent means against anyone daring to criticize or bring

about liberalization. The pathological process begins anew.

Such is the state of affairs we may be actually witnessing to-

day.

However, the mere fact that some religious association has

succumbed to the ponerization process does not constitute

proof that the original gnosis or vision was contaminated from

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

273

the outset by errors which opened the door to invasion by

pathological factors, or that it was an effect of their influence.

In order for the doors to be opened to infection by pathological

factors and furthering progressive degeneration, it suffices for

such a religious movement to succumb to contamination some-

time later in its history, e.g. as a result of excessive influence

on the part of initially foreign archetypes of secular civiliza-

tion, or of compromises with the goals of the country’s rulers.

This succinct summary repeats my above adduced causes

and laws of the course of the ponerological process, this time

with regard to religious groups. Important differences should

be underscored, however. Religious associations are among the

most enduring and long-lived social structures, historically

speaking. The ponerological process in such a group runs its

course in a much larger time frame. In effect, man needs relig-

ion so much that every such group, provided it is numerous

enough, will contain a large number of normal people (gener-

ally the majority) who do not become discouraged and form a

permanent wing inhibiting the process of ponerization. The

equilibrium of the dissimulative phase is thus also to the advan-

tage of those people whose human and religious feelings are

normal. Nonetheless, isolated generations may thus have the

impression that the observed state represents its permanent and

essential characteristics, including the errors they cannot ac-

cept.

We must therefore pose the following question: Can the

most constant and sensible action based on the natural world

view and theological and moral reflections ever completely

eliminate the effects of a ponerological process which has long

been surmounted?

Based on experience gleaned from individual patients, a

psychotherapist would doubt such a possibility. The conse-

quences of the influence of pathological factors can only be

definitely liquidated if a person becomes aware that he was the

object of their activity. Such a method of careful correction of

detail may sound reminiscent of the work done by an art re-

storer who decided against removing all later paint-overs and

revealing the master’s original work in toto, but rather retained

and conserved a few failed corrections for posterity.

274

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

Even against the conditional backdrop of time furthering the

healing process, such efforts at step-by-step untying of knots

based on the natural world view only leads toward a moralizing

interpretation of the effects of uncomprehended pathological

factors, with the consequence of panic and the tendency to

retreat to an apparently safer side. The organism of the relig-

ious group thus will retain some dormant foci of the disease

which may become active under certain permitting conditions.

We should therefore realize that following the path of natu-

ralistic apperception of the process of the genesis of evil, at-

tributing the proportionate “fault” to the influence of various

pathological factors, can ease our minds of the burden repre-

sented by the disturbing results of a moralizing interpretation of

their role in ponerogenesis. This also permits more detailed

identification of the results of their operation, as well as defini-

tive elimination thereof. Objective language proves to be not

only more accurate and economical to work with, but also

much safer as a tool of action when dealing with difficult situa-

tions and delicate matters.

Such a more precise and consistent solution for the prob-

lems inherited from centuries of ponerological nescience is

possible whenever a given religion represents a current of

gnosis and faith which was originally authentic enough. A

courageous approach to remedying conditions caused by pres-

ently perceptible poneric processes, or by chronic perseverance

of survivals from such states far in the past, thus demands both

acceptance of this new science and a clear conviction of origi-

nal truth and basic science. Doubts will otherwise block any

such intent by means of insufficiently objectified fear, even if

they have been repressed deep into the subconscious. We must

be convinced that the Truth can endure such a washing in

modern detergent; not only will it not lose its eternal values,

but it will actually regain its original freshness and noble col-

ors.

With regard to the second above-mentioned situation, when

the ponerogenic process leading to pathocracy has affected

some secular and political movement, the situation of religion

in such a country will be completely different. Polarization of

attitudes with regard to religion then becomes inevitable. The

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

275

social religious organization cannot help but assume a critical

attitude, becoming a support for opposition on the part of the

society of normal people. This in turn provokes the movement

affected by this phenomenon to an ever more intolerant attitude

toward religion. Such a situation thus places a given society’s

religion before the specter of physical destruction.

Whenever pathocracy emerges in an autonomous process,

this means that the religious systems dominating that country

were unable to prevent it in time.

As a rule, the religious organizations of any given country

have sufficient influence upon society to be able to oppose

nascent evil if they act with courage and reason. If they cannot,

this is the result of either fragmentation and strife among vari-

ous denominations or of internal corruption within the religious

system. As a result, religious organizations have long tolerated

and even uncritically inspired the development of pathocracy.

This weakness later becomes the cause of religion’s disasters.

In the case of an artificially infected pathocracy, the relig-

ious system’s joint liability may be lesser, albeit still generally

concrete. It is justified to exonerate a country’s religious sys-

tems for the state of affairs if the pathocracy has been imposed

by force. Specific conditions emerge in this situation: the relig-

ious organizations have the morally stronger defensive posi-

tion, are able to accept material losses, and can also undergo

their own recuperative process.

Pathocrats may be able to use primitive and brutal means to

combat religion, but it is very difficult for them to attack the

essence of religious convictions. Their propaganda proves

overly primitive and brings about the familiar phenomena of

immunization or resistance on the part of normal people, with

the final result being the opposite of the intended moral reac-

tion. Pathocrats can only use brute force to destroy religion if

they feel the latter’s weakness. The principle of “divide and

conquer” can be used if there are various denominations with a

long history of enmity, but the effects of such measures are

generally ephemeral and can lead to unity among the denomi-

nations.

The specific practical knowledge collected by the society of

normal people under pathocratic rule, together with the phe-

276

PATHOCRACY AND RELIGION

nomenon of the psychological immunization, begin to exert

their own characteristic effect upon the structure of religious

denominations. If some religious system succumbed to ponero-

genic infection sometime during its history, the effects and

chronic survivals thereof persevere within for centuries. As

already adduced, remedying this by means of philosophical and

moral reflections meets with specific psychological difficulties.

But under pathocratic rule, in spite of the abuse suffered by

such a religious organization, the latter organism specific anti-

bodies are transfused which cure the ponerogenic survivals.

Such a specific process aims at ridding the religious struc-

ture of those deformations which were the effect of the opera-

tion of the pathological factors familiar to us. Insofar as the

appearance of pathocracy in various guises throughout human

history, always resulting from human errors which opened the

door to the pathological phenomenon, one must also look on

the other side of the coin. We should understand this in the

light of that underrated law, when the effect of a particular

causative structure has a teleological meaning of its own. It

would, however, be highly advantageous for this recuperative

process to be accompanied by greater awareness of the nature

of the phenomena, which also acts similarly in terms of devel-

oping psychological immunity and healing human personali-

ties. Such awareness could also help elaborate safer and more

effective plans of action.

If individuals and groups believing in God are able to accept

an objective understanding of macrosocial pathological phe-

nomena, especially this most dangerous one, the natural out-

come will thus prove to be a certain separation of religious and

ponerological problematics, which qualitatively occupy differ-

ent levels of reality. Church attention can then revert to ques-

tions regarding man’s relationship with God, an area for which

churches have a calling. On the other hand, resistance to pone-

rological phenomena and their worldwide spread should be

largely assumed by scientific and political institutions whose

actions are based on a naturalistic understanding of the nature

and genesis of evil. Such a separation of duties can never be

quite consistent, since the genesis of evil includes participation

of human moral failings, and overcoming these based on relig-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

277

ious premises has been the responsibility of religious associa-

tions since times immemorial.

Some religions and denominations subjected to pathocratic

rule are forced by such circumstance to become overly in-

volved in matters conventionally referred to as political, or

even in economic efforts. This is necessary both in order to

protect the existence of the religious organization itself and in

order to help fellow believers or other citizens suffering abuse.

It is important, however, to avoid having such a state of affairs

become permanent in the shape of habit and tradition, since this

could later make it more difficult to revert to normal human

government.

In spite of existing differences of conviction and tradition,

the basis for cooperative effort on the part of people with good

will should contain that characteristic convergence of the con-

clusions we deduce between the precepts of the Christian Gos-

pels (and other monotheistic religions) and a ponerological

view of the genesis of evil. The faithful of various religions and

denominations do in fact believe in the same God, and at pre-

sent they are threatened by the same macrosocial pathologic

phenomenon. This creates sufficient data to enable a search for

cooperation in affecting achievements whose value is so obvi-

ous.

CHAPTER IX

THERAPY FOR THE WORLD

For centuries, attempts were made to treat various diseases

based on naive understanding and upon experience transmitted

from generation to generation. This activity was not ineffec-

tive; in many cases it produced advantageous results. Supersed-

ing this traditional medicine with the newly generating modern

science in Europe caused social health to deteriorate initially.

However, it was only with the help of modern science that

many diseases were vanquished, ailments against which tradi-

tional medicine had been helpless. This occurred because a

naturalistic comprehension of disease and its causes created a

basis for counteraction.

Regarding the phenomena discussed in this work, our situa-

tion is similar to the one engendered by the above-mentioned

crisis with reference to the health of European nations. We

have left behind the traditional socio-moral organization but

have not yet elaborated a more valuable science, one which

would fill in the gap. We therefore need newly established

criteria which can become the basis for an analogous discipline

with an enduring structure; simultaneously, this would fulfill a

burning need in today’s world.

According to contemporary understanding, effective treat-

ment of a disease becomes possible once we have apprehended

its essence, its etiological factors and their properties, and its

pathodynamic course within organisms with dissimilar biologi-

cal properties. Once such knowledge is available, finding the

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

279

proper treatment measures generally proves a less difficult and

dangerous duty. For doctors, disease represents an interesting,

even fascinating, biological phenomenon. They often accepted

the risk of contact with the contagious pathogenic factors and

suffered losses in order to comprehend the ailment so as to be

able to heal people. Thanks to this, they achieved the possibil-

ity of etiotropic disease treatment and artificial immunization

of human organisms to disease. The doctor’s own health is thus

also better protected today; but he ought never to feel any con-

tempt for the patient or his disease.

When we are faced with a macrosocial pathological phe-

nomenon which requires us to proceed in a manner analogous

in principle to that governing contemporary medicine, espe-

cially with reference to overcoming diseases which quickly

propagate among the populations, the law demands necessary

rigorous measures which become binding upon healthy people

as well. It is also worth pointing out that people and political

organizations whose world view is leftist generally represent a

more consistent attitude in this matter, demanding such sacri-

fices in the name of the common good.

We must also be aware that the phenomenon facing us is

analogous to those diseases against which the old traditional

medicine proved inadequate. In order to overcome this state of

affairs, we must therefore utilize new means based upon an

understanding of the essence and causes of the pathocratic

phenomenon, i.e. according to principles analogous to those

governing modern medicine. The road to comprehension of the

phenomenon was also much more difficult and dangerous than

the one which should lead from such understanding to the find-

ing of naturalistically and morally justified, and properly orga-

nized, therapeutic activities. These methods are potentially

possible and feasible, since they derive from an understanding

of the phenomenon per se and become an extension thereof. In

this “disease”, as in many cases treated by psychotherapists, the

understanding alone already begins to heal human personali-

ties. The author confirmed this in practice in individual cases.

It will also appear that many known experiential results will

similarly become applicable.

280

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

The insufficiency of efforts based upon the best moral val-

ues has become common knowledge after years of rebounding

as though from rubber bands. The powerful military weapons

that jeopardize all humanity can, on the other hand, be consid-

ered as indispensable as a strait-jacket, something whose use

diminishes in proportion to the improved skills governing the

behavior of those persons entrusted with the healing arts. We

need measures which can reach all people and all nations and

which can operate upon the recognized causes of great diseases

Such therapeutic measures cannot be limited to the phe-

nomenon of pathocracy. Pathocracy will always find a positive

response if some independent country is infected with an ad-

vanced state of hysterization, or if a small privileged caste op-

presses and exploits other citizens, keeping them backward and

in the dark; anyone willing to treat the world can then be

hounded, and his moral right to act be questioned. Evil in the

world, in fact, constitutes a continuum: one kind opens the door

to another, irrespective of its qualitative essence or the ideo-

logical slogans cloaking it.

It also becomes impossible to find effective means of thera-

peutic operation if the minds of people undertaking such tasks

are affected by a tendency to conversive thinking like subcon-

scious selection and substitution of data, or if some doctrine

preventing an objective perception of reality becomes manda-

tory. In particular, a political doctrine, for which a macrosocial

pathological phenomenon, in accordance with its famous ide-

ology, has become a dogma, blocks an understanding of its real

nature so well that purposeful action becomes impossible.

Anyone administering such action should undergo an appropri-

ate prior examination, or even a kind of psychotherapy, in or-

der to eliminate any tendencies toward even slightly sloppy

thinking.

Like every well-managed treatment, therapy of the world

must contain two basic demands: strengthening the overall

defensive powers of the human community and attacking its

most dangerous disease, etiotropically if possible. Taking into

account all the aspects referred to in the theoretical chapter on

ponerology, therapeutic efforts should be directed at subjecting

the operations of the known factors of the genesis of evil, as

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

281

well as the processes of ponerogenesis itself, to the controls of

scientific and societal consciousness.

Present attempts at trusting moral data alone, no matter how

sincerely perceived, also prove inadequate as would trying to

operate solely on the basis of the data contained within this

book, ignoring the essential support of moral values. A pone-

rologist’s attitude underscores primarily the naturalistic aspects

of phenomena; nevertheless, this does not mean that the tradi-

tional ones have diminished in value. Efforts aimed at endow-

ing the life of nations with the necessary moral order should

therefore constitute a second wing, working in parallel and

rationally supported by naturalistic principles.

Contemporary societies were pushed into a state of moral

recession during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centu-

ries; leading them back out is the general duty of this genera-

tion and should remain an overall backdrop to activity as a

whole. The basic position should be the intent to fulfill the

commandment of loving one’s neighbor, including even those

who have committed substantial evil, and even if this love indi-

cates taking proplylactic action to protect others from that evil.

A great therapeutic endeavor can only be affected once we do

this with the honest control of moral consciousness, moderation

of words and thoughtfulness of action. At that point, ponerol-

ogy will prove its practical usefulness in fulfilling this task.

People and values mature in action. Thus, a synthesis of tradi-

tional moral teachings and this new naturalistic approach can

only occur with reasoned behavior.

Truth is a Healer

It would be difficult to summarize here the statements of the

many famous authors on the subject of the psychotherapeutic

role of making a person aware of what has crowded his sub-

conscious, stifled within by constant painful effort, because he

feared to look an unpleasant truth in the eye, lacked the objec-

tive data to derive correct conclusions, or was too proud to

permit the awareness that he had behaved in a preposterous

fashion. In addition to being quite well understood by special-

ists, these matters have also become common knowledge to an

adequate degree.

282

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

In any method or technique of analytical psychotherapy, or

autonomous psychotherapy, as T. Szasz119 called it, the guiding

operational motivation is exposing to the light of consciousness

whatever material has been suppressed by means of subcon-

scious selection of data, or given up in the face of intellectual

problems. This is accompanied by a disillusionment of substi-

tutions and rationalizations, whose creation is usually in pro-

portion to the amount of repressed material.

In many cases, it turns out that the material fearfully elimi-

nated from the field of consciousness, and frequently substi-

tuted by ostensibly more comfortable associations, would never

have had such dangerous results if we had initially mustered

the courage to perceive it consciously. We would then have

been in the position to find an independent and often creative

way out of the situation.

In some cases, however, especially when dealing with phe-

nomena which are hard to understand within the categories of

our natural world view, leading the patient out of his problems

demands furnishing him with crucial objective data, usually

from the areas of biology, psychology, and psychopathology,

and indicating specific dependencies which he was unable to

comprehend before. Instructional activity begins to dominate in

psychotherapeutic work at this point. After all, the patient

needs this additional data in order to reconstruct his disinte-

grated personality and form a new world view more appropri-

ate to reality. Only then can we go on to the more traditional

methods. If our activities are to be for the benefit of the people

who remained under the influence of pathocratic system, this

last pattern of behavior is the most appropriate; the objective

data furnished to the patients must derive from an understand-

ing of the nature of the phenomenon.

As already adduced, the author has been able to observe the

workings of such a process of making someone consciously

aware of the essence and properties of the macrosocial phe-

nomenon, on the basis of individual patients rendered neurotic

by the influence of pathocratic social conditions. In countries

119 Thomas Szasz, an American psychiatrist who has argued since the 1950s

that compulsory psychiatry is incompatible with a free society. [Editor’s

note.]

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

283

ruled by such governments, almost every normal person carries

within him some neurotic response of varying intensity. After

all, neurosis is human nature’s normal response to being sub-

jugated to a pathological system.

In spite of the anxiety which such courageous psychothera-

peutic operations necessarily engendered on both sides, my

patients quickly assimilated the objective data they were fur-

nished, complemented them with their own experiences, and

required additional information and verification of their appli-

cations of this information. Spontaneous and creative reintegra-

tion of their personalities took place soon thereafter, accompa-

nied by a similar reconstruction of their world view. Subse-

quent psychotherapy merely continued assistance in this ever

more autonomous process and in resolving individual prob-

lems, i.e. a more traditional approach. These people lost their

chronic tensions; their perceptive view of this deviant reality

became increasingly realistic and laced with humor. Rein-

forcement of their capacity to maintain their own psychological

hygiene, self-therapy, and self-pedagogy was much better than

expected. They became more resourceful in practical life mat-

ters and were able to offer others good advice. Unfortunately,

the number of persons whom a psychotherapist could trust

adequately was very limited.

A similar effect should be attained on a macrosocial scale,

something technically feasible under present conditions. At

such an operational scale, it will liberate spontaneous interac-

tion among such enlightened individuals and the social multi-

plication of therapeutic phenomena. The latter will then create

a qualitatively new and most probably rather stormy social

reaction; we should be prepared for this in order to calm it

down. Finally, this will bring an overall feeling of relaxation

and a triumph of proper science over evil; this cannot be ne-

gated by any verbalistic means, and physical force also be-

comes meaningless. Using measures so different from anything

utilized before will engender an “end of an era” feeling during

which this macrosocial phenomenon was able to emerge and

develop, but is now dying. That would be accompanied by a

sensation of well-being on the part of normal people.

284

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

Within this suggested global psychotherapy, additional ob-

jectified material in the form of a naturalistic understanding of

the phenomenon constitutes the keystone material; this book

has therefore collected the most essential data the author was

able to obtain and to present here in a partially simplified ap-

proach. This no doubt does not represent the entirety of the

knowledge needed; further supplementation will be necessary.

On the other hand, I have devoted less attention to methods,

since this would constitute a manifold duplication of those

kinds of therapies many specialists already know and use in

their practice.

The purpose of this activity will be letting the world regain

its capacity to make use of healthy common sense and to rein-

tegrate world views based on scientifically objectified and ap-

propriately popularized data. The consciousness thus created

would be far more appropriate to the reality which was misun-

derstood until recently; as a result, man will become more sen-

sible in practical activity, more independent and resourceful in

solving life’s problems, and he will feel safer. This task is noth-

ing new; it constitutes a good psychotherapist’s daily bread.

The problem is technical rather than theoretical, namely how to

disseminate such sorely needed influences throughout the

globe.

~~~

Every psychotherapist must be prepared for difficulties

caused by the psychological resistance derived from persistent

attitudes and convictions whose lack of foundation becomes

revealed in the course of work. Particularly in the case of a

numerous group of people, these resistances become more

demonstratively manifest; however, among the members of

such a group we also find allies who help us break down these

resistances. In order to visualize this, let us revert once more to

the N. family example, wherein a dozen or so persons collabo-

rated in abusing a pleasant and intelligent thirteen-year-old

scapegoat.

When I explained to the uncles and aunts that they had been

under the influence of a psychologically abnormal person for

years, accepting her delusional world as real and participating

(with perceived honor) in her vindictiveness to the boy who

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

285

was allegedly to blame for her failures, including those which

occurred years before his birth, the shock temporarily stifled

their indignation. There was no subsequent attack, probably

because this took place in my office of the public health service

and I was protected by the white coat I would usually don

whenever I did not feel completely safe. I thus suffered only

verbal threats. A week later, however, they started returning

one by one, pale and rueful; albeit with difficulty, they did

offer their cooperation in helping to repair the family situation

and the future of this unfortunate boy.

Many people suffer an inevitable shock and react with op-

position, protest, and disintegration of their human personality

when informed of such a state of affairs, namely that they have

been under the spellbinding and traumatizing influence of a

macrosocial pathological phenomenon, regardless of whether

they were followers or opponents thereof. Many people are

awakened to anxious protest by the fact that the ideology they

either condemned or somehow accepted, but considered a guid-

ing factor, is now being treated as something secondary in im-

portance.

The noisiest protests will come from those who consider

themselves fair because they condemned this macrosocial phe-

nomenon with literary talent and raised voices, utilizing the

name derived from its most current ideology, as well as making

excessive use of moralizing interpretations with regard to

pathological phenomena. Forcing them to an apperception of a

correct understanding of the pathocracy will be quite a Sisy-

phean labor, since they would have to become conscious of the

fact that their efforts largely served goals which were the oppo-

site of their intentions. Especially if they engaged in such ac-

tivities professionally, it is more practical to avoid liberating

their aggressions; one could even consider such generally eld-

erly people too old for therapy.

Transforming the world view of people living in countries

with normal man’s systems proves a more troublesome task,

since they are much more egotistically attached to the imagin-

ings suggested to them since childhood, making it more diffi-

cult for them to reconcile themselves with the fact that there are

matters which their natural conceptual system cannot assimi-

286

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

late. They also lack the specific experience available to people

who have lived under pathocratic rule for years. We must

therefore expect resistance and attack on the part of people

protecting their livelihoods and positions as well as defending

their personalities from a vexatious disintegration. Refraining

from such estrangement, we have to count on the accordant

reactions of the majority.

The acceptance of such psychotherapy will be different in

countries where societies of normal people have already been

created, offering solid resistance to pathocratic rule. Many

years of experience, practical familiarity with the phenomenon,

and psychological immunization there long ago produced fer-

tile ground for sowing the seeds of objective truth and natural-

istic comprehension. An explanation of the essence of macro-

social phenomenon will be treated like delayed psychotherapy

which should regrettably have been served much earlier (that

would have enabled the patient to avoid many errors) but is

nevertheless useful because it provides order and relaxation

and permits subsequent reasoned action. Such data, accepted

via a rather painful process there, will be associated with the

experience already possessed. There will be no egoistically or

egotistically inspired protests in that world. The value of an

objective view will be appreciated much more rapidly, since it

ensures a basis for reasoned activity. Soon thereafter, the feel-

ing of realism in apprehending the surrounding world, followed

by a sense of humor, would begin to compensate these people

for the experience they have survived, namely the disintegra-

tion of their human personalities caused by such therapy.

This disintegration of the prior world view structure will

create a temporary feeling of an unpleasant void. Therapists

well know the consequent responsibility of filling this void as

quickly as possible with material more credible and trustworthy

than the contents which were disabused, thus helping to avoid

primitive methods of personality reintegration. In practice, it is

best to minimize patient anxiety by making advance promises

that appropriately objectified material will be furnished in the

form of truthful data. This promise must then be kept, partially

anticipating the appearance of disintegrative states. I have suc-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

287

cessfully tested this technique on individual patients and would

advise its implementation on a mass scale as safe and effective.

For the people who have already developed natural psycho-

logical immunity, their increased resistance to the pathocracy’s

destructive influence upon their personalities, gained due to a

consciousness of pathocracy’s essence, may be of lesser sig-

nificance, but still not without value, since it leads to an ame-

liorated immunization quality at a less burdensome cost in

terms of nervous tension. However, for those hesitant people

who constitute the part of well-adjusted members of the new

middle class, immunizing activities furnished by an awareness

of the pathological nature of the phenomenon may tip their

attitudinal scale in the direction of decency.

The second key aspect of such operations that should be

considered is the influence of such enlightening behavior upon

the personalities of the pathocrats themselves.

In the course of individual psychotherapy, we tend to avoid

making patients aware of permanent aberrations, especially

when we have reason to believe that they are conditioned by

hereditary factors. Psychotherapists, however, are guided by

the consciousness of this condition’s existence in their decision

making. Only in the case of the results of slight brain-tissue

lesions do we decide to make the patient aware of this, so as to

help him elaborate a better tolerance of his difficulties and to

abrogate unnecessary fears. Regarding psychopathic individu-

als, we treat their deviations by means of tactful allusive lan-

guage, bearing in mind that they have a kind of self-

knowledge, and we proceed with the techniques of behavior

modification to correct their personalities, keeping the interests

of society in mind as well.

As far as operations on the macrosocial scale, it will of

course not be feasible to retain these latter cautious tactics of

activity. Traumatizing the pathocrats will be unavoidable to a

certain extent, and even intentional and morally justified in the

interests of peace on earth. Similarly, however, our attitude

must be defined by an acceptance of biological and psycho-

logical facts; renouncing any morally or emotionally charged

interpretation of their psychological deviations. In undertaking

such work, we must consider the good of society to be para-

288

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

mount; nevertheless, we must not abandon our psychotherapeu-

tic attitude and refrain from punishing those whose guilt we are

unable to evaluate. Should we forget this, we would increase

the risk of their uncontrolled reaction, which could bring about

a world catastrophe.

At the same time, we should not nourish exaggerated fears,

for example, that such public enlightenment activities will pro-

voke overly dramatic reactions among pathocrats, e.g. a wave

of cruelty or suicide. No! Those individuals described as essen-

tial psychopaths, in addition to many other carriers of related

hereditary anomalies, have since childhood elaborated a feeling

of being psychologically different from others. Revealing this

awareness to them is less traumatizing than, for instance, sug-

gesting psychological abnormality to a normal person. The ease

with which they repress uncomfortable material from their field

of consciousness will protect them from violent reactions.

What can they do if no ideology can be used as a mask any

more? Once the essence of the phenomenon has been scientifi-

cally unmasked, the psychological result is that they then feel

their historical role to have reached the end. Their work fur-

thermore takes on some historically creative meaning, if the

world of normal people offers them conciliation upon unprece-

dented advantageous conditions. This will cause overall demo-

bilization of the pathocracy, especially in those countries

where, practically speaking, the support of an ideology has

already been lost. This internal demobilization they fear so

much constitutes the second important goal.

A crucial condition and a complement of therapeutic work

must be forgiveness for the pathocrats as derived from under-

standing, both of them and of the signs of the times. This must

be effected by means of correspondingly amended law based

on comprehension of man and of the processes of the genesis

of evil operating within societies, which will counteract such

processes in a causative manner and supersede the former “pe-

nal” law. Forecasting the creation of such law must not be

treated merely as a psychotherapeutic promise; it must be sci-

entifically prepared and thereupon effected.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

289

Forgiveness

The contemporary evolution of legal concepts and democ-

ratic social morality is geared toward dismantling the old tradi-

tions of maintaining law and order by means of punitive re-

pression. Many countries have abandoned capital punishment,

disturbed by its genocidal abuses during the last world war.

Other punishments and the methods of their execution have

also been mitigated, taking psychological motivation and the

circumstances of the crime into account. The conscience of the

civilized nations protests against the Roman principle Dura lex

sed lex, and, at the same time, psychologists discern the possi-

bility that many presently unbalanced people can revert to

normal social life thanks to appropriate pedagogical measures;

practice confirms it only partially, however.

The reason is that mitigating the law has not been balanced

with the corresponding methods of stifling the processes of the

genesis of evil as based upon its comprehension . This pro-

vokes a crisis in the area of societies’ anti-crime protection and

makes it easier for pathocratic circles to utilize terrorism in

order to realize their expansionist goals. Under such conditions,

many people feel that returning to the tradition of legal severity

is the only way to protect society from an excess of evil. Others

believe that such traditional behavior morally cripples us and

opens the door to irrevocable abuses. They therefore subsume

others’ life and health to humanistic values.

In order to emerge from this crisis, we must galvanize all

our efforts in a search for a new road, one which would both be

more humanitarian and would effectively protect defenseless

individuals and societies. Such a possibility exists and can be

implemented, based on an objective comprehension of the

genesis of evil.

In factual essence, the unrealistic tradition of a relationship

between a person’s “crime”, which no other person is in the

position to evaluate objectively, and his “punishment”, which

is rarely effective in reforming him, should be relegated to

history. The science of the causes of evil should strengthen

society’s moral discipline and have a prophylactic effect. Often

merely making a person aware that he was under the influence

of a pathological individual breaks the circle of destructiveness.

290

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

An appropriate psychotherapy should therefore be permanently

included in any measures to counteract evil. Unfortunately, if

someone is shooting at us, we must shoot back even better. At

the same time, however, we should bring back the law of for-

giveness, that old law of wise sovereigns. After all, it has pro-

found moral and psychological foundations and is more effec-

tive than punishment in some situations.

The codices of penal law foresee that the perpetrator of a

penal act who, at the time of his transgression, was limited in

his ability to discern the meaning of the act or to direct his own

behavior as a result of mental illness or some other psychologi-

cal deficiency, receives a lesser sentence to the appropriate

degree. If we should therefore consider the responsibility of

pathocrats in the light of such regulations and in light of what

we have already said about the motivations for their behavior,

we must then considerably mitigate the scope of justice within

the frame of existing regulations.

The above-mentioned legal regulations, which are more

modern in Europe than in the U.S.A., are rather outdated eve-

rywhere and insufficiently congruent with bio-psychological

reality. They are a compromise between traditional legal think-

ing and medical humanism. Furthermore, the legislators were

in no position to perceive macrosocial pathological phenomena

that dominate individuals and significantly limit their ability to

discern the meaning of their own behavior. Susceptible indi-

viduals are sucked in surreptitiously, since they are unaware of

the pathological quality of such a phenomenon. The specific

properties of these phenomena cause the selection of attitudes

to be decisively determined by unconscious factors, followed

by pressure from pathocratic rulers, who are none too fastidi-

ous as to their methods, not even with regard to their own ad-

herents. How should the degree of penal mitigation then judge

them fairly?

For instance, if essential psychopathy is virtually 100% pre-

dictive concerning attraction to and inclusion in pathocratic

activity, should a judgment recognize similar mitigation of

punishment? This should also be applied to other hereditary

anomalies to a lesser extent, since they too have proved to be

primary factors in the selection of attitudes.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

291

We should not fault anyone for having inherited some psy-

chological anomalies from his parents any more than we fault

someone in the case of physical or physiological anomalies

such as Daltonism. We should also stop blaming people who

succumbed to traumas and diseases, leaving brain tissue dam-

age behind, or those who become the object of inhuman peda-

gogical methods.

In the name of their good and that of society, we should use

force with regard to such people, sometimes including forced

psychotherapy, supervision, prevention, and care. Any concept

of blame or guilt would only make it more difficult to behave

in a way which is not only humanitarian and purposeful, but

more effective as well.

In dealing with a macrosocial phenomenon, particularly one

whose life is longer than an individual’s active life, its perma-

nent influence forces even normal people to adapt to a certain

degree. Are we, whose instincts and intelligence are normal

and, according to the criteria of our moral world view, in the

position to evaluate the guilt of these others for actions they

performed within pathocracy’s collective madness? Judging

them in accordance with traditional legal regulations would

constitute reverting to the imposition of normal man’s force

upon psychopathic individuals, i.e. to the initial position which

engendered pathocracy to begin with. Is subjecting them to

vindictive justice worth prolonging the duration of pathocracy

for even a single year, let alone an unspecified time? Would

eliminating a certain number of psychopaths significantly di-

minish these anomalies’ burden upon society’s gene pool and

contribute toward a solution to this problem?

Unfortunately, the answer is no!

People with various psychological deviations have always

existed in every society on earth. Their way of life is always

some form of predation upon society’s economic creativity,

since their own creative capabilities are generally substandard.

Whoever plugs into this system of organized parasitism gradu-

ally loses whatever limited capacity for legal work he might

have had.

This phenomenon and its brutality are actually maintained

by the threat of legal retaliation or, even worse, of retribution

292

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

on the part of the enraged masses. Dreams of revenge distract a

society’s attention from understanding the bio-psychological

essence of the phenomenon and stimulate the moralizing inter-

pretations whose results we are already familiar with. This

would make it more difficult to find a solution to the present

dangerous situation and would similarly complicate any possi-

bilities of solving the problem of burdening society’s gene pool

with psychological anomalies with a view to future genera-

tions. These problems, however, both present and future, can

be solved if we approach them with an understanding of their

naturalistic essence and a comprehension of the nature of those

people who commit substantial evil.

Legal retribution would be a repetition of the Nuremberg er-

ror. That judgment upon war criminals could have been a

never-to-be repeated opportunity to show the world the entire

psychopathology of the Hitlerian system, with the person of the

“Fuehrer” at the head. That would have led to a faster and

deeper disabusement of the Nazi tradition in Germany. Such

conscious exposure of the operations of pathological factors on

a macrosocial scale would have reinforced the process of psy-

chological rehabilitation for Germans and the world as a whole

by means of the naturalistic categories applicable to that state

of affairs. That would also have constituted a healthy precedent

for illuminating and stifling other pathocracies’ operations.

What actually happened is that psychiatrists and psycholo-

gists succumbed all too easily to the pressures of their own

emotions and political factors, their judgments giving short

shrift to the actual pathological properties of both the majority

of the defendants and of Nazism as a whole. Several famous

individuals with psychopathic features or other deviations were

hanged or sentenced to prison terms. Many facts and data

which could have served the purposes adduced in this work

were hanged and imprisoned along with these individuals. We

can thus easily understand why pathocrats were so eager to

achieve this precise result. We are not allowed to repeat such

errors, since the results make it more difficult to comprehend

the essence of macrosocial pathological phenomena, and they

thereby limit the possibilities of stifling their internal causation.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

293

In today’s real world situation, there is only one scientifi-

cally and morally justified solution which could remedy our

current plight of nations and also furnish a proper beginning for

solving the problem of societies’ genetic burden with a view to

the future. That would be an appropriate law based upon the

best possible understanding of macrosocial pathological phe-

nomena and their causes, which would limit pathocrats’ re-

sponsibility to those cases alone (usually of a criminal sadistic

nature) in which it is hard to accept the inability to discern the

meaning of such an act. Nothing else could enable the societies

of normal people to take over power and liberate the internal

talents which could ensure a nation’s return to normal life.

Such an act of forgiveness is in fact justified by nature,

since it is derived from a recognition of the psychological cau-

sation governing a person while committing evil, both within

the scope of our cognition and outside the area we have been

able to understand. This scope accessible to scientific cognition

increases along with progress in general knowledge; in a

pathocracy, however, the image of the phenomenon is so

dominated by causality that there is not much room left for free

choice.

We shall in fact never be in the position to evaluate the

scope of free choice with which an individual person has been

endowed. In forgiving, we subordinate our minds to the laws of

nature, to a basic extent. When we withhold judgment regard-

ing the scope of the remainder unknown to us, we subject our

mind to the discipline of refraining from entering a domain

barely accessible to our mind.

Forgiveness thus leads our reason into a state of intellectual

discipline and order, thereby permitting us to discern life’s

realia and their causative links more clearly. This makes it

easier for us to control our instinct’s vindictive reflexes and

protect our minds from the tendency to impose moralizing

interpretations upon psychopathological phenomena. This is of

course to the advantage of both individuals and of societies.

Simultaneously, and in accordance with the precepts of

great religions, forgiveness helps us enjoy supernatural order

and thereby gain the right to self forgiveness. It makes us better

able to perceive the voice within saying “do this” or “don’t do

294

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

that”. This improves our capacity for proper decision making in

thorny situations when we are lacking some necessary data. In

this extremely difficult battle, we may not renounce this assis-

tance and privilege; they may be decisive in tipping the scales

toward victory.

Nations which have long had to endure pathocratic rule are

now close to accepting such a proposition as a result of their

practical knowledge of that other reality and the characteristic

evolution of their world view. However, their motivations are

dominated by practical data which are also derived from adap-

tation to life in that divergent reality. Religious motivations

also appear; comprehension and affirmation thereof mature

under such specific conditions. Their thought process and so-

cial ethics also evidence a feel for a certain teleological mean-

ing to phenomena, in the sense of a historical watershed.

Such an act of renunciation of judicial and emotional re-

venge with regard to people whose behavior was conditioned

by psychological causation, especially certain specific heredi-

tary factors, is justified by naturalism to a significant degree.

Therefore, such naturalistic and rational principles should per-

mit the definitive decisions to mature. The intellectual effort

involved in cutting the links to a natural comprehending of the

problems of evil and a confrontation thereof with moral pre-

cepts shall bear fruit in many products of human thought.

People who have lost their ability to adapt to sensible work

for hire will have to be guaranteed tolerable living conditions

and assistance in their efforts to readapt. The costs incurred by

society with regard thereto will probably be less than those

involved with any other solution. All this will require appropri-

ate organizational efforts based on this manner of understand-

ing such matters, which will be far removed from traditional

legal practice. The promises should be made to the pathocrats,

and then kept with the honesty worthy of a society of normal

people. Such an act and its execution should therefore be pre-

pared ahead of time from the moral, legal and organizational

points of view.

Just as the idea adduced herein finds a lively response

among people familiar with the above-described macrosocial

phenomenon from experience, it insults the vengeful feelings

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

295

of numerous political émigrés who retain the old experiential

methods regarding social and moral problems. We should thus

expect more opposition from this quarter, justified by moral

indignation. Persuasive efforts should therefore be made in that

direction.

It would also be advantageous if the solution to this prob-

lem could be prepared with a view to the contemporary heri-

tage of the bio-humanistic sciences, a heritage which aims at a

similar evolution of law even though it continues to hide in the

academic world, too immature for practical realization. The

value of scientific studies in this area tends to be underrated by

conservative-minded societies. The work may be facilitated by

means of using such information with a view toward the need

for rapid preparation or updating of the law.

Our civilization’s legislations arose first from the tradition

of Roman law, then from the rights of sovereigns ruling by

“divine right”, a system which predictably defended their posi-

tion, and though they were commanding the law of grace, they

proved almost completely soulless and vengeful within today’s

conception of codified regulations. Such a state of affairs abet-

ted rather than prevented the emergence of pathological sys-

tems of force.

This explains the actual need to effect an essential break-

through and formulation of new principles derived from an

understanding of man, including enemies and evildoers.

Having emerged from great suffering and a comprehension

of its causes, such legislation will be more modern and humani-

tarian as well as more effective in the area of protecting socie-

ties from the products of ponerogenesis. The great decision to

forgive similarly derives from the most credible precepts of

eternal moral teachings, something also in accordance with

contemporary evolution in societal thought. It expresses practi-

cal concerns as well as a naturalistic comprehension of the

genesis of evil. Only such an act of mercy, unprecedented in

history, can break the age-old chain of the ponerogenic cycles

and open the door both to new solutions for perennial problems

and to a new legislative method based on an understanding of

the causes of evil.

296

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

Such a difficult decisions therefore appear in keeping with

the signs of the times. The author believes that this precise kind

of breakthrough in the methodology of thought and action is

within the Divine Plan for this generation.

Ideologies

Just as a psychiatrist is mainly interested in disease, paying

less attention to the patient’s delusional system deforming

whatever individual reality he has, the object of global therapy

should be the world’s diseases. The deformed ideological sys-

tems which grew from historical conditions and a given civili-

zation’s weaknesses should be understood insofar as they are a

disguise, operational instrument, or Trojan horse for

pathocratic infection.

Societal consciousness should first separate these two het-

erogeneous layers of the phenomenon by means of analysis and

scientific evaluation effected upon them. Such a correct and

selective understanding should become part and parcel of all

nations’ consciousness in some appropriately accessible form.

This would correspondingly reinforce their capacity for inde-

pendent orientation within today’s complicated reality by

means of discriminating such phenomena in keeping with its

nature. This will bring about a correction in moral and world

view attitudes. Concentrating our efforts upon the pathological

phenomenon shall then produce proper understanding and suf-

ficiently complete results.

The absence of this basic discrimination in political opera-

tions is an error leading to wasted effort. We may not agree

with ideologies, since all nineteenth-century political ideolo-

gies oversimplified social reality to the point of crippling it,

even in their original form, not to mention their pathologically

deformed versions. The foreground should nevertheless be

occupied by an identification of their role within the macroso-

cial phenomenon; analysis, criticism, and even, more particu-

larly, combating them can be placed in the background. Any

discussions regarding directions needed to change social struc-

tures may be held concurrently as long as they take this basic

separation of phenomena into account. Thus corrected, social

consciousness can effect a solution to these problems more

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

297

easily, and social groups which are intransigent today will be-

come more amenable to compromise.

Once a mentally ill person has been successfully cured of

his illness, we often try to restore the former patient to the

world of his more real convictions. The psychotherapist then

searches the delusionally caricaturized world for the primeval

and always more sensible contents, thereupon building a bridge

right over the period of madness to a now healthy reality. Such

an operation of course requires the necessary skills in the do-

main of psychopathology, since every disease has its own style

of deforming the patient’s original world of experiences and

convictions. The deformed ideological system created by

pathocracy should be subjected to analogous analysis, fishing

out the primeval and certainly more sensible values. This must

utilize knowledge of the specific style whereby a pathocracy

caricaturizes the ideology of a movement upon which it feeds

parasitically.

This great disease of Pathocracy accommodates various so-

cial ideologies to its own properties and the pathocrats’ inten-

tions, thereby depriving them of any possibility of natural de-

velopment and maturation in the light of man’s healthy com-

mon sense and scientific reflection. This process also trans-

forms these ideologies into destructive factors, preventing them

from participating in the constructive evolution of social struc-

tures and condemning their adherents to frustration. Along with

its degenerate growth, such an ideology is rejected by all those

social groups governed by healthy common sense. The activi-

ties of such an ideology thus induce nations to stick to their old

tried-and-true basics in terms of structural forms, providing

hard-line conservatives with the best weapon possible. This

causes stagnation of the evolutionary processes, which is con-

trary to the overall laws of social life, and brings about a po-

larization of attitudes among various social groups, resulting in

revolutionary moods. The operations of the pathologically al-

tered ideology thus facilitate the pathocracy’s penetration and

expansion.

Only by means of retrospective psychological analysis upon

the ideology, reverting to the time which preceded ponerogenic

infection, and taking into account the pathological quality and

298

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

the causes for its deformation, can the original creative values

be discovered and bridges built right over the time frame of

morbid phenomena.

Such skillful unhusking of the original ideology, including

some reasonable elements which emerged after the ponero-

genic infection appeared, may be enriched by values elaborated

in the meantime and become capable of further creative evolu-

tion. It will thus be in the position to activate transformations in

accordance with the evolutionary nature of social structures,

which will in turn render these societies more resistant to pene-

tration by pathocratic influences.

Such analysis presents us with problems which must be

skillfully overcome, namely finding the proper semantic desig-

nates. Thanks to characteristic creativity in this area, pathoc-

racy produces a mass of suggestive names prepared in such a

way as to divert attention from a phenomenon’s essential quali-

ties. Whoever has been ensnared in this semantic trap even

once loses not only the capacity for objective analysis of that

type of phenomenon; he also partially loses his ability to use

his common sense. Producing such effects within human minds

is the specific purpose of this patho-semantics; one must first

protect one’s own person against them and then proceed to

protect social consciousness.

The only names we can accept are those with a historical

tradition contemporary to the facts and reaching back to pre-

infection times. For instance, if we call pre-Marxist socialism

“Utopian socialism”, it will be difficult for us to understand

that it was much more realistic and socially creative than the

later movements already laced with pathological material.

However, such caution does not suffice when we are deal-

ing with phenomena which cannot be measured within the

natural structure of concepts because they were produced by a

macrosocial pathological process. We must thus again under-

score that the light of natural healthy common sense is insuffi-

cient for effecting such retrospective refinement of ideological

values later deformed by such a process. Psychological objec-

tivity, adequate knowledge in the area of psychopathology, and

the data contained in the prior chapters of this book are indis-

pensable for this purpose.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

299

Thus equipped, we also become qualified to create indis-

pensable new names which would elucidate the actual proper-

ties of phenomena, providing we pay sufficient attention to

precepts of semantics with all the probity and economy, as

would demand William of Ockham. After all, these names will

spread throughout the earth and help many people correct their

world view and social attitude. Such activity, albeit legalistic,

actually aims at depriving pathocratic circles of their name

controlling monopoly; their predicable protests will merely

prove that we are on the right track.

Ideology thus regenerated regains the natural life and evolu-

tionary capacity which pathologization has stifled. At the same

time, however, it loses its ability to fulfill imposed functions

such as feeding a pathocracy and cloaking it from both healthy

common sense criticism and something even more dangerous,

namely a feel for psychological reality and its humorous as-

pects.

Condemning an ideology because of its errors, whether con-

tained from the outset or absorbed later, will never deprive it of

this imputed function, especially not in the minds of people

who failed to condemn it for similar reasons. If we further at-

tempt to analyze such a condemned ideology, we will never

achieve the effect which has a curative influence upon the hu-

man personality; we will simply miss the truly important fac-

tors and be unable to fill a certain space with contents. Our

thoughts will then be forced to evade whatever blocks their

freedom, thereby erring among ostensible truths. Once some-

thing succumbs to psychopathological factors, it cannot be

understood unless the proper categories are utilized.

Immunization

Many infectious diseases give an organism a natural immu-

nity for a period between a few years and many. Medicine imi-

tates this biological mechanism by introducing vaccines which

enable an organism to become immune without passing

through the disease. More and more frequently, psychothera-

pists attempt to immunize a patient’s psyche to various trauma-

tizing factors which are too difficult to eliminate from his life.

In practice, we use this most often with people subjected to the

300

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

destructive influence of characteropathic individuals. Immuniz-

ing someone against the destructive effects of psychopathic

personalities is somewhat more difficult; however, it represents

a closer analogy to the task which should be performed with

regard to nations succumbing to the influence of pathocratic

psychological diversion.

Societies governed by a pathocratic system for many years

develop the above-described natural immunization, along with

the characteristic detachment from the phenomenon and sar-

donic humor. In combination with the growth of practical

knowledge, this state should be taken into account every time

we wish to evaluate a given country’s political situation. We

should also underscore that this immunity refers to the patho-

logical phenomenon per se, not its ideology, which explains

why it is also effective against any other pathocracy, no matter

the ideological mask. The psychological experience gained

permits the same phenomenon to be recognized according to its

actual properties; the ideology is treated in accordance with its

true role.

Psychotherapy properly run upon an individual who suc-

cumbed to the destructive influence of the life conditions under

pathocratic rule, always brings about a significant improvement

in psychological immunization. In making a patient conscious

of the pathological qualities of such influences, we facilitate his

development of that critical detachment and spiritual serenity

which natural immunization could not have produced. We thus

do not merely imitate nature; we actually achieve a better-than-

natural quality of immunity, which is more effective in protect-

ing a patient from neurotic tensions and reinforcing his practi-

cal everyday resourcefulness. An awareness of the biological

essence of the phenomenon provides them with a preponder-

ance both over the phenomenon and those people who lack

such awareness.

This type of psychological immunity also proves more per-

manent. If natural immunity lasts the life of the generation

wherein it was produced, scientifically-based immunity can be

transmitted further. Similarly, natural immunity plus the practi-

cal knowledge upon which it is based may be very difficult to

transmit to nations which have not had such immediate experi-

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

301

ence, but the kind which is based on generally accessible scien-

tific data can be transmitted to other nations without superhu-

man efforts.

We are faced with two related goals. In countries affected

by the above-discussed phenomenon, we should attempt to

transform the existing natural immunity into that better-quality

immunity, thus making it possible to increase operative ease

while lowering psychological tensions. With regard to those

individuals and societies which indicate an obvious immunode-

ficiency and are threatened by pathocratic expansion, we

should facilitate the development of artificial immunity.

This immunity is generated mainly as a natural result of

understanding the real contents of the macrosocial phenome-

non.

This awareness causes a stormy experiential period not be-

reft of protest, but this substitute disease process is short-lived.

Stripping the naturalistic reality heretofore protected by an

ideological mask is an effective and necessary assistance for

individuals and societies. Within a short period of time, this

begins to protect them from the ponerogenic activities of patho-

logical factors mobilized within the pathocracy’s monolithic

front. Appropriate indications of the practical means for pro-

tecting one’s own mental hygiene will facilitate and accelerate

the creation of such valuable psychological immunity in a

manner similar to the results of a vaccine activity.

Such individual and collective psychological immunity,

based on a naturalistically objectified understanding of this

other reality, is colored by a feeling of proper knowledge,

which thus creates a new human network; achieving such im-

munity appears a necessary precondition for success regarding

any efforts and actions of a political nature which would aim at

having governments taken over by a society of normal people.

Without such consciousness and immunization, it will always

be difficult to achieve cooperation between free countries and

nations suffering under pathocratic rule. No language of com-

mon communication can be guaranteed by any political doc-

trines based on the natural imagination of people lacking both

the practical experience and a naturalistic understanding of the

phenomenon.

302

THERAPY OF THE WORLD

~~~

The most modern and expensive weapons threatening hu-

manity with global catastrophe are presently obsolete the very

day they are produced.

Why?

They are the weapons of a war which must never take place,

and the nations of the world pray that it never does.

The history of mankind has been a history of wars, which

makes it lack eternal meaning in our eyes. A new great war

would represent the triumph of madness over the nations’ will

to live.

International reason must therefore prevail, reinforced by

the newly discovered moral values and naturalistic science

concerning the causes and genesis of evil.

The “new weapon” suggested herein kills no one; it is nev-

ertheless capable of stifling the process of the genesis of evil

within a person and activating his own curative powers. If so-

cieties are furnished an understanding of the pathological na-

ture of evil, they will be able to effect concerted action based

on moral and naturalistic criteria.

This new method of solving eternal problems will be the

most humanitarian weapon ever used in human history, as well

as the only one which can be used safely and effectively. We

may also hope that using such a weapon will help end centuries

of warfare among nations.

CHAPTER X

A VISION OF THE FUTURE

If it is to bear ripe fruit, every human activity must take root

in the soil of two time frames: past and future. The past pro-

vides us knowledge and experience which teach us to solve

problems and warn us when we are about to commit errors

reminiscent of past mistakes. A realistic apperception of the

past and a sometimes painful understanding of its errors and

evils thus become necessary preconditions for building a hap-

pier future.

A similarly realistic vision of the future, complemented by

well thought out detailed data, endows our contemporary ac-

tivities with a direction and renders their goals more concrete.

Mental effort aimed at forming such a vision enables us to

overcome psychological barriers to free reason and imagina-

tion, barriers caused by egotism and survival of habits from the

past. People fixated upon the past gradually lose contact with

the present and are thus incapable of doing much good for the

future. Let us therefore direct our minds toward the future,

beyond the ostensibly insuperable realities of present age.

There are many advantages to be gained from constructively

planning the future, including the more distant time perspec-

tive, if we can foresee its shape and facilitate pinpointed solu-

tions. This requires that we properly analyze reality and make

correct predictions, i.e. discipline of thought so as to exclude

any subconscious data manipulation and any excessive influ-

ence from our emotions and preferences. Elaborating such an

304

A VISION OF THE FUTURE

original vision so as to make it a reified blueprint for a new

reality is the best way to educate human minds for other simi-

larly difficult tasks in the concrete future.

This would also permit timely elimination of many differ-

ences of opinion which could later lead to violent conflicts;

these sometimes result from an insufficiently realistic apper-

ception of the present state of affairs, various pipe-dream atti-

tudes, or propaganda activities. If it is logically developed and

avoids collisions with an adequately objective understanding of

phenomena which have already been discussed in part, such a

constructive vision can come true in future reality.

Such planning should be reminiscent of a well-organized

technical project, wherein the designers’ work is preceded by

an examination of conditions and possibilities. Executing the

work also requires time-frame planning in accordance with the

appropriate technical data and the human safety factor. We

know from experience that increasing the scope and accuracy

of design activities makes their execution and utility more prof-

itable. Similarly, the more modern and inventive constructions

generally prove more effective than tradition-bound ones.

The design and construction of a new social system should

also be based upon proper distinctions of reality and should

receive appropriate elaboration in many details in order to

prove effective in execution and action. This will require aban-

doning some traditional customs of political life which allowed

human emotions and egoism to play too great a role. Creative

reasoning has become the sole and necessary solution, since it

determines real data and finds novel solutions without losing

the ability to act under real-life conditions.

The absence of such prior constructive effort would lead

both to knowledge gaps about the reality to be operated in and

to a shortage of people with the crucial preparation needed for

creating new systems. Particularly for a nation now affected by

pathocracy, when regaining the right to decide one’s own fate,

would be improvisation which is expensive and dangerous.

Violent disputes among the adherents of various structural

concepts which may often be unrealistic, immature, or outdated

because they have lost their historical significance in the mean-

time, may even cause a civil war.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

305

Wherever old social systems created by historical processes

have been almost totally destroyed by the introduction of state

capitalism and the development of pathocracy, that nation’s

social and psychological structure has been obliterated. The

replacement is a pathological structure reaching into every

corner of a country, causing all areas of life to degenerate and

become unproductive. Under such conditions, it proves unfea-

sible to reconstruct a social system based on outdated traditions

and the unrealistic expectations that such a structure does exist.

What is needed is a design of action which will first permit the

fastest possible reconstruction of this basic socio-psychological

structure and then allow it to participate in social life’s

autonomization process.

The past has furnished us virtually no pattern for this indis-

pensable activity, which can thus be based only upon the more

general kind of data described at the beginning of this work.

We are therefore immediately faced with the need to rely upon

modern science. At least one generation’s worth of time has

also been lost, and with it the evolution which should have

creatively transformed the old structural forms. We should thus

be guided by imaginings of what should have happened if a

given society had had the right to free development during this

time, rather than by data from the past, presently outdated,

albeit historically real.

In the meantime, many divergent ways of thinking have

taken root in those countries. Private capitalism’s world of

social institutions has become distant and hard to understand.

There is no longer anybody left who could be a capitalist or act

independently within such a system. Democracy has become an

imperfectly comprehended slogan for communicating within

the society of normal people. The workers cannot imagine the

reprivatization of great industrial plants and oppose any efforts

in that direction. They believe that rendering the country inde-

pendent would bring them participation in both management

and profits. Those societies have accepted some social institu-

tions, such as a public health service and free education

through university level. They want the operation of such insti-

tutions reformed by subordinating them to healthy common

sense and appropriate scientific criteria as well as tried –and

306

A VISION OF THE FUTURE

true elements of valid traditions. What should be restored is the

general laws of nature which should govern societies; the struc-

tural forms should be reconstructed in a more modern manner,

which will facilitate their acceptance.

Some transformations already made are historically irre-

versible. Regaining the right to shape one’s own future would

thus create a dangerous and even tragic “system void”. A pre-

monition of such a critical situation already worries people in

those countries, stifling their will to act; this situation should be

prevented immediately. The only way is well-organized effort

in analytical and constructive thought directed toward a socie-

tal system with highly modern economic and political founda-

tions.

Nations suffering under pathocratic governments would also

participate in such a constructive effort, which would represent

excellent input to the above-mentioned general task of treating

our sick world. Undeterred in our hope that the time will soon

come when such nations will revert to normal human systems,

we should build a social system with a view to what will hap-

pen after pathocracy.

This social system will be different from and better than

anything which existed earlier. A realistic vision of a better

future and participation in creating it will heal battered human

souls and bring order into thought processes. This constructive

work trains people to govern themselves under such different

conditions and knocks the weapon out of the hands of anyone

who serves evil, increasing the latter’s feeling of frustration

and an awareness that his pathological work is nearing an end.

A careful reading of this book may cause us to discern the

outlines of a creative vision of such a future societal system so

sorely needed by nations suffering under pathocratic rule; if so,

this represents a reward for the author’s effort rather than re-

sults of pure chance. Just such a vision accompanied me

throughout the period of my work on this book (although the

latter nowhere indicates a name nor any more precise details

for it), rendering assistance and proving a useful support in the

future. In some way, it is thus present on the pages and be-

tween the lines of this work.

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

307

Such a social system of the future would have to guarantee

its citizens wide scope personal freedom and an open door to

utilizing their creative possibilities in both individual and col-

lective efforts. At the same time, however, it must not indicate

the well known weaknesses manifested by a democracy in its

domestic and foreign policy. Not only should individuals’ per-

sonal interest and the common good be appropriately balanced

in such a system; they should be woven right into the overall

picture of social life at the level where an understanding of its

laws causes any discrepancy between them to disappear. The

opinion of the wide mass of the citizenry, dictated primarily by

the voices of basic intelligence and dependent upon the natural

world view, should be balanced by the skills of people who

utilize an objective cognition of reality and possess the appro-

priate training in their special areas. Appropriate and well

thought out system solutions should be used for this purpose.

The foundations for practical solutions within such an im-

proved system would contain criteria such as creating the right

conditions for enriched development of human personalities

including the psychological world view, whose societal role

has already been adduced. Individual socio-professional adap-

tation, the creation of an interpersonal network, and a healthy

active socio-psychological structure should be facilitated to the

maximum possible extent.

Structural, legal, and economic solutions should be consid-

ered in such a way that fulfilling these criteria would also open

the door for an individual’s optimal self-realization within so-

cial life, which would simultaneously be for the good of the

community. Other traditional criteria such as the dynamics of

economic development will thereupon prove secondary to these

more general values. The result of this would be the nation’s

economic development, political skill, and creative role in the

international sphere.

The priorities in terms of value criteria would thus shift

consistently in the direction of psychological, social, and moral

data. This is in keeping with the spirit of the times, but actual

execution thereof demands imaginative effort and constructive

thought in order to achieve the above-mentioned practical

308

A VISION OF THE FUTURE

goals. After all, everything begins and ends within the human

psyche.

Such a system would have to be evolutionary by nature, as

it would be based upon an acceptance of evolution as a law of

nature. Natural evolutionary factors would play an important

role therein, such as the course of cognition continually proc-

essing from more primitive and easily accessible data to more

actual, intrinsic, and subtle matters. The principle of evolution

would have to be imprinted firmly enough upon the basic phi-

losophical foundations of such a system so as to protect it con-

sistently from future revolution.

Such a social system would by nature be more resistant to

the danger of having macrosocial pathological phenomena

develop within. Its foundations would be an improved devel-

opment of the psychological world view and society’s links

structure coupled with a scientific and social consciousness of

the essence of such phenomena. This should furnish the foun-

dation for mature methods of education. Such a system should

also have built-in permanent institutions which were heretofore

unknown and whose task will be preventing the development

of ponerogenic processes within society, particularly among

governing authorities.

A “Council of Wise Men” would be an institution com-

posed of several people with extremely high general, medical,

and psychological qualifications; it would have the right to

examine the physical and psychological health of candidates

before the latter are elected to the highest government posi-

tions. A negative council opinion should be hard to challenge.

That same council would serve the head of state, the legislative

authorities, and the executives regarding counsel in matters

entering its scope of scientific competence. It would also ad-

dress the public in important matters of biological and psycho-

logical life, indicating essential moral aspects. Such a council’s

duties would also include maintaining contact and discussions

with the religious authorities in such matters.

The security system for persons with various psychological

deviations would be in charge of making their life easier while

skillfully limiting their participation in the processes of the

genesis of evil. After all, such persons are not impervious to

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

309

persuasion provided it is based upon proper knowledge of the

matter. Such an approach would also help progressively dimin-

ish societies’ gene pool burdens of hereditary aberrations. The

Council of Wise Men would furnish the scientific supervision

for such activities.

The legal system would be subjected to wide ranging trans-

formations in virtually every area, progressing from formulae

whose establishment was based on a society’s natural world

view and ancient tradition to legal solutions based upon an

objective apperception of reality, particularly the psychological

one. As a result, law studies would have to undergo true mod-

ernization, since the law would become a scientific discipline

sharing the same epistemological principles as all the other

sciences.

What is now called “penal” law would be superseded by

another kind of law with a completely modernized foundation

based on an understanding of the genesis of evil and of the

personalities of people who commit evil. Such law would be

significantly more humanitarian while furnishing individuals

and societies more effective protection from undeserved abuse.

Of course, the operational measures would be much more

complex and more dependent upon a better understanding of

causation than could ever possibly be the case in a punitive

system. A trend toward transformations in this direction is evi-

dent in the legislation of civilized nations. The social system

proposed herein would have to break through traditions in this

area in a more effective way.

No government whose system is based on an understanding

of the laws of nature, whether concerning physical and biologi-

cal phenomena or the nature of man, can lay a claim to sover-

eignty in the meaning we have inherited from the nineteenth

century and subsequent nationalistic or totalitarian systems. We

share the same air and water throughout our planet. Common

cultural values and basic moral criteria are becoming wide

spread. The world is interlinked in transportation, communica-

tion, and trade and has become Our Planet. Under such condi-

tions, interdependence and cooperation with other nations and

supranational institutions, as well as moral responsibility for

overall fate, become a law of nature. The national organism

310

A VISION OF THE FUTURE

becomes autonomous but not independent. This must be regu-

lated by means of the appropriate treaties and incorporated into

national constitutions.

A system thus envisaged would be superior to all its prede-

cessors, being based upon an understanding of the laws of na-

ture operating within individuals and societies, with objective

knowledge progressively superceding opinions based upon

natural responses to phenomena. We should call it a

“LOGOCRACY”.

Due to their properties and conformity to the laws of nature

and evolution, logocratic systems could guarantee social and

international order on a long-term basis. In keeping with their

nature, they would then become transformed into more perfect

forms, a vague and faraway vision of which may beckon to us

in the present.

The author has survived many dangerous situations and be-

come disappointed with many people and institutions. How-

ever, the Great Providence has never disappointed him under

the most difficult circumstances. This condition suffices to

permit him to promise that elaborating a more detailed draft for

such a necessary better system will also be possible.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Adler, Alfred: Über den nervösen Charakter ( The Neurotic

Character) 1912

Allilueva, Svetlana : Twenty Letters To A Friend, Harper & Row,

London 1967

Assagiolli, Roberto: Dynamic Psychology and Psychosynthesis, New

York Research Foundation 1959

Becker, Ernest: The Structure of Evil, The Free Press, New York1968

Bilikiewicz, Adam (ed.): Psychiatria, PZWL, Warszawa 1998

Buhler, Charlotte Malachowski: The Course of Human Life: A Study

of Goals in the Humanistic Perspective, Springer Pub Co (June 1,

1968)

Campbell, Philip: “The nature of belief systems in mass publics.” in

David Apter, ed., Ideology and Discontent, Free Press, New York,

1964

Chirot, Daniel: Modern Tyrants, Princeton University Press, Prince-

ton, New Jersey 1994

Cleckley, Hervey: The Mask of Sanity, (4th Edition) Mosby, St. Louis

1983

Dabrowski, Kazimierz: Psychoneurosis is Not an Illness, Gryf Publi-

cations Ltd;, London 1972

DeMause, Lloyd: Foundations of Psychohistory, Creative Roots,

New York, 1982

Doren, Denis M.: Understanding and Treating the Psychopath, J.

Wiley & Sons, New York 1987

Drewa, Gerard (ed.): Podstawy genetyki, Volumed, Wroclaw 1995

Edwards, Paul, Editor-in-Chief: Encyclopedia of Philosophy, Mac-

Millan Publishing Co., Inc & Free Press, New York 1972

Ehrlich, S. K. and R.P. Keogh: “The psychopath in a mental institu-

tion” – Archiv neurol. Psychiatr. vol 76 pp. 286 – 95. 1956

Ferrari, Giuseppe: Teoria dei Periodi Politici. 1872

Freud, Sigmund: Basic Writings, Modern Library, New York 1955

312

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Freud, Sigmund: Studies in Hysteria, Basic Books, New York 1957

Goertzel, Ted: “Generational Conflict and Social Change”, Youth and

Society. 1972

Goleman, Daniel: Inteligencja emocjonolna, Media Rodzina of

Posna$ 1997

Gordon, Thomas and Max Morgan-Witts: Pontif, New American

Library, New York 1964

Granovetter, Mark: “Threshold Models of Collective Behavior”,

American Journal of Sociology 83: 1420-1443. 1978

Gray, K.C. and H.C. Hutchinson: “The psychopathic personality – a

survey of Canadian psychiatrists’ opinions”. Canadian Psychiat-

ric Association. J. vol. 9, pp. 452-61. 1964

Greenfield, Susan (ed.): The Human Mind Explained: An Owner's

Guide to the Mysteries of the Mind, Holt, New York 1996

Hartau, Frederyk: Wilhelm II, Median s.c., Lublin 1992

Herling-Grudzinski, Gustav: A World Apart, Penguin, New York

1996

Hoess, Rudolf: Commandant of Auschwitz: The Autobiography of

Rudolph Hoess, World Pub. Co, 1960.

Horney, Karen: Neurosis and Human Growth, W. W. Norton &

Company, New York 1950

Horney, Karen: The Neurotic Personality of Our Time, W. W. Norton

& Company, New York 1959

Irving, David: Secret Diaries of Hitler's Doctor, Grafton Books,

London 1991

Jenkins, Richard: Social Identity, Routledge, 1996

Jenkins, Richard: “The psychopathic or antisocial personality, J. nerv.

Ment”. Disease, vol 131, pp318-32. 1960

Keller, Morton: “Reflections on Politics and Generations in Amer-

ica.” Pp. 123-135 in Stephen Graubard, ed., Generations, Norton,

New York, 1979

K%pi$ski, Antoni: Psychopatie, PZWL, Warszawa 1977

Koestler, Arthur: Darkness at Noon, Bantam Books, 1966.

Klinberg, Frank: “The historical alternation of moods in American

foreign policy”. World Politics 4: 239-273. 1952

Konorski, Jerzy: Integracyjna dzia#alno"$ mósgu, PWN, Warszawa

1969

Kraupl Taylor, Frederick: Psychopathy: Its Causes and Symptoms,

The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, 1979

Kretshmer, E.: Physique and Character, Routledge, reprinted 1999

Klinberg, Frank: “The historical alternation of moods in American

foreign policy”. World Politics 4: 239-273. 1952

!obaczewski, Andrew M.: Political Ponerology, New York 1984

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

313

!obaczewski, Andzrej: Ponerologia polityczna – Nauka o naturze z#a

w zastosowaniu do zagadnie% politycznych, Rzeszów 1997

!obaczewski, Andzrej: Chirurgia s#owa, Mitel, Rzeszów 1997

!uria, Aleksander R.: Zaburzenia wy&szych czynno"ci korowych na

skutek ogniskowych uszkodze% mósgu, PWN, Warszawa 1967

Maher, Brendan, selected by: Contemporary Abnormal Psychology,

Penguin Books Ltd. Harmondsworth, Middlesex, England 1974

Mannheim, Karl: Essays on the Sociology of Knowledge, Routledge

and Kegan Paul, London. 1952

Marias, Julian: Generations: A Historical Method. University of

Alabama Press, translation, 1970

McCord, W. and J.: Psychopathy and Delinquency, Grune & Stratton,

1956

Merz, Ferdinand und I. Stelz: Einführung in die Erbpsychologie,

Verlag W. Kohlhammer, Stuttgard und Berlin 1977

Miller, Alice: Am Anfang war Erziehung, Surkamp Verlag, Frankfurt

am Main 1951

Neumayr, Anton: Dictators in the Mirror of Medicine: Napoleon,

Hitler, Stalin, Trans. by David J. Parent. Bloomington, Ill.: Medi-

Ed Press 1995

Poradowski, Ks. Michal: Dziedzictwo rewolucji francukiej, Civitas,

Warszawa 1992

Psychotherapy – Journal of the Division of Psychotherapy of the

American Psychological Association

Russell, E.S.: Form and Function: A Contribution to the History of

Animal Morphology, Univ of Chicago Press, 1982

Schlesinger, Arthur M., Sr: Paths to the Present, MacMillan, New

York, 1949

Simonton, Dean Keith.: “Does Sorokin's data support his theory?: A

study of generational fluctuations in philosophical beliefs.” Jour-

nal for the Scientific Study of Religion 15: 187-198. 1976

Sommerhoff, G., Analytical biology, Oxford University Press, 1950

Sorokin, Pitirim: Social and Cultural Dynamics, Volume Four: Basic

Problems, Principles and Methods, American Book Company,

New York. 1941

Sorokin, Pitirim: Social and Cultural Dynamics, One Volume Revi-

sion. Boston: Porter Sargent. 1957

Stycze$, Tadeusz SDS: Wprowadzenie do etyki, Towarzystwo Nauk-

owe KUL, Lublin 1995

Stout, Martha: The Sociopath Next Door, Broadway, 2005

Taylor, Frederick K.: Psychopathology in Causes and Symptoms, The

Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore and London, 1979

314

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Ziskind E, Somerfield-Ziskind E. Peter Jacob FROSTIG, 1896-1959.

Am J Psychiatry. 1960 Nov;117:479-80

About the Author

Andrew M. !obaczewski was born in 1921 and grew up on

a rural estate in the beautiful piedmountain vicinity of Poland.

Under the Nazi occupation he worked on the farm, was an

apiarist, and then a soldier of the Home Army, an underground

Polish resistance organisation. After the Soviet invasion of

Poland, the family estate was confiscated and the owners

driven out from their old house.

Working hard for living, he studied psychology at Yagiello-

nian University in Cracow. The conditons under “Communist”

rule turned his attention to the matters of psychopathology,

especially to the role of psychopathic persons in such a gov-

ernmental system. He was not the first such researcher who

followed a similar path. The work was begun by a secret un-

derstanding of scientists of the older generation, which was

destroyed shortly after by the Red security authorities.

!obaczewski then later became the one who succeeded in ac-

complishing the work and putting it down on paper.

Working in a mental hospital, than a general hospital, and in

open mental health service, the author improved his skills in

clinical diagnosis and psychotherapy. Finally, when suspected

by the political authorities of knowing too much in the matter

of the pathological nature of the system, he was forced to emi-

grate in 1977. In the USA he became engulfed by the activity

of the long paws of the Red diversion. Instead of his very hard

times, the work presented now was written in New York in

1984. All attempts to publish this book at this time failed.

With broken health, he returned in 1990 to Poland and went

under the care of doctors, his old friends. His condition im-

proved gradually, and he became able to work and to publish

another of his works in matters of psychotherapy and socio-

psychology. He is still living in his homeland.

INDEX

Acquired deviations, 105

Braithwaite, R.B., 87

Adler’s Rhombus, 184

Brzezicki, Eug., 135

Alexander II, 266

Bulgaria, 225

Alliluieva, Svetlana, 117

Bush, George W., 8, 24, 109,

America, 91. See United

207

States of America. See

Caesar, Julius, 105

United States of America

Canup, Robert, 20

Anti-Smoking Campaign, 223

Capitalism, 239, 305

Asperger’s Syndrome, 133

Communist societies as

Association, 157, 158, 161,

state capitalist, 239

164, 168, 169, 170, 172,

Catholic Church, 8, 27, 58,

312, 313

134

Asthenic psychopathy, 133,

Censorship, 49, 177, 248

134, 223

Characteropathy, 106, 111,

Auschwitz, 38, 312

113, 116, 117, 120, 137,

Bad Times, 88

148, 154, 155, 188, 189,

Psychological Value of, 85,

214

87

and religious groups, 272

Behaviorists, 49

And social movements, 189

Beria, L., 116

Effects on Normal People,

Biological factors, 55, 186,

107, 109

228

Elimination of from social

Blocking out, 152

movements, 192

Bonaparte, Napoleon, 105

Relation to schizoids in

Borman, Martin, 163

ponerogenesis, 188

Brain Cortex Damage, 114

Role in Ponerogenesis, 106

Brain Tissue Lesions, 89, 100,

Characteropathy, 110

105, 106, 111, 113, 118,

Charcot, Jean-Martin, 90, 176

132, 227, 291

Cheney, Dick, 191

Acquired deviations and,

Christianity, 45, 46, 47, 167

105

and Greek Heritage, 47

318

INDEX

and Roman Influence, 48

112, 131, 145, 146, 147,

Appropriates Roman forms,

148, 155, 177, 181, 185,

47

189, 196, 231, 233, 234,

Appropriates Roman forms,

242, 251, 269, 270, 272,

48

303

Church, 276

Ehrlich, S.K., 122, 311

Circumcision, 150

Eliade, Mircea, 8

Cleckley, 15

Emotion, 53, 63, 81, 89, 91

Cleckley, Hervey, 17, 22,

Emotional life, 251

122, 128, 132, 148, 311

Engels, Frederick, 186

Cognition, 47, 48, 49, 51, 58,

Essential Pathocracy

121, 267, 269, 293, 307,

Former opponents integrate

308

into new regime, 227

and acceptance of religious

Essential Psychopathy, 29, 43,

truths, 268

125, 132, 133, 136, 137,

Communism, 25, 37, 112,

138, 140, 162, 189, 193,

116, 160, 166, 239, 240,

195, 219, 225, 230, 288,

263, 315

290

Communist Manifesto, 166

And social movements,

Comte, Auguste, 57

190, 191

law of three phases, 57

Desire to change world,

Conscience, 133, 143, 151,

190

164, 181, 199, 289

Conscious of their

in new pathocratic

difference, 204

bourgeoisie, 225

Inspirational role in social

Religion as drug on, 271

movements, 193

Conversive thinking, 63, 91,

Involved in pathocratic

151, 152, 153, 177, 211,

activity, 194

264, 280

Percentage of population,

Dabrowski, Kasimir, 311

223

Dabrowski, Kazimierz, 126,

Role in pathocracy, 198

146

special knowledge of, 35

Dabrowski, Kazimierz, 126

Europe, 8, 90, 91, 92, 93, 108,

Daltonists, 121

115, 135, 136, 175, 177,

Analogy to pathocratic

214, 278, 290

system, 230

Evil, 30, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43,

Darkness at Noon, 38

48, 55, 62, 69, 70, 78, 86,

Doubletalk, 165, 205, 242

87, 88, 93, 95, 96, 97, 98,

and religion, 271

99, 101, 102, 103, 104,

Drury, Shadia, 192

106, 109, 116, 117, 120,

Dzerzhinsky, Felix, 134, 135

122, 126, 129, 132, 134,

Egotism, 41, 43, 54, 55, 56,

135, 141, 142, 143, 144,

82, 88, 89, 91, 95, 106,

148, 149, 150, 157, 164,

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

319

172, 173, 178, 179, 180,

Freudian Psychology, 91

181, 182, 188, 242, 249,

Frontal Characteropathy, 113,

267, 269, 274, 275, 276,

140, 162, 189, 224

277, 280, 281, 283, 288,

Frostig, Peter Jacob, 186

289, 292, 293, 294, 295,

Germany, 38, 107, 109, 258,

302, 306, 308, 309, 311

292

as a continuum, 280

Psychiatry and praise of

Christian civilizations loses

pathological types, 69

immunity to, 48

Gray, K.C., 122, 312

Deficiencies in instinct and,

Greece, 45

62

Greek philosophy, 45

Genesis of, 30, 38, 40, 42,

Grossman, Arthur, 112

43, 69, 96, 97, 98, 99,

Grossman, Vassily, 112

101, 102, 103, 104, 106,

Guilt, 109, 128, 129, 131,

109, 120, 122, 126, 132,

132, 180, 288, 291

134, 141, 142, 143, 144,

Happy times, 84, 89, 154, 176

148, 173, 178, 179, 180,

Hare, 15

267, 274, 276, 277, 280,

Hare, Robert, 15, 126, 131,

288, 289, 295, 302, 308,

262

309

Harrington, Alan, 18

Macrosocial, 7

Herder, J.S., 86

Moral, 42

Herling-Grudzinsk, Gustav,

Moral interpretation of, 100

38

Moralistic interpretation of,

History, 9

149

Hitler, Adolf, 163

Moralistic interpretaton of,

Hitlerism, 91, 200

102

Hungary, 28, 225

Psychobiological, 42

Hutchison, H.C., 122

Relationship of

Hysteria, 90, 114, 115, 147,

pathological types to, 99

154, 175, 176, 177, 183,

Religion, 268

217, 280, 312

Study of using model of

Europe, 108

medicine, 98

Social, 89

Extraordinary Rendition, 205

Hysteriodal Cycle

Family, 37, 52, 58, 90, 114,

European, 90

115, 137, 142, 150, 151,

Length of, 90

155, 265, 269, 284, 285,

Hysteroidal Cycle, 84, 183,

315

203

and society, 70

Hysteroidal Cycle

Children of pathocrats, 227

America, 91, 92, 94

Fascism, 91, 166

European, 92

Forgiveness, 47, 182, 249,

Ideology, 30, 37, 68, 74, 145,

288, 289, 290, 293

155, 156, 157, 158, 160,

320

INDEX

162, 164, 165, 166, 167,

Individual, 28, 32, 34, 35, 36,

171, 172, 185, 188, 189,

38, 42, 46, 48, 49, 54, 57,

190, 191, 193, 195, 199,

59, 62, 65, 71, 72, 73, 79,

200, 201, 202, 203, 204,

82, 83, 85, 89, 91, 92, 96,

205, 209, 214, 217, 218,

101, 102, 106, 108, 110,

219, 220, 226, 227, 228,

114, 120, 123, 137, 140,

229, 235, 237, 239, 242,

141, 145, 153, 156, 160,

253, 255, 257, 260, 263,

162, 163, 165, 175, 176,

270, 280, 285, 288, 296,

178, 180, 181, 182, 189,

297, 299, 300

215, 218, 224, 235, 237,

And Pathocracy, 200, 205

242, 251, 268, 273, 279,

and pedagogues, 74

282, 283, 287, 289, 291,

And psychological warfare,

293, 296, 300, 301, 307

218

Ability to intuit

As camouflage for

psychological states in

pathocracy, 200

others, 60

Confrontation with original

Adaptation to pathocratic

adherents, 200

system, 246

Contamination of, 201

and place in society, 75

Pathological, 86

and practical knowledge of

Pathological ideas hide

pathocracy, 93

within, 184

and society, 70

Primitive character of 19th

As fundamental unit of

century, 71

analysis, 59

Split in social movements

Healing, 44

between founders and

Hysteroidal Cycle, 86

pathological types, 192

Overpowered by schizoids,

Ignota nulla curatio morbi,

185

30, 44, 229

Pathologizing of, 195

Immunity, 36, 47, 48, 82, 88,

vs. collective interests, 81

120, 140, 141, 154, 156,

World view as basis for

160, 179, 206, 217, 234,

decision-making, 53

236, 244, 245, 247, 275,

Individual and place in

276, 277, 279, 286, 287,

society, 75

288, 289, 293, 298, 299,

Individual freedom, 81

300, 301, 308

Individual psychological

as holistic factor of

anomalies, 43

organism, 224

Indoctrination, 33, 34, 195,

From psychopathy, 34

197, 245, 250

of human reason, 88

Failure of, 196

Of normal people against

Of American soldiers by

pathocracy, 196

North Vietnamese, 233

of society, 78

Induction, 36, 147, 267

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

321

Pathological, 142

Level of and understanding

Information selection, 152

of pathocracy, 238

Innate traits, 52

Normal people’s superior,

Instinct, 53, 60, 61, 62, 63,

240, 241

71, 80, 81, 82, 127, 148,

Percentage of gifted, 64

213, 232, 237, 252, 262,

Specific of pathocracy, 211

293

Introspection, 49, 63, 85, 267

Inability to distinguish

Israel, 271

pathological aberrations,

Jackals, 136

61

Jenkins, R., 122, 312

Pathological aberrations, 61

Jung, C.G., 49

sthenic, 62

Knowledge, 28, 31, 42, 44,

Instinctive endowment, 59,

47, 48, 49, 57, 68, 69, 70,

60, 150

77, 83, 85, 88, 93, 94, 95,

Instinctive substratum, 60,

102, 103, 104, 110, 127,

118, 124, 126, 145, 225,

129, 134, 135, 137, 143,

240, 262

148, 152, 172, 173, 179,

Deficits in allow

227, 235, 239, 241, 243,

pathological influence

257, 259, 260, 261, 262,

of, 36

263, 264, 266, 267, 269,

Factor in joining the

278, 280, 281, 284, 293,

opposition, 237

294, 297, 298, 300, 301,

Human difference from

303, 304, 309, 310

animals, 60

Acquired, 62

Normal, 235

and religion, 268

Pathocratic belief they can

Emergence of individuals

change others, 231

who understand the

Intelligence, 64, 77, 78, 102,

pathocracy, 243

113, 114, 115, 121, 124,

Illusory, 158

127, 157, 202, 210, 225,

Incorporating practical

231, 235, 237, 238, 251,

knowledge, 252

262, 291, 307

Misformed through

and instinctual substratum,

characteropathy, 107

64

Moral knowledge, 268

Collective, 73

Natural, 185

Correlation with internal

Objective, 220

projection, 64

Objective Nautral, 30

Deficiencies in pathological

of psychological resistance

types, 240

to pathocracy, 236

Individual differences in,

Practical k. about

64

pathocracy, 234

Judgments by people on, 77

322

INDEX

Practical knowledge of

Influence of Greek on

pathocracy, 196, 220,

Christianity, 47

241, 244, 245, 275

Limits in describing

Religious justification to

psychopathy, 39

reject, 270

Moralizing, 104

Scientific, 237

Natural, 39, 42, 55, 68, 72,

Secret, 34

73, 89, 127, 206, 222,

Special knowledge of

258

pasychopaths, 211

Inability to explain

Special knowledge of

world, 53

psychopath, 36

Natural conceptual, 158

Special knowledge of

Need for objective

psychopaths, 127, 128,

language to understand

145, 171, 240, 241

pathocracy, 222

Special knowledge of the

Objective, 42, 51, 53, 55,

psychopath, 36

66, 70, 72, 270, 274

Specific knowledge of

Elaboration of, 55

psychopaths, 257

Psychological, 50, 51, 59,

Koestler, Arthur, 38

74

Kraepelin, Emil, 123

Scientific, 40, 41

Kraul Taylor, F., 122, 312

Semiotics, 72

Kretschmer, E., 135, 136

Social Science, 41

Kretschmer, Ernst, 135

Using pathocratic language,

Language, 27, 39, 41, 42, 45,

243

51, 55, 58, 70, 97, 128,

Law, 45, 47, 85, 87, 121, 142,

165, 173, 188, 225, 239,

143, 148, 157, 168, 193,

243, 244, 252, 274, 287,

207, 213, 276, 279, 288,

301

289, 290, 293, 295, 308,

Common among

309

pathcracies, 200

Beyond moralizing, 309

Conceptual, 50

Botany, 103

Content Plane, 72

Emergence of monotheistic

Description of psychopathy

idea, 268

through natural

Incapable of counteracting

language, 38

pathocractic phenomena,

Expression Plane, 72

212

Formation of new language

Moral, 151

of normal people, 241

Natural, 138, 139

Formulated for this work,

Roman, 46

57

Simplified notion of a

Inability to deal with

being, 48

analysis of psychopathy,

Laws of social life, 71, 94,

56

297

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

323

Lecter, Hannibal, 10

Moralizing interpretation, 42,

Legal Argument, 20

53, 148, 151, 157, 181,

Lenin, V.I., 112

184, 207, 220, 221, 239,

Le#mian, Boles"aw, 249

274, 285, 292, 293

Life and Fate, 112

Of schizoidal declaration,

!obaczewski, 7

187

!obaczewski, Andrew, 15,

Mumps, 119, 159

16, 19, 25, 72, 73, 144,

Munthe, Axel, 89

238, 258, 263

Mythological imagination, 46

Biography, 315

Neoconservatives, 8, 24, 109,

Lorenz, Konrad, 60

186, 207

Luria, 113

Neoconsevratives, 206

Macropathy, 79, 80

Neurosis, 139, 226, 234, 283,

Macrosocial pathological

312

phenomenon, 82, 128, 203,

Natural reaction to

206, 216, 229, 253, 279,

subordination to

280, 285

pathocrats, 251

and religion, 269

Ontogeny, 52

Macrosocial Phenomena, 42,

Opinion Polls, 77

43

Paralogism, 90, 154, 205,

Macrosocial Phenomenon, 28,

211, 251

29, 55, 91, 203, 204, 213,

Paralogistics, 155

226, 241, 243, 245, 247,

Paramoralism, 110, 149, 150,

253, 262, 263, 264, 282,

151, 155, 205, 211, 218,

283, 285, 291, 294, 301

236, 248, 251, 271

Magid, Ken, 18

Paramoralism, 170, 171

Marx, Karl, 125, 188, 255

Paranoid Character Disorders,

As example of schizoidal

110

personality, 186

Paranoid Disorder

Schizoidia, 188

Effects on Normal People,

Marxism, 166

110

Mask of Sanity, The

Pathcracy

(Cleckley), 128, 311

Imposed by force, 220

McKelvey, Caroline, 18

Pathocracy, 36, 43, 175, 177,

Mill, J.S., 58

180, 183, 184, 195, 196,

Mill, John Stuart, 58

197, 199, 200, 201, 202,

Moral judgment, 54, 180, 181

204, 208, 212, 213, 214,

and pathocrats, 222

216, 218, 219, 220, 221,

As result of natural world

223, 224, 227, 228, 230,

view, 53

237, 238, 249, 250, 253,

Moral reason, 64, 78, 150

256, 257, 266, 269, 270,

Moralizing interpretation, 39

271, 275, 276, 280, 285,

287, 288, 291, 293, 297,

324

INDEX

298, 299, 300, 301, 304,

imposed by force, 203, 213,

305, 306

214, 221, 275

Affecting susceptible

Incapable of management,

personalities, 211

210

and Children, 234

Inherent economic

And conquest, 210

weakness, 210

And Ideology, 200

Key roles filled by

And morals, 205

pathological types, 194

and Religion, 267, 269

Lack of creative skills, 198

Art of psychological terror,

Legalistic thinking, 212

244

Limited by military of

artificially infected, 203,

others, 210

216

Need for expansionism,

and religion, 275

209

As disease, 44

New bourgeoisie of, 225

as macrosocial disease, 229

Percentage of population,

Control over psychology,

223

257

Period of maturation, 195

Control over scientific

Psychophysiological shock

organizations, 259

of, 236

Definition of, 193

Purging of transitional

Destruction of normal

leadership, 220

people as biological

Religion under, 274

necessity, 208

Revenge upon normal

Dissimulative form, 220

people, 215

Double game of new

Role of characteropathy in,

bourgeoisie, 226

188

Effects on normal people,

Role of instincts in, 262

244

Role of liberal pathocrats,

Eliminating books from

197

libraries, 35

Role of schizoids in

Essential factors in genesis

formation of, 185

of, 183

Science a danger to, 258

Etiological factors of, 203

Second group of influence,

Expansion of, 206

224

Expansionism derived from

Structure of, 226

very nature of, 209

Susceptible individuals,

Feels threatened by society

225

of normal people, 207

Percentage of

Found in all societies and

population, 223

social movements, 199

Terror, 233

Immunity by effects of

toxic substances, 223

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

325

War as means of

Destructive effects upon,

eliminating normal

234

people, 208

Development of, 94

Weakness of, 198, 199

Disintegrative states, 67,

Pathological conspiracies, 78

145, 153, 286

Pathological factors, 42, 69,

Effects of pathocracy upon,

87, 101, 102, 104, 105,

231

109, 111, 116, 119, 122,

Effects of pathological

137, 141, 143, 145, 149,

types on, 140

151, 154, 155, 157, 160,

Egotization of, 67

163, 167, 168, 169, 177,

Emotional factors affect

180, 181, 188, 218, 234,

perception, 53

235, 265, 273, 274, 276,

Formation of, 70

292, 301

how influenced by

And final transformation of

characteropathy, 106

social movments, 189

In the face of psychopathy,

And ideology, 201

34

Monitoring of, 103

Instability of, 66

Pathological thought, 74

Judeo-Christian Notion, 46

Pathological types

Oversimplifications by

Inherited deviations, 162

Church, 58

Paranoid, 189

Pathocracy and children,

Pavlov, Ivan, 49, 111

251

Perinatal damage, 105, 113,

Psychological causation of,

114, 116, 142

65

Personality, 34, 42, 48, 51,

Psychological differences

59, 62, 63, 67, 71, 72, 85,

in, 65

87, 94, 102, 103, 110, 111,

Psychological View, 49, 50

112, 114, 115, 117, 139,

Recession of in happy

140, 145, 146, 147, 152,

times, 89

155, 157, 176, 182, 185,

Reconstruction of, 282

187, 211, 213, 217, 226,

Reintegrative state, 67

232, 234, 237, 248, 250,

Roman notion, 46

262, 264, 270, 285, 286,

Supra-sensory causation

299, 312

and, 66

6% succomb to pathocratic

PersonalityEffects of

influences, 35

pathological factors upon,

Causality of, 51

142

Changes of due to shock,

Poland, 28, 32, 37, 99, 124,

214

136, 239, 249, 315

Characteropathic influence

Ponerization process, 160,

of Wilhelm II, 106

161, 165, 167, 168, 169,

253, 272

326

INDEX

Ponerogenesis, 40, 42, 43, 99,

Attacking religious

158, 173, 178, 180, 184,

convictions, 275

203, 213, 221, 265, 269,

Ineffectual propaganda

274, 281, 295

against pathocracy, 243

Dissimulative phase, 172,

To hide true character of

197, 198, 215, 221, 236,

pathocracy from world,

273

197

in a religious movement,

Psychiatry, 123, 135, 256

271

Abuse of, 266

in religious groups, 272

Abuse of for political

Transitional phase, 193

purposes, 265

Ponerogenic Association

Disease and delusions, 202

and Religion, 271, 272

in Soviet Union, 256

Ponerogenic associations,

in the Ukraine, 260

158, 160

Under Communism, 255

Primary and secondary,

Under pathocracy, 260

160, 161

Under pthocracy, 264

Secondary, 161, 162, 164

Psychology, 31, 35, 42, 50,

Ponerogenic process, 101,

58, 59, 62, 66, 91, 95, 98,

103

104, 132, 136, 137, 142,

Ponerogenic process, 164

144, 154, 172, 176, 178,

Ponerogenic processes, 144,

234, 241, 246, 256, 260,

145, 149, 154

261, 262, 265, 282, 311,

and Religion, 270

313, 315

Ponerology

Association, 63

Monitoring of pathological

Barren under Roman rule,

factors, 103

46

Ponerology, 29, 32, 42, 43,

Behaviorists, 49

99, 122, 149, 157, 170,

Common substratum, 61

176, 178, 179, 180, 181,

Consequences of repressed

221, 280, 281, 312

attitudes, 66

first criterion of, 158, 170,

Historical overview, 49

176

Need for solitude, 63

Powell, Colin, 198

Possibility of subjective

Project For A New American

error, 49

Century, 186

Progress depends upon

Propaganda, 33, 43, 71, 163,

practitioners, 49

164, 165, 193, 197, 201,

Study of personality, 49

211, 226, 231, 236, 248,

Suffers censorship, 49

250, 252, 257, 304

Under Communism, 255

Activation of pathological

Under pathocracy, 260

ideas in society, 189

Under pthocracy, 264

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

327

Universal law on

Succombs to

psychological

ponerogenesis, 270

differences in a

Reverse blocking, 211

population, 65

Reversion blockades, 155

Used to study moral

Reversive blockade, 151

problems, 98

Rice, Condoleeza, 198

Psychopathology, 27, 28, 31,

Roman civilization, 45, 168

35, 41, 42, 43, 69, 101,

Rome, 47, 249

122, 145, 154, 178, 212,

Philosophy in, 46

222, 233, 256, 259, 261,

Roosevelt, F.D., 119

262, 282, 292, 297, 298,

Rove, Karl, 191

313, 315

Rumsfeld, Donald, 191

Frozen evolution of

Russell, E.S., 87, 313

personality, 66

Saint Augustine, 7

Psychopathy, 29, 43, 123,

Salekin, Trobst, and

125, 129, 131, 133, 134,

Krioukova, 129

136, 137, 140, 154, 227,

Salekin, Trobst, Krioukova,

233, 240, 263, 312, 313

126

Awareness of as healer,

Schizoid declaration, 124,

233

125, 186

Characteristics of, 130

Correction of, 187

Imitating feelings, 21

How interpreted by normal

Psychopathy and Delinquency

person, 186

(W. and J. McCord), 131,

Pathological acceptance of,

313

187

PsychopathyStudy of under

Three reactions to, 187

pathocracy, 262

Schizoida, 214, 223

Purusha, 51

Schizoidia, 123, 137, 186, 188

Quantum Future Group, 30

And Jews, 186

Rasputin, 87

Impose conceptual views

Reasoning, 49, 60, 68, 87, 90,

on others, 185

102, 110, 116, 117, 122,

Schizophrenia, 123, 124, 165,

124, 133, 146, 150, 152,

167

154, 175, 176, 188, 203,

Search for Truth, 85

240, 270, 304

See Stalin, Josef, 116

and Moralists, 103

Selection of premises, 152

Deterioration of, 75

Semiotics, 72

Examples of objective, 72

September 11, 2001, 209

in Hysteroidal Cycle, 91

Shah of Iran, 118

Ongoing development of,

Silberman, Steve, 133

63

Silence of the Lambs, 10

Religion, 150

Skirtoidal, 223

Skirtoids, 135, 136

328

INDEX

Smoke over Birkenau, 38

Creative potential of, 65

Snezhnevsky, Andrei, 256

Democracy, 305

Social hysteria, 89

Deviants in, 74

Social order indicator, 76

Division of under

Social Science, 41, 55, 87,

pathocracy, 238

222

Dreams of obtaining power

and psychological

in, 78

complexity, 68

Effects of upward and

Reaction to Psychology, 59

downward social

Socially Adept Psychopath, 20

adjustment, 76

Society, 35, 48, 49, 51, 52,

Eugenics, 143

59, 64, 70, 72, 73, 74, 75,

European study of, 45

77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 83, 85,

Expansion of pathocracy

86, 89, 108, 120, 124, 131,

within, 207

133, 135, 136, 138, 140,

Family as unit (Comte), 58

141, 154, 156, 159, 160,

Foreign character of

161, 168, 169, 172, 173,

imposed pathocracy, 215

174, 176, 177, 179, 181,

Hysteroidal Cycle, 86

183, 184, 190, 193, 194,

Man as basic unit of, 59

195, 196, 197, 203, 207,

Network of normal people,

208, 209, 213, 214, 216,

246

217, 218, 219, 221, 224,

Normal people majority in

225, 226, 227, 228, 231,

pathocratic, 225

232, 234, 235, 236, 237,

of normal people under

239, 240, 241, 242, 243,

pathocracy, 246

244, 247, 248, 250, 253,

Pathocracy potentially

255, 259, 275, 287, 289,

present in all, 183

291, 292, 294, 301, 305,

Pathologizing of, 195

308, 309

Poisoned by schizoid ideas,

Ability to progress, 71

186

Ability to understand

Psychologist’s view of, 72

psychological

Psychopath’s view of, 141

phenomena, 74

Quality of psychological

and Deviants, 78

world view in, 73

and neurosis, 251

Role of instinctual

And pathocracy, 193

substratum in, 62

and pathological members,

Role of intelligence in, 65

68

Science useful for, 50

and religion, 249

Stratification of under

and self-involved

pathocracy, 214

pedagogues, 73

vs. individual survival, 61

Apiary, 71

with non-homogeneous

Consequences of large, 79

populations, 79

POLITICAL PONEROLOGY

329

Socrates, 88, 268

Inability of pathocrat to

Solzhenitsyn, A, 38

think like normal people,

Solzhenitsyn, Alexander, 112

243

Sommerhoff, G., 87, 313

Man’s ability for abstract,

Soviet system, 59

63

Spellbinders, 145, 155, 156,

Mental effort develops

157, 162, 163, 166, 171,

understanding, 248

178, 188, 217, 218

Pathological anomalies in,

Spiritual crisis, 169, 174, 183

86

Stalin, Josef, 116, 117, 313

Pathologizing of, 195

Stout, Martha, 12, 17, 24, 126

Philosophical, 98

Strauss, Leo, 191

Psychological, 51

Subconscious Selection, 91,

Tillier, William, 146

108, 115, 176, 280, 282

Transpersonification, 36, 233,

Szasz, Thomas, 282

235

Szmaglewska, Severina, 38

At university, 35

Szmaglewska, Seweryna, 38

Pathological nature of, 35

Teleology, 87

United States of America, 26,

The Mask of Sanity, 17

80, 202, 260, 263, 271

The Other World, 38

and atomic bomb, 258

Thought, 47, 49, 53, 57, 66,

and ignorance of pathcracy,

70, 75, 86, 90, 104, 108,

263

109, 111, 114, 115, 124,

On way to pathocracy, 217

130, 132, 153, 154, 167,

Upward social adjustment, 76

177, 179, 181, 223, 225,

van Voren, Robert, 59, 256,

247, 250, 252, 262, 268,

260, 261

294, 295, 296, 306, 307

Vatican, 27

Ability for complex

War on Terror, The, 211

operations of, 64

Wikipedia, 123

Characteropathic defects

Wilhelm II of Germany, 107

of, 188

William of Ockham, 299

Deadened by contact with

World View, 51, 52, 102, 248

psychopathy, 236

Causative conditioning of,

De-Criterialization of, 140

51

Discipline of, 303

Deviant, 55, 74

Early Christian, 47

Natural, 41, 43, 53, 54, 57,

Gap between thought and

82, 106, 127, 140, 142,

psychological reality, 48

144, 145, 160, 214, 237,

In a truly Communist

240, 241, 269, 270, 273,

society, 255

274, 282, 307, 309

in Hysteroidal Cycle, 85

Egotism of, 54

Errors of, 52

330

INDEX

Mirrors reality or

Objective, 73

perception, 53

Psychopathic, 54

Moralistic categories of,

World View

83

Objective, 41

Tendencies towards

XYY Karyotype, 121, 137

deformation, 53

Zarathustra, 268

Content

Lobaczewski Andrew M. Political Ponerology: A Science on the Nature of Evil Adjusted for Political Purposes